LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS

K. H. BARNARD

Additions to the Fauna-list of South African Crustacea and Pycnogonida (published

December 1955) ; ss ae

P. L. G. BENorrT

Ichneumonidae Nouveaux ou Intéressants de l’Afrique du Sud (published December

1956) ..

L. D. BoonstRA

The Skull of Tapinocephalus and its near relatives (published December 1956)

Pareiasauriér-studies. Deel XII. °’n Lewensrekonstruksie van Bradysaurus seeleyi

(published December 1956)

J. P. Harpinc

The South African Cladoceran Euryalona colletti (Sars) and other South African

species (published May 1957) . ; ?

N. A. H. MiLtarp

The Hydrozoa of False Bay, South Africa (published January 1957)

_D. P. Murray

The Species of Lepidochrysops and Cupidopsis of Southern Africa. The Genitalia

(Lepidoptera-Lycaenidae) (published December 1956) ae ae os

J. E. Wess

On the Lancelets of South and East Africa (published May 1957)

Page

245

7h)

109

249

NEW GENERIC NAMES PROPOSED IN THIS VOLUME

_— es

Cypsiphimedia (Acanthonotozomatidae)

Ilyograpsus (Grapsidae)

Miophrixus (Bopyridae)

pxcetes ...

Actumnus

Afrephialtes ..

Afrochiltonia . .

Aglaophenia ..

Alpheus

Ampelisca..

Amphisbetia .

Antennella

Antennopsis

Antilibinia

Artopoles

Asphragis

Athelges

Bopyrella

Brachiella

Brachiostoma..

Bradysaurus

Byblis ..

Caligus

Camorta

Campanularia

Caprellina

Charitopimpla

Chlorodiella ..

Chondracanthus

Chorinaeus

Cirolana

Cleantis

Clistopyga

Clytia .. ;

Conilorpheus ..

Corallana

Coryne

Cryptochirus .

Cryptocnemus

Cryptodromia

Cupidopsis

Cymo..

Cymodoce

LIST OF GENERA

PAGE

Cyphocarcinus

Cypsiphimedia

Delaulax

Dictyocladium

Dies

Ebalia ..

Elasmopus

Euchrysops

Eudendrium ..

Eumedonus

Euonyx

Euryalona

Eurystheus

Exetastes

Glypta

Halecium

Haliophasma . .

Halopteris

Hapalocarcinus

Hebella

Hermilius

Holcopimpla ..

Hyale .

Hydractinia

Hydrocorella ..

Hydrodendron

Hymenosoma. .

Ianiropsis

Ilyograpsus

Iphimedia

Isocladus

Itoplectis

Keratocephalus

Kirchenpaueria

Lanocira

Leander

Lemboides

Lembos

Lepidochrysops

Leptochelia

Leuckartiara ..

Liljeborgia

Lovenella

Lytocarpus

Macrophthalmus

Medesicaste

Melita. .

Menaethiops ..

Miophrixus

Mormosaurus. .

Myriothela

Nemertesia

Nikoides

Nototropis

Obelia. .

Oralien

Orthocentrus . .

Palaemon

Pallenoides

Paracaprella ..

Paracilicaea

Paracleistostoma

Paracollyria

Paragattya

Paranthura

Paratymolus ..

Pelosuchus

Periclimenes ..

Petrolisthes

Pilumnopeus ..

Pimpla

Pinnixa

Plumularia

LIST OF GENERA

PAGE

Pontophilus

61 Porcellana

47 Processa

95 Propallene

Q4. Pseudodromia

III Pycnogonum ..

49 Pycnotheca

182

a Queubus

241

Reticularia

103 Salacia

oe Sarmatium

We . Scandia

79 Sertularella

156 Sertularia

186 Sjostedtiella

Sphaeramene . .

Sphaeroma

334 Sphaerozius

oo Sphyrion

Squilla se

Symplectoscyphus

198 Synidotea

103 Synthecium

124

Talorchestia ..

A7 Tapinocephalus

105 ‘Taurops :

99 Thecocarpus ..

70 Theronia

23 Tryphosa

126 Tubularia

230 Typhlocarcinodes

8 whee

164 Unciolella

47 Urothoe

30 Xenopthalmodes

131

230 Zuzara

PAGE

105

3i/)

106

234

107

203

207

202

207

221

124

38)

104

219

203

152

164

240

127

179

ANNALS

a SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

VOLUME XLII

i) PART I, containing:—

: 1. Additions to the Fauna-list of South African Crustacea and Pycnogonida. By —

K. H. Barnarp. (With fifty-three text-figures.)

ZTE ON y

JUN13 1953

di i

& i Re

: oe) é eat

ISSUED DECEMBER 1955 PRICE 20s. od.

S | PRINTED FOR THE

TRUSTEES OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

BY THE RUSTICA PRESS (PTY.) LIMITED, COURT ROAD, WYNBERG, CAPE

ier ANNALS

OF THE

POUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

VOLUME XLII

1. Additions to the Fauna-list of South African Crustacea and Pycnogonda. By K. H.

BARNARD. (With fifty-three text-figures.)

This paper forms an appendix to previous papers on South African Crustacea

and Pycnogonida. The additions are mainly the results of intensive collecting

by the University of Gape Town Ecological Survey (U.C.T.) carried out by

the Zoology Department under the direction of Professor J. H. Day; and by

the Zoology Department of the University of the Witwatersrand (U.W.).

The former has extended the survey of the estuaries of the Union of South

Africa to that of Inhambane, Portuguese East Africa; and the latter has

operated from the Marine Biological Station on Inhaca Island, Delagoa Bay.

As might be expected several interesting new records have been collected,

but it is quite certain that many more will be added in the future. The marine

fauna of Portuguese East Africa has not yet been thoroughly investigated; nor

in fact has that of the Union of South Africa.

I wish to express my thanks to Professor Day and his team of enthusiasts

(U.C.T.), and to Mrs. M. Kalk (U.W.) for submitting these collections for

identification; and for presenting to the South African Museum duplicates of

the species not represented in its collections.

A full list of the species collected is not given, only notable additions to the

localities which extend the already known distribution of the respective species,

new records, and new species.

The employment of new methods of collecting usually produces abundant,

and often surprising, results. The University of Cape Town has recently

adopted ‘Operation Frogman’ for investigating the shallow-water fauna of

False Bay. Mr. J. F. GC. Morgans, a member of Professor Day’s staff, has

pioneered this method in South Africa, and has demonstrated its advantages

over the old-fashioned ‘naturalist’s dredge’. Many of the following records and

discoveries are due to his enthusiasm for submarine collecting.

In some cases species, hitherto considered rare, have been found to be

plentiful when their particular habitat has been discovered. For example,

in the course of an investigation into the species of Patella living on the Cape

coast (Koch, H. J., 1949, Ann. Natal Mus., xi, 3, p. 491), the Isopod Dyna-

VOL. XLIII. PART I.

JUN 4 1956

EEE EEE EE’? ned CQO OO OOOO OOOO OEE

2 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

menella australis Rich. and the Amphipod Calliopiella michaelsent Schell. were

found in abundance under the shells of these molluscs.

The following papers containing references to the South African Crustacean

fauna have appeared in recent years.

Barnard, K. H. 1951. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (12), iv, pp. 698-709, figs.

(Isopoda and Amphipoda).

. 1952. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Afr., xxxill, pp. 279-82, figs. (Grandidierella

species). :

1954. Ann. Mus. Congo. Tervuren, 4to, zool. 1, pp. 120-131, figs.

(Decapoda, Isopoda, Amphipoda).

. 19546. Mem. Inst. Sct. Madagascar. A. ix. pp. 95-104, figs. (Decapoda).

. 1955a. Ann. Natal Mus., xiii, 2, p. 247 (record of a Cirripede).

. 1955). Ann. Natal Mus., xiii, 2, p. 249 (a new freshwater Isopod).

Capart, A. 1951. Exp. océanogr. Belge, III, 1, pp. 1-205, figs. (Brachyura).

Forest, J. 1951. Bull. Soc. zool. Fr., \xxvi, p. 83 (Calcinus).

. 1954. Ann. S. Afr. Mus., xli, 4, pp. 159-213, figs. (Paguristes).

Holthuis, L. B. 1950. Stboga Exp. monogr., xxxix, a, 9, pp. 1-126, figs.

(Palaemoninae).

——. 1951. Altlantide Rep. No. 2, pp. 7-187, figs. (Caridea).

. 1952. Stboga Exp. monogr., Xxxix, a, 10, pp. 1-254, figs. (Pontoninae).

. 1952. Exp. océanogr. Belge, III, 2, pp. 1-88, figs. (Macrura).

Reid, D. M. 1951. Ailaniide Rep. No. 2, pp. 189-291, figs. (Amphipoda).

Ruffo, 8. 1947. Mem. Mus. Civ. Verona. I. pp. 113-30. figs. (Amphipoda).

. 1953. Rev. Kool. Bot. Afr. xlvii. pp. 120-36. figs. (Amphipoda).

The following new genera and new species are described in the present

paper.

DECAPODA. Menaethiops natalensis and delagoae, Paracleistostoma fossula,

Ilyograpsus (n.g. Grapsidae), I. rhizophorae, Xenophthalmodes brachyphallus, Ebalia

pondoensis (tuberculata Brnrd. 1950 non Miers 1881) and agglomus, Porcellana

delagoae, Acetes natalensis, Alpheus bullatus.

ISOPODA. Paranthura latipes, Cirolana imposita, pilula, and capitella, Conil-

orpheus blandus, Corallana furcilla, Isocladus otion and mimetes, Sphaeramene muicro-

tylotos, Cymodoce lis and alts, Paracilicaea teretron and clavus, Artopoles capensis,

Taniropsis bisbidens, Athelges caudalis, Miophrixus (n.g. Bopyridae), M. latreutzdis.

AMPHIPODA. Evuonyx conicurus, Tryphosa normalis and africana, Urothoe

serrulidactylus, pinnata and pinnata var. femoralis, Cypsiphimedia (n.g. Acanthonoto-

zomatidae), C. gibba, Melita machaera, Afrochiltonia (n.g. Talitridae) for Chilionza

capensis Brnrd. 1916, Lembos teleporus, Unciollela foveolata.

COPEPODA. Chondracanthus colligens, Brachiella supplicans.

PYCNOGONIDA. Propallene similis, Pallenowdes proboscideum.

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 3

REcorpDs OF ADDITIONAL SPECIES AND NEw LOCALITIES

DECAPODA

Macropodia rostrata (Linn.). Zwartkops estuary, Port Elizabeth; Bushmans

River mouth (Alexandria-Bathurst Division) (U.C.T.). Barnard 1954.

Achaeus lacertosus Stmpsn. Inhambane, Portuguese East Africa (U.C.T.).

Inachus angolensis Capart 1951. 0°-16° 30’ S.

Inachus dorsettensis (Penn.). False Bay, 40 fms. (U.C.T.).

Menaethius monoceros (Latr.). Durban Bay (U.C.T.).

Naxioides hirta M. Edw. Inhambane (U.C.T.).

Platylambrus quemvis Stebb. Inhambane (U.C.T.).

Eumedonus granulosus MacGilch. Delagoa Bay (U.W.). Barnard 19540.

Hymenosoma orbiculare Desm. Delagoa Bay (U.W.); Inhambane (U.C., JD)

Dotilla fenestrata Hilg. Keiskama River mouth, and Breede River mouth

(U.C.T.). Barnard 1954.

Cleistostoma edwards McLeay. West coast: Saldanha Bay. South coast:

mouths of Sundays River, Bushmans River, Keiskama River, Bashee

River (U.C.T.). Barnard 1954.

Cleistostoma algoense Brnrd. 1954. West coast: Saldanha Bay. South coast:

mouths of Breede River, Great Brak River, Knysna, Zwartkops River,

Bushmans River (U.C. ae Me

Tylodiplax blephariskios (Stebb.). Durban Bay and St. Lucia Bay (U.C.T.).

Barnard 1954. Inhambane (U.C.T.). See infra fig. 7f.

Cardisoma carnifex (Herbst). Richards Bay (U.C.T.). Barnard 1954.

Pachygrapsus plicatus (M. Edw.). Delagoa Bay (U.W.).

Varuna litterata (Fabr.). Port St. Johns (U.C.T.). Barnard 1954.

Varuna tomentosa Pfeff. Port Edward, Umtamvuna River, 300 yards from

mouth (U.C.T.). Barnard 1954.

Pseudograpsus erythraeus Kossm. Delagoa Bay (U.W.).

Sesarma longipes Krauss. Inhambane (U.G.T.).

Sesarma meinertt de Man. Beira (Chace, 1953); Delagoa Bay (U.W.).

Sesarma catenata Ortm. Mouths of Bushmans River, Sundays River, Zwart-

kops River, and Breede River. The last is the most westerly locality

hitherto recorded. Barnard, 1954.

Sesarma elongata M. Edw. Inhambane (CLC T,):

Portumnus meleayt Brnrd. Angola, 9° S. (Capart, 1951). Barnard, 1954.

Ovalipes punctulatus de Haan. Walfish Bay (Capart, 1951). Tristan d’Acunha

(a.60) x 77 mm. 5) At Mus:)?

Portunus tuberculatus Roux. Barnard 1950 as Elliptodactylus rugosus Doflein.

Atlantic, southwards to 26° S. (Capart, 1951). Barnard, 1954. -

Monomia gladiator (Fabr.). Inhambane (U.C.T.).

Cycloachelous granulatus (M. Edw.). Durban Bay (U.C.T.). Barnard, 1954.

Thalamita integra Dana. Durban Bay and Inhambane (U.C.T.).

Thalamita investigators Alcock. Durban Bay (U.C.T.). Barnard, 1954.

Panopeus africanus M. Edw. Durban Bay (U.C.T.). Barnard, 1954.

Kozymodes xanthoides (Krauss). Delagoa Bay (U.W.).

Chlorodopsis pilumnoides (White). Delagoa Bay (U.W.).

Phymodius ungulatus (M. Edw.). Delagoa Bay (U.W.).

Phymodius monticulosus (Dana). Durban Bay (U.C.T.).

Xantho hydrophilus = exaratus (M. Edw.).

(?) Halimede delagoae Brnrd. 1954. Portuguese East Africa (Lourengo

Marques Museum). :

ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Lybia plumosa Brnrd. Durban Bay (U.C.T.); Delagoa Bay (U.W.). Barnard,

1954. See infra fig. 13d.

Euriippellia annulipes (M. Edw.). Kosi Bay and St. Lucia Bay (U.C.T.).

Barnard, 1954. Delagoa Bay (U.W.).

Pseudozius caystrus (Ad. & White). St. Lucia Bay (U.C.T.).

Pilumnoides perlatus (Poeppig). Walfish Bay (Capart, 1951). Barnard, 1954.

Epixanthus frontalis (M. Edw.). Kosi Bay and Inhambane (U.C.T.).

Pilumnus hirsutus Stmpsn. var. (Barnard, 1950, p. 265). Saldanha Bay

(U.G.T.). Barnard, 1954.

Parapilumnus pisifer (McLeay). Delagoa Bay (U.W.).

Goneplax angulata (Pennant). See Barnard, 1954.

Eucrate sulcatifrons (Stmpsn). Delagoa Bay (U.W.).

Typhlocarcinus sp. 92 only. Inhambane (U.C.T.).

Thaumastoplax spiralis Brnrd. Estuaries of Great Brak River (Mossel Bay) and

Zwartkops River (Algoa Bay), in Echiuroid burrows; Durban Bay

(U.C.T.). Barnard, 1954.

Nautilocorystes ocellata (Gray). Walfish Bay (Capart, 1951). Barnard, 1954.

Conchoecetes artificiosus (Fabr.). Inhambane (U.C.T.).

Dromidia dissothrix Brnrd. False Bay, 11-12 metres (U.C.T.). Barnard, 1954.

Calappa japonica Ortmann. Kentani coast (S. Afr. Mus.). Barnard, 1954.

Calappa gallus (Herbst). Inhambane (U.C.T.).

Ebalia tuberculata Miers. See Capart, 1951 and Barnard, 1954. Capart con-

siders that the specimens assigned by me in 1950 to Miers’s species

represent a different, perhaps new, species. Since then Dr. Monod has

sent me West African specimens undoubtedly referable to tuberculata,

which prove that barnardi is a synonym of Miers’s species. For the

former, therefore, I propose the name pondoensis n. sp. (Pondoland

coast).

Leucosia marmorea Bell. Inhambane (U.C.T.).

Dorippe lanata (Linn.). Delagoa Bay (U.W.).

Emerita austroafricana Schmitt. Occurs as far south as the Kentani coast.

Barnard, 1954. I have recently seen specimens from the west coast of

Madagascar (Madagascar Institute).

Paguristes spp. See Forest, 1954.

Aniculus aniculus (Fabr.). Delagoa Bay (U.W.).

Troglopagurus jousseaumi Bouvier. Delagoa Bay (U.W.).

Clibanarius clibanarius (Herbst). Inhambane (U.C.T.).

Clibanarius padavensis de Man. Durban Bay and Inhambane (U.C.T.).

Clibanarius longitarsus (de Haan). Richards Bay and Inhambane (U.C.T.);

Delagoa Bay (U.W.).

Diogenes custos (Fabr.). Delagoa Bay (U.W.); Inhambane (U.C.T.).

Diogenes avarus Heller. Delagoa Bay (U.W.); Inhambane (U.G.T.).

Diogenes costatus Hend. Inhambane (U.C.T.).

Diogenes senex Heller. Delagoa Bay (U.W.); Inhambane (U.C.T.).

Spiropagurus spirifer (de Haan). Inhambane (U.C.T.).

Pachycheles natalensis Krauss. Delagoa Bay (U.W.).

Polyonyx sp. In Chaetopterus tubes, Durban Bay (U.C.T.).

Callianassa rotundicauda Stebb. Saldanha Bay, and Durban Bay (U.C.T.).

Upogebia africana (Ortm.). West coast : Saldanha Bay (U.C.T.); South

coast: mouth of Keiskama River and Sundays River (U.C.T.). Barnard,

1954.

Upogebia africana var. (Barnard, 1950, p. 520). Inhambane (U.C.T.).

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 5

Upogebia assist Brnrd. False Bay, 10 fms. (U.C.T.).

Upogebia savignyt Strahl. False Bay, 8 metres (U.C.T.); Delagoa Bay (U.W.).

Scyllarides elisabethae (Ortm.). Off Inhambane (Lourengo Marques Museum).

Penaeopsis hilarulus de Man. Delagoa Bay (U.W.); Inhambane (U.C.T.).

Acetes erythraeus Nobili. Durban Bay (U.C.T.).

Leucifer penicillifer Hansen. Durban Bay (U.C.T.).

Caridina africana Kingsley. Inhambane (U.C.T.).

Latreutes mucronatus (Stmpsn.). Barnard, 1950, p. 706: for ‘135 mm.’ read

13°5 mm. Durban Bay (U.C.T.).

Latreutes pygmaeus Nobili. Inhambane (U.C.T.).

Angasia armata (Paulson). Inhambane (U.C.T.).

Eippolysmata vittata Stmpsn. Inhambane (U.C.T.); Delagoa ee CULW2)):

Ogyrides saldanhae Brnrd. Walfish Bay, up to 32 mm. in length (Holthuis,

1952). Table Bay (R. W. Rand, Guano Islands Administration, 1955).

Betaeus jucunda Brnrd. Mouths of Bashee River, Bushmans River, Zwartkops

River, and Breede River (U.C.T.). Barnard, 1954.

Athanas cf. minikoensis Gout. Delagoa Bay (U.W.).

Palaemon in Barnard, 1950 = Macrobrachum; and Leander ibid. = Palaemon,

subgen. Paleander and Palaemon.

‘Palaemon’ sundaicus and delagoae = M. equidens (Dana).

‘Palaemon’ dolichodactylus = M. scabriculum (Heller). See Holthuis, 1950.

‘Leander’ Palaemon concinnus Dana. Umkomaas and Durban Bay (U.C.T.).

Barnard, 1954. Delagoa Bay (U.W.).

Anchistus inermis (Miers) = custos (Forskal.). Holthuis, 1952.

‘Palaemonetes’ natalensis Stebb. is considered to belong to the genus Peri-

clymenaeus by Holthuis, 1952.

Paranchistus ornatus Holthuis 1952. Mozambique.

Harpilius a subgen. of Periclymenes. H. depressus and beaupresii placed in gen.

Harpiliopsis. Holthuis, 1952.

Focaste n.g. for Coralliocaris lucina. Holthuis, 1952.

TANAIDACEA

Leptochelia savignyi (Kroyer). Inhambane (U.C.T.).

ISOPODA

Cyathura estuaria Brnrd. St. Lucia Bay (U.G.T.).

Panathura serricauda Brnrd. Saldanha Bay (U.C.T.).

Exanthura macrura Brnrd. Lamberts Bay (U.C.T.).

Apanthura dubia Brnrd. East London (U.QC.T.).

Mesanthura catenula (Stmpsn.). East London (U.C.T.).

Haliophasma pseudocarinata Brnrd. False Bay and Algoa Bay (U.C.T..).

Eurydice longicornis (Studer). Olifants River mouth and Saldanha (U.C.T.);

Zwartkops estuary, Algoa Bay (Macnae, Rhodes Univ.).

Pontogeloides latipes Brnrd. Saldanha Bay, Durban Bay, Kosi Bay, and

Inhambane (U.C.T.).

Cirolana undulata Brnrd. Various localities from Port Nolloth to East London

(Weal):

Cirolana bovina Brnrd. East London (U.C.T.).

Cirolana saldanhae Brnrd. 1951. Saldanha Bay (U.C.T.).

Cirolana cingulata Brnrd. Off Umkomaas (Natal), 40 fms. (S. Afr. Mus.) ;

Arniston and Algoa Bay (U.C.T.). See also infra p. 53.

Aega monilis Brnrd. Saldanha Bay area (Fisheries Survey).

Nerocila trichiura (Miers). Durban, on Exocoetus (S. Afr. Mus.).

6 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Livoneca raynaudi M. Edw. Durban, on a wrasse (S. Afr. Mus.).

TIrona melanosticta Sch. & M. Durban, on Tylosurus (S. Afr. Mus.); Delagoa

Bay, on Tylosurus (U.W.).

Sphaeroma serratum (Fabr.). Durban Bay (U.C.T.). Barnard, 1951. Delagoa

Bay (U.W.).

Sphaeroma walkeri Stebb. Durban and Inhambane (U.C.T.).

Exosphaeroma planum Brnrd. Various localities from Port Nolloth to Jeffreys

Bay (U.C.T.).

Exosphaeroma porrectum Brnrd. Lamberts Bay, Saldanha Bay, and Port

Elizabeth (U.C.T.).

Exosphaeroma pallidum Brnrd. Saldanha Bay (U.C.T.).

Exosphaeroma estuarium Brnrd. 1951. Umkomaas, Natal (U.C.T.).

Pseudosphaeroma barnardi Monod. Hermanus, Wilderness (George Division)

and Knysna (U.C.T.). Barnard, 1951.

Sphaeromene polytylotos Brnrd. Liideritzbucht (S. Afr. Mus.); Port Nolloth

UC):

Dies monodi Brnrd. 1951. Bashee River, Port St. Johns, Umkomaas, and

Kosi Bay (U.C.T.). See also infra p. 72.

Dynamenella australis Rich. Paternoster Bay and Danger Point (U.C.T.).

Occurs under the shells of Patella.

Cymodocella sublevis Brnrd. Saldanha Bay, Plettenberg Bay, and East London

(UEC):

Cymodocella pustulata Brnrd. Saldanha Bay, Still Bay, and East London

(U-CoP.).

Cymodocella magna Brnrd. 1954. Groen River (south of Port Nolloth) (U.C.T.).

Cymodocella eutylos Brnrd. 1954. Mossel Bay, Jeffreys Bay, and Kleinmond

(Bathurst Division) (U.C.T.).

Idotea ziczac Brnrd. 1951. Saldanha Bay, and False Bay, 8 fms. (U.C.T.).

Paridotea reticulata Brnrd. Port Nolloth and Lamberts Bay (U.G.T.).

Paridotea rubra Brnrd. Port Nolloth, Lamberts Bay, and East London

(U.C.T.).

Paridotea fucicola Brnrd. Port Nolloth, Still Bay, and Cape Infanta (U.C.T.).

Idarcturus platysoma Brnrd. Paternoster Bay (U.C.T.).

Arcturella corniger (Stebb.). One 9, Morumbane, Inhambane (U.C.T.).

Antias uncinatus Vanh. Saldanha Bay (U.C.T.). Originally described from

Simonstown.

Stenetrium crassimanus Brnrd. Plettenberg Bay and Quolora (U.C.T.).

Stenetrium diazt Brnrd. Plettenberg Bay (U.C.T.).

Janira capensis Brnrd. Lamberts Bay, Saldanha Bay, False Bay, and Knysna

(UG).

Janira exstans Brnrd. Saldanha Bay, and East London (U.C.T.).

Taniropsis palpalis Brnrd. Various localities from False Bay to East London

(WEEE

Iais pubescens (Dana). Durban, on Sphaeroma walkeri; and Inhambane, on

Sphaeromids (U.C.T.).

Protojanira perbrinckt Brnrd. 19556. Natal and Zululand, freshwater. Peraeo-

pod 1 of 9 resembles that of 3.

Alloniscus pigmentatus B-L. Inhambane (U.C.T.).

AMPHIPODA

Microlysias xenokeras Stebb. False Bay (U.C.T.).

Ampelisca diadema (Costa). Saldanha Bay (U.C.T.)..

Leucothoe spinicarpa (Abildg.). Portuguese East Africa (S. Afr. Mus.).

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. GRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 7

Leucothoe richiardit Less. Saldanha Bay and False Bay (U.C.T.).

Stenothoe gallensis Wikr. Knysna (U.QC.T.).

Stenothoe assimilis Chevr. = valida Dana.

Temnophlias capensis Brnrd. Buffels River mouth (south of Port Nolloth) to

Still Bay (U.C.T.). Barnard, 1954.

Temnophiias hystrix Brnrd. 1954. Hondeklip Bay (west coast), Gape Hangklip

(south coast) (U.C.T.).

Palinnotus natalensis Brnrd. Port Shepstone and Richmond (Natal) (U.C.T.).

Colomastix pusilla Grube. Saldanha Bay (U.C.T.).

Perioculodes longimanus (B. & W.). Saldanha Bay (U.C.T.).

Synchelidium haplocheles (Grube). Inhambane (U.QC.T.). Recorded by Walker

1904 from Ceylon as brevicarpa B. & W.

Calliopiella michaelsent Schell. Saldanha Bay and False Bay (U.C.T.). Occurs

under the shells of Patella harmonizing in colour (mauve) with the

animal’s foot.

Nototropis guttatus (Costa). Olifants River mouth (U.C.T.). Recorded from

the Mediterranean, Canaries, and Senegal.

Paramoera capensis (Dana). Various localities from Port Nolloth to Natal

(W-E.T:).:

Eriopisa chilkensis (Chilton). Knysna, and St. Lucia Bay (U.C.T.). Barnard,

IQ5I.

Megaluropus agilis Hoek. Saldanha Bay (U.C.T.).

Melita zeylanica Stebb. Various localities from Olifants River mouth (west

coast) to Inhambane (U.C.T.).

Melita fresnel: (Aud.). Inhambane (U.C.T.).

Maera subcarinata (Hasw.). Algoa Bay (U.C.T.).

Dexamine spiniveniris (Costa). Saldanha Bay (U.C.T.).

Paradexamine pacifica (Thomson). False Bay (U.C.T.). See Barnard, 1930,

‘Terra Nova’ Rep., viii, 4, p. 389, figs.

Polycheria atolli Wikr. Lamberts Bay, and Algoa Bay (U.Q.T.).

Talorchestia ancheidos Brnrd. Inhambane (U.C.T.).

Talorchestia inaequalipes Brnrd. 1951. Saldanha Bay (U.C.T.).

Parorchestia notabilis Brnrd. 1935. Inhambane (U.C.T.). Originally des-

-cribed from Cochin State, India.

Hyale maroubrae Stebb. Knysna (U.C.T.).

Hyale saldanha Chilton. Port Elizabeth (U.C.T.).

FAyale grandicornis (Kroyer). Various localities from Lamberts Bay to Natal

(W:@ Et). Sce also: znfraip: 933) figs 46:

Grandidierella bonniert Stebb. Durban, and Inhambane (U.C.T.).

Grandidierella chelata Brnrd. 1951. Port St. Johns and Bashee River mouth

(CECeL:)..

Grandidierella lutosa Brnrd. 1952. Hermanus (U.C.T.); Kleinmond (Bat-

hurst Division) (Rhodes Univ. Zool. Dept.).

Lembos jassopsis Brnrd. 1951. Saldanha Bay (U.C.T.).

Lembos podoceroides Wikr. Inhambane (U.C.T.). Recorded from Ceylon,

Maldives, Red Sea, Paumotu Archipelago.

Eurystheus semidentatus Brnrd. Algoa Bay (U.C.T.).

Cheiriphotis megacheles (Giles). Saldanha Bay, False Bay and Algoa Bay

(ola i

Chevalia aviculae Wikr. Inhambane (U.C.T.).

Ampithoe ramondi Aud. Inhambane (U.C.T.).

Cymadusa australis (Brnrd.). Paternoster Bay and False Bay (U.C.T.).

Delagoa Bay (U.W.).

8 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Erichthonius brasiliensis (Dana). Delagoa Bay (U.W.).

Cerapus abditus Templ. False Bay, Algoa Bay, and Inhambane (U.C.T.).

Siphonoecetes orientalis Wikr. Inhambane (U.C.T.). Delagoa Bay (U.W.).

Siphonoecetes dellavalle: Stebb. St. Helena Bay and False Bay (U.C.T.).

Pseudoprotella phasma (Montagu). 29° 16’ S., 14° 48’ E. s.s. ‘Africana’ (per

WECaie):

Metaprotella haswelliana (Mayer)

var. taprobanica Mayer. Inhambane (U.C.T.).

STOMATOPODA

Conchoderma huntert (Owen). Natal, on jellyfish. Barnard, 19554.

Poecilasma (Temnaspis) amygdalum Auriv. Delagoa Bay, on Palinurid (U.W.).

COPEPODA PARASITICA

Caligus pelamydis Kroyer. False Bay, on snoek, Thyrsites atun; Table Bay, on

Trigla capensis (U.Q.T.).

Caligus lunatus Wilson, 1928. False Bay, on Seriola lalandei (U.C.T.). Pre-

viously recorded from Red Sea, on Seriola aurovittata (Wilson).

Caligus. coryphaenae St. & L. Table Bay, on a shark (U.C.T.).

Caligus rapax M. Edw. Table Bay, on Merluccius capensis and Trachurus

trachurus (U.C.T.).

Caligus mauritanicus Brian 1924. False Bay, on Pomatomus saltator (U.C.T.).

Caligus (?) bonito Wilson 1905. False Bay, on Sarda sarda. § only; record

should be checked on 2 material (U.C.T.).

Caligus zei Norm. & Scott 1906. False Bay, on Thyrsites atun. Agrees with

the description, but a check on further material is desirable (U.C.T.).

Caligus brevicaudatus A. Scott 1901. Table Bay, on Trigla capensis (U.C.T.).

Caligus labracis 'T. Scott 1902. ‘Table Bay, on Clinus superciliosus (U.C.T.).

Pennella exocoeti (Holten). Length 40 mm. On Exocoetus. (Fish. Research

Ship ‘Africana II’, 1951.)

Charopinus ramosus Kroyer. ‘Table Bay, on a skate (U.C.T.).

Clavellisa scombri (Kurz). ‘Table Bay, on gills of Scomber colias (japonicus)

(WU). ©. ike): |

Parabrachiella insidiosa (Heller). ‘Table Bay, on Merluccius capensis (U.C.T.).

P. australis Wilson (see: Barnard, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., xli, p. 298, 1955)

should probably be made a synonym.

DECAPODA

Fam. INACHIDAE

Gen. Paratymolus Miers

1879. Miers, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., p. 45.

1880. Haswell, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist (5), v. p. 302.

1882. id., Cat. Austral. Crust., p. 142.

1884. Miers, Zool. H.M.S. ‘Alert’, Crust., p. 261.

1893. Ortmann, ool. Jahrb. Syst., vil, p. 34.

1895. Alcock, 7. Aszat. Soc. Bengal, \xiv, p. 173.

1929. Balss, Denkschr. Ak. Wiss. Wien., cii, p. 3 (placed in group Camposcioidea).

Carapace ovoid or subpentagonal, convex, anterior third declivous. Rostrum

prominent but short, apically bifid, dorsally grooved. Eye-stalks fairly long,

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 9

straight, movable but not retractile, cornea subglobular, scarcely oblique;

orbits incomplete ventrally. Ant. 1 folding longitudinally, sockets separated by

aseptum. Ant. 2 peduncle slender, basal joint short. Mxp. 3 suboperculiform,

flagellum well developed. Chelipeds (2) short, wrist with strong upstanding

spine. Legs not elongate, dactyls slender, nearly straight. Genital openings of

@ sternal. Abdomen ¢ 5-segmented, 2 7-segmented.

Differs from Achaeus in the short basal joint of ant. 2, less oblique and more

globular cornea, and short legs.

Paratymolus pubescens Miers

Bigs.) iy 2)

to79. | Miers, loc. cit., p..45, pl. 2, fig. 6.

1880. Haswell, loc. cit., p. 303, pl. 16, figs. 1, 2 (bztuberculatus).

1882. id., loc. cit., p. 142 (bztuberculatus).

1893. Ortmann, loc. cit., p. 35, pl. 3, fig. 2 (ventral view rostrum and mxp. 3).

1910. Rathbun, Vid. Selskr. Skr. Copenhagen (7), v. p. 317.

All exposed surfaces of carapace and appendages covered with a close

velvety ‘pubescence’ (see Remarks). Carapace pentagonal; posterior two-thirds

nearly flat, anterior third declivous. Rostrum short, broadly triangular,

dorsally grooved, apically bifid, lobes rounded. A supraorbital tooth. Antero-

lateral margin sharply bidentate, hinder tooth the larger, forming the angle

between antero- and postero-lateral margins; postero-lateral margin fading

out posteriorly on the dorsal surface, with 2 inconspicuous tubercles; lateral

margin (as seen in dorsal view) with a conical tooth on the branchial region.

Dorsal surface with 2 conical projections in front of the gastric region, and a

median rounded inconspicuous hump on the cardiac-intestinal regions. Lower

margin of carapace with feebly plumose setae in front, followed by closely set

straight, tubular setae.

Basal joint of ant. 2 short, and joint longer, 3rd longer than and, clavate

setae on lower margin of 2nd joint, and on lower and upper margins of grd

joint, those on lower margin of 3rd joint especially long; flagellum about equal

to last 2 peduncular joints, with a few long setae. Eye-stalks short, cornea

subglobular, a short clavate seta on anterior apex of stalk at base of cornea.

Mxp. 3 external surface of 3rd and 4th joints and exopod with ‘pubescence’.

Cheliped with ‘pubescence’, anterior margin of arm with 4 clavate setae,

the strong acute process of the wrist with large clavate setae on posterior

margin, smaller ones on anterior margin, hand and fingers also with clavate

setae, cutting edges of finger and thumb with several small denticles, stronger

on thumb than on finger, and numerous short simple and longer clavate setae.

All legs of all specimens detached; the longer ones being presumably the

anterior ones. Dactylus longer than preceding joint, with 3 or 4 retrorse

denticles, the middle one the largest; a series (5-6) of long clavate setae on

both anterior and posterior surfaces.

IO ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

225° 59-80 9.959 Sere.

its Ht

lditey ir

Paratymolus pubescens Miers. a. dorsal view of carapace. b. lateral view, with portion of lower

margin further enlarged, and one seta further enlarged. c. surface view and section of one of

the scale-like setae forming the pubescence on carapace. d. antenna 2, with seta further enlarged.

e. maxilliped 3, with two kinds of setae further enlarged. f. exopod of maxilliped 3. g. right

cheliped. h, clavate seta from cheliped further enlarged. 7. dactylus of leg.

ADDITIONS TO FAUNASLIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA II

Pleopod 1 §: the basal joints of the two appendages are fused to form a

transverse plate, to which the separate distal joints are articulated. The latter

very stout, especially the posterior flange of the seminal channel proximally;

apex curved outwards, thickly setose. Pleopod 2: the two appendages are

separate and normal in shape. :

Length ovig. 2 6:5, breadth 5-5 mm. As preserved, pinky-brown, eyes

maroon.

Fic. 2.

Paratymolus pubescens Miers. Sternal view of g abdomen with 1st (fused)

and 2nd pleopods (apical setae omitted on left pleopod 1).

Locality. Inhambane, Portuguese East Africa. 1 ¢, 2 ovig. 99, 2 immature,

in Zostera beds (U.C.T. Jan. and July 1954).

Distribution. Japanese Seas, Siam (pubescens); Queensland (bituberculatus).

Remarks. ‘The ‘pubescence’ would be better described as a ‘lepidosis’, the

setae being flattened and broadly ovate, and more or less imbricate.

These specimens correspond so closely with the descriptions and figures of

Miers’s pubescens and Haswell’s bituberculatus, and Alcock’s hastatus, that there

seems no justification for a n. sp. They have broader shoulders than in Miers’s

and Alcock’s figures, thus corresponding better with Haswell’s figure. ‘The

upper distal apex of the hand is more prominent than in Miers’s figure, but

12 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

less prominent than in Haswell’s, approximately as in Alcock’s figure. The

4 small teeth on posterior border of the arm, mentioned by Haswell, are not

present; whereas the 4 conspicuous clavate setae on the anterior margin

apparently were not present in Haswell’s specimen, but are shown in Alcock’s

figure.

Alcock’s hastatus apparently is more tuberculate than either Miers’s or

Haswell’s or the present specimens, but I think it should be regarded as

synonymous.

The size of the plate formed by the fusion of the coxopodites (Cochran 1935)

or ‘bridge’ joining the protopodites (Flipse, 1930) of the 1st pleopods is

remarkable.

Fam. ACANTHONYCHIDAE

Gen. Antilibinia McLeay

1950. Barnard, loc. cit., p. 36, fig. 7c, d.

Through the kindness of Dr. H. B. S. Cooke (Geology Dept. Witwatersrand

University) the Museum has received a fine ovigerous 2 of A. smithii McLeay

from the coast of Pondoland, measuring 62 X 57 mm.

This specimen confirms Krauss’s statement and figures that there are seven

abdominal segments in both sexes.

Gen. Menaethiops Alcock

1950. Barnard, loc. cit., p. 38.

Two dozen specimens of this genus have been examined. They appear to

belong to three species. One is fascicularis, but the other two cannot easily be

assigned to any species recorded from the western Indian Ocean, viz. brevicornis

M. Edw. 1868, acutifrons M. Edw. 1868, bicornis Alcock 1895, and Lenz 1905,

nodulosa Nobili 1905, corniculata Klunz. 1906, and contiguicorms Klunz. 1906.

The descriptions of these species make no mention of some characters which

appear to be of specific value. ‘Iwo n. spp. are therefore instituted, with local

names.

The validity of these three species may appear doubtful because of the

overlap in distribution. ‘Twenty-four is a very small number of specimens;

gradations may later be collected; but on the available evidence they cannot

be referred to only one species. The sternal sculpture in the § may not prove

to distinguish all the species of this genus, but it is very distinctive in two of

the present species.

Menaethiops fascicularis (Krauss)

Fig. 3a-c.

1929. Balss, Denkschr. Ak. Wiss. Wien., cii, p. 9, fig. 3.

1950. Barnard, loc. cit., p. 39, fig. 8.

This species is well characterized by the absence of a projecting anterior

corner on the supraorbital margin, which passes in a sinuous curve into the

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF 8.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 13

rostral prong. Suborbital margin denticulate. Outer apex of basal joint of

ant. 2 strongly produced. The distal margin of the basal joint, adjoining the

insertion of the following joint, is nodulose or crenulate, and these crenulations

continue on a short longitudinal ridge in the middle of the basal joint. The

rim of the antennulary socket is also crenulate. These crenulations are particu-

larly distinct in the Delagoa Bay 6 mm. 9. The postocular tooth (hind corner

of the supraorbital margin) is nearly linear or narrowly triangular, serrulate

(at least on hind margin). A slight swelling on ocular peduncle, but no

definite spine.

The sternite between the chelipeds is smooth, polished, and concave in

front of a transverse series of inconspicuous granules, behind which the surface

is covered with impressed punctae. The other sternites are also punctate,

without any granules.

The above characters are constant in 3 gg (6-7 mm.) and (except the

sternite) in two non-ovigerous 99 (4:5 and 6 mm.).

Additional locality. Delagoa Bay. 1 non-ovig. 2 (6 mm.). (U.W.)

Menaethiops natalensis n. sp.

Fig. 3d—f.

In general similar to fascicularis, but rostral prongs a little longer. Supra-

orbital margin with well-marked acute anterior projection; postocular tooth

serrulate as in fascicularis, but larger and more triangular, though not always as

broadly triangular as here figured. Suborbital margin very feebly (if at all)

denticulate, usually nearly straight, but sometimes convex in the middle.

Outer apex of basal joint of ant. 2 not strongly produced (but somewhat

variable). Rim of the antennulary socket feebly crenulate, but no ridge on the

basal joint of ant. 2. A well-marked spine on ocular peduncle.

Sternite between chelipeds polished in front and punctate behind with a

scarcely perceptible ridge between the two areas. Other sternites punctate,

without granules.

Pleopod 1 ¢ as in fascicularis.

Length 10 mm.

Localities. Umpangazi (Impengazi), Natal. 1 g (U.C.T); Delagoa Bay.

2 $5 (7 mm.) 5 ovig. 92 (7-10 mm.) g immature (4-7 mm.) (U.W.)

Remarks. In one specimen the right anterior corner of the supraorbital

margin is rather strong and curved outwards, approximating to delagoae. In

two other specimens the anterior corner on one side (right or left) is bevelled

off as in fascicularis.

M. Edwards’s figure of brevicornis shows a transverse line of granules not

only on the sternite between the chelipeds, but on the three following sternites.

Menaethiops delagoae n. sp.

Fig. 39-1.

In general similar to fascicularis, but rostral prongs longer, distally divergent.

Supraorbital margin sinuous, the acute anterior corner larger than the acute

ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

“i

Fic. 3.

Menaethiops fascicularis (Krauss). a. dorsal view of rostral prongs and antero-lateral portion of

carapace. b. ventral view of same. c. sternite between chelipeds, and apex of abdomen.

Menaethiops natalensis n. sp. d,e, f. as ina, b, ¢c respectively.

Menaethiops delagoaen. sp. g, h, i. as in a, b, ¢ respectively.

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA ES

posterior corner (postocular tooth), both non-serrulate. Suborbital margin

straight, denticulate posteriorly. Outer apex of basal joint of ant. 2 acutely,

but not strongly, produced. Rim of antennulary socket not crenulate, and no

ridge on basal joint of ant. 2. No spine on ocular peduncle.

Sternite between chelipeds with 2 groups of 6—7 granules in front of the

abdominal groove, polished and concave in front of a transverse series of

granules, punctate behind. Other sternites punctate, without granules. The

suture between Ist and 2nd sternites opposite the middle of the 6th abdominal

segment, not as in the other species opposite the suture between 6th and 7th

segments.

Pleopod 1 ¢ as in fascicularis.

Length 10-5 mm.

Locality. Delagoa Bay. 1 3 (U.W.)

Remarks. M. Edwards does not figure the sternites of acutzfrons.

Fam. MAMAIDAE

Gen. Cyphocarcinus M. Edw.

1868. M. Edwards, Nouv. Arch. Mus. Paris, 1V, p. 73 (9).

1875. Paulson, Red Sea Crust, p. 3 (3) (Ixton).

1889. Cano, Bol. Soc. Napoli (1), 3, pp. 86, 180 (Podohuenia).

1923. Gravier, Bull. Mus. N. H. Paris, 1923, 3, p. 214 (g) (Stenocarabus).

1929. Balss, Denkschr. Ak. Wiss. Wien., cli, p. 22.

1945. Stephensen, Dan. Sci. Invest. Iran, 4, p. 108, fig. 21 A, B (plp. 1, 2. 3).

— Cyphocarcinus capreolus (Paulson)

Fig. 4.

1875. Paulson, loc. cit., p. 3, pl. 2, figs. ra—f (g) (Lxion c.).

1923. Gravier, loc. cit., p. 214, figs. 1-8 (¢) (Stenocarabus suspensus).

Carapace of both sexes resembling the figures given by Paulson and Gravier,

i.e. without conspicuous knobs, only a rostral knob followed by 2 small granules

in the median line; some tiny granules along the costate lateral margin, dis-

cernible more by their white colour than by their relief; a rather conspicuous

white granule just in front of the faint cervical groove. A transverse section

through the hinder third of the carapace would show an almost evenly curved

semicircular profile in the g, but in the 2 a somewhat squarish profile owing

to the presence of an obscure blunt longitudinal ridge, on which are 2-3 little

granules; below this the lateral wall of the branchial region is nearly vertical.

All these granules are better developed in 9 than in g; in addition 9 has

4 granules en carré in the middle of the carapace and a medio-dorsal series (3-5)

towards the hind end.

Orbit circular, with a slit on anterior, posterior, and inferior margins;

upper margin anteriorly with a small setiferous tubercle. Surface closely

pitted (as in Paulson’s and Gravier’s figures), and covered with short fine pile;

longer setae on supraorbital ridge and on rostral knob and prongs.

16 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

f | e

Fic. 4.

Cyphocarcinus capreolus (Paulson). a. side view of g carrying a piece of Cymodocea. b. dorsal view of

carapace (the tips of the upper branches of the rostral prongs have been drawn too far apart).

c. view of the left orbital region. d. ventral view of left antennulary and antennal region: ant. 1

removed from socket; lettering corresponding with that in fig. c. e. chela of J. f. chela of 9.

g. pleopod 1 g, with apex further enlarged.

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 1

Abdomen in both sexes of 7 segments; in 3g 1st short, 2nd and 3rd much

wider, remainder gradually decreasing, but 6th slightly widened across distal

margin, 7th longer than its basal width; in 2 (nonovigerous) widest across

suture between 3rd and 4th segments, 7th shorter than its basal width; 2nd

segment in both sexes with a small blunt median knob.

Chelipeds subequal, larger and more robust in 3 than 9, arm with 4 granules

on upper margin, and 5-6 on lower margin (not shown in Paulson’s figure).

In ¢ finger with strong tooth near base, followed by a semicircular gap, and a

distal cutting-edge with 5 rounded denticles, thumb with 8-9 denticles, one

larger than the others, distal to which the cutting-edge resembles that of the

finger. In 9 finger with no tooth (or only a very small one) at base, cutting-

edge with 9 rounded denticles, thumb with 9 similar denticles. Paulson’s

figure of the cheliped of his 3 almost corresponds with that of the present 99,

from which one may assume that the toothed and gaping finger seen in the

present $¢ is developed only when the animal is fully grown. The curve of

the cutting-edge of the thumb in Paulson’s figure is not exactly like that of the

present 99, but seems to indicate that at a future, perhaps the next, moult it

would assume that of the present gg. Gravier’s specimen was in the same

stage as Paulson’s.

Dactylus of all legs with 7-8 strong spiniform teeth, increasing in size

distally, in addition to the unguis.

Pleopod 1 ¢ as in Stephensen’s figure; the process on the basal transverse

joint not so strong as in Gravier’s figure 8.

Length ¢ @ 11°5 from rostral knob, 13-14 mm. including the rostral prongs.

As preserved, madder-brown, pinkish or pale salmon, abdomen of 2 speckled,

chelipeds and legs paler, finger and thumb of chelipeds white, eyes maroon.

Locality. Inhaca Island, Delagoa Bay. 4 3d, 9 ovigerous and 1 non-

ovigerous 99, 2 juv. (U.W.)

Distribution. Red Sea (capreolus); Madagascar (suspensus).

Remarks. Laurie (1915. 7. Linn. Soc. Lond., xxxi, p. 433), Nobili (1906 and

1907), and Balss (1929) regard capreolus as a synonym of minutus M. Edw. 1868.

Balss accepted two species: the knobbly minutus and the smooth suspensus, but

nevertheless made the smooth capreolus a synonym of the former.

I am inclined to concur with Dr. Gordon (in litt. July 1954) that in all

probability there is only one somewhat variable species whose distribution

extends from the Red Sea, Persian Gulf, Andaman Is., to the Seychelles,

Madagascar, and Delagoa Bay (Stephensen misquoted M. Edwards and

included Zanzibar). For the present, however, I prefer to record these speci-

mens, smooth (except for the granules) in both sexes, as capreolus.

Laurie and Gravier both refer to M. Edwards’s fig. 8 which shows in the 9

the rostral prongs united for a distance about equal to the length of the anten-

nulary sockets, and then divergent, with a V-shaped sinus; very different

from Paulson’s fig. 15 and the present specimens. Rathbun (i1g11. Trans.

Linn. Soc. Lond., zool., xiv, p. 255), however, suggests that M. Edwards over-

18 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

looked a narrow slit separating the bases of the prongs. But that does not

obviate the difference in the shape of the sinuses.

Nobili and Rathbun record the 3 as carrying a long cylindrical sponge

‘projecting’ from its rostral prongs; but it is not stated (I have not seen Nobili)

whether the sponge was growing on the crab or had been picked up by the

crab.

One of the present ¢ specimens has a length (22 mm.) of the stem of the

marine flowering plant Cymodocea ciliata firmly wedged between the prongs.

The stem is oval in section and will only fit one way between the prongs.

Another ¢ (total length 11 mm.) carries edgwise a piece of the leaf of Cymo-

docea, approximately 11 X 8mm. A Q (total length 13 mm.) carries, edgewise,

a piece of leaf 10 <X 3 mm. In these cases there is no possibility of a natural

settlement as there might be in the case of a sponge; the crabs must have

‘purposely’ picked up their burdens and fitted them between the prongs. The

other specimens have nothing wedged between the prongs. But all are so

densely covered with the filaments of a calcareous alga and hydroids as to be

scarcely recognizable as animals until cleaned. One @ is overgrown with a

sponge (with calcareous calthrop spicules) and another 9 is almost completely

covered by a gelatinous Tunicate; both are covered in addition with other

‘rubbish’.

For a figure of Cymodocea see: Cohen. S. Afr. 7. Sct., xxxvi, p. 246, fig. 1, 1939.

Delagoa Bay is the southernmost recorded limit of this Red Sea genus: Kalk.

S. Afr. J. Scz., li, 4, p. 108, 1954.

Fam. PARTHENOPIDAE

Gen. Eumedonus M. Edw.

1834. M. Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust., i, p. 349.

1894. Rathbun, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xvii, p. 66 (Echinoecia).

1906. id., Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm. for 1903, pt. 3, p. 880.

1918. id., Bzol. Res. ‘Endeavour’. v, pt. 1, pp. 27, 28.

1922. Gravier, Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. Paris, 1922, no. 7, p. 484.

1930. Flipse, Szboga Exp. monogr., xxxix, c. 2, pp. 80, go (the genotype niger

M. Edw. is, by some mischance, omitted).

1934. Gordon, Res. Sct. Ind. orient. Neerl., ili, 15, p. 62.

1938. Monod, Mem. Inst. Egypte, xxxvii, pp. 110-12.

Eumedonus granulosus MacGilch.

1905. MacGilchrist, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (7), xv, p. 253-

1907. Illustr. Zool. ‘Investigator’, pt. 12, pl. 77, figs. 2, 2a.

1911. Rathbun, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond. (2), zool., xiv, p. 259.

1942. Ward, Mauritius Inst. Bull., ii, p. 78.

1954. Barnard. Mem. Inst. Sci. iteuieasean. Asmircsip. 00. Ligue

?1905. Lenz, Abh, Senckenb. Ges., xxvii, 4, p. 344. (zebra, non Alcock).

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 19

Length 14, breadth 15 mm. Dull salmon with longitudinal, paler, dark-

bordered stripes; chelipeds and legs speckled with red, finger and thumb of

chelipeds white.

Locality. Delagoa Bay. 1 9 (U.W.).

Distribution. Persian Gulf, 47-9 fms.; Amirante Is., 28 fms. ? Zanzibar

(lzenz). |

Fam. HyMENOSOMATIDAE

Hymenosoma orbiculare Desm.

Fig. 5.

nego. Barnard, loc. cit., p. 68, fig.

15a, b.

1951. Capart, Exp. ocean. Belge, p. 61,

fig. 18.

1955- Broekhuysen, Ann. S. Afr. Mus.,

xli, pp. 313-43, text-figs. 1-13

(breeding and growth).

Additional localities. Tiger Bay, Angola

(Capart); Inhambane, Portuguese East

Africa (U.C.T. 1954). BiG:

Be is : Hymenosoma orbiculare Desm. Carapace

A figure is given here of the speci- of ovigerous @ of the ornate form from

mens referred to on pages 70, 71 of my deep water in False Bay. See:

monograph. I am still of opinion that Bee Ores Cnty ior

a specific name is not really necessary. The full life-history and ecology of the

normal shallow-water form and the ornate form from deeper water should

be fully investigated.

FAM. PINNOTHERIDAE

Gen. Pinnixa White.

1846. White, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., xviii, p. 177.

1876. Lockington, Proc. Calif. Ac., vii, p. 55 (Tubicola).

1918. Tesch, Siboga Exp. monogr., xxxix, c. 1, p. 266 (list of species).

Commensal in tubes and burrows of Polychaets and Holothurians. Hitherto

recorded mostly from the coasts of America.

Pinnixa penultipedalis Stmpsn.

Bikes (5)

1858. Stimpson, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sc. Philad., x, p. 108 (Q).

1894. Ortmann, Xool. Jahrb. Abt. Syst., vii, p. 695, pl. 23, fig. 7.

1907. Stimpson ed. Rathbun, Smiths. Misc. Coll., xlix, p. 143 (9).

Carapace smooth, punctate laterally on the branchial region; very fine

tomentum occupying very shallow grooves: one transverse to anterior margin

(hepatic), one parallel to antero-lateral margin, and one parallel to postero-

20 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

lateral margin; a faint transverse ridge across posterior half of carapace;

pterygostomial region and bases of legs furry.

Abdomen reaching to buccal cavity; g with segments 4-6 fused, basal

segments not nearly occupying sternal width; in 9 sutures between segments I

and 2, and between 2 and 3 (cf. Stimpson) furry.

Mxp. 3, 6th joint articulated within the apical margin of 5th which projects

as a rounded flange on the internal (anterior) surface. A transverse subapical

row of long close-set setae on 5th joint, a submarginal one on the median edge

tle

pate

ErGes0:

Pinnixa penultipedalis Stmpsn. a. carapace, cheliped, and extended abdomen, longitudinal profile

of carapace on left. b. external view of left maxilliped 3. c. internal view of same. d. external

view of exopod of right mxp. 3. e. 1st walking leg. f. 3rd leg. g. 4th leg. A. posterior view of

left pleopod 1 ¢,

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 2I

of 4th joint, and a longitudinal one on 7th joint, all three series of setae on the

inner (anterior) surface of the appendage.

Finger and thumb of chelipeds gaping, furry, finger crossing apex of thumb

which has a subapical ridge.

Third leg much larger and stronger than any of the others (incl. chelipeds) ;

outer (upper) margin of 4th—6th and inner (lower) margin of 4th and 6th joints

minutely crenulate, concealed by thick marginal fur on posterior surface but

visible on the anterior surface; 4th joint with 2 rows of fur-covered granules on

posterior surface, subparallel with upper and lower margins; and a similar

row very near the lower margin of 6th joint. (The lower margin of this latter

joint might be described as flat between 2 granular ridges.) Fourth leg shortest,

thickly setose; upper margin of 4th joint crenulate, lower margin flat between

2 granular ridges.

Length 3:5 mm., breadth 6-5 mm. Pinkish.

Locality. Inhambane. go and 99 associated with Sipunculid worms: ovig.

09 in Jan. (U.C.T. Jan. and July 1954).

Distribution. Hong Kong and Japan.

Remarks. These specimens seem to agree with Stimpson’s description as

regards the characters mentioned by him. The identification, however, is by

no means certain. The transverse ridge across the carapace, and the large

penultimate pair of legs are characters shared with other species.

Ortmann’s small figure shows an ovoid carapace, without any lateral

angularities such as are present in other species (see e.g. Rathbun. 1898. Proc.

U.S. Nat. Mus., xxi, pl. 43, figs. 6 and 7).

P. penultipedalis and tumida seem to be the only two species recorded from the

Indo-Pacific region. ‘The Madagascan P. brevipes M. Edw. 1853 is considered by

Tesch to belong to another genus.

Fam. OxyYPODIDAE

Gen. Macrophthalmus Latr.

1950. Barnard, loc. cit., p. 101.

A revised key is given to include the new South African records of convexus,

latreillei, and depressus.

A. Carapace about twice as broad as long. Outer surface hand 9 with a ridge

near lower margin.

1. Inner surface hand g with a spine. External orbital tooth smaller than

Ist antero-lateral tooth.

a. External orbital tooth and tst antero-lateral tooth crossed, or nearly at

right angles.

(i) Eye-stalks extending slightly beyond sides of carapace. a pap ee lesulcates |

(ii) Eye-stalks scarcely reaching inner margin of Ist lateral tooth. ... grandidieri

6. External orbital tooth and ist antero-lateral tooth pointing approxi-

mately in same direction.

(i) Length of hand ¢ chela (without thumb) 4 times as long as high.

Carapace with verrucose tubercles laterally. en MROTCUES:

ligecertcc |

22 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

(ii) Length of hand (without thumb) about twice as long as ae

Carapace without verrucose tubercles. . hilgendorfi

2. Inner surface of palm without spine. External orbital tooth larger them 1st

antero-lateral tooth, and forming the anterior angle of carapace. ~ «+ 6) CONVERS

B. Carapace less than twice as broad as long, conspicuously granulate. Inner

surface palm of g chela without spine.

1. Four lateral teeth, including the external orbital tooth. ..« « latretle:

2. Two lateral teeth (3rd tooth indicated by a minute notch).

a. Length of carapace about 2 width. On each branchial region 2 longi-

tudinal parallel lines of granules. . . . . depressus

b. Length of carapace about ? width. No parallel lines of granules. .. . . bosci

Macrophthalmus hilgendorfi Tesch

1950. Barnard, loc. cit., p. 103, fig. 207

Two immature specimens, 5:5 X II mm. and 95 xX 10 mm., seem to be

referable to this species. The one discrepancy is the absence of the tooth on

the inner surface of palm of cheliped. Apparently this tooth should be regarded

as an adult feature.

Locality. Inhambane. (U.C.T.)

Macrophthalmus convexus Stmpsn.

1900. Alcock, 7. Asiat. Soc. Bengal., |xix, p. 378.

1915. Tesch, Zool. Med. Mus. Leiden, i, p. 175, pl. 7, fig. 8.

1919. Kemp, Rec. Ind. Mus., xvi, p. 389, pl. 24, fig. 2 (abnormal ¢ chela).

Locality. Durban Bay. (U.C.T.)

Distribution. Mauritius, Madagascar, Indo-Pacific.

Macrophthalmus latreille: (Desm.)

1881. Lenz and Richters, Abh. Senckenb. Ges., xii, p. 4, figs. 24-7 (pollenz).

1886. Miers, ‘Challenger’ Rep., xvii, p. 250, pl. 20, fig. 1 (serratus).

1906. Laurie, Herdman Ceylon Pearl Fish., v. Suppl., Rep. 40, p. 427, text-fig.

1D BVO ONG Dy 1ey, Se

1915. ‘Tesch, loc. cit., p. 181 (synonymy).

Locality. Inhaca Island, Delagoa Bay. 1 9 (U.W.).

Distribution. Madagascar, Indo-Pacific.

Macrophthalmus depressus Riippell

1O05. Mesch, locscit wo. 160s) pl. ou fies:

1919. Kemp, loc. cit., p. 392.

1945. Stephensen; Dan. Sci. Invest., Iran, pt. 4, p. 191, fig. 58A (plp. 1 dg).

Locality. Inhambane. (U.C.T.)

Distribution. Red Sea, Persian Gulf, Aden, Ceylon.

Gen. Paracleistostoma de Man

1895. de Man, ool. Jahrb. Syst., viii, p. 580.

1918. Tesch, Siboga Exp. monogr., xxxix, c. pp. 58 (in key), 62.

1932. Shen, Zool. Sinica., A, ix, 1, p. 231 (P. cristatum de Man figured).

1937. ‘Tweedie, Bull. Raffles Mus., 13, p. 157 (2 n. spp.).

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA

Fic. 7.

Paracleistostoma fossula n. sp. a. carapace, with longitudinal profile. 5. left mxp. 3 in situ. c. dorsal

e. distal joints of leg.

f. pleopod 1 g, with apex further enlarged. See p. 3.

outer view of chela.

view of cheliped.

Tylodiplax blephariskios (Stebb

24 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Paracleistostoma fossula n. sp.

Fig. 7a-e.

Carapace smooth, glabrous; a very feeble ridge across the cardiac and

branchial regions forming the hind border of a shallow transverse furrow, very

faint medianly but more distinct laterally, the front border of which is even less

conspicuous than the hind border, and obsolete medianly but better indicated

laterally; lateral corners of front angular, but appearing rounded in a general

dorsal view; antero-lateral angles squarish, antero-lateral margins with 2 feeble

indentations; post-frontal crests obsolete.

Third maxillipeds separated by a gap almost as wide as width of 3rd joint,

Ath joint shorter but slightly broader than grd joint, both joints obliquely

furrowed; exopod visible.

Chelipeds equal, smooth; arm with rounded lobe at inner upper apex,

inner margin with plumose setae, inner surface of palm also with plumose

setae, outer surface with costa near lower margin from base almost to apex of

thumb, cutting-edges with rounded teeth, the 3 nearest the base of finger

larger than the others.

Legs smooth, without ridges on 4th joints, not specially setose; anterior

margin of 4th joints of all legs, and front and hind margins (especially the hind

margin) of 5th leg (presumably the 5th, but all legs detached) with plumose

setae; coxal joints with plumose setae dorsally.

3° X 5 mm. As preserved, pale brown.

Locality. Delagoa Bay. 1 ovig. 9. (U.W.)

Fam. HAPALOCARCINIDAE

1900. Calman, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond. (2), zool., vill, p. 47.

1915. Potts, Carnegie Inst. publ., 212, Papers Dept. Mar. Biol., viii, pp. 33 sqq.

1936. Shen, Hong Kong Nat. Suppl., No. 5, p. 21.

1937. Rathbun, Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus., No. 166, p. 258.

1944. Utinomi, Palao Trop. Biol. Sta. Studies, II, 4, pp. 687 sqq.

Gen. Hapalocarcinus Stmpsn.

1859. Stimpson, Proc. Boston Soc. N.H., vi, p. 412.

Hapalocarcinus marsupialis Stmpsn.

1859. Stimpson, loc. cit., p. 412.

1900. Calman, loc. cit., p. 43, pl. 3, figs. 29-40.

1902. Borradaile, Fauna Geogr. Mald. Lacc. Arch., 1, p. 271.

1906. Rathbun, Bull. U.S. Fish. Comm. for 1903, pt. 3, p. 892.

1907. Stimpson (ed. Rathbun), Smiths Misc. Coll., xlix, p. 170 footnote, pl. 14,

fig. 8.

1g11. Rathbun, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond. (2), zool., xiv, p. 242.

1915. Potts, loc. cit., pp. 35 sqq. figs. 1-4, 5C, 6B, 7B, D, 8B, 9-15, pls. 1, 2

(2, 3, zoea) (formation of galls and biology).

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 25

1924. Balss, Denkschr. Ak. Wiss. Wien., xcix, p. 16.

1925. Edmondson, P. B. Bishop Mus. Bull., 27, p. 32.

1933. id., B. P. Bishop Mus. Occas. Papers, X, 5, p. 17, fig. 6b, d (zoea).

1937. Hiro, Palao Trop. Biol. Sta. Studies, No. 1, pp. 137 sqq., pl. 4, fig. 1, pl. 5.

1937. Rathbun, loc. cit., p. 259, fig. 46, pl. 79, figs. 3-9.

1944. Utinomi (= Hiro), loc. cit., p. 700 et passim, figs. 5A, 8, 13B, pl. 3,

figs. I-4.

A juvenile 9, 2 mm. in length, corresponds with Potts’s figure of Stage 2

(pl. 1, fig. 2). The chelipeds are robust, with a prominent spine distally on the

inner margin of the arm. Three pairs of incipient pleopods.

Locality. Delagoa Bay. 2 ovig. and 1 juv. 99 from the coral Stylophora

(Szderopora) digitata. (U.W.)

Distribution. Red Sea, Maldives, Chagos Archipelago, Réunion, Ceylon,

Indo-Pacific. In various corals (see Utinomi, 1944).

Gen. Cryptochirus Heller

moot deller, Verh. Zool. bot. Ges. Wren, xi, p. 19.

1862. M. Edwards, Ann. Sci. nat. Paris (4), xvii, p. 362 (Lithoscaptus).

1937. Richardson, Bull U.S. Nat. Mus., No. 166, p. 262.

1944. Utinomi (=Hiro), Palao Trop. Biol. Sta. Studies, 11, 4, pp. 687 sqq.

Distinguished by the granulate carapace and dentate peduncle of antenna 1

from Hapalocarcinus with smooth carapace.

Cryptochirus coralliodytes Heller

imeotew tleller, loc. cit., p. 10.

1861. id., SB. Ak. Wiss. Wien., xliii, p. 366, pl. 2, figs. 33-9. (Paulson quotes

aplenty.)

1875. Paulson, Red Sea Crust., p. 72. (Lithoscaptus paradoxus M. Edw.)

1880. Richters, Beitr. Meeresf. Mauritius Seych., p. 159.

1902. Borradaile, Fauna Geogr. Mald. Lacc. Arch., 1, p. 271.

1933. Edmondson, Occ. Pap. B. P. Bishop Mus., X, 5, p. 14, fig. 5, and pl. 4,

Jes 18)

1937. Hiro, Palao Trop. Biol. Sta. Studies, No. 1, p. 140 et passim, pl. 4, figs. 2,

SanplO:

1944. Utinomi, loc. cit., p. 697 e¢ passim, figs. 5 B, 6 A, 7 A,D, 9, 11 A,B,

IQA wtORALeTh A. Es 16 A beand ipl) 94 fies. 15/65 pli 4) fash 1512:

Locality. Durban, 4 ovig. 99 from circular holes in the coral Favia. (U.W.).

Distribution. Red Sea, Maldives, Mauritius, Indo-Pacific. In Favia and other

massive corals (see Utinomi, 1944).

Fam. GRAPSIDAE

Ilyograpsus n.g.

Carapace subquadrangular, antero-lateral margins slightly oblique, dentate;

fronto-orbital width three-quarters or more, front less than half, the greatest

26 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

width of carapace. Orbits large, lower border complete, no infra-orbital

crest. Antennules oblique, septum rather narrow. Antennae in the orbital

hiatus. Epistome short. Maxillipeds widely gaping, no hairy oblique ridge,

4th joint broader than long, flagellum inserted in the middle of anterior

margin, exopod narrow, without tooth on inner margin. Chelipeds 3 weak,

shorter than legs; tips of finger and thumb spooned. Legs slender, dactyls

slender, terete. Abdomen ¢ extending nearly to margin of buccal cavity, all

segments distinct, evenly tapering, not constricted in middle, 1st segment

occupying not quite all the space between the 5th coxae, 2nd segment very

short, and narrower than 1st and 3rd, 3rd widest. Female unknown.

Genotype. I. rhizophorae n. sp.

Remarks. ‘There is a most disconcerting resemblance, even to the faint cross-

bands on the legs, between the species described below and Camptandrium

paludicola Rathbun (1910. D. Vidensk. Selsk. Skr. (7), vol. V, no. 4, p. 326, fig. 9).

Tesch (1918. Szboga Exp. monogr., xxxix, c. p. 68) maintains that Rathbun’s

species does not belong to Camptandrium, and is certainly a Grapsid; he suggests

it should be referred to Cyrtograpsus Dana.

Cyrtograpsus belongs to the subfam. Varuninae (Rathbun. 1918. U.S. Nat.

Mus. Bull., 97, p. 225) in which the incomplete lower orbital border is supple-

mented by a suborbital crest (as it is also in Campiandrium; see: Rathbun, 1907,

Smiths. Misc. Coll., xlix, p. 137, and 1910, loc. cit., p. 325; also Kemp, 1915,

Mem. Ind. Mus., v, p. 236). The new species has a complete lower orbital

border and therefore belongs to the Grapsinae, in which subfamily, however,

there seems to be no existing suitable genus for it.

Ilyograpsus rhizophorae n. sp.

Fig. 8.

g—Carapace subquadrangular, front prominent; antero-lateral margin

with 3 teeth behind the outer orbital tooth, the 1st blunt and less prominent

than either the orbital tooth or the and lateral, the 3rd lateral the smallest;

lateral margins subparallel. Post-frontal crests prominent; regions obscure,

but groove between gastric and cardiac regions distinct; 3 short setulose crests

near the lateral and postero-lateral margins. Surface with short sparse pubes-

cence, when denuded feebly granulose, chiefly around the lateral margins.

Infra-orbital border with 2 low denticles. A feeble setose ridge from angle of

buccal cavity across the sparsely setose pterygostomial region. Sternum and

abdomen minutely and obscurely granulose.

Chelipeds subequal, anterior margin of 4th joint finely crenulate-dentate;

inner surface of hand distally and inner surface of finger and thumb pubescent;

finger and thumb apically spooned, cutting-edges crenulate-dentate, that of

the finger proximally with broad low tooth.

Legs (only 5 are present, all detached) longer than chelipeds, 4th joint

about 24 times as long as broad, anterior margin with plumose setae, and a

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 27

conspicuous subterminal tooth; in four of the legs the 6th joint is about 4 times

as long as broad, smooth, dactyls slender, terete, slightly curved, a little more

than half length of 6th joint, finely setulose; in the remaining leg (probably

the hindmost leg) 6th joint is only twice as long as broad, and furry on both

margins, 5th joint with plumose setae on anterior margin as in 4th joint,

dactyl nearly as long as 6th joint, thickly setulose.

Jey, 8%

Ilyograpsus rhizophorae n.g., n. sp. a. carapace. 6. ventral view of anterior portion of carapace

showing mxp. 3 in situ. c. abdominal segments 1-3. d. mxp. 3. e. left cheliped. / inner view

of chela. g. posterior view of left pleopod 1 g, with anterior view of apex.

Abdomen, Ist segment not quite extending to the sockets of 5th coxae, 2nd

very short and narrower than ist, 3rd widest at base but also not reaching the

5th coxae, lateral margins of 3rd-6th segments tapering evenly, but rather

abruptly in distal half of 6th, 7th almost as long as its basal width, apically

rounded.

28 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Pleopod 1 rather slender, distally slightly curved outwards, outer margin

setose, apex rounded, the ‘lip’ of the seminal channel on the anterior side not

as long as the posterior ‘lip’. !

Length 6-5, breadth 7-5 mm. As preserved, yellowish-brown with very

faint indications of cross-bands on 6th joints of the legs.

Locality. Inhambane, in mangrove swamps. 1 g. (U.C.T.) (July, 1954.)

Sarmatium crassum Dana

Fic. 9.

1851. Dana, Pr. Ac. Nat. Sc. Philad., p. 251.

1652. 1d.) U.S. Expl. Exp. Crust., p.. 356, pla2o.nie te

1869. M. Edwards, Nouv. Arch. Mus. Paris, v, p. 28 (germant).

1900. Alcock, 7. Aszat. Soc. Bengal, Ixix, p. 426.

1917. Tesch, Zool. Med, iii, p. 215 and p. 258 (in key).

Carapace glabrous, regions indistinct, as long as broad (greatest width at

end epibranchial tooth, but distance between hind angles of carapace slightly

greater) ; lateral margins very slightly sinuous, subparallel, with a small indent

behind the blunt external orbital angle, and a feeble inconspicuous indent

about midway between latter and hind angle. Some short oblique lines of

small granules on hinder branchial region, with some tiny tufts of setules.

Postfrontal lobes not conspicuous, median pair

occupying nearly all the space between orbits.

Chelipeds ¢ subequal, 4th joint with inner

lower margin serrulate, outer lower margin

only finely serrulate, upper margin with a small

acute spiniform tooth subterminal (projecting

over the transverse groove on outer surface),

wrist with short tooth on inner margin, palm

glabrous, coarsely punctate on outer surface

becoming granulate on lower margin, inner

surface smooth, sparsely punctate, with a few

Sarmatium crassim Dana. Very Imeonspicuous granules) mela gormeweme

Lateral margin of carapace; series, upper surface with 4 smooth transverse

Aover of} cheliped, with Tidges with subsidiary milled ridges (Alcock

profiles. quotes: 4—5 ridges; ‘Tesch says 6-7), a series of

small dark denticles above insertion of finger; finger with 4 short black-tipped

spines in proximal half, and a series of minute dark denticles distally; finger and

thumb not gaping, slightly furry at base. Asharp subterminal tooth on upper mar-

gin of 4th joint of legs; 4th joint of 5th leg slightly longer than twice its width.

Seventh abdominal segment longer than basal width (24-12? mm.).

Length 12 mm., breadth 12-5 mm. Fawn-brown, chelipeds and legs biscuit-

coloured with orange tinge.

Locality. Durban Bay. 1 g. (U.C.T. 1950.)

Distribution. Samoa, S. China, Sumatra, Nicobars.

Fic. 9.

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 29

Fam. XANTHIDAE

Chlorodiella mger (Forskal)

Bigs 0:

19504 barnarc.vloc, cit... 213) (references).

Fic. 10.

Chlorodiella niger (Forskal). Carapace and leg of juv. 3.

As this species was not figured in the above-cited work, the opportunity is

here taken to give a figure of a juvenile, with remarks on the differences

between the latter and the adult.

Juv. 3,5 < 6mm. Front as well as infraorbital margin very clearly denticu-

late. Second, third and fourth antero-lateral teeth distinctly spiniform; in

adult the teeth become progressively blunter (cf. Laurie, 1915). Upper surface

of carapace with fairly well-marked regions, small groups of minute granules,

and scattered setae; in adult regions scarcely traceable, surface smooth to the

naked eye but minutely shagreened, glabrous.

Legs less setose than in adult, consequently the spines on 4th-6th joints more

clearly visible, and especially the denticles on inner margin of dactylus.

All abdominal segments distinct; pleopods 1 and 2 not fully developed.

Locality. Delagoa Bay. 1 adult g, 1 juv. g. (U.W.)

Gen. Cymo de Haan

1833. de Haan in Siebold. Fauna Japon. Crust., p. 22.

Cymo andreossy: (Audouin)

Fig. 11.

1826. Audouin in Savigny, Descr. Egypte, p. 86, pl. 5, fig. 5 (Pelumnus a).

1875. Paulson, Red Sea Crust., p. 38, pl. 6, fig. 5.

1884. Miers, Crust. H.M.S. “Alert’, p. 532 (andreossit).

1887. de Man, 7. Linn. Soc. Lond., xxii, p. 35.

1898. Alcock, 7. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, \xvii, p. 173 (references).

1915. Bouvier, Bull. Scc. Fr. Belg., xlviii, p. 280.

30 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

The left half of the front of the juvenile agrees exactly with de Man’s des-

cription. The fingers and thumbs of both chelae of both specimens are pure

white.

Locality. Delagoa Bay. 1 immature 5:5 X 6 mm., I non-ovig. 9 11 X II°5

mm. (U.W.)

Distribution. Red Sea, Seychelles, Mauritius, Rodriguez, Indo-Pacific.

Gen. Pilumnopeus M. Edw.

1863. Milne Edwards, Ann. Sci. Nat. (4), xx, p. 289.

1887. De Man, 7. Linn. Soc. Lond., xxii, p. 52 (Heteropanope part).

1893. Alcock, 7. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, \xvii, p. 207 (Heteropanope part).

1933. Balss, Capita Zool., iv, p. 33.

\ ,

ee ey

ney

AY N : ‘ WW Naf

fs Wel Rat ALA

‘Yn 13) ay, HN mat

ae PE ath

. ace a a oo a iN

Fic. 11.

Cymo andreossyi (Aud.). Carapace of 9,

right half denuded; with frontal margin of

juvenile.

De Man and Alcock regarded Pilumnopeus as synonymous with Heteropanope

Stimpson 1858. Balss, however, keeps them separate, defining Pilumnopeus as

having the middle frontal lobes convex, the carapace more convex, and with

transverse setose lines of granules.

Pilumnopeus indica (de Man)

Fig. 12.

1887. de Man, loc. cit., p. 53, pl. 3, figs. 1, 2 (Heteropanope 1).

1898. Alcock, loc. cit., p. 208 (Heteropanope 7)

1933. ‘Balss; loc: cit. p33:

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 31

One J, 8 X 12 mm., and ovig. 99 up to 8-5 xX 12:5 mm., agree so well with

de Man’s detailed description that there can scarcely be any doubt as to their

identity. The only difference in these specimens is: the hand of the larger

(right) chela is granular on the upper surface and on the outer surface near

the articulation with the wrist; and the lower surface and distal half of outer

surface of the smaller (left) chela are not granular.

Smallest ovig. 9 4:5 X 6mm. Brownish, speckled and mottled with reddish-

brown, hand of cheliped with small orange spots, finger and thumb blackish,

colour not extending on to palm.

Locality. Durban Bay. 1 g and ovig. 99. (U.C.T.)

Distribution. Mergui Archipelago.

Fic. 12.

Pilumnopeus indica (de Man). Carapace of 3, right eye removed; abdomen; right chela; pleopod

I $, with apex further enlarged.

Gen. Actumnus Dana

sonia Dana, Amer. 7. \Sct. (2), ly p. 128:

? Actumnus laevigatus Rathbun

Bigs:

1911. Rathbun, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., xiv, p. 233, pl. 19, figs. 3, 4.

1933. Balss, Capita Zool., iv, p. 36 (Pilumnus 1).

—Carapace strongly declivous anteriorly, with very short pile, with

scattered long plumose setae. Front 4 width of carapace, 2 broad lobes with-

out (or with a scarcely noticeable) notch next to the orbit. Supraorbital

32 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

margin with very inconspicuous trace of one slit, feebly beaded; infraorbital

margin beaded. No infraorbital or subhepatic teeth. Antero-lateral margin

with 3 small teeth, each tipped with a white spinule. Distance between outer

orbital angle and 1st tooth slightly greater than that between ist and 3rd teeth.

Only the left cheliped present. Wrist with a conical knob on inner surface,

upper surface inconspicuously corrugated, minutely granulate on outer

surface. Palm finely granulate, some of the granules slightly larger and forming

3 moderately definite longitudinal rows on outer surface. A few granules on

base of upper surface of finger. Tips of finger and thumb pointed. Finely

ou aly

id .

lu ii a

FIGs 13.

? Actumnus laevigatus Rathbun. a. carapace of 9, the short pile removed, with longitudinal

profile. 0b, ¢. outer and upper surfaces of chela.

Lybia plumosa Brnrd. A carapace more correctly drawn than in fig. 46f in Barnard, 1950,

loc. cit.

pilose, with a few long plumose setae. Legs without spinules on margins;

pilose and setose, especially the dactyls, with longer plumose setae.

Length 5 mm., breadth 7-5 mm.

Locality. Inhambane. 1 ovig. 9. (U.C.T.).

Distribution. Seychelles.

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 33

Remarks. ‘This specimen seems to be near, if not identical with, A. laevigatus

Rathbun, described from a single ovig. 9 6-8 x 9:3 mm. Balss regards this

species as a Pilumnus on account of the broad sternum.

Gen. Sphaerozius Stimpson

1950. Barnard, loc. cit., p. 253.

The two species recorded from the South African region may be distinguished

as follows:

1. Frontal lobes oblique, entire. Outer surface of hand of chela granular. ... nitidus

2. Frontal lobes transverse, each 3-lobulate. Outer surface of hand of chela

STEDMAN RT a a Sic a Sornasinit

Fic. 14.

Sphaerozius fornasini (Bianconi). Carapace of specimen 12°5 x 18:5 mm., from Inhambane.

Frontal lobes of adult g. Pleopods 1 and 2 J, the latter with group of spines further enlarged.

Sphaerozius fornasini (Bianconi)

Riga r4:

1851. Bianconi, Spec. Zool. Mosambic., fasc. 5, p. 84, Crust., pl. 2, figs. 1, 1a—c.

(Mem. Ac. Sci. Bologna, III.) (Galene f.)

1878. Hilgendorf, MB. Ak. Wiss. Berlin, p. 795 (Menippe subg. Myomenippe f).

1899. de Man, Notes Leyden Mus., xxi, p. 57, pl. 7, fig. 1 (Myomenippe f).

1950. Barnard, loc. cit., p. 256.

The lobules on the frontal lobes are not so conspicuous in the young as in

the adult.

34. ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Length, ¢ 52 mm., breadth, 75 mm. (Hilgendorf, 54 x 79 mm.). Reddish-

brown, more or less mottled, chelae with small pale spots, finger and thumb

black, the colour not extending on to palm.

Locality. Inhambane. 3 specimens. (U.C.T. 1954.)

Distribution. Mozambique; Ibo.

Remarks. ‘There is a curious resemblance between the 2nd pleopod ¢ of this

species and that of Notonyx mitidus (Goneplacidae, Rhizopinae) (Stephensen,

1945, Dan. Sct. Invest. Iran, pt. 4, fig. 47B): both have a spiniferous step midway

along the appendage.

Fam. GONEPLACIDAE

Gen. Xenopthalmodes Richters

1950. Barnard, loc. cit., p. 296 (references).

Aenophthalmodes brachyphallus n. sp.

Fig. 15a-d.

Two go agree with moebii except in two characters.

The first abdominal segment is proportionately wider, extending well

beyond the lateral angle of the 3rd segment (fig. 15a) whereas in moebu the two

Fic. 15.

Xenophthalmodes brachyphallus n. sp. a. abdominal segments 1-3, and left sternal plate g, articular

surface of segment 1 dotted. b. posterior view of right pleopod 1 g. c¢. apex of same further

enlarged. d. outer surface of chela of large 9 12 X 18 mm.

Xenophthalmodes moebii Richters. e. abdominal segments 1-3, and sternal plate g, for comparison

with a.

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 35

segments are subequal in width (fig. 15¢), consequently it reaches midway

along the sternal plate, instead of scarcely one quarter.

The 1st pleopods extend almost to the tip of the abdomen, but do not project

beyond it as in moebw and dolichophallus. ‘Vhe appendage is strongly sinuous,

with a slight beak-like apex curving outwards, with 2 series of strong spines

distally; in the other two species the appendage is straight, slender, tapering

to a fine unarmed point.

Length gg 5:5 and 12 mm., 9 12 mm. (measured by calipers, not over the

curve of the carapace); breadth gg 8 and 16 mm. resp., 2 (nonovig.) 18 mm.

Locality. Inhambane. 2 gg, 19, and immat. (U.Q.T. Jan. and July 1954.)

Remarks. The size of the 9 and the larger 3 specimen is noteworthy, the

breadth being considerably greater than the largest of Alcock’s specimens

(12 mm.).

The specific identity, or otherwise, of Richters’, de Man’s, Alcock’s, the

Delagoa Bay specimen (Barnard, loc. cit., 1950), and dolichophallus Tesch

remains somewhat uncertain. The shape of the 4th joint of mxp. 3 may vary

to some extent, but the 1st plp. dis a very definite character. Tesch presumably

examined de Man’s ¢ specimen, but he does not describe this appendage,

merely stating that an elongated, externally visible appendage is ‘not to be

observed in de Man’s specimen’ (p. 217).

Stephensen (1945, Dan. Sci. Invest. Iran, pt. 4, p. 178, figs. 47 CG—-E) has

further remarks on dolichophallus ‘Tesch 1918.

Gen. Typhlocarcinodes Alcock

ngage: Alcock, 7. Astat. Soc. Bengal, \|xix, p. 326.

1902. Borradaile, F. Geogr. Mald. Lacc. Arch., 1, p. 267 (Caecopilumnus).

1918. Tesch, Szboga Exp. monogr., Xxxix, Cc. I, pp. 202 (in key), 226.

Typhlocarcinodes piroculatus (Rathbun)

Fig. 16.

1911. Rathbun, Trans. Linn. Soc. London (2), zool., xiv, p. 239, pl. 20, figs. 1,

2 (2). (Lyphlocarcinops p.)

mie Hesch, loc. cit., p. 231, pl. 15, fig. 2 (4).

Fronto-orbital width one half width of carapace. Front wider than orbit,

just over 3 times in carapace width. Antero-lateral margin entire, costate,

beaded, passing into postero-lateral margin without any appreciable notch.

Abdomen Ist segment in § and 2 occupying whole distance between the 5th

coxae; in g 2nd segment narrower than the adjoining sternal plate, 3rd—5th

segments fused but indicated by faint median impressions.

Ocular peduncle immovable, piriform, cornea small but distinct on ventral

surface of apex. Antenna 1 folding completely into fossa, stout, flagellum with

broad, short joints tapering into 4 or 5 slender distal joints, with long smooth

(non-setose) sensory filaments. Antenna 2 flagellum longer than last joint of

peduncle, 12-jointed in J, 8-jointed in 9.

36 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Epistome sunken, not prominent. Buccal cavity slightly narrowing in

front. External maxillipeds nearly meeting in centre line, 4th joint sub-

circular, the antero-lateral corner rounded.

Cheliped, internal angle of wrist not prominent; in § palm about as long as

broad, finger and thumb about as long as palm, gaping, each with a furry

groove on outer surface, upper surface of wrist and palm with small granules

concealed by the fur, outer and inner surfaces glabrous, finger with 2-3 small

teeth on cutting-edge, thumb with a more prominent one; in @ less robust,

more setose, finger and thumb not gaping.

Legs setose, margins of 4th-6th joints especially thickly clothed with long

fringes.

Pleopod 1 ¢ distally tapering and laterally compressed, the dorsal edge with

5-6 denticles. Pleopod 2 very slender, as long as pleopod 1.

>»

FGA, SAA?

\RRY Atos

SSN Zan.

SN Kz

Fic. 16.

Typhlocarcinodes piroculatus (Rathbun). Antennae 1 and 2. Abdomen of g. Pleopod 1 4,

posterior view of right appendage, with lateral view of apex (to same scale).

Length ¢ 8-5 mm. (by calipers, not over the curve), 9 7 mm.; breadth g

I1mm., 29mm. As preserved, dirty white, the fringes on the legs brown with

a reddish tinge.

Locality. Delagoa Bay. 1 3, 1 non-ovig. 9. (U.W.)

Distribution. Amirante Is., Seychelles, 34 fms.; Philippine Is., 36 metres.

Remarks. In spite of a few minor differences from the descriptions of Rathbun

and Tesch (e.g. the flagellum of antenna 2 is longer, especially in the ¢) these

specimens appear to belong to this species. Both are larger than the other

known specimens.

Tesch did not describe the pleopods of the g. Nor have they been pre-

viously described in any species of this genus. Stephensen (1945, Dan. Sez.

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 37

Invest. Iran, pt. 4, p. 227) notes that, as far as recorded, pleopod 2 in the

Rhizopinae is short except in Notonyx. The present species forms another

exception.

Fam. DROMIIDAE

Pseudodromia integrifrons Hend.

Figs 17:

1888. Henderson, ‘Challenger’ Rep., xxvii, p. 16 footnote (sine descr.).

1893. id., Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond. (2), v, p. 406, pl. 38, figs. 7-9.

1950. Barnard, loc. cit., p. 316 (in key only).

Pubescence on surface of carapace chiefly in the shallow grooves marking the

regions; the lateral and anterior margin of carapace, however, with thick

fringe of plumose setae, especially noticeable on the rostrum.

The 6th joint of 5th leg has 2

strong spines on outer surface of apex

(not 3 as in Henderson’s description).

Length of carapace 3 7°5 mm.,

ovig. 9 65 mm. 36 ova, about

I mm. in diameter.

Locality. Inhambane. §¢ and ovig.

ee (UCT)

_ Distribution. Ceylon; Obock.

Cryptodromia tomentosa (Heller)

1861. Heller, SB. Ak. Wiss. Wien.,

sive P-.214- Fic 17.

1875. Paulson, Red Sea Crust., p. 83. Pseudodromia integrifrons Hend. Left 5th

: . leg, outer surface (on left) and anterior

1878. Hilgendorf, MB. Ak. Wiss. (appeny (icra wiew- (onbnieHol

Berlin, p. 813, pl. 2, figs. 3-5.

1880. Kossmann, Reise. Roth. Meeres., pt. 2, p. 68.

mooe:) de Man, 7. Linn. Soc. Lond., xxii, p. 212.

?1903. Borradaile, Fauna Geogr. Mald. Lacc. Arch., Il, p. 577, pl. 33, fig. 3

(hirsuta).

1942. Ward, Mauritius Inst. Bull., II, 2, p. 70.

A non-ovigerous 9, 14 X 14 mm., is more like Hilgendorf’s figure of penta-

gonalis in general outline, but the large antero-lateral tooth is truly marginal,

and the median rostral tooth is only just visible in dorsal view as in his figure of

tomentosa. ‘The tooth behind the branchial groove is slightly less prominent

than in the figure of the former species, and the supraorbital margin is less

concave than in that of the latter species. Dorsal surface of carapace com-

pletely covered with tomentum.

Localities. Ibo (Hilgendorf); Inhambane. 1 9. (U.C.T.)

Distribution. Red Sea, Chagos Archipelago.

38 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Remarks. C. pentagonalts Hilg. (loc. cit, p. 814, pl. 2, figs. 1, 2) should, I think,

be united with tomentosa. According to Hilgendorf the antero-lateral tooth is

truly marginal in tomentosa, but inframarginal in pentagonalis. Both species were

found together at Ibo; pentagonalis has been recorded also from Mauritius and

India (Henderson, 1893). Alcock (1899) and Henderson also thought the two

species were not distinct.

C. hirsuta Borrad. is also very similar.

Regarded as synonymous with canaliculata Stimpson 1858 by de Man (1887,

Arch. Naturg., lili) and by Ortmann (1892). Rathbun (1911) records both

canaliculata and pentagonalis from the Seychelles.

= sh

ry ally

s 2?

a si >» 9

eer o ’

AR ST Wiens

Se ie ey SA6

Fic. 18.

Ebalia agglomus n. sp. a, 6. dorsal and lateral views. c. mxp. 3. d. abdomen ¢. e. pleopod 1 @.

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 39

Fam. LEUCOSIIDAE

Ebalia agglomus n. sp.

Bice re:

g—Carapace as broad as long, but postero-lateral margins slightly con-

verging behind; branchial regions separated from the median gastro-cardiac-

intestinal regions by a well-marked furrow (not as deep as in glomus), 2 large

medio-dorsal cardiac tubercles, 2 smaller intestinal ones, smaller tubercles and

granules on the cardiac and branchial regions, and minute granules on

intestinal region; gastric region and front quite smooth (with sparse impressed

punctae); front with shallow median groove; supraorbital and antero-lateral

margins beaded; pterygostomial ridge prominent, beaded, separated by the

shallow hepatic-branchial gap from the beaded postero-lateral margin; hind

margin with slightly enlarged median and lateral granules.

Cheliped about 14 times length of carapace; arm shorter than carapace,

granulate on upper, lower, and outer surfaces especially basally; wrist, palm

and fingers minutely granulate (appearing smooth even under x8 lens).

Abdomen with 3rd—5th segments fused, lateral margins of 6th and 7th

segments crenulate. Pleopod 1 straight, distally enlarged, with pointed apex.

Length and breadth 7-5 mm.

Locality. Inhambane. 1 ¢ (U.C.T.). Delagoa Bay. 1 3 (U.W.).

Remarks. At first glance resembling a less highly sculptured form of glomus

or diadumena, but distinguished by the 1st pleopod .

Gen. Cryptocnemus Stimpson

1858. Stimpson, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Philad., x, p. 161.

1918. Ihle, Siboga Exp. monogr., xxxix, b2, p. 285 (with key to species) and

p. 317 (references). i

Cryptocnemus holdswortht Miers

Fig. 19:

1877. Miers, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond. (2), zool., I, p. 241, pl. 38, figs, 30-2.

1906. Laurie, Herdman’s Ceylon Pearl Oyster Rep., Suppl. Rep. V, p. 356.

1910. Lenz, Voelizkow Reise Ostafr., Il, p. 544.

1918. Ihle, loc. cit., p. 286 (in key) and p. 317 (in list of species).

Laurie remarks that the shape of the carapace is somewhat variable; and

that Miers’s 9 specimen and his two 99 were the only three specimens recorded

to that date. Lenz had one 9, whose abdomen agreed with Miers’s figure. In

the present specimen the abdomen is for the most part parallel-sided, and all

7 segments are distinct, but the 1st and 2nd are immovably fused; the hind

margin of the Ist segment (probably, but may be the front margin of the 2nd)

with a transverse ridge.

A strong ridge on the pterygostomial region, anteriorly forming the border

of the inhalent channel.

40 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

IMCs HO.

Cryptocnemus holdsworthi Miers. Carapace and abdomen of immature (? 9).

Length 6:25 mm., breadth 10 mm. As preserved, white.

Locality. Inhambane. 1 immat. ? 9, dredged in 4-1-5 metres, bottom sand,

with patches of Cymodocea weed. (U.C.T. July 1954).

Distribution. Ceylon.

Fam. PORCELLANIDAE

Porcellana delagoae n. sp.

Hic 20.

Median frontal tooth rather narrow, length subequal to basal width;

margins of frontal teeth thickly fringed with short plumose setae. Carapace

with scattered plumose setae, chiefly anteriorly and on the lateral branchial

regions; the 2 semicircular postfrontal lobes rather prominent, with rather deep

depression in front of them. Lateral margin with 3-4 spines above insertion of

Fic. 20.

Porcellana delagoae n. sp. a. carapace. b. ventral view of basal joint of left ant. 1. c. ventral view

of peduncle of left ant. 2. d. right cheliped, the vertical flange on 4th joint seen foreshortened.

e. external view of 3rd and 4th joints of cheliped. £ dactylus of leg.

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 41

peduncle of ant. 2 in front of lateral indent, 5 behind it, increasing in size

posteriorly. First peduncular joint of ant. 1 thick, dentate, the ventral apical

transverse margin with a couple of small denticles and some long setae, dorsal

apical margin with 1 spiniform tooth and some small denticles, outer apical

angle with 3-4 strong teeth. Basal peduncular joint of ant. 2 with margin

entire except at apex which is serrulate; following two joints each with apical

tooth on front margin. Inner margin of grd joint of cheliped rather prominent,

with tuft of plumose setae; 4th joint with strong spine on lower inner margin,

upper inner margin produced as a rounded, denticulate flange projecting

vertically, perpendicular to the plane of upper surface of 5th joint, the median

keel spinulose; both margins of hand, and outer margins of finger and thumb

spinulose, and with plumose setae, the latter especially numerous on outer

margin of hand; median keel of hand spinulose, 2—3 denticles on base of finger;

cutting-edges of finger and thumb furry on inner (lower) side. (Only the right

cheliped present, which seems to be the smaller.) Legs with moderately

numerous plumose setae on 2nd—4th joints; dactyls with 4-5 spines, the distal-

most one the largest, followed by a tuft of setae.

Length and breadth 4 mm. Pinkish-orange, somewhat faintly mottled, 2

red dots on the cardiac region.

Locality. Delagoa Bay. 1 ovig. 9. (U.W.)

Remarks. At first glance deceptively like dehaanii, but distinguished by the

spinulose and setose cheliped. The upstanding flange on the 4th joint of

cheliped, if normal, is curious. Among a large number of both sexes of dehaaniz

I have found no tendency of this flange to become vertical and perpendicular

to the plane of the upper surface of the 5th joint.

Petrolisthes virgatus Paulson

ISI, Qi.

1875. Paulson, Red Sea Crust., p. 87, pl. xi, fig. 4 (Paulson gives a reference to

to a figure ‘pl. 1, fig. 9’ in another paper by himself).

1894. Ortmann in Semon, Austral. Reise, v, p. 28, pl. 2, fig. 5 (trvirgatus).

1905. Lenz, Abh. Senckenb. Ges., xxvii, p. 375 (trivirgatus).

Integument not strongly calcified. Carapace, chelipeds and legs completely

covered with short spinate spine-setae. No supraorbital or epibranchial

spines. First peduncular joint of ant. 1 distally tridentate, inner and outer

teeth acute, the broad median lobe with serrulate margin and 2-3 larger

denticles. Second (ist free) peduncular joint of ant. 2 squarely lobed on front

margin. Inner apex of 4th joint of cheliped sharply dentate, 5th joint with

3 sharp teeth on inner (front) margin; outer margin of hand proximally with

sharp spiniform denticles, hidden by the thick marginal fringe of rather long

spinate setae, which is continued along outer margin of thumb. Fourth joints

of gnd-4th legs without spines on front margin, lower (hind) margin of 4th

joint of 2nd leg with acute apical tooth, 4th joint of 4th leg 14 times as long as

broad; both margins of legs strongly fringed with spinate setae.

42 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Length 8-5 mm., breadth 8 mm. (As preserved in formalin) dark crimson-

maroon dorsally, more crimson ventrally, sternum pale but speckled; carapace

with 3 broad longitudinal pale, dark-bordered stripes, a pair of dark rings

between the gastric-cardiac regions ending posteriorly in a pair of small

shallow glabrous pits; abdomen with transverse crimson and pale bands; legs

with pale stripes; chelipeds with pale stripe on hinder margin of 4th and 5th

joints, hand with faint pale stripe along inner (upper) margin continued along

finger, a more conspicuous pale stripe along middle of upper surface, con-

tinued along cutting-edge of finger. Ortmann gave the. ground-colour as dark

violet, paler below, with pattern as in the present specimens, but without

mentioning the dark rings which are shown in Paulson’ figure.

Locality. Delagoa Bay. 2 specimens. (U.W.)

Distribution. Red Sea, Dar-es-Salaam, Zanzibar.

hod

oF 3

4 3

AG a * =

Y i Ry q

ae % %

a AD %

o f SSS

edad SPORE

és

y PPE INE ATS ogee

’

ras wget LE a

v Wcengiaaloe’e's

yn.

ise

Bre. 32

Petrolisthes virgatus Paulson. a. carapace, denuded, the spinate setae shown only around the

margin. b. ventral view of basal joint of left ant. 1. c. ventral view of peduncle of left ant. 2,

with spinate seta further enlarged. d. spine-seta from front margin of hand of cheliped.

Remarks. There can be little doubt that Ortmann’s species is the same as

Paulson’s. From the figure (x 2) Ortmann’s specimens measured 10 X 7:5 mm.

but the length has almost certainly been exaggerated in relation to the width.

Paulson’s much better figure ( X 3) gives the size as (approx.) 6°17 X 5°7 mm.

Fam. SERGESTIDAE

Gen. Acetes M. Edw.

1950. Barnard, loc. cit., p. 822

Key to the South African species

1. Telson extending beyond middle of inner ramus of uropod, apically pointed. . erythraeus

2. Telson not extending beyond middle of inner ramus of uropod, apically

truncate. MP

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 43

Acetes natalensis n. sp.

Very close to znsularis Kemp (1917 Rec. Ind. Mus., xiii, p. 54, figs.) (= serru-

latus (Kréyer)) from the East Indies, differing only in the 3 petasma.

Outer flagellum of ant. 1 ¢ as in Kemp’s fig. 2¢ of insularis; 2 spinules

proximal to a retrorse process on the side of the flagellum remote from the

2 large clasping spines.

Petasma: proximal and distal extensions of the inner lobe more like those of

indicus (Kemp, loc. cit., fig. 4g), but between the two portions an angular

lobe or tooth on inner margin, distal portion with a pointed process beyond

which extends the apical cylindrical portion, the latter with several granules or

‘pits’ (Kemp).

Telson not reaching beyond middle of inner ramus of uropod, apex truncate

but slightly convex, with a denticle at each corner.

Length ¢ ca. 20 mm., 9 22-3 mm.

Locality: Durban Bay, 4 63; 5 9° (U.G.T., 1951); also a single specimen

from the same locality submitted in 1955 by Mr. W. D. Oliff of the Natal River

Survey.

Remarks. Examination of the latter specimen showed that I had not heeded

Kemp’s warning (loc. cit., p. 44): ‘. .. two species are often found together.

In such cases . . . identification is a tedious process, for each individual must

be separately and carefully examined.’ U.C.T. collected many juveniles of the

large erythraeus and I assumed that all the small examples were the same species.

The character of the telson will at once distinguish the two species, reinforced

in the case of gg by the flagellum of antenna 1 and the petasma.

Fam. PROCESSIDAE

Key to the South African genera

1. First peraeopod without exopod. oe eA LenOcessa:

2. First peraeopod with exopod. MMS hen NeKOtdeS,

Gen. ProcessA Leach

1950. Barnard, loc. cit., p. 715

1951. Holthuis, Atlantide Rep., 2, p. 37

Key to the South African species

1. Rostrum narrow, slender.

a. 2nd legs unequal.

i. Body and 3rd—5th legs slender. 5th abdominal segment with hind

corner rounded. . austroafricana

ii. Body and 3rd—5th legs robust. 5th abdominal segment With ae

corner dentate. ey mere cdules

b. and legs equal (or subequal). i cae Margiimand

2. Rostrum broad at base, triangular in dorsal view. Nie Wea sie ya sonica

44. ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Processa aequimana (Paulson)

1875. Paulson, Red Sea Crust., p. 97, pl. 14, figs. 6, 6a (Nika ae).

1906. Nobili, Ann. Sci. Nat. zool. Paris (9), iv, (no specimens, translation of

Paulson’s description).

1922. de Man, Siboga Exp. monogr., xxxix, a4, p. 44, pl. 4, figs. 19-19.

1937. Gurney, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., cvii, B, p. 87, pl. 1, figs. 1-10; pp. 91, 92

(in key); and pp. 92, 95, 97; pl. 2, figs. 33-5, pl. 3, fig. 36 (develop-

ment). ,

Distinguished by the 2nd legs being equal, or nearly so, in length.

Length 17 mm.

Locality. Inhambane. 1 ovig. 9, in Zostera bed. (U.C.T. Jan. 1954).

Distribution. Red Sea; East Indies.

Remarks. Gurney records ovigerous 99 in late February.

At Ghardaqa, Red Sea, the shrimps inhabit ‘the shallow reef-flat, which is

largely laid bare at the lowest tides’. They appear to burrow in the sand

during the day, and were only taken at night (loc. cit., p. 86).

Processa japonica (de Haan)

1849. De Haan, Fauna Japonica, p. 184, pl. 46, fig. 6.

1920. De Man, Siboga Exp. monogr., xxxix, a 3, p. 208, pl. 18, figs. 53-534.

1937. Gurney, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., B, cvii, p. 88, pl. 1, figs. 16-19.

Three ovig. 99, 30-36 mm., have the broad triangular rostrum and minute

telsonic spines which Gurney notes as distinctive of this species.

Recorded as ‘yellow (bright golden) shrimps burrowing in sand’ (Mrs. M.

Kalk, U.W.).

Locality: Delagoa Bay (U.W. 1955).

Distribution. Japan; East Indies; east coast of Africa (Gurney does not

state the exact locality of the specimen he examined from the John Murray

Expedition).

Gen. Nikowdes Paulson

1875. Paulson, Red Sea Crust., p. 98.

Nikowdes danae Paulson

1875. Paulson, loc. cit., p. 98, pl. 14, figs. 5-5d.

1906. Nobili, Ann. Sci. zool. Paris (9), iv, p. 79, pl. 5, figs. 1-1f-

1937. Gurney, loc. cit., p. 89, pl. 1, figs. 20-5, pl. 2, figs. 26-9.

One specimen, ca 27 mm. (if extended) is provisionally assigned to this

species. The basal process of ant. 1 is short and broad, apex obliquely truncate,

the internal corner projecting farther forwards than the external corner; thus

differing from Paulson’s fig. 5d. Gurney does not figure this appendage, and

Nobili’s paper is not available to me; de Man (1920, loc. cit., p. 193, pl. 16,

figs. 50-50/) also gives no figure of it for his stbogae, and without a figure his

description is not very enlightening.

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 45

Locality: Delagoa Bay (U.W.).

Distribution. Red Sea; Djibouti. Gurney (loc. cit., pp. 89, 91) considers

sibogae from the East Indies synonymous with danae.

Fam. ALPHEIDAE

Alpheus bullatus n. sp.

Pismo)

1950. Barnard, loc. cit, p. 742 (banded species from St. Lucia Bay).

Rostrum extending to end of 1st peduncular joint of ant. 1, not strongly

keeled, similar to that of crassimanus. Supraorbital spines present. Basal

process of ant. 1 reaching to (or a trifle beyond) apex of 1st peduncular joint.

Basal joint of ant. 2 with ventral (external) spine; blade of antennal scale

reaching half way along spine, which does not quite reach end of last peduncular

joint of ant. 2.

First leg: margins of 4th joint entire,

upper apex blunt; large chela ¢ (right)

about twice as long as broad, outer half of

upper surface with rounded granules, more

or less in transverse rows, inner half with

smaller granules and punctae; lower sur-

face with scattered large punctae; finger

knob-like, apex truncate; small chela J,

a short denticle at upper apex of 5th joint,

a short blunt tooth on upper surface of

palm at base of finger, outer half of upper

surface with rounded granules, inner half

with punctae, lower surface with a few

large punctae, finger subequal to palm.

Both chelae in 9 similar to, and almost as

robust as in g; the large chela on the left Be. on.

side. Alpheus bullatus n. sp. Dorsal view of

Third and fourth legs, 4th joint 3 times Hots, hewge Cael) al Gy Koen eis

i i upper surfaces.

as long as broad, lower margin with spaced

groups of 2—3 setules, no tooth at lower apex; 6th joint of 3rd leg with 7, of

4th leg with 5 stout spines. Fifth leg more slender than 3rd and 4th. Dactyls

of 3grd—5th legs biunguiculate.

Telson not strongly narrowed distally; with median groove between well-

marked ridges on which are inserted 2 pairs of strong spines.

Length 3 22 mm., 2 27 mm. As preserved, two broad transverse bands on

carapace and one on each abdominal segment brick-red; no medio-dorsal

abdominal pale stripe; spine on outer ramus of uropod dark brown or blackish.

Localities. Delagoa Bay. 1 g, 1 9. (U.W.) St. Lucia Bay (S. Afr. Mus.).

46 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Remarks. Although the chelae are missing, all three specimens from St.

Lucia Bay agree with the Delagoa Bay specimens in all other features, including

the colour pattern.

These specimens do not seem to agree with any described species. The

large chela, although broader, seems to resemble in general that of lutini Cout.

and of phrygianus Cout.; but both these species have a tapering telson and no

supraorbital spines. !

The large chela is indeed very similar to that of malleator Dana, as figured

by Coutiére (1899, fig. 262), and in other characters also there is a close

resemblance to the specimen described by Balss (1914, ate. D. Zentr. Afr. Exp.,

I, p. 98, figs. 1-5) as ‘tuberculosus’ (non Osorio) and later (1916, Beitr. Meeresf.

Westafr., II, p. 22) identified as malleator Dana var. edentatus Zimmer 1913.

A. malleator is recorded from the Eastern Pacific, West Indies, Brazil, and

West Africa. The finger of the large chela of the present specimens, however,

is more knob-like than hammer-shaped: the proximal end only slightly bulbous

and the apex abruptly truncate.

The strongly bicarinate telson of the Delagoa Bay specimens seems to be an

unusual feature in the genus, but it is scarcely noticeable in the smaller

specimens from St. Lucia Bay.

Fam. PALAEMONIDAE

Subfam. Palaemoninae

Key to South African genera and subgenera (after Holthuis)

I. Branchiostegal spine present.

A. Branchiostegal groove absent. Lower margin of rostrum with double row

of setae, which arise some distance above the bases of the teeth. 6th joint of

Sth leg without transverse rows of setae distally. —Two median spines on

telson very strong. Pleopod 1 § with well developed appendix interna.

Mandibular palp 2-jointed. . . . . Leander

L. tenuicornis (Say), circumtropical.

B. Branchiostegal groove present. Lower margin of rostrum with (usually) a

single row of setae (if two rows, the setae arise near the margin). 6th joint

of 5th leg with transverse rows of setae distally. ‘Two median spines on

telson slender. Pleopod 1 3 appendix interna rudimentary or absent. . . Palaemon

1. Mandibular palp 2-jointed. . . . . subgen. Palaeander

elegans Rathke, maculatus (Thallw.),

squilla (Linn.) (adspersus Rathke),

west coast of southern Africa.

2. Mandibular palp 3-jointed. . . . . subgen. Palaemon

a. Pleopod 1 g appendix interna rudimentary. . +s» Concinnus

b. Pleopod 1 g appendix interna absent.

i. Rostrum very slender, curving upwards. Free part of antennulary

flagellum subequal to fused part. Peraeopod 2 slender, 5th joint

twice as long as chela. 2 ss Gebales

ii. Rostrum curving upwards. Free part of antennulary flagellum

3% times the fused part. Peraeopod 2 5th joint shorter than chela. . pacificus

iii. Rostrum straight. Freshwater. os + a OapeRsEs

II. Branchiostegal spine absent. Hepatic spine present. . « « « Macrobrachium

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 4.7

Leander tenuicornis (Say)

more. Say, Proc. Ac. Sc. Philad., I, p. 249.

1875. Paulson, Red Sea Crust., p. 116, pl. 17, figs. 3-5 (torensis).

1925. Kemp, Rec. Ind. Mus., xxvii, p. 302, fig. 11 (append. intern., plp. 1 ).

1950. Holthuis, Szboga Exp. monogr., xxxix, a 9, p. 26, figs. 1, 2.

1952. id., Allan Hancock Publ. Occ. Pap., No. 12, p. 155, pls. 41, 42 (synonymy

and references).

Two specimens with rostral teeth *¢° and 7+.

Locality. Delagoa Bay. (U.W.)

Distribution. Red Sea, Réunion. Indo-Pacific and Atlantic. Common in

floating Sargassum weed and among seaweeds in shallow water (Holthuis).

Palaemon (Palaemon) debilis Dana

1852. Dana, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sct. Philad., vi, p. 26.

1950. Holthuis, Szboga Exp. monogr., xxxix, a. 9, p. 66, fig. 13 (references).

Holthuis records this species from mangrove swamps at Durban. Also

recorded from Chagos, Maldives, and Indo-Pacific.

Subfam. Pontoniinae

1952. Holthuis, Szboga Exp. monogr., xxxix, a 10, pp. 1-254 (key to genera

and subgenera).

Holthuis regards Ancylocaris Schenkel 1902 as a synonym of Harpilius Dana

1852. The two species recorded by me (1950) as species of Harpilius should be

included in Harpiliopsis Borradaile 1915.

Gen. Periclimenes Costa

Subgen. Periclimenes

Periclimenes rex Kemp

1922. Kemp, Rec. Ind. Mus., xxiv, p. 158, text-fig. 25, and pl. 5, fig. 5.

An ovig. 9 24 mm. in length agrees with Kemp’s description except in two

features, probably varietal or sexual.

The upper edge of the rostrum has a series of 28 teeth, excluding the apical

point, and the two teeth immediately preceding the latter are smaller than the

others; the posterior 3 teeth are postorbital, but there is no isolated tooth on

the carapace.

The outer margin of the external lobe of the basal joint of ant. 1 ends in an

acute point (as in Kemp’s fig. 255), but the distal margin projects beyond this

point and ends in one (left) or two (right) sharp points (somewhat similar to

the right ant. 1 in fig. 39¢ of Paranchistus ornatus Holthuis 1952).

Only one (detached) leg of the second pair is present.

Kemp records the gorgeous coloration of this species; as preserved, the

present specimen is uniform deep orange, with a hint of a pale dorsal patch on

48 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

the carapace, and the chelae of the first pair of legs and of the one remaining

leg of the second pair still retain a purple tinge (as described by Kemp).

Locality: Delagoa Bay. (U.W.)

Distribution. Andaman Islands.

Subgen. Harpilius

Key to the South African species

I. Supraorbital spine present. 4th joint of 2nd leg with spine-tooth on

lower apex.

a. Spine of antennal scale extending well beyond apex of scale. oe

joint of and leg shorter than palm (9). : . grandis

b. Spine of antennal scale not, or scarcely, extending beyond apex of

scale. 5th joint of 2nd leg subequal to (9), longer than ($) palm. . demani

2. Supraorbital spine absent. 4th joint of and leg without apical spine-

tooth. 5th joint of 2nd leg shorter than palm. - « +. 6 breutcarpales

Pertclimenes (Harpilius) grandis (Stimpson)

1922. Kemp, loc. cit., p. 210, text-figs. 58, 59, and pl. 7, fig. 10.

1952. Holthuis, loc. cit., pp. 11, 79 (references).

Locality: Delagoa Bay, 1 3, 1 ovig. 9. (U.W.)

Distribution. Japan, East Indies, India, Ceylon, Red Sea, Zanzibar.

Periclimenes (Harpilius) demani Kemp

1915. Kemp, Mem. Ind. Mus., v, p. 279, pl. 13, fig. 10, and text-figs. 27 a-1.

1922. id., Rec. Ind. Mus., xxiv, pp. 171 (in key), 2109, fig. 64 (antennal

scale).

1952. Holthuis, loc. cit., pp. 11, 83.

Using Kemp’s 1922 key, these specimens are easily identified as this species;

and they agree with his 1915 detailed description. The rostral formula varies:

8-9 teeth above, 2-3 below.

Length 20 mm.

Localities. Durban Bay. 34, ovig. 92 July 1950. 1 ovig. 9, Jan. 1951; and

Inhambane. 34, ovig. 99, and immature, Jan. 1954. (U.C.T.)

Distribution. Chilka Lake; Madras; Mergui Archipelago. Inhabits both sea

and brackish water.

Fam. CRANGONIDAE

Pontophilus pilosus Kemp

1916. Kemp, Rec. Ind. Mus., xii, p. 367, text-fig. 4, and pl. 8, fig. 4.

Of 6 specimens the smallest (9g mm.) agrees with Kemp’s description, but

the others (12-13 mm.) have 4 medio-dorsal spines on the carapace

instead of 3. The basal process of ant. 1 and other characters agree with the

description.

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 49

Mottled and banded with brown as described by Kemp.

Locality: Delagoa Bay, 6 specimens, incl. ovig. 99, from among Cymodocea

plants. (U.W.)

Distribution. Southern India.

STOMATOPODA

Fam. SQUILLIDAE

Squilla harpax de Haan

1849. de Haan, Fauna Japon. Crust., vii, p. 222, pl. 51, fig. 1.

1913. Kemp, Mem. Ind. Mus., iv, p. 88, pl. 7, fig. 77 (raphidea, part)

1950. Barnard, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., xxxvill, p. 851, fig. 1c, g (raphidea, non

Fabr.).

1952. ‘Tiswari and Biswas, Rec. Ind. Mus., xlix, p. 358, fig. 3b, d, f-

The last-mentioned authors, Holthuis concurring, have separated harpax

from raphidea, and given the differential characters.

S. harpax appears to be a smaller species, not exceeding 200 mm. in length.

The cornea is even wider proportionately to the length of the whole eye than

in raphidea; the lateral margin of the carapace is concave from the antero-

lateral spines to the angular projection in hinder third (sinuous in raphidea).

The 5th thoracic segment is laterally obtuse (not armed with a spine); the

submedian keels on the thoracic segments and first five abdominal segments

are obsolete. The intermediate keels on the thoracic segments do not end in

spines. The keels supporting the marginal teeth on the telson are not massive

or inflated.

The 5th thoracic segment is the crucial character.

The single specimen from Durban in the South African Museum, measuring

195 mm. in length, shows the above diagnostic characters.

Distribution. Japan, Hong Kong, Singapore, Andaman Islands, Bay of

Bengal, Bombay.

TANAIDACEA

Fam. ‘TANAIDAE

Leptochelia mirabilis Stebb.

ice 23%

These specimens are identified with mirabilis solely on geographical reasons,

Ceylon being the nearest locality from which these ‘dolichochelous’ Tanaids

have been recorded. The other species to be considered are: minuta Dana 1853

(loc. ?), rapax Harger 1879 (east coast of N. America and Bermuda) and

foresti (Stebb.) 1896 (West Indies). Stebbing (1900, Willey’s Zool. Res., pt. 5,

p- 616) suggests that Paratanais erythraea Kossm. 1880 (Red Sea) may be

synonymous with minuta.

These species have been distinguished by minute differences in the relative

lengths of the joints, and the number of flagellar joints in 1st and 2nd antennae.

50 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

A one-jointed outer ramus of the uropod is said to distinguish rapax (see:

Richardson, 1905, Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus., no. 54, p. 23 in key), but Stebbing

(1905, loc. cit., p. 6) states that even the same species may have a one- or two-

jointed outer ramus.

Stebbing’s single specimen of mirabilis was a § with the 1st gnathopods not

quite symmetrical, and both of them damaged; he was therefore unable to

describe the apex of the thumb. In the present specimens the 1st gnathopods

are symmetrical in all the gg, and the thumb is similar

to those of rapax and forestt (see: Richardson, loc. cit., figs.

31 and 25).

Length, g 3 mm., Ist gnathopod 5-6 mm.; 2 2-5 mm.

As preserved, white, eyes black.

Locality. Inhambane, in Zostera beds. 34, ovig. 99.

(UEC)

Distribution (mirabilis). Ceylon.

ISOPODA

Fam. ANTHURIDAE

Gen. Haliophasma Hasw.

1940. Barnard, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., xxxii, pp. 382, 498 (key

to species).

The following key seems preferable to that given in the

above work on p. 408. |

1. Telson clearly distinct from pleon segment 6.

a. Telson narrow-ovate, strongly tricarinate. .. . . éricarinata

b. Telson broadly-ovate.

i. Telson widest proximally, with basal

lateral flanges, more or less distinctly

tricarinate. ... . foveolata Fie: ate

ii. Telson widest in middle, not tricarinate. . . . . coronicauda Leptochelia mirabilis

ae : 5 Stebb. Finger and

iii. Telson obovate, apically upturned. .. . « hermani thumb of 1st peraeo-

2. Telson fused with pleon segment 6. . . . . pseudocarinata pod g.

Halwophasma foveolata Brurd.

Fig. 24a-c.

1940. Barnard, loc. cit., p. 384, fig. 2.

My suggestion that this species might be the female of éricarinata is put

entirely out of court by the present fine male specimen.

Foveolae and pits present on dorsal surface of head and peraeon segments

1-3 (only a few on 3), demarcated lateral areas on segments 2—5 (one or two on

segments 6 and 7), and strongly marked on sternites of segments 2—7.

Antenna 1, flagellum 12-jointed (the apical one minute), with dense fascicles

of setae. Antenna 2, flagellum 7-jointed, with fascicles of shorter and stiffer

setae (not ‘furry’ as in antenna 1).

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 51

Peraeopod 1, 5th joint with lower apex blunt, 6th joint cylindrical but

curved, lower margin concave from base to a triangular tooth near finger

hinge.

B Pleopod 2 J stylet inserted slightly beyond middle of inner ramus, extending

slightly beyond apex of ramus, slightly expanded distally, apex acute.

Telson as in the original figure: basal half with marginal flanges, distinctly

narrowed in distal half; lateral ridges present but no trace of the central ridge;

ventral surface as a whole concave, but with a slight median convexity.

Length 26 mm.

wekocalty. False Bay. 1 g. (U.C.T.)

a G f af

FIG. 24.

Haliophasma foveolata Brnrd. a. peraeopod 1 g. b. transverse section of telson. c. pleopod 2 g

stylet.

Paranthura latipes n. sp. d. peraeopod 5. e. telson and uropod. f. pleopod 2 ¢ stylet.

Gen. Paranthura B. & W.

1925. Barnard, 7. Linn. Soc. Lond., xxxvi, p. 152.

Paranthura latipes n. sp.

Fig. 24d-f.

Telson ovate-lanceolate, lateral margin slightly sinuous, greatest width a

little before midway, margin and dorsal surface with long, minutely plumose

setae. Uropod, peduncle with a transverse series of long setae at distal inner

corner, ramus longer than basal width, outer ramus broadly ovate, margins

with long, minutely plumose setae. Antenna 1, flagellum 6-jointed, setose.

Peraeopod 1 as in punctata (1914, Barnard, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., x, pl. 29 C)

but basal tooth on palm not prominent. Peraeopods 4-7 with and and grd

2 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

joints broadly oval. Pleopod 2 ¢ stylet a little longer than inner ramus,

slightly constricted at two-thirds the length, the distal third slightly lanceolate,

apex acute.

Length, ¢ 7-5 mm. As preserved, yellowish-grey; head, a medio-dorsal line

and the hind margins of peraeon segments, pleon segments laterally, telson,

peduncle and outer ramus of uropods darker grey, eyes black, antennae and

peraeopods white.

Locality. Maxixe (Machiche), Inhambane Bay. Low tide, sand banks and

concrete piles. (U.C.T.)

Remarks. Distinguished by the broadly oval 2nd and grd joints of peraeopods

4-7, and the densely setose telson.

In my references to punctata (loc. cit., p. 348a) the inclusion of Hilgendorf’s

opinion (1878, MB. Berl. Ak. Wiss., p. 847) that punctata was a Paranthura,

might be construed as a record of Stimpson’s species from Ibo (Mozambique).

Hilgendorf merely recorded an ‘Anthura sp.’ without any description.

Fam. EuRYDICIDAE (CIROLANIDAE)

Cirolana imposita n. sp.

Fig. 25¢, d.

g—Head, peraeon and pleon smooth, but, when viewed semidried under a

x 16 lens, sparsely sprinkled with minute granules. Frontal lamina pentagonal,

separate (but barely) from rostral point. Telson with 2-3 granules at base on

either side of a broad median ridge which extends to apex; this ridge with a

median groove, the edges of which are approximate basally but divergent in

the distal two-thirds, and enclose a subsidiary median ridge; lateral margins

distally and apex with plumose setae (spines may have been present but are

now broken off).

Pleopod 1, outer ramus twice as broad as inner ramus.

Uropod rami extending slightly beyond apex of telson; outer ramus with

2 groups of a spine and setae near the outer margin in distal two-thirds, inner

margin and apex with plumose setae; inner ramus with spines (6 or 7) and

plumose setae.

Penial processes on 7th sternite as in sulcata (Barnard, 1939, Ann. S. Afr. Mus.,

XXxll, p. 392, fig. 6f). Stylet on pleopod 2 extending slightly beyond apex of

ramus, slender, slightly curved outwards distally, apex acute.

Length 9-10 mm.

Localities. 1 § from stomach of cormorant shot off Danger Point, 1954.

(R. W. Rand, Biologist to the Guano Islands Administration); 1 g, 1 9 off

Cove Rock (East London), 80 fms. (s.s. Pzeter Faure coll. in S. Afr. Mus.).

Remarks. In regard to the sculpturing of the telson, this species is allied to

sulcata Hansen 1890, but invites closer comparison with cingulata Brnrd., 1920. The

telson of sulcata has a median groove between two ridges, open from close to the

base of the telson, without any indication of a median ridge (“imposita’) (fig. 25a).

ee oe ie an ~~

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 53

The granules on the pleon segments are usually distinct, but are usually

obsolete on the ridges bounding the telsonic furrow. I have seen only one

specimen as strongly granulate as in Hansen’s figure, which shows in addition

a median line of granules in the furrow.

C. sulcaticauda Stebb. 1904 has the tuberculate ridges nearly parallel, and

also a median row of tubercles in the furrow. In other features sulcaticauda and

sulcata are quite distinct.

FIG. 25.

Cirolana sulcata Hansen. a. telson

Cirolana palifrons Brnrd. 6. malformed telson of the Type.

Cirolana imposita n. sp. c. telson and right uropod. d. frontal lamina.

Cirolana cingulata Brnrd. e. telson and right uropod (marginal plumose setae omitted).

My original description of the telson of cingulata (‘a median ridge with two

punctate-striate grooves’) is correct; but for comparison with the present

species would be better worded: a median ridge with a groove which is slit-like

in basal third, but widens in distal two-thirds, where it is nearly completely

filled with a median somewhat granular ridge (fig. 25¢).

Another species with a similarly sculptured telson is palifrons Brnrd. 1920.

Although the sculpture had been disrupted by injury in the only known

54 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

specimen, the normal sculpture seems to have been very similar to that of

cingulata (fig. 255). ‘The two species are easily distinguished by other characters. —

Cirolana pilula n. sp.

Fig. 26a-c.

Body smooth, very convex. Frontal lamina and peraeopods as in hirtipes.

Eyes round. Impressed line on hind margin of eyes continuous across median

area of head.

Telson broader than long, length about ? basal width, broadly rounded,

distal margin minutely crenulate, with a plumose short seta in each notch.

Uropods not reaching telsonic apex, inner ramus broad, distal margin with

plumose setae and 6—7 spines, outer ramus shorter than inner, ovate, apex with

plumose setae and 5-6 spines.

Vasa deferentia opening by pores flush with sternal surface (as in hirtzpes).

Stylet on pleopod 2 ¢ slender, straight but slightly curved distally, apex

serrulate, with a minute digitiform process.

Length ca. 11 mm., breadth 4-5 mm. As preserved, pale with pinkish or

greyish speckles.

Locality. False Bay (94° 17 6" S. 18° 399 2" E. and 34° 12 6” Sate sa@e, ene

25-34 fathoms, shelly sand. 3 specimens, including ¢ but no ovig. 9. (U.C.T.)

Remarks. ‘Vhis species appears to be able to ‘conglobate’ almost as com-

pletely as the terrestrial Tylos, and in fact bears a strong resemblance to this

littoral Isopod. It belongs to the hirtzpes group, but is at once distinguished by

the short, rounded telson.

Cirolana capiiella n. sp.

Fig. 26d-g.

A fringe of setae on hind margins of the peraeon segments laterally and on

side-plates, smaller specimens not so setose as the largest (in fact almost

glabrous); pleurae of pleon segments sparsely setose; pleon and telson with

very fine pile.

Head with an upstanding median process between the eyes, apically slightly

bifid, and near the inner margin of eye a very low rounded tubercle; median

process not developed in juveniles 7 mm. in length, but indicated in specimens

Q-11 mm. in length, in which latter also the tubercles can just be seen if

specimen examined semi-dry.

Frontal lamina obovate, anterior margin rounded, freely projecting,

separated from small rostral point by the contiguous bases of Ist antennae.

Hind margins of peraeon segments each with a series of small sharp denticles,

5 or 6 on either side of a median one, feeble and obscure on Ist and 2nd seg-

ments, but becoming more prominent on hinder segments.

Pleon segments 3 and 4 each with 3 or 4 denticles on either side of a median

one; in the largest specimen the denticles on segment 4 stronger than on segment

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 55

3, and the submedian pair stronger than the others; segment 5 with a median

and 2 (or 3) lateral denticles. ‘Telson with an obscure median groove bounded

by very feeble ridges; this sculpture can only be seen when specimen is semi-

dry; a strong acute tooth laterally over the articulation of uropod; apex

narrowly rounded, with plumose setae and about 6 spines.

Uropod, inner ramus broad, outer ramus ovate, of about equal length,

margins with plumose setae and spines.

Vasa deferentia opening by pores flush with surface.

Fic. 26.

Cirolana pilula n. sp. a. pleon segments 4 and 5, telson and uropod. Bb. frontal lamina. c. pleopod

2 § with apex of stylet further enlarged.

Cirolana capitella nn. sp. d. lateral and dorsal views of head. e. frontal lamina. f. peraeon segment

7, pleon, telson and uropods. g. lateral view of pleon segments 3~—5, basal corner of telson, and

peduncle of uropod.

Pleopod 1, inner ramus % as broad as outer ramus. Pleopod 2 ¢ stylet as

long as ramus, slender, apically acute.

Largest specimen 12 X 4°5 mm. Preserved, uniform pale yellowish, eyes black.

56 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Locality. Inhambane, and in the Lagoa Poelela at Inharrime. 1 adult 3,

3 immature gd, 7 juv. (U.G.T. 1954)

Remarks. Closely resembling willey: Stebb. (1904, Spol. eylan., II, p. 11,

pl. 3) but pleon segment 3 not overlapping segment 4, and frontal lamina not

pentagonal with anterior point meeting rostral point (see: Barnard, 1935, Rec.

Ind. Mus., xxxvii, pp. 309, 312, fig. 185). In this last respect the present species

is comparable with fluviatilis (see: Barnard, loc. cit., p. 310, fig. 19).

Gen. Conilorpheus Stebb.

The coinciding of three characters, viz. transverse impressed lines on the

peraeon segments, a particular kind of sculpture on the telson, and a narrow

inner ramus on pleopod 1, in Conilorpheus scutifrons and Cirolana cingulata led to a

check-up on all the South African species of Cirolana.

A narrow inner ramus on pleopod 1 was recorded in the original descriptions

of cingulata and palifrons, and is found in imposita n. sp. (supra), but the trans-

ference of these three species to Conilorpheus is precluded by the frontal lamina

being separate from the rostral point, and the bases of 1st antennae contiguous.

In C. scutifrons the bases of 1st antennae are definitely separated by the junction

of the rostral point and the strongly produced frontal lamina.

A narrow inner ramus on pleopod 1 is also found in C. sulcata. But in this

species—with the same basic type of telsonic sculpture in its simplest form—

the contiguity of the bases of 1st antennae is an ambiguous character: in some

specimens the bases are sufficiently bulbous to meet over the lower-lying septum

joining the rostral point and the frontal lamina, in others the rostral point and

the frontal lamina meet, or almost meet, on the surface.

One cannot go farther than say: there is a group of four species of Czrolana

with closely comparable telsonic sculpture: sulcata, palifrons, imposita and

cingulata, the last of which shows a truly remarkable convergence with

Conilorpheus scutifrons.

In the course of examining the Crrolana species one or two features were noted

suggestive of a possible division of the rather numerous species into groups. It

would, however, be premature to attempt this.

Conilorpheus scutifrons Stebb.

Fig. 27a-—d.

1908. Stebbing, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., vi, p. 46, pl. 5 (Crustacea pl. 31).

1920. Barnard, ibid., xvii, pp. 351, 352.

An unfortunate error occurred in the latter description; the ¢ and 2 symbols

were transposed. The first paragraph (p. 352) applies to the 9, the second to

the g. As is often the case, the 3 is the more highly sculptured of the two

sexes, but not to a very great extent. The sculpturing typical of the species is

the same in both sexes.

There are traces sometimes of feeble tubercles on peraeon segment 2, but

usually one of the 3 or 4 transverse impressed lines is merely undulate or

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 57

crenulate; these crenulations are more marked on segments 3 and 4, and on

segment 5 become definite denticles or tubercles. There are usually accessory

denticles between the major tubercles on segments 5-7.

On the pleon the median pair of tubercles on segments 3-5 are more promi-

nent than any of the other tubercles, of which there appear to be constantly 2

on either side, and some minor denticles.

For reasons given by Stebbing the full development of the telsonic sculpture

was not present in his (type) specimen, and as no mention was made in my

6 f e

FIG. 27.

Conilorpheus scutifrons Stebb. a. peraeon segment 7, pleon, telson and uropods (marginal spines

and setae on telson and uropods omitted). b. peraeopod 1. c. ¢ penial processes on peraeon

segment 7. d. pleopod 2 ¢.

Conilorpheus blandus n. sp. e. pleon, telson and uropods. /f. peraeopod 1.

58 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

note, a description and figure is given here. As will be seen from the figure the

sculpturing is distinctly reminiscent of that of Cirolana cingulata (fig. 25e), which

species also has transverse impressed lines on the peraeon segments. The

median ridge is overlapped at the base by two adnate lobules, there is a slight

ridge (sometimes obscure) in the middle of the central groove, each margin of

the latter being ornamented with 4 little tubercles, often apically bifid. There

are several other little denticles and points on the telson, as also on the inner

ramus of uropod. Minor variations in arrangement occur among the smaller

denticles.

Peraeopod 1 as described by Stebbing. The 4th joint has 4 (sometimes 5)

bluntly rounded teeth as shown in his figure (not ‘spines’ as in his description) ;

5th and 6th joints each with 2 spine-setae on inner apex; inner margin of 7th

joint crenulate, ending in a ‘squared’ or rounded lobe at base of unguis.

Penial processes on 7th peraeon sternite separated by about twice the basal

width of one of them; apices curving inwards.

Stylet on pleopod 2 in fully adult § arising at basal quarter of inner ramus,

not midway as in the ‘subadult’; uniform in width, distally curved outwards,

apex rounded.

One @ has large brood lamellae on peraeopods 2-5. Only one embryo,

2-5 mm. in length, remains in the pouch.

Length ¢ 9 mm., 2 10 mm. As preserved, the Algoa Bay specimen has

greyish irregular mottling on the peraeon; the other specimens are yellowish,

eyes black.

Additional localities. East London, littoral. 1 3, 1 9 (Prof. Stephenson, 1937) ;

False Bay and Algoa Bay. (U.C.T.)

Conilorpheus blandus n. sp.

Fig. 27¢, f.

©—Head and body covered with very fine and short pile, which becomes

thicker on pleon and telson; when semi-dried the head and peraeon are seen

to be obscurely rugulose. Postero-inferior corners of side-plates 1-4 with a few

plumose setae; whole inferior margins of 5—7 thickly set with plumose setae, as

are also the pleural margins of the (exposed) pleon segments.

Frontal lamina as in scutifrons, meeting the rostral point and separating the

bases of ist antennae, tridentate, with an accessory denticle on each side

proximally.

Flagellum of 1st antenna 5~-7-jointed, of and antenna 9—10-jointed.

Maxilla 1 inner lobe with 3 strongly setose spines.

Peraeopod 1, 4th joint with undulate inner margin, feebly crenulate proxi-

mally, 5th joint with 4 blunt teeth increasing in size distally, 6th with 2 large

blunt curved teeth, 7th with a strong curved tooth at base of unguis.

Pleopod 1, inner ramus only half the width of outer ramus.

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 59

Uropod, inner ramus obovate, outer distal corner extending slightly beyond

telson apex, outer ramus ovate, not reaching level of telson apex, both rami

with marginal spines and thick fringe of plumose setae.

Telson apex more narrowly rounded than in scutifrons, with about 6 spines,

and thick fringe of plumose setae.

8-8-5 mm. X 4mm. As preserved, yellowish, eyes black.

Locality. Algoa Bay. 2 subadult 99. (U.C.T.)

Remarks. Both specimens are subadult, preparing for ecdysis. The contrast

between this smooth velvety species and the sculptured scutifrons, both with a

tridentate frontal lamina, is very striking.

Fam. COoRALLANIDAE

Gen. Corallana Dana

1879. Schiddte and Meinert, Nat. Tidsskr. (3), xii, p. 286.

1904. Stebbing, Fauna Geogr. Mald. Lacc. Archip., ii, p. 703.

1914. Barnard, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., x, p. 358a.

1931. Nierstrasz, Siboga Exp. monogr., Xxxil, c., p. 163.

Corallana furcilla n. sp.

Fig. 28c-e.

2 with embryos—Body with scattered setules, chiefly on side-plates and hind

margins of peraeon segments. Surface obscurely rugulose or foveolate, pleon

and telson with irregularly scattered pits.

Peraeon segments 1-4 without sculpture; segment 5 with 4-5 obscure

flattened tubercles laterally; segment 6 with 3 tubercles, the submedian pair

obscure; segment 7 with 5-6 tubercles, the lateral ones more prominent than

the central ones.

Pleon segment 2 smooth; segments 3 and 4 each with a median pair of

tubercles and a single lateral one, upper margin of pleuron of segment 4

crenulate; segment 5 with a median pair of longitudinal tubercles.

Telson with a very obscure transverse series of granules at base, outer basal

corner upturned, carinate; surface slightly concave between the lateral margins

but with a very slight central convexity, apex with a pair of short slightly

upturned points, distal margin with plumose setae, a pair of spines in the sinus,

and one spine on outer margin of each prong.

Basal joints of 1st antennae contiguous, not anteriorly dilated, flagellum

13-jointed. Antenna 2 flagellum 23-jointed.

Epistome transverse, vertical and not visible until upper lip is depressed.

Peraeopods 1-3, inner apex of 3rd joint with 3 blunt tubercles, 5th with 4

blunt tubercles on inner margin; these tubercles do not lie in the plane of the

limb, but curve backwards towards the posterior surface.

Uropod, inner ramus extending almost to telson apex, obovate, apically

truncate with 2 spines near inner corner, outer and apical margins with

60 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

plumose setae; outer ramus slightly longer than inner, narrow, ovate, articu-

lating vertically, upper margin thick, both margins with plumose setae.

13 X 5 mm. As preserved, slaty-grey, somewhat mottled, eyes black.

Embryo 3:3 mm. Telson with broadly rounded, subtruncate apex.

Juvenile 8-5 mm. Peraeon and pleon without sculpture. Telson as in

embryo, but apical margin with plumose setae and 6 spines; distal margin of

Fic. 28.

Lanocira latifrons Stebb. a. head. 6. telson and uropod.

Corallana furcilla n. sp. c. peraeon segments 5-7, pleon, telson and uropods of adult 9. d. telson

and uropods of juvenile from brood pouch, 3-3 mm. e. telson and uropods of juvenile 8-5 mm.

ge a ee on et

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 61

inner ramus of uropod with plumose setae and 6 spines; outer ramus with 3

spines on outer and 1 on inner margin distally, apex with 1 stout spine and

plumose setae.

Locality. Inhambane, from holes in roots of mangroves. 1 2 with embryos,

ago. (U.C.T.)

Remarks. Similar to nodosa 8. & M. and /ursuta S. & M. as regards the

tubercular sculpture of the hinder peraeon segments.

The juvenile, presumably, is conspecific with the adult.

The recurved tubercles or stout spines on the anterior peraeopods appear

to be well adapted to excavating holes or burrows.

Lanocira latifrons Stebb.

Fig. 28a, 5.

Tons otebbineg, 7. Linn. Soc. Lond. xxxi, yp). 217, pl. 21.

g—Agreeing with Stebbing’s description except in two features: one obvious,

the other rather obscure.

The telson has not a ‘rather narrowly rounded apex’. The margins are

convex, without any concavity, and the apex is broadly rounded. Moreover

there are no marginal spines among the plumose setae, though marginal spines

are present on both rami of uropods.

The second feature is one which may not have been developed in Stebbing’s

smaller ¢ (7.75 mm.), or may have been overlooked. There are two pairs of

tufts of setae on the head, one near inner hind margin of eye, the other near

inner front margin of eye. Unless examined semi-dry these little tufts might

easily be overlooked.

Bases of 1st antennae contiguous, separating the pentagonal frontal lamina

from the rostral point.

Length 9:5 mm. As preserved, yellowish, eyes black.

Locality: Inhaca Island, Delagoa Bay. 1 3. (U.W.)

Distribution. Sudanese Red Sea.

Remarks. In a large number of specimens the growth of the rostral process

in the g could be followed. The suggestion seems not unreasonable that

latufrons may be only the fully adult ¢ of the earlier species gardinert Stebb. 1904,

and zeylanica Stebb. 1905. The latter was also found in the Sudanese Red

Sea; and gardineri and zeylanica at Ceylon.

One point deserves attention: Stebbing’s figure (pl. 51A) of gardinert seems

to indicate that the frontal lamina separates the bases of the Ist antennae.

Fam. SPHAEROMIDAE

Sphaeroma annandale: Stebb.

1940. Barnard, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., xxxii, p. 405.

A ¢ and an ovigerous 2 from Inhambane (U.C.T.) have the transverse

ridges on the peraeon segments continuous from side to side, not broken up into

62 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

tubercles; there are 2 circular tubercles on pleon segment 4, very indistinct

in g; in @ the left-hand one only of one of the normal 2 pairs of submedian

tubercles on telson is present, the other pair and the median tubercle being

obsolete; in ¢ there is a mere suspicion of one submedian pair of tubercles on

telson.

Gen. Isocladus Miers

1914. Barnard, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., x, p. 384.

The two species here described are the first representatives of this genus to

be recorded from South African waters.

Fic. 209.

Isocladus otion n. sp. a. 5th—7th peraeon segments and pleotelson with uropod ¢. 6. lateral

view, 6. ¢. 5th—7th peraeon segments, pleotelson with uropod 9. d. lateral view 9. e. ventral

view of apex of telson. f. epistome.

The sharp denticle on either side of the median process in g is a distinctive

character. The ridge formed by the bulbous junctions of the peraeon segments

with their side-plates does not occur in tristensis (Leach) or integer (Heller), in

both of which the transverse profile forms a perfectly even curve. It occurs,

however, to a lesser degree in the Australian Zuzara venosa (Stebb.) of which I

have seen specimens, and in the Cape <. furcifer Brnrd.; and appears to be

‘

7! es 2 hl

— | =

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 63

quite well marked in <. (Isocladus) excavata Baker judging by his figure (1910,

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., xxxiv, pl. 24, fig. 4).

‘ Isocladus otion n. sp.

Bis: 20:

Body glabrous, inconspicuously rugulose (best seen when removed from

liquid and semi-dry). Epistome without crest, almost in contact with rostral

process. Hind margins of peraeon segments rather prominent. Antero-lateral

corner of peraeon segments bulbous at junctions with epimera, the latter also

bulbous at the junctions so as to form a rather prominent lateral ridge on each

side of the peraeon. On 7th segment the epimeron stands up conspicuously,

more so in g than in 9, like a little ear (hence the specific name).

Seventh segment in § with a median process, its apex obscurely trifid, and

flanked on each side (midway between median line and epimeron) by a sharp

denticle; in 9 hind margin only slightly more convex than in preceding seg-

ments, with a mere suggestion of a pair of granules corresponding with the

sharp denticles in the g.

Pleon smooth in g, but with a submedian pair of inconspicuous knobs.

Telson in ¢ smooth, with bluntly pointed apex; in 2 more strongly convex

proximally, with 2 submedian parallel ridges and the rugulosity becoming

almost granular; a shallow ventral groove in both sexes.

Uropods not extending to apex of telson in either sex, ovate, broader in J

than in 9.

Penial processes on 7th peraeon segment close together but bases not conti-

guous. Stylet on pleopod 2 straight, longer than endopod, apex acute.

Length, 6-5 mm. As preserved, chalky white.

Locality. False Bay, 4-10 fathoms. 2 §¢, 1 ovig. 9. Sept. 1946; 2 immat.

eee rebr. 1947. (U.C.T.)

Remarks. ‘The apices of the uropods falling short of the telsonic apex may

perhaps indicate that the only two males are not quite fully grown, although

in other respects (separation of stylet on pleopod 2) they seem to be mature.

Isocladus mimetes n. sp.

Fig. 30.

Body glabrous. Head and peraeon segment 1 granulate. Epistome as in

olion, without crest, almost in contact with rostral process. Posterior half of

“segments 2—6 rather conspicuously ridged in side view, each segment with 2

submedian small granules, segments 2-4 also with a less conspicuous median

granule; additional intervening minute granules can be seen when examined

semi-dry.

Segment 7 in ¢ inconspicuously granulose, with median process, its apex

forked, flanked on either side by a prominent conical denticle; in 9 similar to

segment 6, with the 4 well-marked granules, and additional minute ones.

64 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Junctions of peraeon segments with their side-plates bulbous, forming a

rather prominent lateral ridge. Side-plates vertical, scarcely visible in dorsal

view; side-plate on 7th segment not so prominent as in otzon.

Pleon in $ granulose, but without definite granules, in 9 distinctly granulate,

and with a submedian pair of short ridges or longitudinally oval tubercles.

Telson in g obscurely granulose, apex slightly raised, with a rather wide

open notch; seen from behind the ventral groove is rather deep; in @ distinctly

granulate with 2 submedian parallel ridges, apex bluntly pointed, dorsally

raised, scarcely carinate but with a few granules; the profile of telson but not

that of pleon closely resembles that of Zuzara furcifer (fig. 31¢), in hind view the

ventral groove not so deep as in 3.

FIG. 30.

Isocladus mimetes n. sp. a. 5th—7th peraeon segments and pleotelson with uropod ¢. 6. lateral

view. c¢, d. posterior and ventral views of apex of telson.

Uropods in ¢ extending beyond telsonic apex, inner ramus rather narrow,

outer margin in distal } nearly straight, outer ramus subtriangular, basally

rather broad, distal half of outer margin nearly straight and sloping to the

narrowly pointed apex; in 9 not extending to telsonic apex, ovate.

Penial processes on 7th peraeon segment close together but bases not

contiguous. Stylet on pleopod 2 ¢ straight, longer than endopod, apex acute.

Length, 5 mm. (the g appears larger than 2 on account of the projecting

uropods). As preserved, amber-coloured, with minute pigment specks,

uropods paler.

Locality. Off Roman Rock, False Bay, 12-14 metres. 3 gg. 19. (U.C.T. 1954.)

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 65

Remarks. The forked process on peraeon segment 7 in the ¢ gives a remark-

ably deceptive likeness to Zuzara furcifer. ‘The absence of the median process

on telsonic apex, and the shape of the uropods, however, at once distinguish

the present species.

The @ is distinguished from that of otion by the four longitudinal series of

granules on the peraeon, and by the tubercles on the pleon being more longi-

tudinally oval than circular. The telson is more rugged and in this respect

resembles that of <. furcifer (infra).

These three species were found at slightly different sites, but in each case

both sexes were found in association; otherwise the correlation of the sexes would

have been difficult if not impossible.

Kuzara furcifer Brnrd.

Bigs Sir

1920. Barnard, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., xvii, p. 361, pl. 15, figs. 26, 27 (3).

Adult g. On 6th peraeon there is a feeble tubercle about midway between

the median line and the side-plate. This was overlooked in the original

description and figure.

Fic. 31.

Kuzara furcifer Brnrd. a. dorsal view of 6th and 7th peraeon segments and pleotelson with

uropods of immature ¢ 4:5 mm. 6. the same of 2 5°5 mm. . lateral view 9.

Immature 3, 4°5-5 mm. in length: 7th peraeon segment with a submedian

tubercle on either side of the short, quadrangular median process, which does

not extend beyond the hind margin of pleon segment 4; the second tubercle

clearly seen in the adult, is very faint. Telson relatively a little shorter than in

adult, apex acute, subapical margin slightly concave; small tubercles or

granules as in adult. Rami of uropods not reaching telsonic apex.

®, 5°5-6 mm.: more strongly granulose than 4; no trace of tubercles on 6th

peraeon segment; 7th peraeon segment with an obscure tubercle about midway

between median line and side-plate; pleon segment 4 with a small median

66 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

granule, flanked by a larger tubercle. Telson shield-shaped, apex acute,

margins evenly convex; a submedian pair of elongate tubercles followed by a

pair of round tubercles, apex upturned and bluntly keeled, with 2 granules.

Rami of uropods not reaching telsonic apex.

Additional localities. Keurbooms River estuary (K.H.B. 1931. 1 39); Klein-

mond (Caledon Division) (K.H.B. 1 ¢); False Bay, 7 fathoms (U.C.T. g,

Pe; Juv.).

Gen. Sphaeramene Brnrd.

1914. Barnard, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., x, p. 405.

Sphaeramene microtylotos n. sp.

Fig. 32a-e.

In general very similar to polytylotos Brnrd. 1914, but the larger tubercles,

especially the submedian ones on the pleo-telson, are conical instead of button-

like, and the smaller ones are rounded granules (cf. fig. 32f).

Telson with 3 pairs of submedian conical tubercles, increasing in size and

diverging posteriorly; apex bluntly pointed, with a rounded tubercle dorsally,

and a groove ventrally.

Epistome pentagonal, the bluntly pointed apex meeting the rostral point.

Antenna 1, Ist joint L-shaped, with prominent conical boss on anterior

margin.

Uropods extending to telsonic apex, inner ramus oblong, margins sub-

parallel, with a median series of 6—7 granules. Distal margin truncate, slightly

emarginate; outer ramus ovate, apex turned outwards, outer distal margin

feebly serrulate.

Length 6-7 mm. As preserved, pinkish.

Localities. False Bay, from stomach of cormorant. 3 specimens (R. W. Rand,

Biologist to Guano Islands Administration, 1954); False Bay, 14-17 metres.

1 ovig. 9. (U.C.T. 1954.)

Remarks. The great likeness to polytylotos obviously suggests inclusion in the

same genus, although the characters of the J, when discovered, may necessitate

the removal of the new species to another genus.

The 3 specimens are fairly well preserved in spite of their having been taken

from the stomach of a cormorant, in all probability having been first swallowed

by a fish. The dorsal integument of two of the specimens has not suffered from

the gastric juices, and the pleopods are intact. All three specimens appear to be

immature, because neither brood lamellae, penes, nor ¢ stylets on pleopod 2

could be found.

The tubercles and granules are not quite symmetrically arranged, and differ

slightly in the 3 specimens.

The ovig. 2 was received later, and confirms the description based on the

three specimens.

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 67

Cymodoce zanzibarensis Stebb.

1910. Stebbing, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., zool., xiv, p. 105, pl. 9, fig. D.

g—Agreeing with Stebbing’s description. It is a little tempting to make this

species a synonym of the earlier bicarinata Stebb., described from Minikoi,

Ceylon and Zanzibar; but the fact that Stebbing himself (1910, loc. cit.,

pp. 105, 106) has recorded both species from Zanzibar precludes this. More-

over zanzibarensis is a larger species, less setose, especially anteriorly, and the

stylet on pleopod 2 ¢ is straight and relatively shorter than the long, inward

curving stylet in bicarinata (see: Stebbing, 1904, Fauna Geogr. Mald. Lacc. Arch.,

ip: 712, pl. 52, fig. B).

BiG 3o"

Sphaeramene microtylotos n. sp. a. head with peduncles of tst antennae. 6. 7th peraeon segment,

pleotelson with uropods. c. posterior view of apex of telson. d. dorsal view of first two joints of

peduncle of Ist antenna. e. epistome with bases of Ist antennae.

Sphaeramene polytylotos Brnrd. f. head for comparison with a.

11-12 X 6 mm. As preserved, pinkish-brown, buff, or greyish, the smooth

telsonic boss rose-pink or pale orange. In Stebbing’s specimens the rose-

coloured boss on the telson had retained its colour for seven or eight years.

Q—At one station 5 ovig. 99 were taken in the same haul as 5 gg, and may

be presumed to belong to this species. 9-10 mm. Telson with 2 small sub-

median tubercles or low rounded bosses, each surmounted by a granule; the

median lobe of the trilobate apex bears no dorsal tubercle or boss, but is

slightly gibbous, and more densely setose than the surrounding area. Rami of

-uropods of equal length, extending to level of telsonic apex.

68 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

On another occasion 1 Q was taken with ¢¢ of both C. zanzibarensis and

Paracilicaea clavus; which raises a little doubt as to whose wives these females

really are.

Locality. Inhambane. 9 gg. (U.G.T.)

Distribution. Zanzibar.

Cymodoce natalensis Brnrd.

1920. Barnard, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., xvii, p. 366, pl. 16, figs. 1, 2 (japonica

Rich. var. n.).

Additional locality. Algoa Bay. 2 gg. (U.C.T.)

These two specimens correspond exactly with the Natal specimens, which

were formerly considered as a variety of japonica. I now think this form should

be given specific status. The 3 pairs of tubercles (1 on 4th pleon segment and

2 on telson) are all very nearly of the same size; in fact the anterior pair on the

telson are usually larger than the posterior pair; and the closely fitting opposed

surfaces of the former pair and the pair on the 4th pleon segment is distinctive;

neither Richardson’s nor Thienemann’s figures bear the least resemblance to

this arrangement.

Cymodoce cryptodoma Brnrd.

Fig. 33d.

1920. Barnard, loc. cit., p. 368, pl. 16, figs. 6, 7.

Additional locality. Algoa Bay. 1 4, 1 ovig. 9. (U.C.T.)

The present ¢ has the 4th pleon segment more prominent than in the type 3;

it might almost be said to have a submedian pair of low bosses. A lateral view

is given here, as the shape of the telsonic projections is not fully indicated in a

dorsal view. On the outer side of each ridge is a shallow submarginal hollow.

Cymodoce lis n. sp.

Fiss3oan0:

g—Head, peraeon and pleo-telson perfectly smooth and glabrous, obscurely

and sparsely punctate (seen when examined semi-dry). Telson apically

broadly rounded. Antenna 1, basal peduncular joint entire (not dentate).

Epistome broadly /\-shaped. Penial processes on 7th peraeon segment close

together, elongate, slender and tapering to fine points. Pleopod 2 ¢ stylet

tapering to a fine point, extending slightly beyond apex of ramus. Uropod,

inner ramus obovate, apically truncate, inner distal angle extending to level

of telsonic apex, outer ramus much longer, narrow ovate, apex narrowly

rounded.

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 69

11 X 6mm. As preserved, creamy whitish, eyes black.

Locality. Algoa Bay. 1 g. (U.C.T.)

Remarks. A species with the telson of an Exosphaeroma (cf. truncatitelson)

combined with the broad, arrowhead-like epistome and the long slender penial

processes of a Cymodoce.

ir a

Fic. 33.

Cymodoce lis n. sp. a. peraeon segment 7, pleotelson and uropods. 6b. epistome.

Cymodoce alisn. sp. c. pleotelson and uropods.

Cymodoce cryptodoma Brnrd. d. lateral view of peraeon segment 7, pleotelson and uropod.

Cymodoce alts n. sp.

Big 39C.

g—Setulose, becoming densely setose on pleo-telson and uropods. Peraeon

segments 2—7 each with a transverse series of granules on the thickened hind

margin, becoming more conspicuous posteriorly, almost tubercles on segments

6 and 7. Pleon, some small granules on pleura of segment 3, segment 4 with a

submedian pair of large conical tubercles on hind margin overlapping base of

70 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

telson, splayed outwards, their inner margins more or less crenulate, flanked

externally by 2 small granules; on anterior portion of segment a series of 4-6

granules.

Telson basally with a transverse (curved) row of 4 tubercles, centrally with

2 widely separated apically bifid tubercles; laterally a (longitudinal) series of

3 tubercles, the hindmost one apically bifid; apex trilobate, median lobe with

a submedian pair of small setiferous tubercles and a larger conical median one,

apex truncate, with a small medio-dorsal conical tubercle; lateral lobes

apically bifid; minute granules basally, centrally and apically.

A strong fringe of plumose setae on pleura of segment 4 and on the submedian

tubercles. The bifid tubercles on telson setiferous, and the apical lobes with

stiff golden-brown setae.

Penial processes on 7th peraeon segment close together, slender. Pleopod 2

3 stylet 14 times as long as ramus, moderately stout, tapering to an acute apex.

Uropods extending beyond telsonic apex, inner ramus oblong, apex

obliquely truncate, outer apical corner with an acute point, outer ramus

longer, narrow ovate, apex with acute point; peduncle and rami with stiffish

brown setae on upper surfaces, margins with long plumose setae.

First peduncular joint of antenna 1 not denticulate.

9-9°5 X 4-4:25 mm. As preserved, dull yellowish-grey, eyes black.

Locality. Algoa Bay. 3 gg. (U.C.T.)

Paracilicaea mossambicus Brnrd.

1914. Barnard, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., x, p. 397, pl. 34, fig. D.

g—Agreeing with the type, but: peraeon segments 2—7 each with 2 trans-

verse rows of granules on hind margin, feeble on segment 2, becoming stronger

posteriorly, but not conspicuous. Each boss on telson with 2 denticles more or

less concealed among setae.

©—Whole body setulose, especially pleon segment 4 and telson. Telson with

2 low bosses, each surmounted by an inconspicuous glabrous point; no

depression between the bosses at base of telson; apex trilobate, the lobes broad

and separated by short clefts. Rami of uropods not extending beyond telsonic

apex, subequal, ovate, apices blunt.

Length ¢ 9 mm., 2 8 mm. As preserved, ¢ amber-coloured, the telsonic

bosses and the subcircular basal depression between them castaneous; 9 pale

greyish-cream; eyes black.

Locality. Inhaca Island, Delagoa Bay. 1 4, 2 ovig. 99. (U.W.)

Paracilicaea teretron n. sp.

Fig. 34a, 0.

Setulose. Head, peraeon and pleon without tubercles or granules; in a few

specimens there is a hint of a submedian pair of granules on hind margin of 4th

pleon segment.

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 71

Telson in g with a submedian pair of small tubercles in centre ; In some

specimens these granules are the end points on very feeble and obscure ridges;

apex trilobate, median lobe not bulbous dorsally; in 9 evenly convex, without

any tubercles, apex not so deeply trifid as in @.

Uropod, inner ramus extending to level of telsonic apex in 4, slightly beyond

in 9, oblong, obliquely truncate, outer apex acute; outer ramus in ¢ twice as

long as inner ramus, terete, outer margin gently convex, tapering to an acute

apex; in @ a little longer than inner ramus, ovate, apex acute.

FIG: 34.

Paracilicaea teretron n. sp. a, 6. pleon, telson and uropods, ¢ and 9.

Paracilicaea clavus n. sp. c. pleon, telson and uropods 3.

Penial processes on 7th peraeon segment close together, elongate, slender,

tapering to acute points. Pleopod 2 ¢ stylet one third longer than ramus,

scarcely tapering, apex blunt.

Length g 7-5 mm., 2 6 mm., breadth 3 mm. As preserved, slaty-grey or

buff coloured.

Locality. Inhambane. gg, 99. (U.C.T.)

Remarks. Very close to mossambicus Brnrd. (1914, loc. cit., supra) but differing

by the simpler sculpturing on the telson, and the narrower, terete outer rami

of the uropods. :

There can be little doubt that the present ¢g and 99 are conspecific, as they

were found on several occasions, and always together. The 2 of hansent Stebb.

1910 (Zanzibar) is unknown. “Cymodoce’ hamaia Baker (1908, Trans. Roy. Soc. S.

Austr., XXxli, p. 141, pl. 4, figs. 1-11) appears to belong to Paracilicaea, but

Baker has described the 9 as being very similar to the ¢ both as regards the

telson and the outer rami of uropods.

A small g, 6 mm., with penial processes and pleopod 2 stylet already

developed, appears to belong to this species, but the telsonic apex is not so

deeply incised, and the inner margin of outer ramus of uropod is gently convex,

consequently the ramus is not so narrow and terete. Delagoa Bay (U.W.).

72 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Paracilicaea clavus n. sp.

LS BVI

g—Smooth; when semi-dried the whole surface is seen to be shallowly and

rather coarsely pitted; glabrous except for a few setae on the margins of the

side-plates, pleura, telson and uropods.

Pleon segment 4 with a submedian pair of low conical tubercles; the angle

of the pleuron where it articulates with the telson is also often rather prominent.

Telson with a submedian pair of large bosses; apex trilobate, the median lobe

not dorsally gibbous.

Uropod, inner ramus not extending to apex of telson, somewhat curved,

outer distal corner sharp, distal and inner margins forming a continuous

curve; outer ramus elongate, outer and inner margins straight, terete, with

apical point, rather thickly setose on inner margin.

Penial processes on 7th peraeon segment close together, elongate, slender,

tapering to acute points. Pleopod 2 ¢ stylet one third longer than ramus,

proximally rather stout, distally tapering to a subacute apex, inner margin

proximally and the apex minutely setulose (cf. hanseni Stebb., loc. cit., pl. 9,

fier Cine ae

Length (largest) 11 mm., breadth 6 mm. As preserved, cream or greyish,

mottled, or slaty-grey.

Locality. Inhambane. 10 gg. (U.C.T.)

Remarks. Similar to mossambicus in having submedian tubercles on 4th pleon

segment and submedian bosses on telson, but smooth (to the naked eye) and

almost glabrous.

The ten specimens were taken on three different occasions, but no females

referable to this species were caught.

Dies monod: Brnrd.

1951. Barnard, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (12), iv, p. 701, fig. 3.

Additional locality. Inhambane estuary. (U.C.T.)

Remarks. Dr. Th. Monod has suggested to me that Cassidina pulchra Chilton

(1924, Mem. Ind. Mus., v, p. 888, fig. 8, and pl. 60, fig. 4) might belong to the

genus Dies. This may well be so, but it cannot be decided without further

details, e.g. if pulchra has a single penial process, it should be transferred to Dies,

if double it can remain in Cassidina (see: M. Edwards, Hist. Nat. Crust., pl. 32,

fig. 11, which shows two processes on the 7th sternite).

Gen. Ariopoles Brnrd.

1920. Barnard, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., xvii, p. 376.

Artopoles capensis n. sp.

Fig. 35.

g$—Body depressed, almost circular; surface granulose, margin setose.

Rostral point curved downwards, abutting against the projecting apex of

epistome which is visible in dorsal view.

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 73

Antenna 1, 1st and 2nd joints each with a triangular lobate expansion on

front margin.

Peraeopod 1 dissimilar from the other peraeopods, much stouter, 4th joint

produced at lower apex, lower margin crenulate, upper apex with a biserrate

spine, 5th joint underriding 6th and partly enclosed in 4th joint, with stout

biserrate spine on lower apex, 6th joint with a similar spine on lower apex.

Fic. 35.

Artopoles capensis n. sp. a. dorsal view. 5), c, d. frontal, ventral and lateral views of epistome; in

b sockets of 1st antennae shaded. e. inner view of peduncle of left 1st antenna. /. anterior view

of left peraeopod 1 3, with biserrate spine further enlarged. g. pleopod 2 3, with apex of

stylet further enlarged.

Penial processes on 7th peraeon sternite contiguous. Stylet on pleopod 2

longer than inner ramus, rather stout, margins minutely spinulose, apex acute.

Pleopod 3 outer ramus obscurely 2-jointed. Pleopods 4 and 5 both rami

without marginal setae, inner ramus with 3 or 4 transverse undulations

(scarcely folds or pleats); pleopod 5 outer ramus 2-jointed, squamiferous

processes distinct.

Telson with small apical notch, no ventral groove. Uropod (peduncle plus

inner ramus) broad, almost semicircular, outer ramus minute.

Length 6 mm., breadth 5 mm.

Locality. False Bay (south of Kogel Bay), 14-17 metres, rock. 1 g. (U.C.T.)

74 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Remarks. ‘This 3 specimen is obviously a species of Artopoles, a genus which —

was based on a single 2 specimen; no other specimens have been recorded,

and no other species has been added to the genus. The generic diagnosis

needs some slight emendations to accommodate sexual dimorphism, viz.:

telson with small apical notch in 3; peraeopod 1 in § with enlarged 4th joint.

The small differences in the pleopods may or may not be important; for the

present they can only be recorded. The appearance of the inner rami of

pleopods 4 and 5 at first glance seem to indicate affinity to the Hemibranchiate

group.

The question arises whether this specimen is the ¢ of A. natalis. The ¢ is very

much broader than the 2 (6:5 and 4 : 3:25 resp.); if the reverse were the

case, one might accept the difference as being merely sexual. The notch at the

telsonic apex and also the different shape of the uropods might well be

characteristic of the male. But the difference in shape of the lobate expansions

on Ist and 2nd joints of the 1st antennae is too great to be considered as sexual.

This ¢ specimen is therefore described as a new species.

Fam. IDOTEIDAE

Synidotea variegata Cllge.

1917. Collinge, Rec. Ind. Mus., xii, p. 2, pl. tr.

1936. Barnard, ibid., xxxvili, p. 185, fig. 16a.

1940. | 1d!, Ann. S: Ayr Mus.) xxxu, 1420.

Additional localities. Durban, Empangazi, Richards Bay, St. Lucia Bay;

Inhambane. (U.C.T.)

Remarks. In the key, loc. cit., 1940, p. 507, in the first couplet the words

‘Peraeopods . . . peduncle’ should be omitted in both sets of characters. An

additional character for separating hirtipes and variegata is the width relative

to the length: width 24-23 in length in the former, at least 3 in the latter.

Synidotea setifer Brnrd.

1914. Barnard. Ann. S. Afr. Mus., x, p: 205, plesnen

The fully developed stylet on pleopod 2 of a §, 21 mm. in length, is rather

remarkable, but the specimen was received too late for figuring in this paper.

It extends beyond the apex of the inner ramus of the pleopod; the inner edge

(i.e. remote from the ramus and facing its fellow on the opposite side) is formed

by a rather strongly chitinized rib, ending in a short point; from about midway

a thin flange extends on one side to the apex, widening distally; this flange is

armed with numerous close-set parallel lines of spinules, appearing under a

low magnification as if obliquely striated.

There is a single median penial process, as in S. hzrtzpes and variegata (Barnard,

1920, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., xvii, p. 380, footnote; and 1936, Rec. Indian Mus.,

XXXVIll, p. 185).

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 75

Largest specimen 23 mm., an ovigerous 9 16 mm. Colour of some freshly

preserved specimens: cream, with a row of tiny black dots along the lateral

margins and on upper surfaces of antennae and legs.

Additional localities: 33° 53’ S., 25° 51’ E. 26 fms. 6 specimens, incl. 1 ovig.

©, on red Fan-coral (Gorgonia). s.s. Pieter Faure; 34° S., 20° 49’ E. gt metres.

meeerijcana (per U-C.T., 1948); 34° 49 S., 20° 21’ E. 47 fms. 1 specimen

23 mm., 1 ¢ 21 mm. (trawler, 1947, per U.C.T.).

Cleantis natalensis Brnrd.

1925. Barnard, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., xx, p. 394.

1Q30.) 1G..)hvec, Indian Mus) xxxvi, p. 186, fig. 17.

This is the first recorded g. A pair of penial processes. Stylet on pleopod 2

half as long again as inner ramus, rather stout, triquetral in section at base,

distal third curving gently outwards, apex subacute. Length 8 mm.

Locality: Richards Bay, Natal. 1 g. (U.C.T.)

Distribution: Described from Durban Bay, and later recorded from India.

Fam. JAERIDAE

Taniropsis bisbidens n. sp.

Fig. 36.

Head, peraeon and pleon sparsely setose dorsally, profusely laterally, setae

on lateral margins of posterior peraeon segments and pleon especially long.

Head produced in a prominent triangular rostral process, apex bluntly

pointed. Side-plates on segments 1 and 5-7 unilobate, on segments 2-4

bilobate.

Antenna 1 flagellum 15-16-jointed. Mouth-parts normal. Maxilliped with

external distal angle of 2nd and 3rd joints acutely produced; 4th and 5th joints

broad.

Peraeopod 1 ¢ more robust than the following peraeopods, distal half of

lower margin of 4th joint and whole lower margin of 5th and 6th joints with

dense fringe of long, very fine (non-plumose) setae. In the larger ¢ the right

peraeopod is thus enlarged and furry, but the left is similar to peraeopod 2;

in a smaller 3, 5 mm. in length, the reverse is the case. In Q all peraeopods

similar (except the hinder ones increase in length, as in @).

Pleopod 1 ¢ peduncles fused, rami well developed, adnate but not fused,

apices of peduncle and rami each with a tiny scarious projection. Pleopod 2

6 normal. Pleopods 1-2 @ forming a circular operculum with shallowly

emarginate distal margin.

Pleopod 3 ¢ operculiform, inner ramus with truncate apex, 1 plumose seta

on inner angle, 2 on outer; outer ramus enormously enlarged, ovate, incom-

pletely 2-jointed, the suture indicated only on inner and outer margin. In 9

also operculiform, but outer ramus not enlarged to such an extent as in g.

76 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Fic. 36.

Taniropsis bisbidens n. sp. a. whole animal, flagella of 2nd antennae omitted. 6. maxilliped.

c. 4th—7th joints of peraeopod 1 g. d. pleopod 1 g, with apices of peduncle and ramus further

enlarged. e. anterior view of left pleopod 3 3. f/. pleopod 3 9. g. pleopod 4 (¢ and 9).

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA Wil

Pleopod 4 g and @ inner ramus with 7-8 plumose setae on the oblique

distal margin. Pleopod 5 normal, uniramous.

Uropods well developed, rami in both sexes well developed, narrowly ovate,

strongly setose, especially the distal half of the inner ramus.

Length, 2 gg 5 and 8 mm., 2 ovig, 92 7 and 9 mm. Pale cream becoming

white laterally where the integument is thin, probably semitransparent when

alive; a black medio-dorsal stripe which bifurcates in front on the head and

behind on the pleon; in front the black colour is continued on to the peduncles

of 1st antennae, and peduncles of 2nd antennae except the last (6th) joint;

behind it is continued on to the peduncles and proximal halves of the uropods.

Eyes black.

Locahty. False Bay (Oatland Point, south of Simonstown), 4-64 metres, rock.

maa zovig. 92. (U.C.T. 1953.)

Remarks. Remarkable at first sight on account of its striking colour pattern.

It would be interesting to discover the particular habitat and habits of this

animal. The coloration may be concealing, adapted possibly to that of some

Hydroid or Alcyonarian. The colour appears to be fast in alcohol; the speci-

mens were caught in June 1953 and submitted to me in November 1954, and

the colour is still (1955) intense black.

Morphologically the shape of the head is noticeable, but there are no

unusual features in the appendages except the 3rd pleopods. These are oper-

culiform in both sexes; in the 9 the outer ramus is moderately enlarged, some-

what similar to that of Jaera marina (Sars, 1897, Crust. Norw. I, pt. 5-6, pl. 43,

labelled ‘plp. 1’), but in the g the outer ramus is enormous.

Fam. BoPpyRIDAE

Gen. Athelges Gerst.

1861. Hesse, Ann. Scr. Nat. (4), zool., xv, p. 91 (Athelgue ? vernac.).

1862. Gerstaecker, Arch. Naturg., xxviii, Abt. 2, p. 558.

1898. Sars, Crust. Norw., II, p. 209.

As the genus Parathelges Bonnier 1900 does not seem to be differentiated by

very tangible and distinctive characters from Athelges, the present species may

be assigned to the older genus.

Athelges caudalis n. sp.

Fig. 37a.

9-First pair of oostegites projecting beyond head like a double ‘cocked hat’,

the outer angles curving backwards (cf. Parathelges whiteleggei N. & B., 1931,

Vidensk. Medd. Dansk. nat. Foren., xci, pl. 1, fig. 4).

Pleon narrower than peraeon; 5th segment and ‘pleo-telson’ freely projecting

(not embraced by pleura of 4th segment as in P. weberi N. & B. 1923), with a

78 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

pair of circular uropods. The two pleopodal lamellae on each pleuron arise

from a common stalk; both lamellae of pleopods 1 and 2 are ovate; the anterior

one of pleopods 3 and 4 is subcylindrical and the other ovate.

g—Attached on outside of bases of last peraeopods on left side of 9. Similar

to that of A. pagun. The pleon segments fused, longer than basal width, not so

elongate as in A. paguri (cf. Sars, 1898, pls. 88, 89), but more elongate than in

Fies/37.

a. Athelges caudalis n. sp. 6, c. Bopyrella hodgarti Chopra 9 and @.

d. Miophrixus latreutidis n.g., n. sp.

P. whiteleggei N. & B. (1931, loc. cit., fig. 92) and P. webert (cf. Nierstrasz &

Brandis, 1929, ool. Anz., Ixxxv, p. 302, fig. 11). Eyes distinct.

Length, 9 ca. 9 mm., ¢ 1:3 mm.

Locality. Inhambane. 1 ovig. 2 with g, on the Pagurid Duogenes senex.

(U.C.T.)

Gen. Bopyrella Bonnier

1900. Bonnier, Trav. Sta. zool. Wimereux, vill, p. 347.

1923. Nierstrasz & Brandis, Siboga Exp. monogr., xxxii, b, p. 95.

1923. Chopra, Rec. Ind. Mus., xxv, pp. 467, 540.

1929. Nierstrasz & Brandis, Vid. Medd. Dansk. Naturh. Foren., Ixxxvii, p. 29.

1930. Chopra, Rec. Ind. Mus., xxxii, p. 132.

1931. Nierstrasz & Brandis, Vid. Medd. D. Naturh. Foren, xci, p. 150.

1936. Shiino, Mem. Coll. Sc. Kyoto Umv., B. xi, 3, p. 157.

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 79

Bopyrella hodgartt Chopra

Hig 27D. c

1923. Chopra, loc. cit., p. 473, pl. 14, figs. 7-12.

923 Pp P: 473> P gs. 7

Locality. Inhambane. One ovig. 9, with dg, in left branchial cavity of

Alpheus crassimanus. (U.C.T.)

Distribution. Vizagapatam, Madras, on Alpheus crassimanus.

One ovig. 9, without 3, on Hippolyte, may also belong to this genus. Length

1:25mm. Pleon segments fused, outline entire but slightly undulate on the one

side.

Miophrixus n. g.

9—Body asymmetrical. All 7 peraeopods present on the shorter side, but

only peraeopods 1 and 2 on the longer side. Pleon 3-segmented, segments 1

and 2 distinct, followed by a larger segment representing the fused 3rd-5th

segments and telson. A pair of bilobed processes on each side of pleon segments

1 and 2; the dorsal processes (side-plates or exopods of pleopods) more or less

pedunculate, the ventral processes (uniramous pleopods or endopods of

pleopods) smaller, sessile. Uropods distinct.

g—Pleon segments fused. Eyes distinct. ,

Remarks. ‘The presence of only two free pleon segments, with pleopods,

seem to differentiate this form from the several closely related genera or sub-

genera of the original genus Hemuiarthrus (olim Phryxus). If Hemiarthrus Giard

& Bonnier 1887 is adopted for the preoccupied name Phryxus Rathke, as

Chopra (1923, Rec. Ind. Mus., xxv, p. 428) has done, Phrixus proposed by

Caroli (1929, and adopted by Nierstrasz & Brandis 1931) falls into synonymy.

Miophrixus latreutidis n. sp.

Bissso7d.

Length, 2 3-3:-5 mm. Attached between the pleopods and facing telson of

host. g 0:75 mm.

Locality. Inhambane. 3 ovig. 99, 1 3, on Latreutes pygmaeus. (U.C.T.)

Fam. DETONIDAE (SCYPHACIDAE)

Camorta nicobarica Brnrd.

1936. Barnard, Rec. Ind. Mus., xxxviii, p. 190, fig. 19.

Two g¢ and 2 ovig. 99, 5-6 mm. in length, appear to belong to this species.

The short telson has the minute apical indent (loc. cit., fig. 19b). The mouth-

parts also agree, except that the spines on the apex of outer lobe of maxilla 1

are not so blunt, and the lobe on outer distal corner of 2nd joint of the

-maxilliped is more broadly rounded. This last feature should be checked in

80 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

the type specimens; the acute lobe shown in my fig. 19 f may be an error in

observation or draftsmanship.

Locality. Inhambane, among mangroves. (U.C.T.)

Distribution. Nicobar Islands.

Remarks. The genus Olibrinus Budde-lund (1912, Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond. (2),

zool., xv, p. 389), placed by its author in a separate subfamily of the Oniscoidea,

appears to have some similarity with the above genus. Both have a multi-

articulate flagellum in antenna 2, but the apex of inner lobe of maxilla 1 has

2 plumose setae in Olibrinus, and only a few setules in Camorita.

The three species of Olibrinus have been recorded from the Malay Peninsula,

Djibouti, and the Chagos Archipelago.

AMPHIPODA

Fam. LysIANASSIDAE

Euonyx conicurus n. sp.

Fig. 38.

Closely resembling the North Atlantic :

chelatus Norman (see: Sars, Crust. Norw.,

pl. 40, fig. 1), but differing as follows:

Pleon segment 3 dorsally ridged, but

not sharply keeled; postero-interior angle

quadrate with a short sharp point; segment

4 dorsally depressed at base, then raised

into an acute forwardly directed process

(cf. Tryphosa onconotus Stebb. 1908).

Antenna 1, basal joint prominently

lobed in distal half. Gnathopod 2, 6th Fic. 38.

joint about two-thirds length of 5th joint, © Ewonyx conicurus n. sp. Pleon seg-

upper distal corner gibbous, palm short, ™cn's ae a oid ae

rounded, finger weak.

Length 6-5 mm. As preserved, white.

Locality. Fish Hoek Bay (False Bay), 15 metres. (U.C.T.)

Tryphosa normalis n. sp.

Fig. 39.

No eyes. Lateral angles of head moderately acute. Postero-lateral angles of

pleon segment 3 quadrangular, the angle rounded. Pleon segment 4 with

convex dorsal hump, but not sharply carinate. Epistome moderately pro-

jecting, rounded above, front margin straight. Gnathopod 1, palm of 6th joint

very oblique and almost as long as hind margin, angle between the two about

(oa |

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 81

160°, defined by two slender spines. Telson with 2 pairs of dorsal spines, and a

pair of small spines on apex of each lobe.

8-9 mm. As preserved, white.

Locality. Langebaan, Saldanha Bay; False Bay, 26 metres. (U.C.T.)

Fic. 39.

Tryphosa normalis n. sp. a. lateral view of head.

b. epistome and upper lip. c. pleon segments 3 and 4.

d. 1st gnathopod. e. telson, with apex of one lobe

further enlarged.

Remarks. A very ordinary and featureless species. The best differential

character seems to be the very oblique palm of gnathopod 1, not unlike that of

onconotus Stebb., but the whole joint is more slender and parallel-sided than in

the latter species. The epistome is similar in these two species. The dorsal

profile of the 4th pleon segment resembles that of the eyeless bispinosa Schell.

from the Falkland Islands.

Tryphosa africana n. sp.

No eyes. Lateral angles of head moderately acute. Postero-lateral angle of

pleon segment 3 as in trigonica (Stebbing, Challenger Rep., pl. 9g) but rather more

produced (cf. Tryphosites longipes, Sars, Crust. Norw., pl. 29, fig. 1); pleon segment

4 with rounded carina. Antenna 2 ¢ 4th joint broadly oval, width more than

half the length. Epistome rounded above, front margin straight. Gnathopod 1

6th joint slightly ovoid, palm very oblique, subequal to hind margin. Gnatho-

pod 2, 5th joint ovoid, width slightly more than half length of anterior margin.

Telson tapering, with 2 pairs of dorsal spines, and a spine and seta on apex of

each lobe.

Length 7-8 mm. Colour as preserved white.

Locality. 32° 5’ S., 17° 52’ E. (off Lamberts Bay), 123 metres. $3, ovig. 99.

5 Febr. 1953. (Trawler, per U.C.T.)

Remarks. Rather like trgonica from Kerguelen Island as regards pleon

segment 3, and like normalis as regards gnathopod 1.

82 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Fam. AMPELISCIDAE

Ampelisca excavata Brnrd.

Fig. 404.

1925. Barnard, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., xx, p. 336, pl. 34, figs. 5-7.

This species grows to a length of 10 to 13 mm. The 2nd joint of peraeopod 5

in the original specimen appears to have been abnormal, and a figure is here

given of the normal form.

Additional localities. Gordon’s Bay (False Bay), 36 metres; Algoa Bay, 14

metres. (U.C.T.)

Byblis amsuropus Stebb.

Fig. 405.

1908. Stebbing, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., vi, p. 72, pl. 10 (Crust., pl. 36).

A co-type from Stebbing, and three other examples from approximately the

same locality (off East London) have been examined. These confirm Stebbing’s

description.

The present specimen also agrees with Stebbing’s description except as

regards the 5th peraeopod and the length of the 3rd uropods. It is smaller than

the above-mentioned specimens, but about the same size as Stebbing’s type.

The 3rd uropod reaches beyond the apices of the other two pairs of uropods by

only half, instead of the whole, length of its rami.

Fic. 40.

a. Ampelisca excavata Brnrd. 5th peraeopod. b. Byblis anisuropus Stebb. 5th peraeopod, with 6th

and 7th joints further enlarged. c. Nototropis granulosa Wlkr. 2nd joint of 5th peraeopod.

In general, peraeopod 5 agrees with Stebbing’s description, but the 2nd

joint is broader, the 5th joint is relatively larger and the front and hind apices,

especially the hind apex, embrace the base of the 6th joint, which is shorter

and stouter, 7th joint much smaller. Peraeopods 3 and 4 of both sides missing.

Locality. False Bay. 1 specimen, 7 mm. in length. (U.C.T., Sept. 1953.)

Remarks. When more specimens are available, a separate specific name may

be justified for this form.

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 83

Fam. HaAvusTorRIIDAE

Gen. Urothoe Dana

1891. Stebbing, Trans. Zool. Soc. Lond., xiii, p. 1.

@ The tuft of plumose setae on the pleura of pleon segment 2 is on the outer

Wsurface in the specimens I have examined (cf. Ruffo, loc. cit., infra, fig. I, 3, 4,

7), not on the inside as Stebbing (loc. cit., p. 4) says. In some cases these tufts

Bare composed of numerous very long setae, and are very noticeable in a dorsal

B view of the animal.

Key to the South African species

1. Peraeopod 3, 4th and 5th joints longer than broad. seeclezan’s

| Peraeopod 3, 4th and 5th joints broader than long. Sie

@2. Peraeopod 3, 5th joint 14 times as broad as long. Dactyl slender, ae

denticulate. . pulchella

Peraeopod 3, 5th joint twice (or nearly so) as broad as long. Dactyl aul

| form. Ly or Re

3. Peraeopod 3, dactyl spinose. ... . grimaldi

| Peraeopod 3, dactyl serrulate or crenulate. bid Bae G!

4. Peraeopod 5, 2nd joint subcircular, as broad as long. ... . serrulidactylus

Peraeopod 5, 2nd joint oval, about 1} times as long as broad. i pnnatasand

var. femoralis

Urothoe elegans Bate

1925. Chevreux & Fage, Faune de France. Amphip., p. 101, fig. 95.

1949.* Ruffo, Ann. Mus. Civ. St. Nat. Genova, \xiii, p. 80, fig. I, 1-4.

1951. Barnard, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (12), iv, p. 704.

Length 2-5-3°5 mm.

m 8 ©Localities. 21 miles off Cape St. Blaize, 44 fathoms. 2 99 (mutilated), (S.

B Afr. Mus., s.s. ‘Pieter Faure’ coll.); False Bay (near Seal Island), larva traps at

surface. gd and 99 (s.s. Africana); Still Bay, 38 fms.; Langebaan, Saldanha

B Bay. (U.C.T.)

& Remarks. The minute denticulations on the dactyl of peraeopod 3 are often

B very obscure and difficult to observe.

Urothoe pulchella (Costa)

Fig: 41a:

1916. Barnard, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., xv, p. 143.

1925. Chevreux & Fage, loc. cit., p. 99, fig. 92.

1949. Ruffo, loc. cit., p. 82, fig. I, 5-7.

Localities. 33 miles off Cape St. Blaize, 60 fathoms. 1 ¢ (Barnard); 12 miles

off Cape St. Blaize, 42 fathoms. 1 @ (S. Afr. Mus., s.s. ‘Pieter Faure’ coll.) ;

False Bay, 40 metres. 1 g, 1 9; Great Brak R. mouth; Knysna; Sundays R.

estuary; Port St. Johns. (U.C.T.)

*Date of publication of reprints 11th September, 1947. See Vol. Ixiii, pp. 303, 304.

84 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Remarks. Reid (1951, Atlantide Rep. II, p. 221, fig. 21) has described U. leone

from the coast of Monrovia, a species so close to pulchella as almost to amount

to synonymy. The quadrate, slightly produced and acute postero-inferior

corner of and joint of peraeopod 3 is unusual and may be abnormal (only 1 @

was obtained). The oblique series of spine-setae near the apices of 4th and

5th joints of peraeopods 1 and 2 are not shown in the figure (in any case they

are not specific characters), nor are any stout spines shown on the 4th joint of

peraeopod 3.

Ayyyiy

oe My

byp spt iN

Min

Fic. 41.

Outer view of 3rd peraeopod of: a. Urothoe pulchella (Costa); b. U. grimaldii Chevr.

c. U. serrulidactylus n. sp.

Urothoe grimaldit Chevr.

Fig. 410.

1895. Chevreux, Mem. Soc. zool. Fr., viii, p. 428, figs. 1-4 (3).

1925. Chevreux & Fage, loc. cit., p. 99, fig. 93 (¢ 2); and var. inermis, p. 100.

1935. Chevreux, Res. Sct. Camp. Monaco, fasc. xc, p. 69, pl. 16, figs. 10, 16-18

(g) (2 stated to be unknown).

1951. Reid, Atlantide Rep., II, p. 220 (localities only).

Peraeopods 1 and 2, 4th joint is slightly oval, the front and hind margins

being slightly convex, 14 times as long as 5th joint (in pulchella the 4th joint is

twice as long as 5th, and parallel-sided). The usual oblique rows of long slender

setae near apices of 4th and 5th joints, on outer surface.

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 85

Peraeopod 3, 4th joint with 5 spines immediately above articulation of 5th

joint, and in its hinder half a fan-like series of 6 slender spine-setae, plumose

setae on hind margin but not on distal margin (inner surface); marginal

plumose setae on hinder half of distal margin of 5th and 6th joints; dactyl

cultriform, with (6) 7-8 slender spines in a single row on front margin in both

SEXES.

Length 5 mm. As preserved (U.C.T. specimens), white, eyes black.

Localities. 21 and 33 miles off Cape St. Blaize, 44 and 60 fathoms. 1 3,5 99

(S. Afr. Mus., s.s. “Pieter Faure’ coll.); False Bay, 26 metres; 32° 12’ S., 16°

38’ E., 215 fms.; from sponge; Langebaan, Saldanha Bay. (U.C.T.)

Distribution. North and west coast of France; Moroccan coast (Mediter-

ranean) ; off Monrovia, Ivory Coast and French Guinea.

Remarks. These specimens seem referable to Chevreux’s species without

much doubt. Chevreux & Fage describe the dactyl of peraeopod 3 as having

12 spines in a double row in Q, in contrast with the single row of 6 in g. In the

present specimens both sexes have only a single row. The variety inermis

(French coast and coast of Sahara) has no spines on the dactyl.

Urothoe serrulidactylus n. sp.

Big. Aue.

1951. Barnard, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (12), iv, p. 704 (ruber, non Giles).

Antenna 1, flagellum 6—7-jointed, accessory flagellum 3-—4-jointed.

Peraeopods 1 and 2, front and hind margins of 4th joint slightly convex, 5th

joint as broad as long.

Peraeopod 3, 4th joint with a series of 10 spines in front half and one of 5

spines in hind half, plumose setae on hind margin and a tuft of 4-5 in middle

of distal margin on inner surface (not shown in figure); marginal plumose

setae on hind half of distal margins of 5th and 6th joints; dactyl cultriform,

front margin serrulate.

Peraeopod 4, 2nd joint about 1% longer than wide, hind margin entire, with

a few setules, and a submarginal row of long plumose setae on inner surface.

Peraeopod 5, 2nd joint nearly as wide as long, hind margin convex, entire,

with a few setules.

Pleon segment 2, postero-inferior corner quadrate, outer surface with tuft

of plumose setae. Lower margins of segments 1 and 3 rounded. Telson with

3 spinules on apex of each lobe.

Length 4-5 mm. As preserved, yellowish, eyes black.

Locality. Kosi Bay, Zululand. 10 99, some ovig. (U.C.T.)

Remarks. ‘These specimens were erroneously recorded as ruber. The character

of the dactyl of peraeopod 3 is against such identification. In the present

specimens it is serrulate, whereas Giles’s figure shows two spines on the front

margin; probably there are, normally, more than two spines. I still consider

that spinidigitus Wlkr. 1904 will prove to be a synonym of ruber.

86 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

The somewhat oval shape of the 4th joint, and the broad 5th joint of

peraeopods 1 and 2 seem to be differential characters in the present specimens.

Urothoe pinnata n. sp.

Fig. 42a, b.

Antenna 1, flagellum 6—8-jointed, accessory flagellum 5-6-jointed.

Peraeopods 1 and 2, front and hind margins of 4th joint slightly convex,

5th joint longer than broad.

x S

; di we } a

Poege, pe

EE fa eds "y WS

L IS

Ay 0 " S

Tees . |

i\\ A 27 gs nm .

. | Be ott

' . AE Zit by

+ STAY ah

)

/ ! A be THA (

TAY ING

City |

a Cc

Fic. 42.

Urothoe pinnata n. sp. a. outer view of 3rd peraeopod. 5. 2nd-4th joints of 5th peraeopod.

c. 2nd-4th joints of 5th peraeopod of femoralis n. var.

Peraeopod 3, 4th joint with a row of 14 spines in front half, with 3 larger

ones at apex, a row of g-10 in hind half, plumose setae on hind margin, and

along hind half of distal margin on inner surface (not shown in figure), some

of the latter very long, extending to apex of dactylus; marginal plumose setae

on hind half of distal margin of 5th joint, and a tuft on inner surface of 6th

joint (not shown in figure); dactyl narrow cultriform, front margin more or

less crenulate (sometimes obscure).

Peraeopod 4, 2nd joint about 14 as long as broad, hind margin entire with a

few setules, and a submarginal row of plumose setae on inner surface; plumose

setae on hind margin of 4th joint.

Peraeopod 5, 2nd joint about 14 as long as broad, hind margin convex,

entire, with a few setae at upper corner, and a few setules below, 4th joint

with 3 graduated spines near hind apex and some long setae.

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 87

Pleon segment 2 with postero-inferior corner quadrate, outer surface with

large and conspicuous tuft of long plumose setae. Lower margins of segments 1

and 3 rounded. Telson with 2~3 spinules on apex of each lobe.

Length 5-10 mm. As preserved, white, eyes black.

Locality. False Bay, 30 metres. 18 99, some with ripe ovaries, but none

actually ovigerous, Sept. 1953. (U.C.T.).

var. femoralis n.

Fig. 42¢.

Six of the above specimens are exceptional in possessing an acute projection

proximally on the hind margin of 2nd joint of peraeopod 5, and 4 very stout

equidistant spines on hind margin of 4th joint.

Remarks. ‘The long plumose setae on either side of pleon segment 2 seem to

be more abundant than in other species, and appear in a dorsal view of the

animal like little wings.

The feature which characterizes the variety is remarkable. If a specimen

with this feature had been collected separately (in a different locality, or even

in the same locality on a different date) it would undoubtedly have been

regarded as a species. But the eighteen specimens, all of the same sex, were

collected together at the same time and place, and the six exceptional specimens

can only be regarded as a variety or an aberration.

Fam. ACANTHONOTOZOMATIDAE

Iphimedia capicola Brnrd.

1932. Barnard. Discovery Rep., V, p. 118, fig. 66.

The original g was only 4-5 mm. in length; the present two ovigerous 99

are I1 and 12 mm. in length. They are from the same area as the ‘Discovery’

specimen, and, in spite of two discrepancies from the original description, must

be ascribed to this species.

The postero-inferior corners of peraeon segments 6 and 7 are quadrate in

the smaller, but acute in the larger specimen. The postero-inferior corners of

side-plates 5-7 are acute in both specimens.

The telson is apically concave between rounded apices, without any lateral

denticles. |

Locality. Langebaan, Saldanha Bay; mussel bank at low spring tide mark

in main channel. 2 ovig. 99. (U.C.T., May 1951.)

Cypsiphimedia n.g.

Near Jphimedia. Peraeon segment 1 dorsally enlarged and gibbous, front

margin nearly horizontal; head projecting vertically downwards (cf. figure of

eblanae in Bate, 1862, pl. 22, fig. 3); segments 2-7 increasing in length, 7th

about twice the and.

88 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Side-plate 1 small, partly concealed at hind base by side-plate 2; anterior

and lower margins of side-plates 1-3 forming an even curve; 3 deepest, 4 not

so deep as 3, narrow. Telson short, apically incised.

Upper lip incised. Lower lip with lobes apically notched. Mandible with-

out spine-row and molar (position of latter indicated by a facet), secondary

cutting-edge feeble or absent, palp well developed. Maxilla 1 palp extending

beyond apex of outer plate. Maxilla 2 and maxilliped as in [phimedia, inner

apex of 2nd joint of palp of maxilliped produced.

FIG. 43.

Cypsiphimedia gibba n.g., n. sp. Head and peraeon segments

1-4, with side-plates; 6th and 7th joints of znd gnathopod;

and telson.

Gnathopod 1 slender, minutely chelate; gnathopod 2 subchelate. Hind

apex of 4th joint of peraeopods 5-7 acutely produced.

The swollen 1st peraeon segment with its reduced side-plate, and the

absence of any dorsal denticles on peraeon and pleon, seem to indicate a new

genus. The entirely smooth body is an unusual feature in this family.

Genotype: C. gibba n. sp.

Cypsiphimedia gibba n. sp.

Fig. 43.

Peraeon and pleon smooth, without processes or denticles. Postero-inferior

corner of pleon segment 3 rounded, with a small point.

Antenna 1 flagellum 17-jointed; antenna 2 flagellum 15-16-jointed. Gnatho-

pod 1 as in J. obesa (see: Sars, Crust. Norw., pl. 132), 2nd joint sinuous. Gnatho-

pod 2 6th joint ovate, shorter than the (dorsal margin of) 5th joint, and

broader. Hind margin of 2nd joint of peraeopods 5-7 entire, with a few

widely spaced minute setules in notches.

Length (front of peraeon segment 1 to telson) 4:5 mm. As preserved, dull

yellowish, eyes black.

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 89

Locality. Algoa Bay, 5-7 metres. 1 specimen. (U.C.T.)

Remarks. Apart from the swollen ist peraeon segment, distinguished from the

other South African species of this family (Iphimedia capicola and Panoploea excisa

(both from the Saldanha Bay area) by the absence of any dorsal denticles on

peraeon and pleon.

Fam. LILJEBORGIIDAE

Liljeborgia epistomata Brnrd.

Fig. 44.

1932. Barnard, Discovery Rep., v, p. 144, fig. 83 (9).

g—Integument smooth. Corneal lenses and ocular pigment absent.

Side-plate 1 enormously enlarged, ovoid, hind margin concave, front and

lower margins very finely setulose; side-plate 2 trapezoidal, deeper than long,

lower hind corner bluntly pointed; side-plate 3 subtrigonal, deeper than long,

front margin convex, hind margin straight.

Fic. 44.

Lileborgia epistomata Brnrd. g. a. head and peraeon segments 1-4, with side-plates (gnathopod 2

partially visible). 6. anterior margin of head with bases of 1st and 2nd antennae, mandible with

basal joint of palp, epistome and upper lip. c. mandible. d. outer view of 6th and 7th joints of

gnathopod 2. e. inner view of palmar angle of hand of gnathopod 2. /. pleon segments 3-5.

g. telson.

gO ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM —

Pleon segment 2 with a very slight dorsal keel ending in a minute denticle;

segment 3 dorsally rounded and gibbous above base of segment 4, margin

medianly notched to receive the keel on segment 4. Telson longer than its

basal width, cleft to base, each lobe apically with 5 graduated spines external

to the acutely produced inner apex.

Epistome strongly produced, cultriform, apically curved and acute. Man-

dible with cutting-edge straight, entire, with blunt tooth at each end, secondary

cutting-edge 5-dentate, spine-row with 11 spines, molar tubercle with a tuft of

setae, palp nearly twice as long as mandible, very slender, 2nd and 3rd joints

subequal, 1st joint shorter. Innermost seta on inner lobe of maxilla 2 longer

than any of the others.

Antenna 1 reaching to about midway along 5th peduncular joint of antenna

2, or when laid back, to end of 2nd peraeon segment; antenna 2 almost as long

as body (14 mm.).

Gnathopod 2, 6th joint about 14 times as long as greatest width, palm

oblique, sinuous, with prominent bilobed tooth near finger-hinge, finger with

7-8 serrations; on inner surface tip of finger fits into a shallow pit bordered by

3 setae and 3 stout spines.

Locality. False Bay. 1 specimen. (U.Q.T., Sept. 1953.)

Remarks. ‘There can be no doubt that this is the ¢ of epistomata described

from 99 collected by the ‘Discovery’ at Saldanha Bay. It is not unexpected to

find sexual dimorphism in the 2nd gnathopod, but the enormous development

of the 1st side-plate and the elongate mandibular palp in the 3 are remarkable.

Fam. ATYLIDAE

Nototropis granulosus Wlkr.

Fig. 40c.

1914. Barnard, loc. cit., p. 173.

Integument (examined semi-dry) minutely shagreened and punctate, which

gives an impression of being granulose when tilted at certain angles to the light.

Postantennal angle of head rounded, below a shallow notch (cf. vedlomensis

Sars, pl. 164, fig. 2). Peraeopod 3 as in vedlomensis. Peraeopod 5 2nd joint

broadly lobed (more so than in homochir).

Additional localities. False Bay and Algoa Bay. (U.C.T.)

Fam. GAMMARIDAE

Melita machaera n. sp.

Fig. 45.

Integument sparsely pitted. Head with lateral corner rounded, post-antennal

corner quadrate, a little larger than in obtusata (as figured in Sars, pl. 180,

fig. 1; more like fig. 243 in Chevreux & Fage, Faune de France). Side-plates 1-3

deep, a minute denticle at lower hind corner; side-plate 4 in 2 not modified.

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA gi

Pleon segment 3 with a small medio-dorsal tooth (not developed in juv.),

segment 4 with medio-dorsal tooth (in one specimen flanked on one side by a

minute denticle) ; segment 5 with a lateral tooth on each side. Postero-lateral

corner of segment 1 rounded, of segment 2 quadrate, of segment 3 shortly

produced.

a4 g

Fic. 45.

Melita machaera n. sp. a. head. b. gnathopod 1 (g and @). c. spine from lower apex of 5th joint

of gnathopod 1. d, e. gnathopod 2, ¢ and @ respectively. f, g. inner view of palmar angle of

hand of gnathopod 2, ¢ and 9 respectively. Ah. pleon segments 3-6, with uropod 3. 2. telson.

Telson longer than basal width, cleft to base, lobes narrow-ovate, each with

1 long and 1 short spine subterminally on inner margin.

Antenna 1 with 5-jointed accessory flagellum. Mandibular palp slender (as

in obtusata).

Gnathopod 1 ¢ 9, 4th—6th joints with thick fringe of short setae on lower

“margin, extending a short distance on to inner margin (as in obtusata; see Bate,

1862, pl. 33, fig. 3h; Bate & Westwood, 1863, vol. i, p. 342; and Sars, pl. 180,

fig. 1). These fringes are present in a juvenile 3 mm. in length.

Q2 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Gnathopod 2 3, 6th joint nearly as in obtusata as figured by Bate, 1862,

pl. 33, fig. 32, but with a stronger palmar tooth between the basal tooth and the

defining angle; dactylus widest in middle (not subterminally), apex rounded

but not quite evenly (cf. gladiosa, Bate, pl. 33, fig. 6). In 9 almost as large and

robust as in 4, 6th joint with palm denticulate, with a larger tooth in the

middle, defining angle bidentate, dactylus more slender than in 4, tapering to

an acute apex which closes on inside of palm. In juveniles the palm resembles

that of 2, but without the larger denticle in middle.

Peraeopods 3-5, hind margin of 2nd joint with very feeble indents.

Uropod 3 very long, nearly equal to length of pleon segments 2-6, peduncle

extending to apices of rami of uropods 1 and 2, outer ramus about 24 times as

long as peduncle, sword-like, slightly curved distally, broadly oval in cross-

section, feebly setulose, with apical spine (2nd joint). In juv. up to about

6—7 mm. the ramus is of more normal shape, relatively broader and less sword-

like, more strongly setulose; from about 8-9 mm. in length the ramus assumes

the adult shape.

Length 11 mm. (14 mm. incl. urop. 3). As preserved, chocolate or vinous

brown, with white transverse bands at the sutures of the segments, i.e. hind

margin of head, and both front and hind margins of segments 1-7 are narrowly

bordered with white, pleon segments with only the hind margins bordered

with white; front margin of side-plates 1-3, front and hind margins of 4 and 5,

and hind margins of 6 and 7 white, continuing in line with the white sutural

bands on peraeon; 2nd joints of peraeopods 5-7 with front margin, the ‘mid-

rib’ (muscles) and the hind margin white; antennae white but suffused basally;

enathopods 1 and 2 brown, the dactylus of gn. 2 white; peraeopods 1 and 2

white, 3-5 white (except 2nd joints); peduncles of uropods 1-3 brown, rami of

urop. 1 and 2 white, of urop. 3 brown basally, distally white. Front margin of

head with white border, which also surrounds the dark brown eye.

Locality. False Bay. gg, ovig. 2 and juv. (U.C.T., Nov. 1953 and Sept.

1954.)

Remarks. These specimens have so many features in common with obtusata

(North Atlantic and Mediterranean) that they might be regarded as only a

variety of this species. But as the 2 has the hand of gnathopod 2 almost as

large and robust as that of the ¢ (the ovigerous 2 leaves no doubt on this

point), a fact which does not seem to be recorded for obtusata (or any species of

Melita), there seems some justification for specific status. To this character

may be added the greater length of the telson, and especially the length and

shape of the 3rd uropod, the latter being a most outstanding feature.

The coloration is comparable with that of dentata: ‘yellowish, with broad

transverse bands of a dark reddish brown hue’ (Sars, Crust. Norw., I, p. 514).

Of gladiosa Chevreux & Fage (Faune de France. Amphip., p. 234) say: ‘couleur

persistant longtemps dans l’alcool’; this applies to the present specimens, some

of which have been in alcohol two years without, so it seems, any appreciable

fading of the intensity of the brown colour.

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 93

Elasmopus affins Della Valle

1893. Della Valle, F. Fl. Golf. Neap., p. 734, pl. 1, fig. 9 (col.), pl. 22, figs. 1-15.

1920. Shoemaker, Bull. Amer. Mus. N.H., xliii, p. 371, figs. 1, 2 (congoensis).

1930. Monod, Bull. Soc. zool. Fr., lv, p. 496, figs. 7, 8.

Locality. Langebaan, Saldanha Bay. 3d, 99, juv. (U.C.T., Dec. 1950.)

Distribution. Mediterranean; Port Etienne; St. Paul de Loanda.

Fam. TALITRIDAE

Talorchestia malayensis 'Tatt.

1922. ‘Tattersall, Mem. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, V1, p. 453, pl. 21, figs. 11-20.

Locality. Delagoa Bay. 2 gg, 2 99. Length 7 mm. (U.W.)

Distribution. Singapore Botanic Gardens. According to Annandale (in

Tattersall, loc. cit.) this is a completely terrestrial Amphipod, being found in

damp places at considerable distances from water.

Remarks. This species is distinguished from all the species recorded up to the

present from southern Africa by having a scabrous lobe on the lower margin

of the fourth joint of gnathopod

I g, as well as on the 5th and

6th joints.

Hyale grandicornis (Kroyer)

Fig. 46.

This opportunity is taken to

figure the 1st gnathopod of a g

specimen from Port Edward,

which appears to be grandicornis.

The 2nd gnathopod agrees with ~ Fic. 46.

this species, but the anterior mar- Ayale grandicornis (Kroyer). Gnathopod 1 of a

: P 2 oe F 3d specimen from Port Edward, Natal, with

gin of 2nd joint is crenulate, with palmar angle further enlarged.

setules in the notches.

Additional localities. Various localities from Lambert’s Bay on the west coast

to Port Shepstone, Isipingo, and Port Edward in Natal. (Professor Stephenson

and Professor Day, U.C.T.)

Afrochiltonia n.g.

As in Chiltonia Stebb. emend. Hurley, but: gnathopods 1 and 2 similar to one

another and alike in both sexes (gnathopod 2 not enlarged in 9), and pleopod 1

not modified in ¢.

Genotype: Chiltonia capensis Brnrd. 1916.

Remarks. To include this species, with ‘1st and 2nd gnathopods alike in both

sexes, the 2nd not enlarged’, in the genus Chiltonia, I suggested enlarging the

Q4 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

generic diagnosis. Hurley has recently (1954, Tr. Roy. Soc. N. Xeal., \xxxi,

p- 565) amended the diagnosis to read “‘Gnathopods 1 and 2 subchelate in both

sexes’. But he has made the interesting discovery that in the type species

(mthiwaka Chilton) and two other New Zealand species the 1st pleopod in the

dg is modified. This fact entirely alters the situation. The species capensis is not

a suitable companion with species in which the males have an enlarged

gnathopod 2 and a modified 1st pleopod.

At Dr. Hurley’s suggestion I re-examined the type material of capensis and

found there was no modification of the 1st pleopod in g. This fact was com-

municated to him. He has suggested the possible desirability of raising the

South African and Australian species to subgeneric or generic rank (Hurley,

loc. cit., p. 576 and footnote). The Australian species still await detailed

investigation, but I have no hesitation in removing capensis to a different genus.

The adoption of the prefix Afro- indicates my doubt that the Australian

species will be found to be congeneric with the South African.

Rihe’s record (1914, D. Stidpol. Exp., xvi, p. 35, figs. 13, 14 a-c) of “Chaltona

subtenuis Sayce’ from Lakeside Vlei is curious and needs further inquiry. He

figures an enlarged gnathopod 2

(fig. 13b) but says he had 6 young

females measuring 1-5 mm. Lake-

side Vlei is the same as Muizenberg

Vlei, from which I have seen

material collected by U.C.T. In ae

this material there are no ¢¢ with

enlarged 2nd gnathopods.

Additional localities. Muizenberg

Vlei; Kosi Bay, Zululand; Olifants

River mouth. (U.C.T.)

Another apparent error in NG

Rithe’s paper: he records a Para-

moera sp. ? and figures (fig. 14d)

the characteristic telson of P.

capensis, but gives the locality

‘Plumstead’, which is some five

miles inland from the coast.

Fam. AORIDAE :

Lembos teleporus n. sp.

Fig. 47.

Cc d

A strong ventral, slightly for-

wardly curved spine on peraeon

segment 3 in ¢ (adult). Fic. 47.

Lembos teleporus n. sp. a, 6. gnathopod 1, 9

Cuugiligpael a gy OlGagake, one and ¢ respectively. c, d. gnathopod 1 g,

joint 3 times as long as 5th, sub- juvenile and intermediate stage.

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 95

equal in width to 5th at base, widening distally, palm oblique, a blunt tooth

near finger hinge, palmar angles quadrate, margin between finely crenulate,

inner margin of finger crenulate. In 9 6th joint twice as long as 5th, widening

slightly to the oblique palm, with broad tooth, palmar angle rather sharp,

with spine on lower margin.

In juv. 3 6th joint oval, palm oblique, slightly convex, with notch near

the acute palmar angle, near which a spine on lower margin, inner mar-

gin of finger serrate. Intermediate stage, 6th joint beginning to widen

distally, palm with a stronger convexity, inner margin of finger neither serrate

nor crenulate.

Gnathopod 2 ¢ @ 6th joint subequal to 5th in length (outer margin) and

width, palm transverse, palmar angle square, with a spine, both joints setose,

finger serrate on inner margin.

Length ¢ 9 8 mm., 2nd-6th joints of gnathopod 1 ¢ 5 mm., 9 3 mm. As

preserved, greyish, speckled, eyes black.

Locality. Inhambane, 1-2 fathoms. gg, 99. (U.C.T.)

Remarks. The 1st gnathopod 3 bears some resemblance to that of gambiense

Reid (1951, Atlantide Rep., 2, p. 255, fig. 47), but the 6th joint is more cuneiform

and without the strongly produced spiniform palmar angle.

Gen. Lemboides Stebb.

1932. Barnard, ‘Discovery Rep., v, p. 222.

1940. id., loc. cit., p. 537 (key to species).

L. afer has been shown (1932) to have ventral spines, and therefore my 1940

key is wrong. The following may be substituted.

1. No ventral spines or processes. . .. . crenatipalma

With ventral spines or processes. 2

2. Gnathopod 1 ¢ palm defined by two denticles, finger short, not overlapping |

palm. . afer

Gnathopod 1 ¢ defined by a strong tooth, finger long, overlapping one . . acanthiger

Fam. PHOTIDAE

Eurystheus holmesi Stebb.

Fig. 48a-d.

moo. stebbing, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., vi, p. 85, pl. 14 A (Crustacea, pl.

40 A).

agro. id., ibid., p. 461.

Gnathopod 2 ¢g differs in shape from Stebbing’s figure. The hind margins

of 2nd joints of peraeopods 3-5 are not irregularly dentate, and the 2nd joint of

peraeopod 3 is not proximally expanded into a lobe. As Stebbing says,

peraeopod 4 is longer than peraeopod 5.

Locality. False Bay. 1 3. Length 7 mm. (U.C.T.)

96 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Eurystheus palmoides Brnrd.

Fig. 48¢-g.

1932. Barnard, ‘Discovery Rep’, v. p. 231, fig. 144.

The discovery of these adult g and @ specimens shows that palmoides was

based on the immature 4, and that the species has considerable resemblance

to maculatus (Johnston) from the North Atlantic, Norway to France, Azores, and

Senegal.

The 2nd joint of gnathopod 2, however, is relatively more slender, and the

6th joint in g (at least when fully developed) is stronger and differently shaped.

The 2nd gnathopod ¢ bears a striking similarity to Stebbing’s enlarged figure

of this appendage in holmes: (loc. cit., supra, pl. 40 A, gn. 2).

Length ¢ 4:5 mm., 9 ovig. 4—5°5 mm.

Locality. Fish Hock Bay (False Bay), 7-9 metres. (U.C.T.)

Fic. 48.

Eurystheus holmesi Stebb. a, b, c. 2nd joint of 3rd-5th peraeopods respectively. d. gnathopod 2 3.

Eurytheus palmoides Brnrd. e, f. gnathopod 2 ¢ and @ respectively. g. postero-inferior angle of

pleon segment 3.

Fam. COoROPHIIDAE

Gen. Unciolella Chevr.

1910. Chevreux, Mem. Soc. zool. Fr., xxiii, p. 263.

1928. Schellenberg, in Fox, Trans. Zool. Soc. Lond., xxi, p. 633.

Differs from Unciola in having the hind corners of pleura of pleon segments

rounded, and styliform dactyls on peraeopods 1 and 2. The unattached 3

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 97

enathopod 1 assigned by Schellenberg to Chevreux’s species has the 5th joint

greatly enlarged (somewhat in the manner of Microdeutopus).

Unciolella foveolata n. sp.

Fig. 49.

Integument coarsely but closely pitted. Head with vertical groove laterally

near posterior margin, post-antennal corner acutely quadrate but not produced.

Eyes well developed, oval.

Peraeon segments each with a lateral furrow, oblique on segments 1-3 but

thereafter becoming more horizontal, and continued on pleon segments 1-3 as

a shallow furrow immediately above the pleura. Peraeon segments 2—7 each

with a transverse furrow near the anterior margin. No sternal spines or hooks

on any of the segments. Side-plates shallow, 1-4 subtriangular, 5-7 bilobed.

Pleura with postero-inferior corners completely rounded.

Telson subtriangular, with slight median projection apically, and a minute

spine on each lateral margin.

Antenna 1 subequal to head plus peraeon segments 1-4 (or 5), flagellum

17—-20-jointed, accessory flagellum 4—5-jointed.

Antenna 2 shorter than antenna 1, flagellum 7-8-jointed.

Mouth-parts as in Unciola (Sars, pl. 222), but mandibular palp more robust,

larger than in U. lunata (Chevreux, loc. cit., pl. 20, fig. 6) with thick brush of

setae on 3rd joint.

Gnathopod 1 nearly alike in both sexes, 5th joint not enlarged, oblong, lower

margin convex in 4, less so in Q, densely setose, 6th joint subequal to 5th, some-

what ovate, palm oblique, less so in 9 than in ¢ and defining angle conse-

quently better defined, with 1 strong spine, dactyl serrate.

Gnathopod 2 nearly alike in both sexes, similar to gnathopod 1, but slightly

longer.

Peraeopods 1 and 2, 4th joint about ? length of 2nd and as broad, 5th

abruptly narrower, 6th slightly longer than 5th, only half as wide at base,

dactyl subequal to 5th joint, styliform.

Peraeopod 3 robust, 2nd joint not quite twice as long as broad, oval, 5th

shorter than 4th, with 3-4 stout blunt spines on posterior apex, 6th subequal

to 5th but only half as wide, with 1 stout blunt spine on posterior apex, and a

bunch of plumose setae on anterior apex, more or less concealing the dactyl

which is less than half length of 6th joint.

Peraeopod 4 nearly twice as long as peraeopod 3, relatively slender, and

joint with plumose setae on hind margin, 4th joint 24 times as long as 5th, 6th

slightly shorter than 4th, twice as long as 5th, dactyl strong, curved.

Peraeopod 5 not present on any of the specimens, presumably similar to 4th

but probably slightly longer.

Uropod 1, 4 strong spines on upper margin of peduncle, and a stronger

apical one, rami subequal, setose. Uropod 2, 2 strong spines on upper margin

98 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

of peduncle, outer ramus shorter than inner. Uropod 3 transversely oblong,

inner apex with a short spine (? representing the inner ramus), outer ramus

extending to apex of rami of uropod 2, with apical tuft of plumose setae.

Length 13-14 mm. As preserved, whitish, eyes pale brown.

Locality. False Bay. ¢3, ovig. 92 and immature. (U.Q.T., Sept. 1953.)

Remarks. Apart from the foveolate integument the present species in distin-

guished from lunata Chevr. (Algeria and Suez) by the 3rd peraeopod and 3rd

uropod.

Fic. 49.

Unciolella foveolata n. sp. a. head and peraeon segments 1-3. b. peraeon segments 6 and 7, and

pleon segments 1-3. c, d. gnathopod 1 ¢ and @ respectively. e. apical joints of peraeopod 3.

jf. apical joints of peraeopod 1. g. apex of peduncle, and rami of uropod 1. h. uropod 2.

2. uropod. 3.

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 99

Fam. CAPRELLIDAE

Gen. Paracaprella Mayer

1890. Mayer, F. Fl. Golf Neapel., xvii, p. 41.

1903. id., Szboga Exp. monogr., xxxiv, p. 65 (with key to species).

In my 1940 key (loc. cit., p. 542) in the second alternative of couplet 4, after

‘(fig. p. 522)’ insert: ...4 a. Transfer “Mandibular palp 3-jointed .. . 6.’ to

couplet 4 a, and add: ‘Mandibular palp absent . . . Paracaprella’.

Paracaprella pusilla Mayer

1890. Mayer, loc. cit., p. 41, pl. 1, figs. 28-30, pl. 3, figs. 45-7, pl. 5, figs. 48,

49, pl. 6, fig. ro.

mao id-, loc: cit., p. 67, pl. 2, figs. 96, 37, pl. 7, fig. 52 (adult GQ).

A5mm. ¢ specimen agreeing exactly, including the 12-jointed flagellum of

antenna 1, with Mayer’s description of this Brazilian and West Indian species,

was scraped from a ship’s hull in Durban harbour. (U.C.T., 1951.)

Caprellina spinger Brnrd.

role.) Barnard, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., xv, p. 282, pl. 28, fig. 35 (Q).

The large dorsal bifid hook-like spine on the 3rd segment is present in a

juv. 4 mm., a 2 with incipient brood lamellae 5-5 mm., and a g 6-5 mm.;

in a 9 with developed brood lamellae 5 mm. there is only a slight medio-dorsal

hump. In all the specimens the other dorsal spines on the 2nd and 4th segments

are absent.

Locality. Langebaan, Saldanha Bay. (U.C.T.)

Remarks. The coloration, though faded, is similar to that of the 2 described

from False Bay; the dark band at base of 6th joint of 5th peraepod is present

in the ¢.

COPEPODA PARASITICA

Gen. Caligus

See: Barnard, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., xli, p. 244, 1955.

Extended key to South African species

I. Fourth leg 4-jointed.

A. Abdomen 2-segmented

I. 1st abdominal segment 4 times length of 2nd. .... pelamydis

2. 1st abdominal segment shorter than 2nd. .... [elongatus|

B. Abdomen 1-segmented, shorter than genital segment. ~... lunatus

II. Fourth leg 3-jointed.

A. Abdomen 2 4-segmented, g 2-segmented. ... . coryphaenae

B. Abdomen 1-segmented, or more or less distinctly 2-segmented.

1. Abdomen long, in 2 about as long as genital segment, in ¢ longer.

a. Caudal rami long, in g about half length, in g longer than,

abdomen. .... lalandei

6b. Caudal rami short or very short.

100 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

i. Caudal rami short. Abdomen distinctly 2-segmented, a little

shorter than genital segment. . cossackit

ul. Caudal rami short. Abdomen @ 1-segmented, ¢ eee . rapax

iil. Caudal rami short. Abdomen a little longer than genital seg-

ment, indistinctly 2-segmented. . . mauritanicus

iv. Caudal rami very short. Abdomen t-segmented, a little lores:

than genital segment. . aril

2. Abdomen about as long as genital segment; in g distinctly, in 9 indie

tinctly, 2-segmented. .... bonito

3. Abdomen short or very short, about half, or less, genital segment.

a. Caudal rami much longer than wide. .... engraulidis

b. Caudal rami about as broad as long

i, Genital segment a little longer than broad.

a. Abdomen longer than broad. end joint of antenna 1 very

long. Prongs of sternal fork apically acute. 2b eueee

8B. Abdomen broader than long. Antenna 1 normal. Prongs of

sternal fork apically rounded. .... brevicaudatus

ii. Genital segment broader than long.

a. 5th leg visible dorsally. 08 + 1 LADIGES:

B. 5th leg invisible dorsally. .... letrodontis

Gen. Hermilius Heller

1865. Heller, Novara Crust., p. 186.

The genus is easily distinguished by the carapace being longitudinally folded,

like that of an Ostracod or Concostracan.

The only other species: longicornis Bassett-Smith (1898, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist.

(7), ii, p. 80, pl. 3, fig. 2) from Trincomalee on Arius acutirosiris, is probably

synonymous with Heller’s species.

Hermilius pyriventris Heller

1865. Heller, loc: cit:, p. 187, pl. 16) fies! 1, 1a:

1899. Bassett-Smith, Proc. Kool. Soc. Lond., p. 445.

1924. Brian, Parasit. Mauritan, fasc. 1, p. 32.

Localities. Gordons Bay (False Bay) and Table Bay, on gills of Galezchthys

(Tachysurus) feliceps. (U.C.T.)

Distribution. Java, on Arius acutus (Heller); Mauritania, on Arius heudeloti

(Brian).

Chondracanthus neal: L-S.

Fig. 50.

1930. Leigh-Sharpe, Parasitology, xxii, p. 468, figs. 1, 2 (Q¢).

The present specimens agree with the description, but have four (as in

C. zei) medio-dorsal processes instead of three, and a single medio-ventral

process close behind the second pair of legs.

The ovisacs are 3~4 times the length of the body, and irregularly coiled.

Locality. 32° 15’ S., 16° 30’ E., 230-250 fathoms, on Malacocephalus laeurs.

(U.C.T.)

Distribution. Off south-west Ireland, deep water, on the same fish-host.

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA IOI

Chondracanthus colligens n. sp.

Fig. 50.

©—Head longer than wide, postero-lateral corners rounded, without notice-

able projections. Thorax elongate, about as long as genital segment, obscurely

segmented, the first part carrying posteriorly the Ist pair of biramous legs, the

second part fused with the genital segment, carrying the 2nd pair of biramous

legs, and laterally produced on each side into a large curved process; the latter

may actually belong to the genital segment. Genital segment oblong, with

an acute process in middle of each lateral margin, a medio-ventral process at

about the same level, and short, incurved postero-lateral corners. Ovisacs

cylindrical (but not fully preserved). 8-10 mm.

ree Jae

Orr ex A Gis.5

See i eerel

Fic. 50.

Chondracanthus neali L-S. Left and right, dorsal and ventral views respectively of 9.

Chondracanthus colligens n. sp. Centre, ventral view of 9.

Localities. Approximately 32° 15’ S., 16° 30’ E., 230-250 fathoms, and Table

Bay, on Kingklip (Genypterus capensis). (U.Q.T.)

Remarks. From microfilm photographs of C. ophidit Kroyer 1863, which I

owe to the kindness of Dr. J. P. Harding of the British Museum, the Cape

specimens seem to be quite different from the South American species taken

from a fish of the same genus (or family).

102 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

The resemblance to the New Zealand C. genyptert Thomson 1890 may be

closer, but there are neither lateral processes nor a medio-ventral process in

the middle of the genital segment; nor can one be certain from either of

Thomson’s two figures whether the postero-lateral processes are actually the

postero-lateral processes flanking the abdomen, or an additional larger pair

concealing the latter.

It is a little curious that there should be three forms of a Chondracanthus (or

possibly allied genus) on three fishes so closely allied generically or specifically,

or even specifically identical, from subantarctic waters of South America, New

Zealand, and the Cape.

Brachiella supplicans n. sp.

Fig. 51.

@—Cephalothorax somewhat shorter than trunk, carapace of head dis-

tinct; a pair of uniramous posterior processes ventral to the ovisacs, a pair of

biramous processes dorso-laterally dorsal to

the ovisacs. Second maxillae completely

fused, or fused only at base and tips, in both

cases enclosed in a common membranous we

sheath; or separate, fused only at base and

at tips, and each appendage enclosed in its

own sheath; bulla small. ‘The membranous

sheath encloses also the whole body and

processes, each biramous process being

enclosed in its own sheath. Ovisacs short,

ovoid, not enclosed in sheaths. Cephalo-

thorax to junction with and maxillae 2 mm.,

end maxillae 2 mm., trunk 2-5 mm., ovisac

I mm.

§—Brachiella-type (Wilson, 1915, Proc. U.S.

Nat. Mus., xlvii, pl. 25 C). 1-3 mm.

Locality. ‘Table Bay, on Kingklip (Genypterus

capensis). (U.C.T.) ~

Remarks. ‘Thanks to Dr. Harding for no Re

sending photographs of Kréyer’s figures of aa \\

‘Anchorella’ appendiculosa and appendiculata, I A

am able to say that the present specimens do ies:

not appear to be referable to either of these YS

species.

No specific importance is attached to the Fic. 51.

parasites being enclosed in a membranous aa sues n. sp. ‘J and

sheath; it may be due to the method of re ‘alee pie tri

ee a

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 103

preservation (cf. Brian, 1906, Copep. Parasit. Pesci Ital., pl. 8, fig. 6, of

Brachiella impudica, and other figures).

Gen. Medesicaste Kroyer

1955. Barnard, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., xli, p. 300.

The genus contains the genotype étriglarum Kroyer and penetrans Heller. The

species asellinum described and figured in T. and A. Scott (1913, Brit. Parasit.

Copep., p. 184, pl. 52, fig. 6) as belonging to this genus, is really the genotype of

Lernentoma (see: Leigh-Sharpe and Oakley, 1927, loc. cit., infra).

Medesicaste penetrans Heller

1955. Barnard, loc. cit., p. 301, fig. 31.

The posterior bilobed expansion of the thorax is often much more developed

than in Heller’s figure (copy in Barnard, loc. cit., fig. 31a). One specimen

measures from head to end of genital segment 18 mm., from head to end of

thorax 9 mm., posterior expansion of latter 3-5 mm. wide.

In my description the term ‘neck’ applies to the thinnest portion of the

animal between the thoracic expansion and the genital segment, not to the

constriction between head and thorax.

Localities. Table Bay, on Trigla capensis, and False Bay, on Trigla quekettt.

a).C 1.)

Gen. Oralien B-S.

1899. Bassett-Smith, Proc. ool. Soc. Lond., p. 489.

1927. Leigh-Sharpe and Oakley, Parasitology, xix, pp. 456-8.

1927. Oakley in Leigh-Sharpe, ibid., p. 465.

1932. Wilson, Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus., no. 158, pp. 494, and 614, 616 (in key).

Leigh-Sharpe and Oakley (jointly) give an historical account of the genera

Lernentoma, Oralien, and Medesicaste, with their genotypes L. asellina (Linn.),

O. triglae (Blainville), and M. triglarum Kroyer; and justify the validity of

Oralien. Oakley (solo) gives revised definitions of the three genera.

Oralien triglae (Blainville)

Fig. 52.

1822. Blainville, Journ. Phys., xcv, p. 441, pl. 62, fig. 12 (Lernentoma t.).

1927. Oakley, loc. cit., p. 460, figs. 3-6, 7 B; and p. 465.

me@32. Wilson, loc. cit., p. 495, fig: 2966, ¢ (24).

Head and neck 3-4 mm. (somewhat foreshortened in the drawing) ‘body’

(thorax and genital segment) about as wide as long, 2°75 mm.

Locality. Table Bay, on gills of Trigla capensis. (U.C.T.)

Distribution. British coasts; Mediterranean; Martha’s Vineyard, U.S.A.

104 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Gen. Sphyrion Cuv.

1955. Barnard, loc. cit., p. 305.

R. W. Rand, Biologist to the Guano Islands Administration, has submitted

several specimens of this genus taken from the stomachs of seals which had

been feeding on the fish-hosts of the parasites.

Two specimens have a cylindrical knob on either side of the buccal mass,

and indications of a developing knob on each postero-lateral corner of the

‘hammer’. The width of the hammer is 8 mm. and 12 mm., and the length of

Fic. 52.

Oralien triglae (Blainville). Dorsal (left) and ventral (right) views of 2; and g.

the neck 26 and 14 mm. respectively. The ‘8 x 26’ specimen has an even

longer neck, relatively, than the long-necked specimen 12 X 25 recorded in

my paper, p. 306.

The other specimens have a smooth, transversely oblong hammer as figured

for lumpi (loc. cit., fig. 33 6). ‘The hammer and neck proportions vary as

follows: 9 X 11,13 X 16 (two specimens), 7 _<X 22, 11) X 22) en ee ne

OX WAG XK 312,10)<00;

Tyvold (1914, Bergens Mus. Aarbok., p. 15) came to the conclusion, based on

24 examples, that the neck is much longer relatively in young than in old

examples. It may, therefore, be used as an indication of age, but not as a

specific character.

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 105

PYCNOGONIDA

Fam. PALLENIDAE

Gen. Propallene Schimk.

1909. Schimkewitsch, Zool. Anz., xxxiv, pp. 7, 9 (table), 11.

1937- Calman, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (10), xx, p. 534.

1951. Stock, Mem. Inst. R. Sci. Nat. Belg., (2) fasc. 43, p. 9 footnote.

Ocular tubercles at hind end of cephalic segment. Legs without auxiliary

claws. Palp consisting of 2 slender joints. Oviger without apical claw; 5th

joint in g with distal lobe(s), last 4 joints with lanceolate serrate spines. Finger

and thumb of chelifer spinose or setose. Proboscis with setae around mouth.

Propallene similis n. sp.

Fig. 53a-c.

gd—Very similar to kemp: (Calman) (Rec. Ind. Mus., xxv, p. 277, fig. 6 as

Parapallene k.) from India. The thumb of chelifer has 8 setae, 4 longer and 4

shorter; the finger has 7 short spines (in kempz both have 4 strong ‘teeth’).

Calman regards the short basal tubercle of the palp as a joint, with an

elongate 2nd joint. Here the elongate slightly clavate joint is definitely divided

into two, and arises from a knob-like expansion of the integument (cf. longiceps

as figured by Schimkewitsch, loc. cit.).

Oviger, 5th joint apically with a setose lobe on one side, and a recurved

tooth on the opposite side (as in Calman’s figure), distal joints with lanceolate

serrate spines: 12, II, 11, 13 = 47 (Calman does not give the numbers in

Kempt).

Length 2-5 mm. (proboscis 0-5 mm.).

Locality. Algoa Bay, 9 metres. 1 non-ovigerous g. (U.C.T.)

Remarks. 1 have seen Schimkewitsch’s description of the Japanese longiceps

(B6hm) but not B6hm’s or Ortmann’s descriptions. Schimkewitsch does not

give the numbers of serrate spines on the distal joints of the oviger.

Gen. Pallenoides Stock

1951. Stock, loc. cit., p. 8.

1952. id., Bull. Inst. R. Sct. Nat. Belg., xxviii, 14, p. 4.

Pallenoides proboscideum n. sp.

Fig. 53d, e.

§—Body as in magnicollis Stock, but with a pair of knobs, ending in sharp

points, on cephalic segment, which also has one tooth and a denticle on each

lateral margin. An obscure median knob on each segment and on crurigers;

the anterior and posterior distal corners of the latter with sharp points.

106 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Proboscis squarish, slightly wider distally than proximally, apically truncate.

Chelifer scape with denticles on outer and distal margins, and 3-4 rather stout

spines on inner distal corner; thumb expanded basally on inner margin, with

crenulate edge; finger curved, without gape. Oviger with apical lobe on 5th

joint, distal joints with 8, 7, 6, 8 = 29 obovate, extremely finely serrate spines,

with one or two longer serrations basally.

Length 3 mm.

Locality. Algoa Bay, 5-7 metres. 1 non-ovig. g. (U.C.T.)

Remarks. Agrees generally with the genotype except for the presence of an

apical lobe on 5th joint of oviger. According to Schimkewitsch (1909, loc. cit.,

table on p. g) this lobe may be present or absent in species of Parapallene; its

generic importance therefore seems doubtful.

Fic. 53.

Propallene similis n. sp. a. oviger, with serrated spine further enlarged. 6. chelifer. c. palp.

Pallenoides proboscideum n. sp. d. proboscis, chelifer, cephalic and 1st segment. e. oviger, with

spine further enlarged.

Fam. PyCNOGONIDAE

Pycnogonum nodulosum Dohrn

1881. Dohrn, F. Fl. Golf. Neapel., III, p. 203, pl. 16, figs. 1-3.

1953. Fage, Bull. Mus. Paris (2), xxv, p. 381 (in list of West African species).

Agreeing with Dohrn’s description and figures, including the tubercle on

the proboscis.

Length 4-75 mm.

Locality. Algoa Bay, 9 metres. 1 9. (U.G.T. 1954.)

Remarks. I have not seen the papers on which Fage based his 1953 (loc. cit.)

list of species occurring on the west coast of Africa from Gibraltar to the Congo.

ADDITIONS TO FAUNA-LIST OF S.A. CRUSTACEA AND PYCNOGONIDA 107

P. cessaci Bouvier also occurs on the West African coast (1952, Fage. Bull.

Mus. Paris (2), xxiv, p. 531, fig.), but lacks the tubercle on the proboscis and

the nodulose legs. Both species are distinguished from pusillum by the absence

of auxiliary claws.

Pycnogonum sp. cf. microps Loman

Two immature specimens 6:5 and 5:5 mm. in length, collected at Inhaca

Island, Delagoa Bay (U.W.).

Surface minutely granulate, the larger specimen faintly reticulate on pro-

boscis and cephalic segment. No auxiliary claws. 3rd and 4th segments

distinct; crurigers not contiguous. A small knob on hinder part of cephalic

segment, one each on segments 2 and 3; feeble knobs on crurigers, those on the

Ath pair being the best developed. Proboscis cylindrical in the smaller, slightly

tapering in the larger specimen. Ocular tubercle small, eyes obscure. Legs

scarcely nodulose in the smaller, but distinctly so on 1st and 2nd tibiae in the

larger specimen. Oviger short, 8-jointed (incl. claw), apparently not fully

developed.

The smaller specimen has a strong resemblance to muicrops Loman (see:

Barnard, 1954, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., xli, p. 154) from Natal, especially as there

is a suspicion of a minute tubercle behind the ocular tubercle as well as the

larger one on hind part of cephalic segment.

Incertae sedis

Queubus jamesanus Brnrd.

1946. Barnard, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (xi), 13, p. 63.

HOA) ide, lOG: Clty pa 1h 75, es 34.

The University of Cape Town Ecological Survey collection contains two

specimens of this species: one from the type locality St. James (False Bay), the

other from East London (1937).

The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM are issued in parts

publication concurrently.

Most of the Geological and Palacontalowical papers are issued i in conf ueeiem with

intervals as material becomes available. As far as possible each volume is devoted exc

toa particular subject (Zoology, Botany, etc.). Two or more volumes may be i in cour:

‘Geological Survey of the Union of South Africa.

Some volumes and parts are out of print, and others are only sold as parts of a a set, or volu

respectively. The prices of parts published prior to 1940 have been increased.

Out of print: Vols. I, II, V (Parts 1, 2, 8, 9), VII, VII, EX (Part 1), XI (Part 7),

(Part 7), XXI (Part 1), ae XXIV (Part 2), XXVIII (Parts 1, 2, 4), XXXI (Parts a 2,

XLII (Part 3).

except the Geological and Palaeontological parts, which are obtainable from the

~ Vol,

III. 1903-1905 Zoology .. ae a se cs! pete -.

IV. 1903-1908 Palaeontology .. | aes

VV. 1906-1910 Geology, Palaeontology, Zoology, Ancheopalogy

VI. 1g08-1910 Zoology A

IX. 1911-1918 Botany ea Part 1)

X. sIg11-1914 Zoology

XI. sgt1-1918 Zoology ee. ‘Part 7)

XII. 1913-1924 Palaeontology aid Ceotues . (excl. Part 7)

XIII. 1913-1923 Archaeology and Zoology : ; te eee

XIV. 1915-1924 Zoology Bees ae 2 rare

XV. 1914-1916 Zoology .. . st ne ES ech

XVI. 1917-1933 Botany or ee Se Wgaeves i “i ap

XVII. 1917-1920 Zoology .. Ger ns a oe

XVIII. 1921 Zoology .. aye a es aco ott cele

XIX. 1924-1925 Zoology .. ws ae pe ee ee re

XX. 1924-1926 Zoology ot AY) fe

XXI. 1925-1927 Zoology . (exely Partin)

XXIII. 1925-1926 Zoology — ee

XXIV. 1929-1938 Anihiapalesy and: Ethnology . (excl. Part 2)

XXV. 1927-1928 Zoology |

XXVIL. 1928 Zoology se my Ha se

XXVIII. 1929 =Anthropology ss ee re SS ick ey SK

XXVIII. 1929-1932 Palaeontology . (Part 3 only)

XXIX. 1929-1931 Zoology se : ae Me

XXX. 1931-1935 Zoology ... OL ote

INDEX of papers, authors, and subjects, published i in Vols I-XXX. heat

XXXI. 1934-1950 Palaeontology Me + (Part 4 ay

XXXII. 1935-1940 Zoology ey SC HL : : :

XXXII. 1939 -Zoology .. ee Riker ce J Rr as:

XXXIV. 1938 Zoology .

XXXV. Reserved for conclusion of rabncaragl in Vol! XXXIV.

XXXVI. 1942-1948 Zoology a me e

XXXVII. 1947-1952 Archaeology ve aA

XXXVIII. 1950 Zoology .. a, ae Gi wearers Me aie,

0) SLX, TQ52) > 03 Zoology gua se ns os a at

XL. 1952- Botany Part 1, 1s. Part 2, 175. 6d. Part 3

XLI. 1952-1955 Zoology is Be aS oe

XLIT.. 1953- Palaeontology Part 1, 12s. 6d. Part 2

‘

Copies may be obtained from—

The LIBRARIAN, Soutu ArricAN Museum, Cape Town,

GOVERNMENT PRINTER, PRETORIA.

NN OO 0oOW NO = wm Ne m1 G9 O29 69 DR OO OD OD ) & WN oO moat

OR ON HOO

ANNALS |

s “AFRICAN MUSEUM

H, containing : —

2. < The Species of Lepidochrysops, Euchrysops and Cupidopsis of Souther

Africa. The Genitalia (Lepidoptera - Lycaenidae). By DeEsmMonD

PP. MurRAY, F.R.E.S. e

as Nouveaux ou Interessanis de VlAfrique du Sud.

_ Par P. L. G. Benorr, Musée Royal du Congo Belge, Tervuren.

<i HHS > ONS

ISSUED DECEMBER 1956 PRICE 9520

PRINTED oA THE

ANNALS

©).E 7 TELE:

BOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

VOLUME XLII

2. The Species of Lepidochrysops, Euchrysops and Cupidopsis of Southern Africa. The

Genitalia (Lepidoptera-Lycaemdae). By Drsmonp P. MurRAy, F.R.E.S.

(With Plates I-III)

INTRODUCTION

With the recent publication of South African Butterflies by D. A. Swanepoel

(1953) one is now able to deal with the twenty-eight species of this genus in a

more comprehensive way than was previously possible.

Swanepoel does not give any information about the genitalia, although the

very detailed accounts he gives of each species of the Lycaenidae (which com-

prise a third of the volume of 320 pages) are very exhaustive, showing long

experience in the field and careful note-keeping. The present author dealt

with the same matter twenty years ago (Murray, 1935) from a different view-

_ point, but since then a number of new species have been added to the list.

Bethune-Baker (1922) is the only author who has previously studied the

genitalia of the Lepidochrysops (Catochrysops—nom. preocc.) (see also the same

author’s paper on the value of this study, 1914), giving us photographs of all

the then known African species. The three magnificent coloured plates (by

Knight) are the finest drawings that have ever been made of Lycaenids.

Stempffer has already dealt with most of the tropical species.

Drawings of the genitalia are much more satisfactory for comparison of these

organs. The present ones have all been made direct from mounts with the aid

of the camera lucida, to assure accuracy; a photo often conceals the very part

one wishes to examine. The present author has dissected the species of all the

other genera of the South African Lycaenids; the published findings will be

found in two papers (Murray, 1944, 1948). The present genus and the species

of Phasis alone remain to complete the study. The disorganization caused by

the late war was the ma‘n cause of the delay, but perhaps this now proves to

be an advantage since the new species and those hitherto very rare but lately

| rediscovered, can be included. It has been recently shown that it is of great

109

VOL. XLIM. PART 2.

IIo ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

importance in this study to examine first the type species, for all species under

any given genus should naturally correspond with the genotype before being

placed therein (Murray, 1954). Hf the genitalia had been examined first

instead of last when a new species was discovered, we should have been saved a

terrible lot of confusion in names, to say nothing of the consequent contro-

versies to which such procedure gives rise. Unfortunately it is found that the

European, Indian, North American (and no doubt other) species are very

mixed up, simply because in the past wing-colouring was practically the only

standard by which a species was judged and placed accordingly.

With the Lycaenidae this is a much more uncertain criterion than with most

other families. It is to be hoped that we have now passed this stage and make

use of more modern and better methods for differentiation and classification.

Many students still do not seem to appreciate how essential is the present study.

Nomenclature is, of course, another great stumbling-block; yet here again if

the genotype were always taken as the standard to which all species within the

genus should conform, we should be saved the multiplication of small genera,

often quite unnecessary and certainly adding to confusion rather than

elucidation.

In this paper we give short descriptions of the genitalia, after setting down

the genotypes; under each species the place and date of capture, from the

author’s own collection except where otherwise stated, and a few necessary

notes accompanied by clear line-drawings of the male genitalia of all the

species for comparison. The same order is used as given by Swanepoel, and

Peters’ Check List of Ethiopian Butterflies (1952) can be consulted. At the end a

list of food-plants is added, as this important information has been gathered

together over a number of years by various collectors and is now practically

complete.

Detailed description of the genitalia of each species is not necessary as they

nearly all resemble each other very closely.

It is by the shape of the valves (harpes), particularly in this genus, that the

different species are distinguished; these are therefore shown clearly on the

plates. These are the two club-shaped claspers which are nearly always sym-

metrical but occasionally show asymmetry as in L. asteris and caffrariae.

Sometimes the aedoeagus (penis) varies in shape, but not sufficiently to mark

out a species as distinct. It is also often forgotten that before and after coitus

this organ is apt to show differences, according as it is extended or contracted.

The falces are two prominent hooks always present on and being part of the

gnathos, attached to the uncus, which here are bilobed hairy pads. In this genus

they do not vary much in form or length. The anellus is the central cone-like

tube which bears on its ventral surface a shield or place called the juxta, often

holding (in some genera) hairs or scales (i.e. the cristae). The juxta probably

acts as a guide to the penis, through which this organ passes (Pierce, 1914;

Beirne, 1942). In the species of Lepidochrysops the anellus is sometimes large and

of varied shape.

—

GENITALIA (LEPIDOPTERA—LYCAENIDAE) III

Gen. Lepidochrysops, Hed.

1923. Hedicke, Disch. ent. Keit., p. 226.

*1. L. parsimon parsimon (Fabr.). Genotype.

No tail. Exp. 3 37-39 mm. 9 38-46 mm. Potchefstroom, Transvaal, Dec., 1933.

For a number of years this species was confused with plebeja (which has a

tail), until Bethune-Baker (loc. cit.) showed clearly that it was a distinct species.

From the drawing it will be seen that the apex of the valve is quite different in

each case.

2. L. plebgja (Butler).

With tail. Exp. ¢ 48mm. 2 48-50 mm.

Drawing made from Bethune-Baker’s photo-plate. This species has six spots

on the underside of hindwing (as also parsimon), whereas patricia and glauca

have only five.

3. L. patricia (Trimen).

With tail. Exp. 3 38-41 mm. 2 41-45 mm. Pretoria, Transvaal, Febr., 1932.

Natal, Oct., 1942.

This species is generally more common than the two former ones, but often

flies with them. The apex of the valve is rounded, almost club-shaped; the

aedoeagus is sometimes bulbous at the point.

4. L. aethopia (Bethune-Baker).

With tail. Exp. g and 3 50 mm.

Drawing made from Bethune-Baker’s photo-plate as no specimen was

available. It is a larger species than the above.

5. L. glauca (Trimen).

With tail. Exp. 40-45 mm. 9 40-47 mm. Pretoria, Transvaal, Febr., 1932.

Distinguished externally by its pale blue colour and five black spots on the

underside of hindwings. This species has often been confused with patricia

which it closely resembles, and although the apex o’ the valve is also rounded,

it is of a different form to patricia.

6. L. jeffery: (Swierstra).

No tail. Exp. 5 and 2 29 mm. Barberton, Transvaal, Oct., 1945 (Swanepoel).

This is the measurement given in the original description, but specimens I

received are at least 10 mm. larger, 1.e. 38-40 mm. similar to patricia.

* The numbers of the species correspond with the numbers of the figures on the plates.

I12 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

It was first discovered by Mr. Jeffery near Ulundi, Barberton, October, 1906,

and at Noordkioof, Transvaal, November, 1908, the type-specimen being in the

Transvaal Museum, Pretoria. It was rediscovered by Mr. Swanepoel in the

same district October to November, 1945-7. His very interesting account of

his long search for this species, which had not been collected for about thirty-

seven years, should be read.

7. L. hypopolia (Trimen).

No tail. Exp. 3 38 mm. 2 40 mm. Potchefstroom, Transvaal, 1920 (Ayres).

This rare and dull species, only found in the Transvaal, was first taken by

Mr. Morant in Natal, September, 1870, and again by Mr. Ayres in 1903 and

1920 near Potchefstroom, and refound there after ten years’ search by

Mr. Swanepoel, September, 1950-1. The specimen I dissected was one of

those taken by Ayres in 1920, now in the Feltham Coll., Witwatersrand

University, Johannesburg. It is possible that two species have been confused

here, as the figures given by Swanepoel do not look like ¢ and Q of the same

species, and he also queries whether Ayres’ species is identical with his own

later captures. The point cannot be decided until comparison is made of the

genitalia.

8. L. procera (Trimen).

No tail. Exp. 929 mm. 9 30 mm. Natal, Dec., 1941. Estcourt and Weenen,

Natal, Oct., 1946.

This elusive species, although first named by Trimen as early as 1893, did

not become well known until it was found in Natal by Messrs. Pennington and

Swanepoel in October, 1943, and again in October and November, 1943-6.

The underside markings of the hindwing are almost identical with letsea, which

is slightly larger. This led me to confuse the two species in the description

given in the Monograph of the S. African Lycaenidae (Murray, 1935). The shape

of the valves, however, is quite distinct: in procera very long and tapering; in

letsea much shorter and not so pointed. Anellus produced forward with an

irregular front edge.

g. L. vansont Swan.

No tail. Exp. 615mm. Swartklip, Vivo, Transvaal, March, 1948 (Swanepoel).

This small species was first found by Mr. Swanepoel on the flats between the

Zoutpansberg and the Blaauwberg Mts., Northern Transvaal, in March, 1947;

he kindly sent me two males for examination. The valves are very long and

slender, the apex (in the two specimens received) ends in a distinct hook.

10. L. letsea (Trimen).

No tail. Exp. 3 32-33mm. 9 32-38 mm. Potchefstroom, Transvaal, Dec., 1933.

The Transvaal examples show a much lighter colouring on the upper side

than the Cape specimens, which in both sexes is a glossy-brown, not greyish as

GENITALIA (LEPIDOPTERA—LYCAENIDAE) 11133

those taken by myself near Potchefstroom on the border of the O.F.S. (speci-

men now at Pretoria). Mr. Swanepoel says there is very little difference in the

colouring of the g and 9, but the Transvaal examples are distinctly grey, not

brown as those from the Cape. I suspect two different species have been

confused here or overlooked.

11. JL. wrvingt Swan.

No tail. Exp. ¢ 20 mm. @ 22 mm. Barberton, Transvaal, Nov., 1946

(Swanepoel).

Smaller and darker than the last species. First taken by Mr. Swanepoel on

the Nelshoogte Range near Barberton, November, 1946. It flies together with

lacrimosa and tantalus. The valve is similar in shape to that of letsea, but shorter;

the anellus produced into two long pointed arms.

ee denote ((lirinien):

No tail. Exp. 3 31-33 mm. @ 31-36 mm. Natal, 12 Nov., 1942.

Estcourt, Natal, Dec., 1942.

The valve, which is very long, has a sickle-shaped apex, sharply dentate,

according to Bethune-Baker, but my specimens do not show this feature.

13. L. lerothodi (Trimen).

No tail. Exp. 3 32-33 mm. 9 33-36 mm. Mokhotlong, Basutoland, Jan., 1944

(Pennington).

This very rare and dark species (g and 2 both dark brown) was first found

by Major Crawshay in the Maluti Mts., Basutoland, in January, 1902, and

remained unknown until rediscovered by Mr. Pennington in January, 1940, in

the same area and by Mr. Swanepoel in a kloof of the same range in January,

1949, flying with methymna and ortygia. The former collector very kindly sent

me some specimens from which the slide and drawing were made. It has not

been found outside Basutoland. Valve long with apex turned into a sharp

hook; anellus produced into two curved prongs.

14. L. loewenstein Swan.

No tail. Exp. g 18 mm. Basutoland, Jan., 1949 (Swanepoel).

First taken by Mr. Swanepoel, January, 1949, at the same place as the former

species. Although resembling lerothodi very closely, it is much smaller and has

a lunule in the hindwing, which the former species lacks, and five prominent

black spots on the underside of the hindwing. The valves are much larger

than in the former species, the apex being slightly curved but not into a curved

prong.

It4 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

15. L. tantalus (Trimen).

No tail. Exp. $ 33-37 mm. 941 mm. Letaba District, Transvaal, Oct., 1943

(Swanepoel). Estcourt, Natal, Oct., 1946.

After being lost sight of for a great number of years this species was found

again in 1943-6, both in the Transvaal and in Natal. The valves are very long

and narrow, tapering at apex into a slight hook with a fine point; anellus large,

the front edge being greatly curved.

16. L. pephredo (Trimen).

No tail. Exp. 3 32-36 mm. 236mm. Estcourt, Natal (Tring Mus.).

First discovered by Mr. C. W. Morrison at Estcourt in October and

December, 1888, and lost sight of until October, 1943-6, when it was collected

again in the same area. This species closely resembles grahami. The valves in

both species are very similar, with a distinct difference in the shape of the apex,

the former being broad, the latter narrow in comparison ; anellus large, excavated

above in front and curved laterally.

17. L. puncticilia (Trimen).

No tail. Exp. d 25-32 mm. 2 32-35 mm. Withhock [sic] Springs, Transvaal,

Jan., 1938.

A very dark brown species, both g and ¢, on both sides of the wings. The

valves of this species, pephredo, and methymna resemble each other very closely;

anellus front edge sub-conical.

18. L. methymna (‘Trimen)

No tail. Exp. S 20-31 mm. 2 32-99 mm. Cape, Och wnosr

This is also a very dark species. Valve long, apex narrow, tapering into a

slightly curved fine point; anellus front edge well curved.

A much larger variety of this species was discovered by Mr. C. G. Dickson

at the Cape, November, 1936: Exp. 42-44 mm., with very dark brown, almost

black, uppersides. It is as large as triment, which it resembles closely in the

underside markings and with which it has previously been confused. The

apex of the valve shows a more distinctly hooked shape than that of the smaller

methymna; the apex of the valve is given for comparison in the figure alongside

fig. 18. The author thinks it should be recognized as a distinct species on

account of these differences and proposes the name major sp. nov. Cape Penin-

sula, November, 1936 (Dickson). cf. Trans. Roy. Entom. Soc. Lond., \xxxvii,

pt. 10, pl. 2, figs. 48-50, 1938, where methymna and puncticilia are shown together

with the following variety (bacchus). ‘There are at least three or four forms of

methymna; until these have been carefully compared and more material is

available, it is not possible to say whether they are distinct species or not.

GENITALIA (LEPIDOPTERA—LYCAENIDAE) 115

19. L. bacchus Riley

No tail. Exp. 9 13 mm. 9 15 mm. Tygerberg Mt., Cape, Sept., 1936

(Dickson).

This very small example, described as a new species in 1938, was found on

Tygerberg Mt. near Cape Town in September, 1936, by Mr. Dickson, who

very kindly sent me a specimen. Although smaller than puncticilia and much

smaller than methymna, it resembles both these species very closely. My mounts

show very little difference, if any, in the shape of the valves from methymna,

though slightly larger and broader in the latter. “The aedoeagus alone seems

to distinguish them.’—(Riley). But a difference in form of this organ alone

does not warrant specific separation. As already shown in the introduction to

this paper, this organ sometimes varies in form before and after coitus. For

these reasons, in the author’s opinion bacchus is a small variety of methymna,

probably confined locally to dry, arid hillsides and therefore a local variety

but not a distinct species.

20. L. ortygia (Trimen).

No tail. Exp. 3 34-39 mm. 2 39-42 mm. Muizenberg, Cape, Febr., 1930.

Kalk Bay Mts., Cape, Dec., 1942 (Dickson).

The unusually long-arm valves, with the sudden excised sickle-shaped apex,

distinguishes at once this species from all the others. Some examples show a

slightly different shaped apex.

on eo wasiens(Godart):

With tail. Exp. 3 40-45 mm. 92 45 mm. Cape, Nov., 1942.

Until Bethune-Baker (loc. cit.) pointed out the mistake in identification, this

species was confused with the following. Valves sometimes asymmetrical, very

near in shape to trimeni, but distinct; anellus with front edge well arched.

22. L. trimem (Bethune-Baker).

With tail. Exp. gd and 2 38-45 mm. Cape, Jan., 1936.

Bethune-Baker named this insect after Trimen, but there are two species

involved, not one only; the underside also shows a difference from asteris.

Valve apex broader than the previous species; size varies somewhat in both

forms.

23. L. caffrariae (Trimen).

With tail. Exp. 3 38-41 mm. 2 38-45 mm. Natal, Dec., 1941. Cape, Dec.,

1935;

One valve in this species is nearly always asymmetrical, a distinction, as

well as being quite different from the previous two species in form; the left

valve shown in the drawing is the normal form.

116 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

24. L. swanepoeli Pennington

No tail. Exp. 3 20 mm. Barberton, Transvaal, April, 1948.

This small species was first taken by Mr. Swanepoel near Sheba Mines,

Barberton, in October, 1945, flying with jeffery. The valves are very narrow

and long, the most delicately formed of all the South African species.

25. L. grahami (Trimen).

No tail. Exp. 5 33-36 mm. 2 38 mm. Cala, Cape, Dec., 1950 (Swanepoel).

It was first taken by Mr. F. Graham in the north-east Cape Province in 1891.

As already noted, the valves are almost the same as in pephredo, the apex in the

present species being only slightly narrower.

26. L. lacrmosa (Bethune-Baker).

No tail. Exp. 3 30-38 mm. 9 35-40 mm. Greytown, Natal, 1920 (Pennington).

Harding, Natal, Oct., 1922.

This and the two following species show a form of valve quite distinct from

all the former examples; they approximate more to those of Euchrysops, to which

genus the author thinks they should be moved, if we are to adhere to the rule

that species should conform to the genotype. In the present case the valve is

much broader and armed with a hood of fine spines near the apex, distin-

guishing it from miobe; the aedoeagus is large with a fine hooked point; the

anellus forms two curved arms on each side of the penis.

272) HE niobe! | Mirinien))|:

No tail. Exp. g 26-33 mm. 92 26-38 mm. Natal, Jan., 1941 (Clark). Natal,

Dec 1942:

This species is slightly smaller than the previous one. The genitalia similar

in most respects, except that the valves are not armed with spines; aedoeagus

extended to a long hooked point with two fine spines or cornuti (Pierce) ; the

anellus is the same as in lacrimosa.

28. L. artadne, Butler.

No tail. Exp. g and 9 39-42 mm. Karkloof, Natal, April, 1947.

This very rare species was first taken near Karkloof Falls, Natal, in 1897;

it was not until forty-five years afterwards that it was found again in 1941 near

Belgowan, Natal, by Mr. Clark. It has never been found outside Natal. The

photo Bethune-Baker gives of the genitalia clearly shows how inadequate

photographs of these organs often are in comparison with a drawing, as in his

picture the form of the valve cannot be seen at all.

Compared with niobe this species shows a distinct shape of valve; the

aedoeagus is also different, it is nearer in general form to lacrimosa. ‘Through

GENITALIA (LEPIDOPTERA—LYCAENIDAE) 1E7

the kindness of Mr. Swanepoel, who took it at Karkloof in April, 1947, and

sent me a male for dissection, the genitalia can now be compared.

Gen. Euchrysops Butler

1900. Butler, Entomologist, xxxiil, p. 1.

29. FE. cnejus (Fabr.) Genotype.

With tail. Exp. g and 2 27-32 mm. Cawnpore, India, Aug., 1935.

The valves are strongly made, long and straight, excavated at the apex

forming a head like the head of a spanner; aedoeagus long, point divided;

anellus developed into a large cone-shaped organ.

30. EE. barkert (Trimen).

With tail. Exp. 3 30-33 mm. 2 29-36 mm. Natal, Tring Mus. No date.

This is a species that has rarely been found, though where it occurs, it seems

to be locally common, both in Natal and in the Transvaal. The valves are very

long and narrow; anellus a hood-shaped cone; aedoeagus long with a bulbous

apex. This species is definitely wrongly placed here; with dolorosa it should be

transferred to Lepidochrysops. (See under No. 33.)

31. E. osiris (Hopffer).

With tail. Exp. 3 34-38 mm. 2 34-39 mm. Klerksdorp, Transvaal, May, 1932.

Natal, Dec., 1941.

Valves short and broad; apex a rounded dentate head; aedoeagus short,

sometimes holding spines or cornuti; anellus front edge rounded.

32. E. malathana (Boisd.) (syn. asopus Hopffer).

No tail. Exp. J 25-35 mm. 2 25-31 mm. Naboomspruit, N. Transvaal, Nov.,

1932. Potchefstroom, Dec., 1936.

Valve fairly short and broad, the apex book-shaped; aedoeagus bulbous at

apex with two fine spines; anellus cone-like, well developed.

_ 33. £. dolorosa (‘Trimen).

No tail. Exp. J 25-29 mm. 9 29 mm. Magaliesberg, Transvaal, Oct., 1927.

Valves very long and narrow, tapering into a fine hooked point; aedoeagus

divided at apex; anellus cone-shaped. This species, with barkert (No. 30) is

definitely wrongly placed here; the genital form is identical with that of all

the other species of Lepidochrysops, to which by affinity both species naturally

belong.

118 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Gen. Cupidopsis Karsch.

1895. Karsch, Ent. Nachr., xxi, p. 298.

34. C. cissus (Godart) Genotype.

No’ tail) Exp. 3) 30-33 mm. 2 30-38) mm" Irene, Pretoria Wcemmmaens

Witpoortje, Krugersdorp, ‘Transvaal, Jan., 1930.

In this genus the valves are of quite different formation from those of

Lepidochrysops, which feature naturally separates the two genera. The form of

the valves in the two species resemble each other closely.

35. C. jobates (Hopffer).

With tail. Exp. J 25-30 mm. 9 26-30 mm. Pretoria, Transvaal, Jan., 1931.

Klerksdorp, Transvaal, May, 1931. Natal, Jan., 1941.

Two new species from Southern Rhodesia have recently been described and

figured, viz. L. ruthica Penn. and barnest Penn. (1953, jf. Entom. Soc. S. Afr., xvi,

pt. 2.)

SUMMARY

The paper has dealt with all the present known species of the Lepidochrysops

found in South Africa, accompanied by drawings of the male genitalia for

comparison and distinction. The great importance of examining these organs

and comparing them with the genotype before a given species is placed in any

particular genus is stressed.

One species only seems doubtful, i.e. L. bacchus, for the reasons stated. The

author considers from the reasons given that L. lacrimosa and L. niobe should

be placed in the genus Euchrysops. E. barkert and E. dolorosa are shown to be

definitely wrongly placed and should be transferred to Lepidochrysops. One new

species is named under No. 18.

The author would like to state that his collection of the Lycaentdae of Europe

(Pethers Coll.), South Africa, India, and of North America has been recently

donated to the South London Entomological Society’s collections now housed

at Burlington House, Piccadilly.

FOOD-PLANTS

Species Plant Family

I. parsimon (1) Lantana salvifolia Jacq. (Swanepoel, Verbenaceae

1953)

(2) Salvia sp. Transvaal (Murray, 1935) Labiatae

2. plebeja (1) Lantana salvifolia Jacq. (Swanepoel) Verbenaceae

(2) Salvia sp. (cultivated) Flowers. Labiatae

Transvaal (Murray)

2 (1)

mM oO BP OO

GENITALIA (LEPIDOPTERA—LYCAENIDAE) 119

Species Plant Family

. patricia Lantana salvifolia Jacq. (Irving) Verbenaceae

. aethiopia = =F

. glauca The same as for patricia?

. jefferyi Becium obovatum N.E. Br. (Swanepoel, Labiatae

1953)

. hypopolia Becium sp. (Swanepoel, 1943) 5

. procera Becium sp. Flowers. Transvaal (Swane- ee

poel, 1953)

. vansoni Lantana salvifolia Jacq. (Swanepoel, Verbenaceae

1950)

yoletsea Lippia scaberrrma. Sond. ‘Transvaal. Verbenaceae

(Murray, 1934)

. irvingi Becium sp. Flowers. ‘Transvaal (Swane- Labiatae

poel, 1940)

. ignota » (Swanepoel, 1953) -

. lerothodi ete 38 1948) 3

. loewensteini speek E 1948) e

. tantalus aN at 9 1943) >»?

. pephredo Becium sp. Flowers. Transvaal (Swane- .

poel, 1953)

. puncticilia Dischima ciliatum Choisy (Dickson, Selaginaceae

Cape, 1943) In the Transvaal

food-plant must

be different as

Dischima_ does

not occur.

. methymna Selago sp. Flowers. Cape (Dickson, Selaginaceae

Cape, 1953) :

. bacchus S. fructicosa Linn. (Dickson, Cape, 1944) 33

. ortygia (1) Selago fructiculosa Rolfe. Cape if

(Dickson, Cape, 1945)

(2) Becium burchellianum N.E. Br. Cape Labiatae

(Clark)

. asteris Selago serrata Berg. Cape Selaginaceae

. trimeni Selago serrata (and two other sp.) (Lunt) x

. caffrariae Becium burchellianum N.E. Br. Labiatae

Salvia sp. Gape (Dickson, 1953) a

Selago sp. (Dickson) Selaginaceae

120 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Species Plant Family

24. swanepoeli Becium sp. (Swanepoel, 1953) Labiatiae

25. grahami Saluia sp. Cape. Flowers (Swanepoel, si

1953)

26. lacrimosa Indigofera sp. ‘Transvaal (Swanepoel, Leguminosae

1953)

27. niobe Indigofera sp. Natal (Swanepoel, 1953) uh

28. ariadne I. astraglina. Natal (Swanepoel, 1953) ry

29. cnejus ome rsa

30. barker i ue

31. Osiris (1) Rhynchosia D.C. Flowers. Transvaal Leguminosae

(Murray)

(2) Vigna monophylla Taub. Flowers.

Kenya (Jackson, 1937)

32. malathana Vigna monophylla ‘Taub. Flowers. Kenya 3

(Jackson, 1937)

33. dolorosa Becium sp. Transvaal (Swanepoel, Labiatae

1953)

34. CiSSUS (1) Eriosema cordaium KE. Mag. Flowers Leguminosae

Transvaal (Murray, 1935)

(2) E. cynoides Benth. Flowers

(Murray, 1935)

35. jobates is ss

REFERENCES

Beirne, B. P. 1942. ‘Morphology of male genitalia in Lepidoptera.’ Ent. Rec., liv, pp. 17-22,

37-39, 1 pl.

1942. ‘Notes on morphology and taxonomy of genitalia of British Rhopalocera.’ Entomo-

logist, Ixxv, pp. 211-16, 17, figs.; and

1943. ibid., lxxvi, pp. 50-4.

Bethune-Baker, G. T. 1914. “The taxonomic value of genital armature in Lepidoptera.’

Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., pp. 314-37, pls. 55-65.

1922. ‘Monograph of the genus Catochrysops.’ Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., pp. 275-366,

pls. 12-32 (3 coloured).

Murray, D. P. 1935. South African Butterflies. A monograph of the family Lycaenidae. With 12 colour

and 6 line plates. London.

A new issue was published later (without date and without the author’s permission)

in which the order of the plates was mixed up.

1944. “The genus Cupido: genitalia.’ 7. Entom. Soc. S. Afr., vil, pp. 82-95, 2 pls.

1948. ‘The genitalia of some S. African Lycaenids.’ 7. Entom. Soc. S. Afr., x, pp. 182-92,

2 pis., 2 figs.

1954. ‘The genera of European Lycaenids.’ Entomologist, Ixxxvii, pp. 4-11, 2 pls.

Peters, W. 1952. Provisional check-list of butterflies of the Ethiopian Region. Lycaenidae. 201 pp.

Pierce, F. N. 1914. The genitalia of the Geometridae. xxix, 88 pp., 48 pls. (Introduction for the

terms used.)

GENITALIA (LEPIDOPTERA—LYCAENIDAE) 121

Stempffer, H. 1936. ‘Contribution a létude des Lycaenidae éthiopiens.’ Bull. Entom. Soc.

Fr., xli, pp. 283, 284.

— 1938. ‘Mission Scientifique de ’Omo. Lepidoptera. Lycaenidae.’ (2). Mem. Mus. Hist.

Nat., Paris. viii, pp. 179-212, 32 figs.

Stevenson, R. H. R. 1939. ‘A new variety of Lepidochrysops glauca with notes on genus

Lepidochrysops.’ Proc. Rhodes. Sc. Assoc., Xxxvil, pp. 41, 42.

Swanepoel, D. A. 1953. Butterflies of South Africa. 320 pp., 17 colour plates. Cape Town.

falty

ates Ag BY

i ihe Rie. >;

Ann. S. Afr. Mus., Vol. XLIII Plate I

1. Lepidochrysops parsimon parsimon (Fabr.). 7. L. hypopolia (Trimen).

Genotype. Africa. 8. L. procera (‘Trimen).

2. L. plebeja (Butler). g. L. vansoni Swan.

3. L. patricia (Trimen). 10. L. letsea (Trimen).

4. L. aethiopica (Bethune-Baker). 11. L. wvingt Swan.

5. L. glauca (Trimen). 12. L. ignota (Trimen).

6. L. jeffereyi (Swierstra).

Ann. S. Afr. Mus., Vol. XLITI Plate 11

Fig. Fig.

13. L. lerothodi (Trimen). 19. L. bacchus Riley.

14. L. loewensteinti Swan. 20. L. ortygia (Trimen)

15. L. tantalus (Trimen). a1. L. asteris (Godart).

16. L. pephredo (Trimen). 22. L. trimeni (Bethune-Baker).

17. L. puncticilia (Trimen). 23. L. caffrariae (Trimen).

18. L. methymna (Trimen). 24. L. swanepoeli Penn.

Inset: major sp. nov. Apex of valve.

Ann. S. Afr. Mus., Vol. XLIII Plate II1

tomes, Sv

FSS

25. L. grahami (Trimen).

26. L. lacrimosa (Bethune-Baker).

27. L. niobe (Trimen). 33. EE. dolorosa (Trimen).

28. L. ariadne Butler. 34. Cupidopsis cissus (Godart). Genotype. Africa.

29. Euchrysops cnejus (Fabr.). Genotype. India. 35. C. jobates (Hopffer).

30. E. barker: (Trimen).

31. E. osiris (Hopffer).

32. E. malathana (Boisd.) (syn. asopus Hopffer).

3. Ichneumonidae Nouveaux ou Interessants de V Afrique du Sud. Par P. L. G. BEnorr,

Musée Royal du Congo Belge, ‘Tervuren.

Les insectes qui font Vobjet du présent mémoire m’ont été confiés pour

étude par le South African Museum a Cape ‘Town.

J’adresse mes remerciements les plus chaleureux a Monsieur le Dr. A. J.

Hesse qui a bien voulu mettrea ma disposition cette collection d’Ichneumonides

d’une qualité exceptionnelle.

Le travail a pu étre mené a bien grace a Paide de Monsieur A. J. Hesse par

le prét de types de Cameron et de Morley, de Monsieur R. Malaise du Natur-

historiska Riksmuseum de Stockholm par le prét de types de Szepligeti, et de

Madame Delfa Guiglia du Museo Civico di Storia Naturale de Génes par le

prét de types de Tosquinet. A tous ma profonde gratitude.

Les types de toutes les espéces décrites dans les lignes qui suivent se trouvent

dans les collections du South African Museum a Cape Town.

Subf. METOPIINAE

Chorinaeus capensis sp. n.

Téte jaune a bande frontale et occiput noirs. Thorax et abdomen noirs.

Pattes jaunes, les femurs partiellement testacés. Antennes brunes, noircies au

dessus. Ailes hyalines.

Flagellum des antennes composé de 21 articles, tous plus longs que larges.

Face et clypéus bombés dans tous les sens, luisants, couverts de ponctuation

peu profonde mais serrée. Front et vertex lisses et luisants; les ocelles limités a

Pextérieur par un sulon. Tempes réguli¢rement arrondies.

Mésonotum finement ponctué, la ponctuation densea la base, plus clairsemée

vers apex; la seconde moitié du mésonotum est aplatie et luisante. Scutellum

entierement rebordé, lisse et luisant sauf quelques points a la base. Méso-

pleures luisants, a fine ponctuation dispers¢ée, la partie postérieure présente une

succession de fines rides longitudinales; aucune caréne entre les mésopleures

et le mésosternum. Métapleures lisses et luisants; il existe de fortes rides

longitudinales sur la partie inférieure. Le propodeon présente une aire médiane

rectangulaire, deux fois plus longue que large, couverte de sculpture finement

ruguleuse. Les aires latérales couvertes de ponctuation dense et profonde.

Tous les tergites 4a ponctuation forte et serrée. Le tergite 1 est 1,25 fois aussi

long que large a l’apex, il porte deux fortes carénes médianes paralléles et deux

latérales. Tergite 2 peu plus large que long et muni de trois carénes entiéres,

dont les deux latérales sont légérement sinueuses. Le tergite 3 porte trois

carénes qui s’estompent vers le milieu.

Tibias II avec deux longs éperons. Les fémurs III sont 2, 5 fois aussi longs

que leur plus grand diamétre. Les tibias III sont 3,2 fois aussi longs que leur

diameétre apical.

123

124 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Ongles des tarses I et II lobés, ongles des tarses III simples. Longueur:

5 mm.

Cap: Mossel bay 12, X, 1941 (R. Turner), 3, holotype au South African

Museum.

Par les tibias II munies d’un seul long éperon cette espéce s’apparente a _

C. latitarsis Benoit et C. quadricarinatus Benoit; elle s’en distingue par l’absence —

d’une séparation caréniforme entre les mésopleures et le mésosternum.

Subf. ORTHOCENTRINAE

Orthocentrus limpidus Seyrig

Cape: Mossel bay 20, X, 1941 (R. Turner), 3.

Cette espéce semble décidément la plus répandue du genre dans la faune

éthiopienne. Jusqu’a présent, elle n’était connue que du Centre africain.

Subf. BANCHINAE

Exetastes peronatus Cameron

Cap: Augusfontein (Calvinia) IX, 1947 (Mus. Exped.) 3 & .

Dikbome, Merweville, Koup, X, 1952 (Mus. Exped.) ¢.

Brandkop, Nieuwoudtville, IX, 1941 (Mus. Staff), 3.

Quatre exemplaires identiques au Type. Le male se distingue de la femelle

par les mandibules tachetées de jaune.

L’espéce était connue par deux exemplaires (2 et ¢) ayant servi a la des-

cription et originaires du Namaqualand: O’okiep et Klipfontein.

Glypta hispida Benoit

Uganda: Mulange novembre, 1922 (R. Dummer), 3, allotype.

Le male différe de la femelle par la ponctuation faciale disparue au milieu,

ce qui laisse le tegument lisse et luisant a cet endroit. Les petites épines du

scutellum sont atténuces.

J'ai décrit cette espéce sur un exemplaire originaire de Basoko, localité

située en pleine forét équatoriale. Il est étonnant de la retrouver en Uganda,

ou les conditions écologiques sont absolument différentes.

Sjostedtiella pulchella Szepligeti

Cap: Mossel bay, 3, XII, 1941 (R. Turner)

Goedehoop (Heidelberg District), X, 1951.

S76stedtiella negripectus Brullé

Glypta Brullé, Hist. Nat. Ins., Hym., 1846, p. 108, 2 3.

Morley, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., XV, 1916, p. 388.

ICHNEUMONIDAE DE L’ AFRIQUE DE SUD 125

Glypta nigro-ornata Cameron, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., V, 1906, p. 117, gd (syn. nov.).

Sjostedtiella nugripectus Morley, ibid., XV, 1916, p. 388.

Sjéstedtiella unirufa Morley, ibid., XXIII, 1926, p. 460, ¢ (syn. nov.).

Le type de Brullé se trouve au Museum National d’Histoire Naturelle de

Paris et son bon état de conservation a permis d’établir la présente synonymie.

Les types de Cameron et de Morley se trouvent au South African Museum,

Cette espéce est connue de la Province du Cap: Stellenbosch, Lammerfontein

in the Moordenaars Karoo, Het Kruis (Piquetberg), et Wit River (Wellington).

Zululand: Eshowe (Bell-Marley).

Sjostedtiella vittenotum Morley

Jai eu VPheureuse surprise de pouvoir étudier de cette espéce encore nele

exemplaires capturés par Lightfoot en méme temps que les types, sur uf

Matroosberg (alt. 3,500 ft.) dans la Province du Cap. Comme les deux types,

il s'agit de femelles uniquement; leur coloration ainsi que les caractéres

plastiques sont stables.

Asphragis densepunctatus sp. n.

A. flavidorbitalis Morley, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., XVII, 1917, p. 217.

Téte jaune aux marques noires suivantes: une strie médiane faciale incom-

pléte, une bande frontale médiane, celle-ci s’étend sur le vertex et envahit

Pocciput. Antennes noires. Mésonotum jaune a trois bandes longitudinales

noires. Scutellum jaune au milieu, noir sur les cotés. Propodeon noir. Pro-

pleures jaunes a bande noire longitudinale. Méso- et métapleures jaunes sauf

la partie supérieure noire. Les sternums noirs en grande partie. Abdomen

d’un rouge brique sauf le tergite I noir en grande partie et une tache noire sur

les deux ou trois tergites suivants. Tous les coxas jaunes, les autres parties des

pattes testacées sauf les tarses III rembrunis et les trochanters parfois noirs.

Ailes hyalines.

Clypéus lisse et luisant. Face densément marquée de points profonds, sa

partie médiane nettement bombée et saillante. Front et vertex également

couverts de ponctuation profonde, mais celle-ci n’est pas si serrée que sur la

face. LTempes rétrécies en ligne droite. Flagellum des antennes composé de

36 articles.

Mésonotum de peu plus long que large, densément marqué d’une forte

ponctuation, l’espace entre les points est lisse et luisant, sans microsculpture.

Scutellum avec une ponctuation dense, ainsi que les méso- et meétapleures.

Propodeon couvert de ponctuation profonde et extrémement serrée, sans

aucun espace entre les points; cette sculpture est uniforme. La caréne trans-

versale normale, réguli¢rement courbée. Les carénes métapleurales entieres.

Le tergite I est 1,84 fois aussi long que large a l’apex, il porte a sa base deux

courtes carénes le long de la fossette basale, i! est couvert d’une ponctuation

126 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

forte; sur les cotés, cette ponctuation est entremélée de quelques rides; l’espace

entre les points est sans aucune microsculpture. Le tergite 2 est 4 peine plus

long que large a apex, densément marqué de gros points, mais ici l’espace

entre les points est couvert d’une microsculpture alutacée. Les tergites 3 et 4

portent également une ponctuation trés serrée mais un peu plus fine que sur le

tergite 2. Tariére aussi longue que le corps. Ongles des tarses avec une dent

a la base.

Longueur: 8-8,5 mm. Tariére: 8 mm.

Province du Cap: Gt. Winterhoek, Tulbagh, 3,600 ft., XI, 1916, 9, holotype

au South African Musuem, et IV, 1916, 9, paratype au Musée Royal du Congo

Belge.

Du point de vue plastique, cette espéce se rapproche de A. rufipes Cam., elle

s’en distingue immeédiatement par la coloration de la téte et celle du mésonotum

ainsi que par la ponctuation faciale, les dimensions du tergite I et la sculpture

différente de ce dernier.

Asphragis recalcitrans sp. n.

Espéce trés proche de A. marliert Benoit; elle ne s’en distingue que par les

caractéres suivants:

Mésonotum d’un roux testacé avec deux bandes jaunes. Le propodeon est

dépourvu d’un sulcus médian. Chez A. marliert Benoit, ce sulcus part de la

base et s’estompe peu au dela du milieu. Le tergite 2 est entiérement aciculé

et ne présente aucune trace de ponctuations dans les angles basaux. La tariére

est nettement plus longue que chez l’espéce citée; elle atteint ici la longueur du

corps. La taille du corps est plus petite. Les autres caractéres plastiques sont

rigoureusement les mémes que chez A. marliert Benoit.

Longueur: 5 mm. Tariére: 5 mm.

Cap: Mossel bay, 23, I, 1940 (R. Turner), 9, holotype au South African

Museum.

Subf. PIMPLINAE

Paracollyria calosoma sp. n.

Téte et thorax d’un rouge brique. Tergites 1 et 7 d’un rouge brique, les

tergites intermédiaires noirs. Pattes I et II rouges. Coxas, trochanters et

fémurs III rouges, les autres parties des pattes III noires. Le tiers basal des

ailes antérieures est d’un jaune doré, les deux tiers apicaux sont violacés; cette

derniére partie renferme une petite tache jaune a la pointe basale du ptéro-

stigma et deux vagues taches hyalines au dela du milieu. Antennes noires,

sauf le dernier article du funicule roux.

Antennes composées de 29 articles, le dernier article tronqué au sommet.

Comme chez les autres espéces du genre, le labre dépasse légérement le

clypéus; ce dernier aplati, luisant avec quelques gros points, son bord inférieur

IGHNEUMONIDAE DE L’ AFRIQUE DE SUD 127

tronqué. Espace malaire peu plus court que la base des mandibules. Face

grossiérement ponctuée, elle n’est pas plus haute que large, munie d’une forte

bosse en dessous des antennes. Front et vertex lisses et luisants.

Le lobe médian du mésonotum fortement saillant et enti¢érement lisse, les

lobes latéraux a ponctuation trés dispersée. Les notaules sont crénelés sur la

partie de leur trajet qui longe le lobe médian. Scutellum lisse et luisant.

Propodeon luisant a quelques points trés dispersés, muni d’une faible caréne

postérieure, semicirculaire; son plan médian accuse un sulcus longitudinal.

Caréne métapleurale absente; la séparation propodeon—meétapleures est

indiquée par une faible rangée de points. Méso- et métapleures luisants,

éparsement marques de gros points.

Le tergite I est deux fois aussi long que large, fortement convexe, lisse et

luisant. Les tergites suivants sont tous transversaux, lisses et luisants. ‘Tariere

aussi longue que |’abdomen.

Ongles des tarses I et II munis d’une dent supplémentaire, les ongles des

tarses III simples. Fémurs III densément ponctués.

Longueur: 16 mm. ‘Tariére: 8 mm.

Province du Cap: Cookhouse, III, 1954, 9, holotype au South African

Museum.

Cette espéce prend place parmi le groupe d’espéces dont la base de Vaile

est jaune doré et l’extrémité violacée et qui compte encore P. flavipennis Cam.,

P. pulchripennis Cam. et P. dapsilis Tosq.

Outre la coloration qui lui est spécifique, cette espéce se distingue encore

par la face pas plus haute que large, la caréne postérieure du propodeon ainsi

que par la présence d’un sulcus longitudinal sur le ce dernier.

Theronia hildebrandti Krieger

Province du Cap: Mossel bay, 15, XII, 1941 (R. Turner).

Cape Town, IX, 1918 (K. H. Barnard).

Robertson, 21, IV, 1927 (J. GC. Le Roux).

Cette espéce a été décrite de Madagascar d’aprés un exemplaire portant une

étiquette de fausse provenance et c’est seulement depuis Seyrig (Mem. Ac.

Malg., XIX, 1934) que nous conaissons les caractéres qui la différencient de

T. lurida 'Tosq., espéce trés répandue et commune partout. II est plus que

probable que les Theronia lurida 'Yosq., signalés par Morley de l’ Afrique du Sud

(Ann. S. Afr. Mus., XV, 1916, p. 387) renferment en partie des spécimens de

cette espece. Jusqu’a présent elle n’avait jamais été signalée de |’Union Sud-

Africaine.

Theronia abyssinica Jacobson

Péninsule du Cap: Claremont, 23, IV, 1943 (D. E. Willis).

Newlands, I/II, 1931 (K. H. L. Key).

I] m’a été donné de réétudier les insectes cités par Morley (Ann. S. Afr. Mus.,

XXIII, 1926, p. 458) comme JT. melanocera. Holmgren et obtenus a Kabete

128 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

(Afrique Orientale Anglaise) comme parasites probables de Plusza orichalcea.

Ces exemplaires appartiennent sans aucun doutea la présente espéce. Dans ce

cas également, les citations de Morley relatives a 7. melanocera Holmgren

doivent se rapporter en partie a T. abyssinica Jac.

La distinction entre ces deux espéces est assez subtile, comme di’ailleurs le

cas pour tous les Theronia actuellement connus; sauf en ce qui concerne la

seul forme mélanique: T. ruwenzorica Benoit. Ce groupe est en pleine évolution.

Chez TJ. abyssinica Jac., les tempes sont rétrécies en ligne droite derriére les

yeux et les ailes sont légérement jaunies. Chez 7. melanocera Holmgren, les

tempes sont nettement arrondies, rétrécies en ligne courbe et leur niveau

atteint presque celui des yeux; les ailes sont légerement enfumées. La forme du

clypéus est la méme chez les deux espéces.

Theronia interrupta Szepligeti

Zululand: Mfongosi (W. E. Jones).

Cette espéce n’etait connue que par le seul holotype originaire du Ruwenzori-

Meru. J’en ai réecemment trouvé un troisieme exemplaire dans les collections du

Musée Royal du Congo Belge, il est originaire du Congo Belge. Kivu:

Rwankwi, 15, II, 1952 (J. V. Leroy).

Ces trois stations démontrent la trés vaste aire de distribution géographique

de cette espéce.

Afrephialtes violaceus Kriechbaumer

Province du Cap: Graafwater, X, 1947.

Nardouw, Clanwilliam, IX, 1941.

Espéce typiquement sud-africaine; décrite par Kriechbaumer de la

‘Caffrerie’ elle fut rédecrite par Gameron comme Perithous violaceus d’apres un

exemplaire originaire de Stellenbosch (Cap).

Charitopimpla sericata Kriechbaumer

Province du Cap: Burghersdorp, XI, 1939 (Mus. Staff).

Natal: Clan Syndicate wattle plantations, 25, VI, 1914 (C. B. Hardenberg).

Zululand: Mfongosi (WV. E. Jones).

Espece inféodée au parasitisme des Psychides. Sans étre commune, elle est

répandue dans toute l’Afrique Noire. Philopsyche abdominalis Morley (Ann. S.

Afr. Mus., XV, 1916, p. 388) est probablement synonyme de cette espeéce.

Les spécimens ayant servi a la description furent obtenus a Kentani (Cap)

comme parasites du Psychide: Chalzoides junodi.

Itoplectis melanospilus Cameron

Province du Cap: Mossel bay, 5, XII, 1941 (R. Turner).

Cette espéce occupe toute la partie méridionale de la faune éthiopienne; la

limite de son aire de dispersion doit se situer au Ruanda et au Congo Belge

(Kivu) d’ot j’ai pu étudier quelques exemplaires.

ICHNEUMONIDAE DE L’ AFRIQUE DU SUD 129

Ttoplectis tosquineti D.T.

Transvaal: Louis Trichardt, Zoutpansberg, 4,500 ft., II, 1928 (R. F. Lawrence).

Espéce trés rare, connue jusqu’a présent par le holotype, originaire du Cap

de la Bonne-Espérance et par un exemplaire récolté récemment au Ruanda

(Kagogo). Les deux exemplaires du Transvaal sont morphologiquement

identiques au type, mais se distinguent par la présence d’une bande noire sur

les cétés du pronotum. Leur coloration est identique a celle de JI. saudus

Tosquinet. Un matériel plus abondant est nécessaire pour pouvoir conclure

sil s’agit ici d’une race distincte ou simplement une question de variabilité

individuelle.

Itoplectis rugosus sp. n.

Téte noire. La moitié basale des antennes est noire, la moitié apicale rousse.

Thorax et abdomen d’un rouge foncé. Coxas du méme rouge foncé; les autres

parties des pattes noiratres, les femurs et tibias I et II blancs en majeure partie.

Tibias III munis d’une bande blanche a la base.

ponctuation forte et dense, en certains endroits cette sculpture est confluente

et forme des rides. Front finement strié en travers, sans points. Occiput faible-

ment découpé. Mésonotum enticérement couvert de forte ponctuation serrée.

Scutellum renflé, gibbeux; sa ponctuation est atténuc¢e. Mésopleures entiére-

ment couverts de ponctuation dense et forte sauf sur le spéculum postérieur qui

reste lisse et luisant. Métapleures ponctués comme les mésopleures; sur leur

partie inférieure au dessus des coxas III cette ponctuation conflue et forme des

rides longitudinales. Le propodeon présente une aire horizontale nettement

sépar€e de l’aire verticale; la premiere porte une sculpture rugueuseridée

transversalement; la seconde se présente sous la forme d’un miroir semi-

circulaire lisse et luisant, et limité sur les cotés par une carene lamelliforme.

La base du tergite 1 est lisse et luisante, la partie postérieure grossi¢rement

ponctuée, les tergites suivants a ponctuation forte et uniforme.

Coxas III mats, enti¢rement couverts de points serrés.

Longueur: 6,5-11 mm. ‘Tariere: 1,5-3 mm.

@: identique a la femelle. Le 3 paratype de Mossel bay posséde les sternums

noirs.

Longueur: 8,8-9 mm.

Natal: Stella Bush (Durban), II, 1914 (Marley), 9, holotype.

Cap: Mossel bay, 13, I, 1940 (R. Turner), 4, allotype, ibidem 17, I, 1940, 9,

paratype.

Holotype et allotype au South African Museum. Un paratype au Musée

Royal du Congo Belge.

Holcopimpla vitellina ‘Tosquinet

Pimpla, Tosquinet, Mem. Soc. Ent. Belg., 5, 1896, p. 325, 6.

Holcopimpla nigricornis Cameron, Ann. S. ‘Afr. Mus., V, 1906, p. 113, @ (syn. nov.).

130 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Pimpla concolor Szepligeti, Sjést. Kilim.-Meru Exp., Il, 8, 1910, p. 85, ° (syn. nov.).

Cap: Wit River Valley, Bain’s Kloof (Wellington), X, 19409.

Zuluiand: Mfongosi, V, 1916 (W. E. Jones).

Transvaal: Louis Trichardt, Zoutpansberg, 4,500 ft., II, 1923 (R. F. Lawrence).

Mozambique: Chai Chai, XI, 1923 (R. F. Lawrence).

Cette espéce se caractérise par la présence d’un large sillon médian sur le

propodeon et par la ponctuation dense de la base du propodeon. Ce sillon

médian est toutefois atténué chez les exemplaires de taille réduite et il subsiste

dans ces cas seulement un léger défoncement médian. Chez le male le sillon du

propodeon n’existe pas; il est remplacé par une zone médiane lisse, luisante et

imperceptiblement défoncée. Chez le male le propodeon en entier, est couvert

de ponctuation dense. La taille de cette espéce varie de 7 a 12 mm.

Delaulax rufus Cameron

Cameron, Ann. S. Afr. Mus., V, 1906, p. 112, 3.

Q—Téte, thorax et abdomen d’un rouge vineux sauf la zone médiane du

front ainsi que le stemmaticum noirs. Deux petites taches noires a apex du

propodeon et deux a lapex du tergite 2. Ailes noircies a reflets violacés. Pattes

rouges, les coxas III noirs.

Funicule des antennes composé de 30 a 32 articles, a l’extrémité les articles

sont plus courts mais ils restent linéaires. Face luisante avec quelques fins

points trés dispersés. Le clypéus séparé de la face par un fin sillon. Tempes

élargies et arrondies. Occiput a profonde excavation.

Mésonotum entiérement lisse et luisant, il est 1,25 fois aussi long que large

(rapport 5/4). Scutellum lisse et luisant, normalement convexe. Propodeon a

courbure réguliere, sa base est grossitrement ponctuée. Meéso- et métapleures

lisses et luisants; la caréne métapleurale entiére.

Le tergite 1 est exactement aussi long que large a l’apex, sa cavité basale lisse

et luisante, mais le reste de sa superficie est densément marquee de gros points.

Le tergite 2 transversal, il est 1,72 fois aussi large a l’apex que long, grossiére-

ment ponctué saufa la base et a l’apex ou subsistent des zones lisses. Le tergite

2 est 1,91 fois aussi large a l’apex que long, la ponctuation profonde mais les

points nettement séparés; a la base et a l’apex subsistent de grandes zones

lisses. Le tergite 4 est deux fois aussi large que long, couvert de la méme

ponctuation. Tariére beaucoup plus longue que l’abdomen.

Longueur: 10 mm. ‘Tariére 7,5 mm.

Province du Cap: Ceres District, Cold Bokkeveld, 15/30, X, 1934 (M. Vers-

feld), 9, allotype au South African Museum; Laingsburg District, Koup

Siding, X, 1952 (Mus. Exped.), 9.

Note—Certains exemplaires possédent le mésosternum noir ainsi que deux

bandes noires sur le mésonotum, ces bandes sont confluentes devant. Le seul

exemplaire connu a ce était originaire de Cape Town.

IGHNEUMONIDAE DE L’ AFRIQUE DU SUD I31I

Aanthephialtes hyalina sp. n.

Téte noire sauf clypéus et mandibules rouges. Thorax et abdomen rouges

aux marques noires suivantes: une petite tache triangulaire a l’apex du mésono-

tum, méso- et métasternum, une tache aux mésopleures sous l’insertion des

ailes postérieures, la partie inférieure des métapleures, deux petites taches a

apex du propodeon et deux a l’extrémité du tergite 2. Pattes rouges, les

tarses III noirs. Ailes hyalines.

Funicule des antennes composé de 29 4 31 articles, les derniers sont graduelle-

ment raccourcis vers l’apex. Espace malaire alutacé, plus court que la moitié

de la largeur basale des mandibules. Face densément ponctuée, l’espace entre

les points est lisse et luisant. Front luisant, muni de deux petites fossettes

centrales, juste au dessus de l’insertion des antennes. Tempes élargies et bombées,

elles atteignent les deux tiers de la Jargeur des yeux. Occiput réguli¢rement

excave.

Mésonotum lisse et luisant, il est 1,2 fois aussi long que large, le lobe médian

tronqué. Scutellum lisse et luisant, normalement convexe. Propodeon

normalement bombé, lisse et luisant sauf quelques gros points espacés dans les

angles antérieurs. Epicnémies enti¢res. Mésopleures a ponctuation serrée sur

leur partie antérieure, elle est plus espacé sur la seconde moitié des méso-

pleures. Meétapleures bombés, ponctués sur leur partie supérieure.

Tergite I, typique du genre. ‘Tergite 2 de peu plus court que large a l’apex

(rapport 6/7), luisant avec quelques gros points au milieu. Tergite 3 lisse et

luisant sauf une é€troite zone basale ponctuée, il est 1,3 fois aussi large que long.

La méme sculpture existe sur les tergites suivants.

Tariére aussi longue que le corps.

Longueur: 15mm. Tariére: 15 mm.

Province du Cap: Upper sources of Olifants River, Ceres, XII, 1949 (Museum

Expedition), 2 99, holotype au South African Museum, paratype au Musée

Royal du Congo Belge.

Cette espéce se distingue de toutes les espéces actuellement connues par les

ailes hyalines et abdomen lisse et luisant avec une étroite zone ponctuée a la

base des tergites ainsi que par la taille réduite.

Delaulax natalensis Cameron

Zululand: St. Lucia Lake, 3, XI, 1920 (Marley). Montclair (Durban), 20,

VI, 1945 (Marley).

Une revision du genre Delaulax Cameron est en préparation. Hemipimpla

bifasciata Morley est probablement synonyme de cette espéce.

Pimpla bicolor Brullé

Brullé, Hist. Nat. Ins. Hym., 4, 1846, p. 98, 8.

Lissonota trochanterata Holmgren, Eugenies Resa, 1868, p. 407, ¢ (syn. nov.).

Pimpla rufiventris Szepligeti, Sjost. Kilim.-Meru Exp., U1, 8, 1910, p. 82.

132 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Cap: Mossel bay, 12, I, 1940 (R. Turner). Katberg, III, 1954. Tradouw

Pass, Swellendam District, XI, 1925.

Zululand: Mfongosi, IV, 1917 et IV, V, 1934 (W. E. Jones).

Espéce rarement récolté et repandue du Cap jusqu’au Congo Belge (Kivu).

Je remercie Monsieur R. Malaise du Naturhistoriska Riksmuseum de Stock-

holm qui a bien voulu me soumettre le type de Holmgren.

Pimpla conchyliata ‘Tosquinet

Tosquinet, Mem. Soc. Ent. Belg., 5, 1896, p. 288, 9.

Pimpla spiloaspis Cameron, Rec. Albany Museum, I, 1904, p. 146, 9 g (syn. nov.).

Pimpla brunnewentris Cameron, ibid., I, 1905, p. 238 (syn. nov.).

Pimpla properata subsp. kivuensis Benoit, Rev. Zool. Bot. Afr., 47, 1953, P- 155

(syn. nov.).

Transvaal: Louis Trichardt, I/II, 1928 (R. F. Lawrence). Potchefstroom

sy Nyittes)

Natal: Durban, VII, 1916 (Marley).

Cap: Robertson, 21, IV, 1927 (J. CG. le Roux).

Rhodésie du Sud: Insiza, I, 1919 (G. French).

Je remercie Madame Delfa Guiglia du Museo Civico di Storia Naturale de

Génes qui a bien voulu m’envoyer le type de Tosquinet en étude, ainsi que

Monsieur A. J. Hesse du South African Museum qui me permit étude des

types de Cameron.

Pimpla conchyliata, subsp. properata Tosquinet

Pimpla properata 'Tosquinet, Mem. Soc. Ent. Belg., 5, 1896, p. 203.

Pimpla pleuralts Buysson, Ann. Soc. Ent. France, 1897, p. 352.

Pimpla madecassa Morley, Rev. Ichn. Brit. Mus., 3, 1914, p. 72.

Pimpla properata subsp. aequatorialis Seyrig, Mém. Mus. H. N. Paris, 4, 1936, p. 13

(syn. nov.).

Cette forme se distingue de la précédente par les femurs III entiérement —

noirs. Il est 4 supposer quil s’agisse ici d’une race biologique qui cohabite

parfois avec la véritable P. conchyliata Tosq. Nous ne disposons pas encore d’un

matériel assez abondant pour trancher la question avec certitude.

Rhodésie du Sud: Salisbury, 19, [X, 1908.

Transvaal: Potchefstroom, I, 1930 (J. Joubert).

Cap: Jackals Water, Namaqualand (Lightfoot).

Outiep, Garies, Namaqualand, IX, 1953 (J. du Toit).

Cookhouse, III, 1954 (Mus. Staff).

Newlands, I, II, 1931 (K. H. L. Key).

Stellenbosch, 30, III, 1927 (J. J. Strijdom).

Cape Peninsula, 1941 (Mus. Staff); roadside, Chapman’s Peak, II,

1934. (Wood and Barnard),

2 (2)

ICHNEUMONIDAE DE L’AFRIQUE DU SUD 133

Pimpla vumbana Benoit subsp. meridionalis nov.

Cette race géographique se distingue de la série typique originaire des

Mont Vumba (Rhodésie du Sud) par le thorax noir, sans reflets métalliques et

par les fémurs III noirs. Les fémurs I et II sont également plus foncés que chez

les exemplaires ayant servia la description.

Province du Cap: Katberg, III, 1954, 9, holotype au South African Museum.

Natal: Bulwer, 1914 (W. Haygarth), 9, paratype au Musée Royal du Congo

Belge.

Gen. Clistopyga Gravenhorst

Ce genre est représenté par quelques espéces paléarctiques et quelques

espéces néarctiques. Une de ces espéces européennes C’. zncitaior F’. fut signalé

par Seyrig du Kenya et plus tard par moi-méme du Congo Belge. Aucune

espéce typiquement éthiopienne ne fut décrite jusqu’a présent.

Le genre fut classé par les auteurs anciens parmi les tribu des Pimplini puis

par les auteurs récents, tels Seyrig, et Townes, parmi les Polysphinctim. En

réalité ses caractéres morphologiques ne permettent son introduction dans

aucune de ces deux tribus sans devoir élargir le sens de ces derniéres. I] se

distingue des Pimplini par ja tariére sortant directement de l’extrémité de

Pabdomen et par le dernier sternite entier. Il est exclu des Polysphinctini a

cause de sa tariére a pointe non acérée et le dernier sternite trés grand pas

éloigné de l’extrémité de abdomen comme chez les Polysphinctini mais trés

erand, dépassant méme l’extrémité de ’abdomen et formant une large gout-

tiére sous la base de la tariére. Il est intéressant de noter que les Polysphinctini

sont tous ectoparasites d’Araignées, tandis que les Clistopyga sont endoparasites

de chenilles de Lépidoptéres. J’ai obtenu en Belgique Clistopyga incitator F.

comme endoparasite larvaire d’un microlépidoptere indéterminé. Je propose

en conséquence de considérer ce genre comme type d’une tribu nouvelle:

CLIsTOPYGINI répondant aux carateéres essentiels suivants:

Clypéus aplati pas comprimé latéralement. Notaules profonds, longs, et

convergents. Scutellum normalement bombé. Propodeon sans aréolation,

parfois muni d’une faible caréne transversale. Carénes métapleurales entiéres.

Tergites a ponctuation profonde et tubercules atténués. Tariére courbée vers

le haut, sa pointe pas acérée et pas muni d’‘ecailles’ comme chez les Pimplinz;

son extrémité apicale lisse. Dernier tergite tres grand dépassant l’extrémité de

Pabdomen et formant une goutti¢re sous la base de la tariére. Ailes san

aréole. La nervure récurrente est percée de deux ‘fenétres’. Ongles des tarses

fortement lobés a la base. Yeux non échancrés.

Clistopyga africana sp. n.

Entiérement roux aux marques jaunes suivantes: Clypéus, moitié inférieure

de la face, deux stries orbitales, deux paires de taches allongées et jumelées

sur le mésonotum, les angles antérieurs du scutellum et son extrémité apicale,

1394 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

partie médiane du métanotum, deux taches sur le propodeon au dessus des

coxas III, langle infratégulaire des mésopleures ainsi qu'une large bande

longitudinale sur ces derniers. Métasternum noir. Les propleures sont tri-

colores: jaunes au dessus et en dessous, le milieu noir et roux: le tergite 2

présente deux taches noires a son extrémité. Pattes jaunes en majeure partie

aux marques brunes suivantes: une tache a la face inferieure des coxas III, une

strie sur tous les femurs, les tibias III en majeure partie et les tarses III. Ailes

hyalines.

Téte entiérement lisse et luisante. Une étroite zone faciale est légérement

bombée et se détache des parties latérales de la face. Tempes rétrécies

immédiatement derriére les yeux suivant une ligne trés faiblement courbée.

Mésonotum trés finement marqué de points espacés, l’espace entre les points

est lisse et luisant. Notaules profonds, séparant un lobe médian saillant; ils se

rejoignent aux 2/3 de la longueur du mésonotum. Le mésonotum est 1,23 fois

aussi long que large et hautement bombé. Sillon scutellaire lisse et luisant.

Scutellum lisse et luisant, normalement bombé. Propodeon sculpté de fines

stries transversales serrées, vers l’insertion de Pabdomen cette sculpture s’efface

progressivement; sur les cdtés, les stries sont subponctuées. Propodeon, sans

trace de carene postérieure. Mésopleures lisse au dessus, 4 ponctuation trés

espacée sur la moitié inférieure. Meétapleures lisses et luisants.

Tergite 1 aussi long que large a l’apex, ses bords réguli¢érement divergents;

couverts de sculpture ponctucée fine et subruguleuse; la fossette basale lisse.

Tergite 2 aussi long que large a lapex, grossi¢rement ponctué, les points se

touchent. Tergite 3 de peu plus court que large a l’apex, a ponctuation dense

mais un peu atténuée par rapport au tergite précédent, les tubercules nets.

Les tergites suivants progressivement plus étroits, a ponctuation plus atténuée.

Taille proportionnelle des 6 premiers tergites.

tergite I 2 3 4 5 69) Mariere

Jongueur 26 32 31 29 27 23 68

largeur 26 DD) OS 32 29 26

Tariére courbée vers le haut et plus longue que les deux premiers tergites.

Nervulus interstitiel. Nervellus de l’aile postérieure brisée en dessous de

son milieu.

gd Identique a la femelle sauf la conformation de l’abdomen qui est plus

étroit. Funicule des antennes composé de 24 articles.

Taille proportionnelle des 6 premiers tergites:

tergite I 2 3 4 5 6

longueur 25 28 25 25 25 27

largeur 7 20 20 20 20 20

ICHNEUMONIDAE DE L’ AFRIQUE DU SUD 135

Longueur 2: 7,5 mm. Tariére: 1,8 mm.

o: 7mm.

Transvaal: Louis Trichardt, Zoutpansberg, 4,500 ft., II, 1928 (R.F. Lawrence),

Q, holotype au South African Museum.

Province du Cap: Mossel bay, 22, I, 1940 (R. Turner), ¢ allotype au Musée

Royal du Congo Belge.

The ANNALS OF THE SOU TH AFRICAN M USEUM are ‘taeued in parts at at inegular {

intervals as material becomes available.

Some volumes and parts are out of print, and bce are only sold as ee of a set, or ee 3

respectively. The prices of parts published prior to 1940 have been increased.

Out of print: Vols. I, II (Paris 1-3, 5, 7, 8), III (Part 1), V (Parts 1, 2, 5, 8, 9), VI (Part 1, -

Index), VII (Parts 1, 2, 3, 5), VIII, LX (Parts 1, 2), * (Part 2), XI (Pans 2. 7 vege: — q

(Part 1), XXIV (Part 2), XXXI (Parts I-3).

Vol.

II. 1900-1902 Zoology and Geology (excl. Parts 1-3, 5, 7, 8)

III. 1903-1905 Zoology .. os Bion alee ..(excl. Part. Le

IV. 1903-1908 Palaeontology os

V. 1906-1910 Geology, Palaeontology, Zoology, Anthropology (excl.

Parts 1, 2, 5, 8, 9)

VI. 1908-1910 Zoology e se: Part a aes

VII. 1908-1913 Palaeontology . (Parts 4 and 6 only)

IX. 1911-1918 Botany Ge. Parts 1 and 11)

X. sm911-1914 Zoology . (excl. Part 2) ©

XI. 1911-1918 Zoology (a Pats a as Index)

XII. 1913-1924 Palaeontology and Geology si rad aie

XIII. 1913-1923 ae ae and Zoology _—. .... ae on ae

XIV. 1915-1924 Zoology : a ss Sige a e os

XV. 1914-1916 Zoology .. ol ee ob Ot eae

XVI. 1917-1933 Botany a2 os ae Aga Shes): ue he ae

XVII. 1917-1920 Zoology ; ee

XVIII 1921 Zoology

XIX. 1924-1925 Zoology

XX. 1924-1926 Zoology .. ea etones ae a a ey

XXI. 1925-19027 Zoology os uf a .. (excl. Part 1)

XXII. 1925-1928 Paldcontatagy | : oy See

XXIII. 1925-1926 Zoology .. aie ds?) Ree

XXIV. 1929-1938 Anthropology and Fetnoloey ea ..(excl. Part 2)

XXV. 1927-1928 Zoology ad aro eee

XXVI 1928 Zoology a

XXVIT 1929 Anthropology oe

XXVIII. 1929-1932 Palaeontology

XXIX. 1929-1931 Zoology

XXX. 1931-1935 Zoology ;

INDEX of papers, authors, and subjects, Ppabliched; in Vols. - XXX..

XXXII. 1934-1950 Palaeontology : ‘ gs 4 ‘nly

XXXII. 1935-1940 Zoology .. we os ie Aes a

XXXIII. 1939 Zoology / A

XXXIV. 1938 Zoology ae ok a *.

XXXV. 1956 Zoology .. ahs ue As a

XXXVI. 1942-1948 Zoology

XXXVII. 1947-1952 Archacolaay

XXXVIII. 1950 Zoology

XXXIX. 1952 Zoology ex wie ue

XL. 1952-1956 Botany .. (excl, Index)

XLI. 1952-1955 Zoology 4 ee ae

XLII." 1953-1956 Palaeontology : 55 .s ae Vs

XLII 1955- Zoology .. Ae ie HAW gf Te (Part 1)

Copies may be obtained from—

The LIBRARIAN, Soutu Arrican Museum, Care Town.

HOR ENDO HN ANNHWOOWNKNNHHHNHNHNOBWWRWOR DAN

Le)

io)

é an

2 10am

OMowr~rH

ORODRMOGCODOOOIOMDS © 09 ooo OM

By LiEUWE | ie

oe XIL n i eee van Brady- ee

“Deur LiuwE Dirk Boonstra., (Met plaat IV.) © Ae

PRICE bei: ea ee

cent A,

TEES OF ° THE SOUTH . AFRICAN MUSEUM 5 es

cn (Pry.) LIMITED, : COURT ROAD, _WYNBERG, (CAPE i | Na

ERRATUM

In the paper ‘Fossil Carnivora from Hopefield’, vol. XLII, pp. 335-347

on p. 340 the teeth whose dimensions are given in Table 3 are P;, P, and M,

mand not P,, P; and M,: on p. 341 the caption to Table 4 should read ‘Dimen-

sions of teeth of fossil Lycaon compared with those of a sample of 11 extant

4. The Skull of Tapinocephalus and its near Relatives. By Liztuwe Dirk

Boonstra. (With Plate [V and seventeen text-figures.)

INTRODUCTION

All the known cranial material of the South African 'Tapinocephalidae is to

be considered in this communication. I have examined the specimens in the

British and American Museums of Natural History and those housed in the

South African Museum. Adequate material exists of the genera Tapinocephalus,

Mormosaurus, Keratocephalus and Phocosaurus, whereas of Taurops there is only a

snout and of Pelosuchus only a single weathered dentary.

HIsTORICAL

In 1876 Owen!? made a snout the type of Tapinocephalus atherstoner and,

although a part of the occiput and a part of the supraorbital region were

associated, they were not described or figured.

Seeley in 188814 founded Phocosaurus megischion on a pelvis and this specimen

with other associated bones were included by Lydekker™ in the genus Tapino-

cephalus until I* revived Seeley’s name Phocosaurus.

Broom’s genus Pelosuchus,®? founded on a weathered dentary, includes among

other bones a fairly good femur and it was on the structure of these postcranial

bones that I* recently included this genus in the Tapinocephalidae.

The first good Tapinocephalid skull was described by Broom® in 1909, in

as Watson terms it ‘a . . . somewhat inaccurate account’ and referred it to

Owen’s Tapinocephalus atherstonei and subsequently (1914) it was made the

type of the genus Mormosaurus by Watson.'®

In the meantime (1912) Broom’ had created the genus Taurops on a very

inadequate weathered snout, and in 1913 Haughton! had published some

poor photographs of a very good skull of Tapinocephalus in the South African

Museum (No. 2344). : }

In 1928 Broom® described an incomplete skull of Tapinocephalus, which I

refigured in 1936.1

In 1931 von Huene™ founded the genus Keratocephalus on some pieces of a

skull associated with some postcranial bones, and in 1951 I? figured an

imperfect skull in the South African Museum which I referred to the same

genus.

In 1936 I? arranged the then known genera of the South African Tapino-

cephalia into a number of groups in an attempt to facilitate our study of the

various described forms. In this admittedly arrangement of convenience I

grouped Taurops and Keratocephalus with Tapinocephalus, and included Mormo-

137

VOL. XLIII, PART 3.

138 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

saurus in another group containing Taurocephalus and Struthiocephalus. Recently,

in a study of the girdles and limbs, I* have included in the former group

Pelosuchus and Phocosaurus and am here also transferring to it Watson’s

Mormosaurus.

In the Tapinocephalidae, thus including the genera Tapinocephalus, Phoco-

saurus, Mormosaurus, Taurops, Keratocephalus and Pelosuchus, the structure of the

skull, considered as a group, can be described as follows:

THE GENERAL SHAPE AND FORM OF THE SKULL

The Tapinocephalid skull is large and massive (length 516-600 mm.,

width 456-543 mm., height 315-384 mm.). The snout is relatively weak,

short, low to fairly low and fairly wide to wide (preorbital length

273-330 mm., height 144-186 mm., width 222-330 mm.).

The orbit, which is relatively small, lies wholly in the posterior half of the

skull. ‘The bones of the preorbital half of the skull are relatively unthickened,

whereas the posterior half has the bones, particularly of the roof, greatly

pachyostosed. In the latter the surface is rough, whereas in the former it is

smooth. In this group the thickening also affects the ‘cheek’, whereas in

Struthiocephalus and its allies this remains relatively unthickened and the

surface is smooth. The pachyostosis of the dorsa] cranial bones is accentuated

in centres in Keratocephalus (vide Struthiocephalus), whereas in the other genera

these centres coalesce, so that in the former the distinct naso-frontal boss and a

parietal mound are present, whereas in the other genera these are incorporated

in the general pachyostosis. This pachyostosis extends furthest anteriorly in

Tapinocephalus and extends less anteriorly in Phocosaurus, Mormosaurus and

Keratocephalus in this order. ‘There is a distinct and abrupt step from the facial

to the cranial surface. The postorbital bar is greatly thickened and massive,

but its postfrontal part is not boss-like, but has its surface flowing evenly into

the general thickening of the upper cranial surface.

The orbits are of moderate size and look forwards and outwards, posteriorly

bounded by the massive outwardly thickened postorbital bar, dorsally over-

hung by the thick pre- and postfrontals; anteriorly the border is much less

thickened, except in Tapinocephalus where the dorso-anterior part is also

thickened.

The nostrils are fairly large and oval, situated on the dorsal surface and

directed mainly dorsally and but little laterally; they lie well back from the

anterior tip of the snout and are separated from each other by a strong inter-

narial bar.

The temporal fossa is slitlike in all but Keratocephalus, where the antero-

posterior diameter is not so reduced; dorsally the bay, characteristic of most

species of Struthiocephalus, is obliterated in all except Keratocephalus, where

remains of a bay are still apparent.

The interparietal width is fairly to very large (120-240 mm.) with only a

slight pinching-in to form a bay in Keratocephalus.

THE SKULL OF TAPINOCEPHALUS AND ITS NEAR RELATIVES 139

Due to the forward position of the quadrate the lower jaw is short and the

gape of the jaws fairly small.

In dorsal view the occipital edge is nearly straight except in Tapinocephalus

where it is concave.

THe BONES OF THE DORSAL AND LATERAL SURFACES

The premaxillaries (P.M.) form the upper median surface of the snout,

stretching from the anterior border posteriorly nearly to or beyond the plane

of the antorbital border. The posterior extent is least in Tapinocephalus and

Keratocephalus and most in Phocosaurus and Mormosaurus. The premaxillaries

form a strong internarial bar and then taper in posterior direction — becoming

very narrow in Phocosaurus and Mormosaurus—to lie in a grove in the nasals.

The abrupt step from snout to cranial roof causes the posterior part of the

premaxillaries to be sharply turned up in Tapinocephalus, but less sharply in

Keratocephalus, Mormosaurus and Phocosaurus in this order.

The nasals (N.) are a pair of long, narrow bones tapering somewhat

anteriorly; anteriorly separated by the premaxillaries and posteriorly forming

a groove to receive the posterior ends of the paired premaxillaries; posterior

to the limits of the premaxillaries the nasals meet in the median line and are

here greatly to very greatly thickened to form the antero-median part of the

pachyostosis of the cranial roof and the greater part of the distinct naso-

frontal boss of Keratocephalus; at the line of thickening the surface of the nasal

is bent more or less sharply upwards, thus facing more or less anteriorly;

here each nasal carries a depression presumably to house some facial gland.

In all but Keratocephalus the nasal thickening is confluent with that of the

prefrontal, but in Keratocephalus these two thickenings are separated by a

shallow groove.

The septomaxillaries (S.M.) are small bones forming the lower border and

floor of the nostrils and extend posteriorly as narrow tapering splints between

the nasal and maxilla.

The maxillaries (M.) are the largest bones of the snout, being long but low;

posteriorly a dorsal prong meets the prefrontal, and a ventral prong extends

further posteriorly with its upper edge meeting the ventro-anterior edge of

the jugal. In the indentation between these two prongs lie the anterior ends

of the jugal and the lacrimal. The ventral edge of the maxilla is fairly straight

and this straight edge curves very slightly upwards anteriorly, where it is

continued by the lower edge of the premaxilla.

The lacrimal (L.) is a small, low and relatively short bone. It is shortest in

LTapinocephalus, somewhat larger in Mormosaurus and Phocosaurus and unknown

in Keratocephalus. It forms only a small part of the median part of the anterior

orbital border, which is relatively unthickened. It is overhung by the pre-

frontal—greatly so in Tapinocephalus, but much less in the other genera, where

the anterior part of the prefrontal is not greatly swollen. It has no contact

with the nasal, because of the intercalation of the dorsal prong of the maxilla.

140 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

The jugal (J.) is a strong bone; like the bones of the snout it is not greatly —

thickened and its surface is smooth, being without pits and rugae. It forms

the antero-ventral, relatively unthickened, border of the orbit. It extends far

ventrally, decreasing in width, with its anterior edge curving down sharply —

from the contact with the maxilla. Its ventral edge meets the quadratojugal

in a firm suture in all the genera except Mormosaurus, where there is a deep

incisure reminiscent of that shown in Séruthiocephalus. Its anterior prong is

short in Tapinocephalus, somewhat longer in Mormosaurus and long and high in

Phocosaurus. Its posterior edge presents a shallow curve, where it meets the

anterior wedge-like prolongation of the squamosal; this indentation is deepest

in Mormosaurus and shallowest in Tapinocephalus.

The prefrontal (Pr. F.) is very greatly thickened along its lateral border to

form the very thick rugose overhanging antero-dorsal border of the orbit. In

Tapinocephalus it is swollen right up to its antero-ventral edge and thus strongly

overhangs the lacrimal but in the other genera its anterior quarter is relatively

unthickened. In all the Tapinocephalid genera it meets the maxilla, and the

lacrimal is thus excluded from contact with the nasal. In dorsal view its width

is seen to vary, this also in specimens of the same genus. Posteriorly it meets

the postfrontal so that the frontal is excluded from the orbital border, but a

longer or shorter tongue of the frontal represents the original participation of

the frontal in the orbital border before the overgrowing swelling of the pre-

frontal and postfrontal pushed it out. Medially the swelling of the prefrontal

is confluent with that of the nasal and frontal in all except in Keratocephalus.

Here the prefrontal is mediaily thinner and a shallow groove-like hollow

clearly demarcates it from the naso-frontal boss, as is also the case in the genus

Struthiocephalus. An anterior tongue of the frontal is intercalated between the

nasal and the prefrontal for a considerable distance in Keratocephalus but less

in the other genera and least in Tapinocephalus.

The frontal (F.) is the largest bone of the dorsal] skull roof. Its median part

is roughly rectanguiar and from this body three tongues diverge; the posterior

tongue is the strongest and extends as a fairly thin to fairly wide wedge, lying

between the postfrontal and parietal to enter the border of the temporal fossa

in its antero-dorsal part; the anterior tongue, already mentioned as a fairly

narrow tapering wedge separating the posterior part of the nasal from the

prefrontal, is much weaker than the posterior tongue and in Keratocephalus lies

in the deepest part of the groove, Jateral to the frontonasal boss; the lateral

tongue is weak and only separates the pre- from the postfrontal for a short

distance medially. Anteriorly the frontals are greatly thickened at their

junction with the nasals, where, in Keratocephalus they form the posterior fifth

of the naso-frontal boss, and in the other genera coalesce in the general pachyo- —

stosis. Behind the naso-fronta! swelling the frontals remain thick and swollen

in YLapinocephalus and Phocosaurus, but in Mormosaurus and particularly in

Keratocephalus are reduced in thickness to form a saddle between the elevated

naso-frontal boss and a mound on the parietal. Laterally the frontals are

THE SKULL OF TAPINOCEPHALUS AND ITS NEAR RELATIVES I41

elevated near their contact with the postfrontals, forming a distinct ridge in

Mormosaurus, which is reminiscent of a similar condition in Struthiocephalus

akraalensis. Posteriorly the frontals meet the parietals in a shallowly to deeply

curved suture just anterior to the pineal foramen.

The postfrontal (Po. F.) forms the dorso-posterior corner of the orbital

border, which is here greatly thickened and rugose, and forming the upper

part of the postorbital bar, extends to the margin of the post-temporal fossa.

(Its posterior extent is inconstant and it is sometimes excluded from the margin

of the temporal fossa by the overgrowing of the postorbital. Even in the same

skull this inconstancy is shown, where it reaches the temporal fossa on one side

but not on the other.) The postfrontal, although greatly thickened and massive,

does not form a distinct boss (as in Anteosaurus) because the frontal above and

the postorbital below are equally thickened with the swellings coalescing.

The great thickening of the postfrontal coalescing with that of the prefrontal

overgrows the lateral tongue of the frontal and thus excludes that bone from

the orbital border. ‘The postfrontal forms a greater part of the dorso-posterior

thick orbital border in Phocosaurus, a small part in Tapinocephalus, a small or

great part in Keratocephalus and a moderate part in Mormosaurus.

The parietals (P.) as a pair form a much smaller part of the cranial root

than do the two frontals. A moderate to large pineal foramen lies near the

frontal suture. ‘The antero-posterior length varies considerably even in the

same genus; in Mormosaurus and Phocosaurus it is very short, moderate in

Tapinocephalus and moderate to fairly long in Keratocephalus. In three of the

known Keratocephalus specimens the pineal foramen is surrounded by a low

moundlike boss, whereas in a fourth this area is flat to depressed. In one

specimen of Tapinocephalus this area is depressed, whereas in another there is a

mound; in Mormosaurus there is a low mound and in Phocosaurus this area is

flat. There is a considerable variation in the intertemporal width of the

parietals; the intertemporal width is great in Tapinocephalus (240 mm.), fairly

great in Mormosaurus (201 mm.), moderate in Phocosaurus (177 mm.) and

moderate to fairly small in Keratocephalus (120-158 mm.). In Keratocephalus

there is still some indication of the pinching in to form a bay to the temporal

fossa, as in some species of Struthiocephalus; and in one specimen of Tapino-

cephalus there is a narrow niche in the upper part of the temporal fossa. The

parietal forms a sharp edge to the upper border of the temporal fossa; from

here the parietal presents a lateral more or less vertical face within the temporal

fossa and here meets the posterior flange of the postorbital and the dorsal

flange of the squamosal. Laterally the parietal enters the posttemporal arch,

extending as a thin wedge between the squamosal and the tabular in most of

the skulls examined, but in one specimen of Keratocephalus the tabular enters

the border of the temporal fossa and the parietal does thus not enter between

the squamosal and the tabular, at least on the surface. ‘he degree to which

this parietal tongue, between the tabular and squamosal, is visible on the

surface of the posttemporal arch is dependent on the amount of overgrowth

142 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

of the tabular. Posteriorly the parietals are buttressed by the tabulars and

interparietal.

The postorbital (P.O.) is a massive bone forming the lower part of the broad

and massive postorbital bar; anteriorly it forms the greatly thickened postero-

ventral part of the orbital border and posteriorly most of the thickened anterior

border of the temporal fossa. Ventrally it abuts against the squamosal in a

long curved suture, and anteriorly meets the jugal along a short suture.

Dorsally it meets the postfrontal along a curved suture running across the

postorbital bar, but posteriorly the postorbital sometimes ascends along the

border of the temporal fossa to meet the frontal and thus excludes the post-

frontal from the border of the temporal fossa. (This inconstancy is even seen

in the same skull, where the postorbital excludes the postfrontal from the

margin of the temporal fossa on the one side but not on the other.) Within the

temporal fossa the postorbital sends a short flange upwards and backwards to

meet the descending face of the parietal and at a lower level it meets the

anteriorly directed flange of the squamosal, which lies within the temporal

fossa of which it forms most of the posterior lining.

The squamosal (Sq.) is the main constitutent bone of the ‘cheek’. It is a

strong element, greatly to very greatly thickened. Its outer surface is swollen

in Tapinocephalus, flat and smooth in Keratocephalus, with a strong ridge in

Mormosaurus, and with a ridge, knobs and hollows in Phocosaurus. Anteriorly

it meets the jugal in a long curved squamous suture—shallowly indented in

Tapinocephalus and Keratocephalus, but deeply in Phocosaurus and very deeply in

Mormosaurus. In its antero-ventral corner it receives the quadratojugal, which

appears to be wedged into it, with a tongue of the squasmosal overlapping the

postero-lateral surface of the quadratojugal. Dorsally it is overlapped by the

strong postorbital along a long curved suture and further posteriorly it forms

the thick lower and most of the thick posterior border of the temporal fossa

and much of the posttemporal arch. From the edge of the temporal fossa it

sweeps inwards to form most of the facing of the anterior surface of the post-

temporal arch and here its dorsal edge overlaps the lower part of the lateral

face of the parietal and at a lower level meets the postorbital. On the surface

of the posttemporal arch the squamosal meets the dorso-lateral tongue-like

process of the parietal, which is usually intercalated between the squamosal

and the tabular for a longer or shorter distance; but in one specimen of Kerato-

cephalus a thickening of the tabular prevents the squamosal from meeting the

parietal on the surface of the ‘posttemporal arch. Lower down the posterior

face of the squamosal is covered by the tabular. Postero-ventrally the squamo-

sal forms the thickly rounded postero-ventral edge of the skull. This rounded

border forms the outer wall of the ‘auditory’ groove; medially of this groove

the squamosal forms a strong and prominent curved ridge which forms the

inner wall of the ‘auditory’ groove.

The tabular (T.) in dorsal view presents only its upper and lateral edge,

which forms the postero-lateral corner of the skull, lining the posterior face of

THE SKULL OF TAPINOCEPHALUS AND ITS NEAR RELATIVES 143

the parietal and the upper part of the upsweeping squamosal. In lateral view

the tabular is seen to present its edge, which forms most of the posterior edge

of the skull.

The interparietal (I1.P.) in dorsal view just shows its upper edge which lines

the median part of the posterior parietal edge. Its width from side to side is

small in Tapinocephalus and Mormosaurus, fairly great in Phocosaurus and variable

in Keratocephalus.

The quadratojugal (Q.J.) in lateral view presents a small to moderate

surface. It tapers postero-dorsally and this end is firmly wedged into the

antero-dorsal surface of the squamosal. It has quite a strong contact with the

jugal, except in one specimen of Mormosaurus, where there is a notch at the

junction of jugal with quadratojugal. The quadratojugal is firmly clasped by

the squamosal especially along its posterior edge where the squamosal has a

long ventral process.

The quadrate (Q.) in lateral view has only the outer cotylar face exposed

antero-ventrally of the limits of the quadratojugal.

THE OcciIPut

The occiput is adequately preserved only in TYapinocephalus, fairly well in

Mormosaurus and poorly in Phocosaurus and Keratocephalus.

The occiput of the Tapinocephalidae forms a large surface, very much

broader than high. It is shallowly concave from side to side. Along its median

line the occiput is nearly vertical, with its dorsal edge, however, lying some-

what further posteriorly than its ventral edge. Along the median line the

plane of the occiput makes an angle of slightly more than go° with the plane

in which the alveolar borders of the maxillaries lie. In the median line there

is a robust ridge on the interparietal which runs to the upper rounded edge of

the occiput. On both sides of the median ridge there lies a deep depression —

very deep in one specimen (S.A.M. 11294) of Keratocephalus and not very deep

in Phocosaurus (S.A.M. 11997). The upper edge of the occiput is thick and

rounded and overhangs the lower part of the occiput.

The condyle is directed postero-ventrally so that the skull would hang

downwards. The condyle forms a stout rounded knob that has its dorsal

surface excavated by a shallow groove leading into the foramen magnum. The

dorso-lateral corners of the condyle are formed by the exoccipitals. The

foramen magnum is large and nearly circular. The posttemporal fossae are small

slits, bounded dorsally by the supraoccipital and ventrally by the paroccipital.

The lateral outer border of the skull is formed by the squamosal and medial

to this edge lies a shallow ‘auditory’ groove that has its inner wall formed by a

strong curved ridge formed wholly by the squamosal with no participation by

the paroccipital and tabular as in Struthiocephalus. Ventrally the condyles of

the quadrates lie far anteriorly of the plane of the occiput. In occipital view

the basioccipital part of the condyle forms the median part of the ventral edge,

which is laterally continued by the quadrate ramus of the pterygoid, the

144 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

quadrate condyles and the quadratojugal. Looking at the occiput at right

angles to the plane in which the alveolar borders of the maxillaries lie, much

of the surfaces of the parietal, postorbitals, postfrontals and frontal is seen.

The basioccipital (B.O.) in occipital view shows a T-shaped surface with

the stem, lying in the median line, excavated by a shallow groove leading into

the foramen magnum, and the cross-member forming the ventral edge of the

condyle carrying a large notochordal pit. The dorso-lateral corners of the

condylar surface are formed by the exoccipitals.

Each exoccipital (E.O.) forms a small triangular part of the occipital face

lying lateral to the lower half of the foramen magnum and then stretches

posteriorly to overlap on to the dorso-lateral corner of the condyle.

The supraoccipital (S.O.) is a low, broad bone forming the upper half of

the border of the foramen magnum. Laterally it tapers to a point extending just

past the posttemporal fossa, and forms its dorsal edge. Ventrally its edge is

overlapped by the exoccipital, dorsally it meets the interparietal and, laterally,

the tabular with only small contacts with the paroccipital on both sides of the

posttemporal fossa. The median occipital ridge is low or absent on the supra-

occipital but is a prominent feature on the interparietal.

The interparietal (dermosupraoccipital) (I.P.) is the main median bone of

the occiput. It is a fairly large bone—nearly square in outline—and carries a

strong and prominent ridge along the median line of the occiput. Lateral to

this ridge its surface is shallowly to very deeply excavated. Dorsally it forms the

strong rounded edge of the middle part of the upper occipital edge, meeting

the parietal on the dorsal surface of the skull.

The tabular (T.) is the bone with the largest surface of all the bones of the

occiput. Dorsally it forms the major part of the strong rounded overhanging

edge of the occiput and meets the parietal on the dorsal surface of the skull

and on the dorsal face of the posttemporal arch. Dorso-laterally it meets the

upsweeping process of the squamosal along the posterior edge of the post-

temporal arch. It stretches far laterally but does not contribute to the

formation of the ridge lying medially of the ‘auditory’ groove. Ventrally it

overlaps the dorsal paroccipital edge lateral to the posttemporal fossa.

The paroccipital (P.Oc.) in occipital view is seen to be a strong bar medially

abutting against the basioccipital and overlapped by the exoccipital and

stretching far laterally to meet the squamosal mesial of the ‘auditory ridge’

and overlapping the dorsal part of the posterior face of the quadrate, which it

buttresses very firmly. Its proximo-ventral corner is seen to form the posterior

part of the rim of the fenestra ovalis. In occipital view it obscures much of the

stapes—especially that bone’s distal end.

The quadrate (Q.) in occipital view presents a roughly rectangular face

with, ventrally, a pair of strong rounded knobs separated by a groove forming

the articulatory condyles for the articular. Laterally the quadrate is over-

lapped by the squamosal and flanked by the quadratojugal. Dorsally the

posterior face of the quadrate is overlapped by the distal end of the par-

3(@)

THE SKULL OF TAPINOCEPHALUS AND ITS NEAR RELATIVES 145

occipital firmly applied to it. Medially the short anterior process of the

quadrate is firmly overlapped by the distal end of the quadrate ramus of the

pterygoid and dorsally to this the postero-distal process of the stapes is securely

applied to the posterior face of the quadrate. Latero-ventrally to the postero-

distal corner of the stapes the quadrate carries a low rounded tubercle. An

oval quadratic foramen cuts a notch into the lateral edge of the quadrate.

The quadratojugal (Q.J.) in posterior view presents a small triangular face;:

its inner edge is notched by the oval quadratic foramen; dorsally the squamosal

overlaps the posterior face of the quadratojugal.

The stapes (St.) can only be partly seen in occipital view, as the paroccipital

obscures its upper and dorso-distal corner. The stapedial foramen can just be

seen. The postero-distal process, directed towards the tubercle of the quadrate,

is seen to be applied to the quadrate and firmly wedged in between the par-

occipital and the quadrate and its distal end securely overlapped by the end

of the quadratic ramus of the pterygoid. Proximally the footplate of the

stapes fits into the ventrally situated fenestra ovalis, which has the posterior part

of its rim formed by a downgrown process of the paroccipital and its ventral

edge formed by the basioccipital.

The stapes is seen to lie diagonally, with its proximal end appreciably higher

than its distal end.

Finally, the quadrate ramus of the pterygoid (Pt.) is seen to be firmly

applied to the postero-medial face of the anterior process of the quadrate and

overlapping the ventro-distal end of the stapes.

THE VENTRAL SURFACE OF THE SKULL

The ventral surface of the skull in the Tapinocephalidae is well exposed in

only one specimen of Tapinocephalus (S.A.M. 2344), fairly well in one specimen

(B.M. R.3594) of Mormosaurus, poorly in another specimen (S.A.M. 9082),

whereas little is known of this aspect in Phocosaurus and Keratocephalus.

The bones of the palate and the basis crani lie in practically the same plane,

with the fairly weak lateral pterygoidal rami extending ventral to this plane,

and the bones of the suspensorium lying still further ventrally. Striking is the

very anterior position of the articulatory condyles of the quadrates, which lie

far anterior to the plane in which the basioccipital condyle lies, nearly half-way

up the ventral surface of the skull. The subtemporal fossae are small, short but

fairly wide, the choanae are large, short but wide and the inter-pterygoidal

vacuity is a fairly narrow slit just extending anteriorly to between the posterior

end of the prevomers. A very small suborbital opening lies between the

palatine and transversum. In the projection on to the plane of the maxillary

alveolar borders the surface of the occiput is seen as the occiput makes an

angle of more than go° with this plane.

The basioccipital (B.O.) is, in ventral view, seen to form the greater part of

the occipital condyle. The condyle is a strong rounded knob with its postero-

ventral corners formed by the exoccipitals. The basioccipital has a fairly large

146 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

and deep notochordal pit facing postero-ventrally so that from the atlas the

skull would hang downwards. Anteriorly to its condylar part the basioccipital

has a short but apparently wide face, which is slightly tilted down in anterior

direction and there carries two low tubera lying just posterior to the

basioccipital-basisphenoidal suture. The lateral edge of these tubera forms the

ventral rim of the fenestra ovalis, which thus lies far ventrally. Between the

lateral corner of the tuber and the jugular foramen the basioccipital abuts

against the antero-medial corner of the paroccipital. Further posteriorly the

basioccipital meets the flange of the exoccipital, which overlaps the proximal

part of the paroccipital face.

The basisphenoid (B.S.) posteriorly meets the basioccipital in a digitate

transverse suture at an angle so that the ventral surfaces of these two bones

subtend a very obtuse angle. On its postero-lateral processes the basisphenoid

carries low tubera and their postero-lateral edge forms the antero-ventral rim

of the fenestra ovalis. ‘The anterior extension of the basisphenoid, wedged in

between the quadratic rami of the pterygoids, is short. Along the median line

the basisphenoid carries a low keel lateral to which, near the anterior edge of

the bone, lie the internal carotid foramina. Lateral to each tuber lies the

foramen for the carotid.

The paroccipital (P.Oc.) is a strong and massive bone which forms a strong

and firm connecting link between the cranial base (more particularly the

basioccipital, with the exoccipital overlapping on to its ventral and ventro-—

posterior face) and the tabular, lying dorsally, and the squamosal, laterally,

and its firm support of the quadrate is most important. Its antero-lateral

corner also affords a firm support to the postero-distal end of the stapes, and

its antero-medial corner forms the postero-ventral part of the rim of the

fenestra ovalts.

Concomitant with the forward shift of the quadrate a rotation of the par-

occipital on its long axis has taken place with the result that the paroccipital

presents a much greater face in ventral view than it presents in occipital view.

The two pterygoids (Pt.) together form a relatively small part of the centre

of the ventral surface of the skull. As each pterygoid has no anterior process,

only a weak lateral flange, a short quadrate ramus and in the median line

extending only a short distance posteriorly, it is a not very prominent bone.

Posterior to the interpterygoid slit the pterygoid meets its fellow in the median

line to form a low keel, which is continuous with that formed by the basi-

sphenoids. Lateral to this median keel each pterygoid is deeply excavated to

form a wide and deep diagonally situated groove, which is then laterally

bounded by the quadrate ramus, which is a deep sheet of bone lying obliquely

in the skull and this sheet lies nearly at right angles to the plane of the palate.

Although the quadrate ramus of the pterygoid is comparatively short, it has

a large and firm overlap on the quadrate, being firmly applied to the mesial

face of the anterior quadratic process and extending well posterior of the plane

in which the condyle of the quadrate lies. The upper edge of the quadrate

THE SKULL OF TAPINOCEPHALUS AND ITS NEAR RELATIVES 147

ramus lies ventrally to, but with a fairly firm contact with the anterior part

of the distal end of the stapes, which, passing above it, is firmly applied to the

mesial face of the anterior quadratic process.

The quadratic ramus is connected to the lateral ramus by a strong web of

bone.

The lateral ramus of the pterygoid is weak and does not descend far ventrally

nor extend much laterally, which is in strong contrast to the condition in the

carnivorous Titanosuchia and Anteosauria. It is also relatively weaker than in

the Moschopids, but about the same as in the Struthiocephalids. Laterally

the flange is supported by the robust transversum which, because of the small

lateral extent of the lateral ramus, presents a large ventral face. ‘This is also

seen in Struthiocephalus. Anteriorly the pterygoids do not appear to extend

anterior to the plane in which the anterior edge of the lateral rami lie.

The transversum (Tr.) is a robust bone forming a strong link between the

lateral ramus of the pterygoid and the side wall of the skull, being firmly

buttressed against the inner face of the jugal and, to a lesser degree, against

the maxilla. Anteriorly it meets the palatine in a straight suture, with only a

small suborbital foramen separating them.

The palatine (Pal.) stretches antero-laterally from the anterior edge of the

transverse pterygoid ramus as a thick sheet of bone to form much of the lateral

border of the choana, and has its lateral edge applied to the inner maxillary

surface, where it flanks the alveolar border. In the median line a tongue of

the prevomers apparently prevents the two palatines from meeting each other.

On its postero-median corner the palatine carries a mound-like ridge which

does not, however, appear to be dentigerous.

The prevomers (vomers) (P.V.) are strong but relatively short bones, which

together form a massive interchoanal bar. Their anterior bevelled ends under-

lie the inner face of the premaxillaries. Posteriorly they widen to meet the

palatines postero-laterally, but in the median line apparently send a tongue

posteriorly which is intercalated between the medial edges of the palatines.

Anteriorly, along the median line, the interchoanal bone is grooved, whereas

posteriorly a low keel is developed.

The premaxillary (P.M.) has a very massive alveolar face but in all the

known specimens little of the teeth is known and where infilled alveolar sockets

can be seen they appear to be irregular with some indication of replacement

lingually.

The maxilla (M.) has its alveolar border anteriorly massive and wide but

it then tapers rapidly in posterior direction with a sharp edge continuous with

the sharp ventral edge of the jugal. Little is known of the teeth but it would

appear that they were even more degenerate than those on the premaxilla.

The jugal (J.) in ventral view presents a sharp ventral edge curving sharply

downwards to meet the quadratojugal, and an internal face forming, together

with the transversum, the outer border of the subtemporal fossa. Anteriorly

it meets the massive transversum in a sigmoid suture.

148 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

The quadrate (Q.) in ventral view presents its articulatory surface as a very

prominent feature. The condyle is bipartite with two fairly robust rounded

cotyli separated by a shallow groove. The edges of the cotyli overhang both

the anterior and posterior faces of the dorsal part of the quadrate. Running

obliquely inwards from the inner cotylus is the anterior quadratic process and

it is against its mesial face that the quadrate ramus of the pterygoid is very

firmly applied. Lateral to the outer cotylus the quadrate edge has a rounded

step up before meeting the quadratojugal, which is applied to its outer surface,

with a fairly small foramen quadrat: lying half-way along the suture.

Since the quadrate lies in a forwardly inclined plane much of its posterior

face is seen in ventral view. On this surface there is a small low tubercle above

the inner cotylus, to which the postero-lateral sharp process of the stapes is all

but applied. In ventral view it is very clearly shown how firmly the more

dorsal part of the quadrate is overlapped by the down-sweeping squamosal

outwardly and inwardly by the strongly down-sweeping antero-ventral part

of the strong paroccipital. Above the upper edge of the quadratic ramus of the

pterygoid the distal end of the stapes abuts very firmly against the mesial face

of the quadrate. Another part of the distal end of the stapes passes above the

antero-lateral corner of the paroccipital to abut against the quadrate.

The quadratojugal (Q.J.) in ventral view is seen to be a small element

wedged in between the outer face of the quadrate and the lower overlapping

edge of the down-sweeping squamosa]. A small foramen quadrati notches the

mesial edge of the quadratojugal.

The squamosal (Sq.) is seen to form the angle of the ‘cheek’ and sweeping

downwards it overlaps the quadrate and quadratojugal. The strong and

prominent ‘auditory’ ridge is well shown with the ‘auditory’ groove lying

lateral to the ridge.

The stapes (St.) lies obliquely; from the ventrally situated fenestra ovalis it is

inclined both forwards and downwards. In the ventral view the stapes is seen

to present two distinct faces. The ventral face is elongate with a central waist,

a knoblike proximal end firmly fixed in the fenestra ovalis and an expanded

distal end, which has a long pointed postero-lateral process terminating just

above the tubercle on the posterior face of the quadrate and wedged in between

the quadrate ramus of the pterygoid and the paroccipital. ‘The posterior face,

which is perforated by the round stapedial foramen, is triangular in outline,

with its base applied to the quadrate, after passing outwards above the down-

wardly grown antero-ventral corner of the paroccipital.

By this rather complex system of wedging it is clear that the distal end of the

stapes is all but wholly immovable.

The tabulars (T.), interparietal (I.P.) and the supraoccipital (S.O.) are

visible in ventral view, because the occiput-face is inclined somewhat anteriorly

from above downwards. These bones lie well posterior to the basioccipital

condyle with the first two forming the posterior edge of the skull, which is

slightly concave in Tapinocephalus and Mormosaurus, convex in Phocosaurus and

THE SKULL OF TAPINOCEPHALUS AND ITS NEAR RELATIVES 149

Keratocephalus (except in one specimen), whereas in the Struthiocephalids this

edge is nearly straight or convex, in Moschopids convex and deeply concave

in the Titanosuchia and very deeply concave in the Anteosauria.

THE BRAINCASE IN LATERAL VIEW

Hitherto the braincase of a specimen of Tapinocephalus atherstoner has been

figured! and now a specimen of Keratocephalus, in which both sides of the brain-

case have been exposed, is to be described.

The braincase in Keratocephalus is short and low with the nearly horizontal

basis crani formed by the basioccipital and basisphenoid.

The posterior part of the side wall is formed by inwardly directed plates of

the squamosal, supraoccipital and paroccipital. The antero-ventral corner of

the paroccipital meets the basioccipital to form the posterior part of the rim

of the fenestra ovalis. ‘The anterior half of the rim of the fenestra ovalis is formed

by the basisphenoid.

Anterior to the plates of the squamosal, supraoccipital and paroccipital lie

the prootic and epipterygoid, but the sutures here cannot be determined with

certainty, but appear to lie where indicated in broken line in the figure

(fig. 15).

The epipterygoid (Ep.) appears to be incorporated into the side wall with

the obliteration of the cavum epiptericum. Its base rests on the pterygoid with

possibly a small contact with the basisphenoid.

The posterior edge of the epipterygoid has not been determined with any

degree of certainty, but probably lies where indicated by broken line in the

figure, in which case it is firmly applied to the antero-internally directed

plates of the paroccipital and supraoccipital.

Dorsally the dumbbell-shaped vacuity for the trigeminal nerve (V.) causes

the epipterygoid to bifurcate; the posterior processus oticus meets the prootic,

whereas the anterior processus ascendens meets the under surface of the parietal

_ with its upper edge and the sphenethmoid with the upper part of its anterior

edge. The lower half of the anterior edge of the epipterygoid forms the

posterior edge of the fenestra leading into the fossa hypophyseos.

The prootic (Pot.), as I have tentatively determined its limits, is a small

bone wedged into the dorso-posterior corner of the side wall of the braincase.

Dorsally it meets the parietal just mesial to this bone’s contact with the post-

orbital. Posteriorly its edge is applied to the plate of the squamosal. Its

ventral edge meets the supraoccipital and the upper edge of the processus oticus

of the epipterygoid. Its anterior edge is applied to the posterior edge of the

processus ascendens of the epipterygoid. The prootic forms the upper edge of

the trigeminal foramen.

Of the parasphenoid (Ps.) only the dorsal branch is present, the anterior

horizontal branch is not preserved. It stands with its thickened base on the

upper surface of the basisphenoid and also, anteriorly, on the pterygoids.

Immediately above its base the bone narrows and then thickens in dorsal

150 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

direction so that its two lateral faces diverge to where the sphenethmoids rest

on its outer dorsal edges. Its dorsal edge forms the anterior border of the

fenestra of the fossa hypophyseos. In lateral view its dorsal edge meets the

sphenethmoid in a long curved suture.

The sphenethmoid (Se.) forms a large part of the lateral wall of the brain-

case. In their postero-dorsal part the two sphenethmoids diverge to form a

fairly narrow space to house the fore-end of the brain. Antero-dorsally the two

thin sphenethmoidal plates are applied to each other to form a thin median

septum, which apparently extends far anteriorly. Lateral to this median

septum the sphenethmoid thus forms a recess, with the tractus olfactorius emerging

in its posterior part. Dorsally of the recess in the sphenethmoid the under

surface of the prefrontal is also deeply excavated and in this hollow the bulbus

olfactorius was apparently housed.

OPENINGS IN THE SIDE WALL OF THE BRAINCASE

The fenestra (Hyp.) in the side wall for the fossa hypophyseos is fairly large,

narrowly oval and is bounded by the parasphenoid, sphenethmoid, epiptery-

goid and ? pterygoid.

The fenestra for the trigeminus and abducens nerves (V.) is in outline

dumbbell-shaped and it lies in the upper part of the epipterygoid and causes

this bone to bifurcate into a processus oticus and processus ascendens.

The truncus olfactorius (1) emerges from the posterior corner of the recess in

the sphenethmoid.

The foramen for the n. trochlearis (IV) pierces the sphenethmoid near its

upper edge, just below its contact with the under surface of the frontal.

The foramen for the n. opticus (II) emerges from the upper part of a shallow

depression lying in the sphenethmoid above the large fenestra hypophyseos.

A venous foramen (Ven.) pierces the prootic near its dorso-anterior corner

just under this bone’s contact with the parietal.

A foramen (Ca.) for the exit of the accessory branch of the carotid lies at the

base of the parasphenoid.

The fenestra ovalts (F.O.) lies very low down and its rim is formed by the

basioccipital, basisphenoid and paroccipital.

THe Lower JAw

In all the known Tapinocephalid genera the lower jaw is only adequately

known in one specimen (S.A.M. 9082) of the genus Mormosaurus. Owing to

deformation due to a simple shear the disposition of the elements of the lower

jaw has been disturbed in that by telescoping the dentary has been forced

backwards over the posterior bones.

Because of the great forward shift of the quadrate the lower jaw is very short,

viz. at most only 60% of the maximum skull length. It is massive with a strong

symphysis and the articulatory facets on the articular lie far ventrally —not

much above the plane of the lower border of the jaw.

THE SKULL OF TAPINOCEPHALUS AND ITS NEAR RELATIVES Syl

The dentary (D.) is the largest bone of the jaw with a strong, fairly square

mentum and it forms by far the greater part of the strong symphysis. Its

dorso-posterior end forms a very low coronoid process. On its alveolar border

the dentition is very poorly preserved, with only three roots of teeth present

anteriorly, but what appear to be emply sockets indicate that in life a fairly

regular row of teeth must have been developed, with the anterior ones much

larger than the posterior ones.

The splenial (S.) is a small bone with a weak symphysis with its fellow. At

the symphysis there is a deep groove between dentary and splenial.

The angular (An.) presents a large external face. There is a deep angular

notch and the reflected lamina (lamina reflexa) is a robust sheet of bone, which

in its posterior part lies well away trom the inner sheet of the angular to form

a roomy recessus angularis. ‘The reflected lamina forms the free postero-ventral

edge of the jaw immediately anterior to the articular.

The surangular (S.A.) forms the curved dorso-posterior border of the jaw

and this edge is rounded and robust. Dorsally the surangular abuts against

the dentary and ventrally overlaps the articular. Internally the surangular

presents a large face between the postero-ventral edge of the dentary, the

articular and the postero-dorsal edge of the prearticular. This is the area of

insertion of the m. temporalis.

The prearticular (Pa.) is a long sheet of bone anteriorly intercalated between

the dentary and splenial, and posteriorly overlapping and strongly supporting

the articular. The anterior half of its upper edge meets the coronoid and then

posteriorly it has a free edge lingual to the insertion of the m. temporalis. Its

ventral edge overlaps the inner face of the angular.

The articular (Ar.) is a robust bone wedged in and securely clasped exter-

nally by the surangular from above and the angular anteriorly, and internally

by the prearticular. The articulatory facets on its dorso-posterior surface are

situated low down. The outer transversely oval concave facet is separated by a

low ridge from the inner nearly circular concave facet. A strong but short

retroarticular process is directed postero-ventrally and to it was inserted a

strong m. depressor mandibulae.

The coronoid (C.) is a flat sheet of bone applied to the inner face of the

dentary and meeting the upper edge of the prearticular; it does not extend far

posteriorly and the dorso-posterior corner of the lower jaw is formed by the

dentary.

‘TAXONOMIC

‘TAPINOCEPHALIDAE

Skull Characters of the Family

Skull large (length 488-585? mm.; breadth 400-540 mm.); relatively short

and broad to fairly long and fairly narrow (length varies from 104-127?%

of the breadth); relatively low to fairly low (height varies from 46-69% of the

length); snout short to fairly short (snout length varies from 51-67% of the

Sy ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

total skull length); the snout is low to fairly high and fairly broad to broad

(height of snout from 44-76% of the width of the snout).

The orbit lies in the posterior half of the skull.

The transition from the facial to the cranial surface sloping or very abrupt.

The dorsal cranial bones are strongly pachyostosed with the centres of

thickening coalesced in all but one genus (Keratocephalus); this thickening

occupies from 48-63% of the total median length of the skull. Postorbital bar

wide to very wide and massive; the postfrontal does not form a prominent boss

but its surface curves evenly on to the generally thickened dorsal surface;

temporal fossa small with small to fairly small. antero-posterior diameter;

intertemporal region moderately to very wide (120-240 mm.) ; parietals enter

upper border of temporal fossa; frontal excluded from the orbital border;

lacrimal not reaching nasal.

Quadrate ramus of pterygoid is short.

Dentition in most cases feeble and undifferentiated.

‘TAPINOCEPHALUS

Skull Characters of the Genus

1. The preorbital length is 51-52% of the total median length; the snout is

thus short (preorbital length 273 mm.) and it is broad (330 mm.) and low

(144 mm.), with the height 44% of the width; the dorsal facial surface of the

snout is short and does not extend to the plane of the anterior orbital border;

the transition from the facial to the cranial surface is very abrupt.

2. ‘The dorsal cranial bones are very strongly pachyostosed, with the centres

of thickening coalesced and the transition on to the face is by an abrupt step

along a U-shaped line; the thickening extends very far forward—well anterior

to the plane of the anterior orbital border; along the median line the pachy-

ostotic cranial roof is 339 mm. in length and this is 58-63% of the total median

length of the skull; this great anterior extension is due to the greatly thickened

naso-frontal boss, which does not, however, stand out dorsally above the

general cranial surface. On the sharply up-bent face of the posterior end of

each nasa] there is a fairly deep hollow. The prefrontal is greatly thickened

and this is confluent with the pachyostosis of the nasal and frontal and it

overhangs the orbit forming the greatly thickened antero-dorsal part of the

orbital border and limits direct anterior vision. The area around the pineal

foramen is raised, but its general surface is lower than that of the surrounding

bones.

3. The postorbital bar is very wide and very massive.

4. The posttemporal arch is very thick and the temporal fossa is small with

its antero-posterior diameter greatly reduced. )

5. The dorsal parietal surface is very broad (210-240 mm.) with in one

specimen a narrow constricted bay to the temporal fossa; and the interorbital

width is 88—100% of the intertemporal width.

3 (2)

THE SKULL OF TAPINOCEPHALUS AND ITS NEAR RELATIVES 153

6. Antero-posterior length of the parietal is fairly long (105-114 mm.);

frontal fairly large.

7. The intersquamosal width is very great (495-540 mm.), and is g9-100%

of the median length and the skull is thus nearly or quite as broad as long.

8. The quadrate is situated well forward; the mandibular length is 57% of

the median length of the skull; the quadrate ramus of the pterygoid, although

it extends to well posterior of the condyles of the quadrate and underlies the

Fic. 1. Yopinocephalus atherstonet. Lateral view of skull. x %. S.A.M. 2344.

Slight dorso-ventral compression not corrected.

Note.— All the figures in this paper are not perspective drawings but

projections obtained by pantograph. Those labeiled ‘lateral view’ are

orthoprojections on to the median plane; ‘dorsal’ and ‘ventral views’ are

orthoprojections on to the plane in which the alveolar borders of the

makxillaries lie; the ‘occipital views’ are orthoprojections at right angles

to the plane in which the maxillary alveolar borders lie.

distal end of the stapes, is short; the lateral pterygoid rami form a weak trans-

verse bar of small width.

9g. The dentition is poorly preserved but probably feeble.

Genotype. Tapinocephalus atherstonei, Owen 1876.

Specific diagnosis as for the genus.

Holotype. B.M. R.1705. Snout (there are also other parts of the skull

associated). Near Janwillemsfontein, Prince Albert. Low Tapinocephalus

zone. Coll. Atherstone.

Referred Specimens

A.M.N.H. 5626. Posterior half of a weathered skull. Ganskraal, Prince

Albert. High Tapinocephalus zone. Coll. van Wyk.

154 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Fic. 2. Tapinocephalus atherstonei. Dorsal view of Jal x 4. S.A.Ms

2344-

Fic. 3. Tapinocephalus atherstonei. Occipital view of skull. x }. S.A.M.

2344. Slight dorso-ventral compression not corrected.

THE SKULL OF TAPINOCEPHALUS AND ITS NEAR RELATIVES 155

S.A.M. 2344 (figs. 1-4). A good skull without lower jaw (with parts of the

postcranial skeleton associated). Uitkyk, Beaufort West. Low T apinocephalus

zone. Coll. le Roux.

S.A.M. 11998 (fig. 5). Weathered piece of skull-roof. Sandriver, Beaufort

West. Low? Tapinocephalus zone. Coll. Jack.

Fic. 4. Tapinocephalus atherstonet. Ventral view of skull. x %. S.A.M.

2344.

PHOCOSAURUS

Skull Characters of the Genus

1. The preorbital length is 54% of the total median length as reconstructed;

the snout as reconstructed is thus fairly short (preorbital length 282? mm.)

and it is fairly narrow (222 mm.) and fairly high (168 mm.) with the height

76% of the width; the facial surface of the snout is not very short and extends

to the plane of the anterior orbital border; the transition from the facial to

the cranial surface is not abrupt but slopes up evenly.

2. The dorsal cranial bones are strongly pachyostosed, with the centres of

thickening coalesced and the transition on to the face is by a slope along an

156 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

indistinct indented line; the cranial thickening does not extend very far forward

—just reaching the plane of the anterior orbital border; along the median line

the pachyostotic cranial roof is 267 mm. in length and this is 51% of the total

median length; this small anterior extension of the thickening is due to the fact

that the naso-frontal swelling is situated posterior to the plane of the anterior

e<c--oe ce

pen eS

‘

]

‘

Fic. 5. Tapinocephalus atherstonei. Dorsal aspect of

a weathered piece of the skull-roof. x 4. S.A.M.

11998.

orbital border and to the fact that the anterior third of the prefrontal is

unswollen; the naso-frontal boss is not very prominent, although it is higher

than the general cranial surface. On the sloping face of the posterior part of

the nasals there are a pair of shallow grooves. The posterior two-thirds of the

prefrontal is strongly thickened and this is confluent with the pachyostosis of

the nasal and frontal and overhangs the orbit, but the anterior orbital border

is not greatly thickened. The surface around the pineal surface is depressed

and lies lower than that of the surrounding bones.

THE SKULL OF TAPINOCEPHALUS AND ITS NEAR RELATIVES 157

3. The postorbital bar is fairly wide and massive.

4. The posttemporal arch is moderately thick and the temporal fossa is small

and slitlike with its antero-posterior diameter very small.

5. The dorsal parietal surface is only moderately wide (177 mm.) and the

interorbital width is 107% of the intertemporal width.

6. The antero-posterior length of the parietal is small (72 mm.); the frontal

is not large.

Fic. 6. Phocosaurus megischion. Laterai view of skull. x 4. S.A.M. 11997.

7. The intersquamosal width is moderate (456 mm.); and the median length

as reconstructed is 115°% of the intersquamosal width and the skull is thus

appreciably narrower than long.

8. The quadrate is situated very far forward; as reconstructed the mandibular

length would be about 53% of the median length of the skull.

g. Dentition poorly known but probably feeble.

Genotype. Phocosaurus megischion, Seeley 1888.

Specific diagnosis as for the genus.

Holotype. B.M. 43525. Incomplete coraco-scapulae, humeri, ulna, incom-

plete pelvis and proximal half of the right femur. Varsfontein, Prince Albert.

Middle Tapinocephalus zone. Coll. Atherstone.

Referred Specimens

S.A.M. 11997. Skull lacking tip of snout and without lower jaw (figs. 6, 7)

with the distal end of a femur and radius and an incomplete ilium recently

figured by me.* Locality and collector unknown.

I 58 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

S.A.M. 9103. A piece of the occiput and _ skull-roof. Droéfontein, Prince

Albert. Low? Tapinocephalus zone. Coll. Boonstra.

MorMOSAURUS

Skull Characters of the Genus

1. The preorbital length is 57-58% of the total median length; the snout is

thus fairly long (preorbital length 270-318 mm.) and fairly narrow to fairly

broad (222-279 mm.) and fairly high (150-186 mm.), with the height 67-68%

Fic. 7. Phocosaurus megischion. Dorsal view of skull. x 3.

S.A.M. 11997.

of the width; the facial surface of the snout is fairly short and it does not

extend to the plane of the antorbital border; the transition from the facial to

the cranial surface is abrupt.

2. The dorsal cranial bones are strongly pachyostosed, with the centres of

thickening coalesced and the transition on to the face is by an abrupt step

along a curved transverse line; the thickening extends far forward—anterior

to the plane of the anterior orbital border; along the median line the pachyo-

stotic cranial roof is 252-267 mm. in length and this is 48-55% of the total

median length of the skull; this moderate anterior extension is due to the

THE SKULL OF TAPINOCEPHALUS AND ITS NEAR RELATIVES 159

thickened naso-frontal boss, which stands out well above the general cranial

surface. On the upwardly sloping face of the posterior part of the nasals there

are a pair of shallow depressions. The prefrontal is greatly thickened in its

posterior three-quarters but not in its anterior one-quarter and it overhangs

the orbit, but the antero-dorsal orbital border is not greatly thickened. The

surface around the pineal foramen is lower than that of the surrounding bones.

Fic. 8. Mormosaurus seeleyi. Lateral view of skull and lower jaw. x 14.

S.A.M. 9082. With correction of the simple shear the skull has suffered.

3. The postorbital bar is fairly wide and massive.

4. ‘The posttemporal arch is thick and the temporal fossa is small with its

antero-posterior diameter small to moderate.

5. The dorsal parietal surface is moderate to broad (150-200 mm.) and the

interorbital width is 88-9794 of the intertemporal width.

6. The antero-posterior length of the parietal is small (75 mm.) and the

frontal is fairly large.

7. The intersquamosa] width is moderate to great (438-477 mm.); and the

median length is 105-115% of the intersquamosal width and the skull is thus

slightly to appreciably narrower than long.

8. The quadrate is situated fairly far forward; the mandibular length is

59-64% of the median length of the skull; the lateral pterygoid rami weak but

fairly wide.

g. ‘The dentition is poorly preserved, but the anterior teeth in one specimen

fairly robust.

160 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Genotype. Mormosaurus seeleyi, Watson 1914.

Specific diagnosis as for the genus.

Holotype. B.M. R.3594. Skull without lower jaw. Koup. Low? Tapino-

cephalus zone. Coll. Seeley.

Fic. 9. Mormosaurus seeleyi. Dorsal view of skull. x %. S.A.M.

go82. With correction of the simple shear the skull has under-

gone.

Referred Specimen

S.A.M. 9082. A good but sheared skull with the left mandibular ramus

(figs. 8-10). Klein-Koedoeskop, Beaufort West. Low Tapinocephalus zone.

Coll. Boonstra.

KERATOCEPHALUS

Skull Characters of the Genus

1. The preorbital length is 51-67% of the total median length as recon-

structed; no snout is fully known but the transition from the facial to the

cranial surface is fairly abrupt.

3 (3)

THE SKULL OF TAPINOCEPHALUS AND ITS NEAR RELATIVES 161

2. The dorsal cranial bones strongly pachyostosed from centres which do not

coalesce and the transition on to the face is not along a continuous line, being

in parts abrupt, whereas in others gently sloping; along the median line the

pachyostotic cranial roof is 260-330 mm. in length and this is 50-59% of the

total median length as reconstructed; the great anterior extent of this thickening

is concentrated in the high isolated naso-frontal boss, which stands out very

prominently above the general cranial surface and also from the prefrontal

swelling from which it is sharply demarcated by a shallow groove. The sloping

face of the posterior part of the nasals does not appear to house any groove or

Fic. 10. Mormosaurus seeleyi. S.A.M. 9082.

Above. Lingual view of lower jaw. x %. With the

telescoping of the bones corrected.

I-IV. Sections of the jaw, without correction of

the telescoping the constituent bones have suffered

from a simple shear. The levels of the sections are

indicated by the figures 1-1, 2-2, 3-3, 4-4 in the

top figure. x Ht.

162 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

deep hollow. The prefrontal, although thickened and overhanging the orbit,

lies in a plane much lower than the naso-frontal boss, from which it is

separated by a shallow, broad groove, and the antero-dorsal part of the

orbital border is not greatly thickened.

The area around the pineal foramen forms a low to fairly high mound and

this lies higher than the surface of the surrounding bones.

Fic. 11. Keratocephalus moloch. Lateral view of skull, with correction of the

simple shear it has suffered. x 4. S.A.M. 11937.

3. The postorbital bar is wide to very wide and massive.

4. The posttemporal arch is moderately thick to thick and the temporal

fossa is fairly large with a fairly large antero-posterior diameter.

5. The dorsal parietal surface is fairly narrow to moderately wide (120-

171 mm.) and the interorbital width is 106-130% of the intertemporal width.

In one specimen the lateral edge of the parietal surface is definitely pinched in

as in some specimens of Struthiocephalus.

6. The antero-posterior length of the parietal is fairly long to long (102-

135 mm.); the frontal is fairly short to fairly long.

7. The intersquamosal width is moderate to large (400?-480 mm.); the

median length as reconstructed is 111-127% of the intersquamosal width and

the skull is thus appreciably to much narrower than long.

8. The quadrate is situated fairly far forward.

g. In one specimen (S.A.M. 8946), where part of the jaw is preserved, the

preserved sockets indicate a dentition as well developed as in some of the

Struthiocephalids.

THE SKULL OF TAPINOCEPHALUS AND ITS NEAR RELATIVES 163

Genotype. Keratocephalus moloch, von Huene 1931.

Specific diagnosis as for the genus.

Holotype. Tibingen University No. ?. Parts of the skull and postcranial

elements. Abrahamskraal, Prince Albert. Low Tapinocephalus zone. Coll. von

Huene.

pce ee

of ' =

- '-

ye ec --

’

‘

’

‘

’

See ad eK 5

Fic. 12. Keratocephalus moloch. Dorsal view of the skull, with

correction of the distortion caused by a simple shear. x .

S.A.M. 11937.

Referred Specimens

S.A.M. 10557. Good skull-roof. Fraserburg Boad, Prince Albert. Low Tapino-

cephalus zone. Coll. Boonstra. This specimen was figured by me in 1951.”

S.A.M. 11937. The posterior two-thirds of a skull (figs. 11, 12) with parts of

the postcranial skeleton recently figured by me.* Buffelsvlei, Beaufort West.

Low Tapinocephalus zone. Coll. Boonstra and Marais.

S.A.M. 11294. The weathered and incomplete posterior part of a skull with

the sides of the braincase exposed (figs. 13-15). Boesmansrivier, Beaufort

West. Middle Tapinocephalus zone. Coll. Boonstra.

164 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

S.A.M. 8946. The incomplete posterior half of the skull (figs. 16, 17) with some

limb bones. Mynhardtskraal, Beaufort West. Low Tapinocephalus zone. Coll.

Boonstra.

‘TAUROPS

As only the snout of this genus is known it can only, because of its size, be

tentatively placed in the Tapinocephalidae. 7

The teeth, 14 in number, are typically Tapinocephalian with the largest

three implanted in the premaxilla and the others regularly decreasing in size

Fic. 13. Keratocephalus moloch. Lateral view of skull. x %. S.A.M. 11294.

in posterior direction. This apparently regular set is accompanied by a set of

replacing teeth. The lower jaw teeth are very similar to the upper set.

If this specimen has been correctly referred to the Tapinocephalidae then

there is further indication that in some genera, at least, the teeth are not

degenerate as they appear to be in those genera where good skulls are known.

Genotype. Taurops macrodon, Broom 1912.

Specific diagnosis as for the genus.

Holotype. A.M.N.H. 5610. A snout with teeth. Boesmanshoek, Laingsburg.

Low? Tapinocephalus zone. Coll. Whaits.

PELOSUCHUS

On the basis of some features exhibited by the bones of the postcranial

skeleton preserved I have recently* included Pelosuchus in the Tapinocephalidae.

Of the skull only a weathered dentary is preserved and this shows that in

the dentary, at least, the dentition is typically Tapinocephalian, with large

THE SKULL OF TAPINOCEPHALUS AND ITS NEAR RELATIVES 165

anterior teeth, and that in posterior direction the teeth evenly decrease in size.

If this dentary is thus correctly referred to the Tapinocephalidae then in

one genus of the family at least a full set of regularly placed teeth is present.

Genotype. Pelosuchus priscus, Broom 1905.

Specific diagnosis as for the genus.

PS INES

Fic. 14. Keratocephalus moloch. Dorsal view of skull. x 4. S.A.M.

11204.

Holotype. S.A.M. 918. A dentary, with part of a scapula, coracoid, a fairly

good femur and a distorted tibia. Bokfontein, Prince Albert. Middle? Tapino-

cephalus zone. Coll. du Plessis.

DiIscussIONn

As I am nearing the completion of my study of the cranial structure in the

other groups of the South African Tapinocephalia and hope to have a com-

parative account ready in the near future, only some points in the structure of

the skull of the Tapinocephalidae call for discussion at this stage.

166 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

AGE IN THE SKULL OF THE T'APINOCEPHALIDAE

In the Moschopid, Moschops and the Struthiocephalid, Struthiocephalus, where

a fair number of skulls is available for comparative study, there is evidence

(somewhat obscured by the possibility of sexual dimorphism) that with

increasing age the pachyostosis is intensified. But there is also evidence that

the increased pachyostosis during the lifetime of the individual is paralleled

by a very similar increased pachyostosis during the evolution of the group.

In the Tapinocephalids we still have insufficient material to supply the

necessary evidence on these matters.

Fic. 15. Keratocephalus moloch. Lateral view of braincase, incorporating features

of both right and left sides. x $. S.A.M. 11294.

eo Fe

Meence='

Fic. 16. Keratocephalus moloch. Lateral view of skull. x 4. S.A.M. 8946.

Dorso-ventral compression uncorrected.

THE SKULL OF TAPINOCEPHALUS AND ITS NEAR RELATIVES 167

It is quite clear that the skull S.A.M. 2344 is that of an old reptile. The

sutures are all very much closed, and the poor preservation of the dentition

is due to gerontism and not to the postmortem loss of teeth prior to petrifaction,

in which case the alveoli would be matrix-filled and clearly determinable,

whereas in fact separate alveoli are rarely visible. Now, the pachyostosis in

this skull is very great and can also be considered to be due to its old age, but

in A.M.N.H. 5626 and S.A.M. 11998, with very open sutures, the pachyo-

oercPenmny

Zack i ==

- Ls =

‘

’

‘

’

‘

Fic. 17. Keratocephalus moloch. Dorsal view of skull. x 4.

S.A.M. 8946.

stosis is also very great so that it would appear that the great pachyostosis is

not a function of age but a phyletic character.

In the one well-known skull of Phocosaurus, although the sutures are fairly

open, the pachyostosis is fairly great and this again points to the phyletic

character of the pachyostosis.

In the two known skulls of Mormosaurus the sutures are not open, the teeth

are not strongly developed (especially posteriorly) and the pachyostosis is

great, which apparently points to the pachyostosis being a character of old age.

In the five known skulls of Keratocephalus the dentition is apparently well

developed, with no indication of degeneracy or gerontism; the sutures are

168 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

mostly fairly open and the centres of pachyostosis tend to remain uncoalesced.

But, although these skulls may thus be thought to be of fairly young animals,

there is a considerable difference in size (length as reconstructed varying from

488-585 mm. and breadth from 400-480 mm.) which, apart from possibly

indicating males and females, would point to stages of growth or age within

the species.

My conclusion is that the genera Keratocephalus, Mormosaurus, Phocosaurus and

T apinocephalus cannot be considered to represent growth stages of a single genus,

but represent distinct directions of phyletic development.

SomME PALAEOBIOLOGICAL CONCLUSIONS

In my recent account* of the Deinocephalian girdles and limbs I pointed

out that these skeletal parts indicate that the Tapinocephalidae were chiefly

marsh dwellers, spending most of their time in the shallow ponds and pools

and but seldom moving far on solid ground.

The nature of the dentition and the massiveness of the skulls described

above lend further support to this view. With such a cumbersome body, a

locomotor apparatus so ill adapted to efficient terrestrial ambulation and an

extremely unwieldy masticating mechanism, with its rather feeble mandible

hinged on to such a heavy and massive cranium, feeding on dry ground and

chewing tough vegetable matter would have been extremely unlikely, whereas,

with the heavy body and head buoyed up in the water, feeding on soft and

dJuscious marsh vegetation would be not only possible but imperative.

REFERENCES

1 Boonstra, L. D. “Some Features of the Cranial Morphology of the Tapinocephalid Deino-

cephalians.’ Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., 72, 2, 75-98. 1936.

2 Boonstra, L. D. ‘Kurze Notiz iiber den Schadel der Dinocephalen-Gattung Keratocephalus

F. v. Huene.’ Neues Fb. Geol. Paliontol., Mh. 11, 341-344. 1951.

3 Boonstra, L. D. “The Cranial Morphology and Taxonomy of the Tapinocephalid genus

Struthiocephalus.’ Ann. S. Afr. Mus., 42, 1, 32-53. 1953.

4 Boonstra, L. D. “The Girdles and Limbs of the South African Deinocephalia.’ Ann. S. Afr.

Mus., 42, 3, 185-326. 1955.

5 Broom, R. ‘Notice of some new Fossil Reptiles from the Karroo Beds of South Africa.’ Ree.

Albany Mus., 1, 55 331-7. 1905.

6 Broom, R. ‘On the Skull of Tapinocephalus.’ Geol. Mag., 6, 543, 400-402. 1909.

7 Broom, R. ‘On some new Fossil Reptiles from the Permian and Triassic Beds of South Africa.’

Proc. Kool. Soc. Lond., 859-876. 1912.

8 Broom, R. ‘On Tapinocephalus and Two Other Dinocephalians.’ Ann. S. Afr. Mus., 22, 3,

427-438. 1928.

® Gregory, W. K. “The Skeleton of Moschops capensis Broom, a Dinocephalian Reptile from the

Permian of South Africa.’ Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., 56, 3, 179-251. 1926.

10 Haughton, S. H. ‘On a Skull of Tapinocephalus atherstonet, Owen.’ Ann. S. Afr. Mus., 12, 1,

40-42. 1913.

11 Huene, F. von. ‘Beitrag zur Kenntnis der Fauna der siidafrikanischen Karrooformation.’

Geol. Paléont. Abh., N.F., 18, 3, 159-228. 1931.

12 Lydekker, R. ‘Catalogue of the Fossil Reptilia and Amphibia in the British Museum

(Natural History). IV, 81-98. 1890.

~ ee —F

THE SKULL OF TAPINOCEPHALUS AND ITS NEAR RELATIVES 169

13 Qwen, R. ‘Descriptive and illustrated Catalogue of the Fossil Reptilia of South Africa in the Collection

of the British Museum. ‘Taylor and Francis, London. 1-86. 1876.

14 Seeley, H. G. ‘Researches on the Structure, Organization and Classification of the Fossil

Reptilia. Il. On Pareiasaurus bombidens (Owen), and the Significance of its Affinities

to Amphibians, Reptiles and Mammals.’ Phil. Trans. (B), 179, 59-109. 1888.

15 Watson, D. M. S. “The Deinocephalia, and Order of Mammal-like Reptiles.’ Proc. Zool.

Soc. Lond., 749-786. 1914.

16 Watson, D. M. S. ‘Dicynodon and its Allies.’ Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 118, 3, 823-877. 1948.

5. Pareiasauriér-studies. Deel XII. ’n Lewensrekonstruksie van Bradysaurus

seeleyi. Deur LiEUWE Dirk Boonstra. (Met plaat IV.)

Tussen die jare 1927 en 1935 het ek die Pareiasauriérs van ons Karoo baie

deeglik ondersoek en die resultate, veral die osteologiese en miologiese bevin-

dinge, is hoofsaaklik in die reeks ,,Pareiasaurian Studies’ in die Annale van

die Suid-Afrikaanse Museum gedruk.

Nou laat ek hier ’n foto afdruk van ’n rekonstruksie van een van die soorte

van die Tapinocephalus-sone, waarvan daar, veral uit die Koup, ’n hele aantal

vry volledige geraamtes in die Museum bewaar word. Met hierdie lewens-

toneel word die reeks ,,Pareiasauriér-studies” dan afgerond.

Die rekonstruksie van Bradysaurus seeleyi is lewensgroot gemaak en is ’n

getroue weergawe van al die gegewens wat deur genoemde ,,Studies” byeen-

gebring is.

Die plantegroei is nagemaak volgens die gegewens, ongelukkig maar karig,

wat deur paleobotanikers beskikbaar gestel is.

Dat die tuiste van die Pareiasauriérs ’n laagliggende moerasagtige gebied

was, weet ons van die anatomiese bou van hierdie diere, van die aard van die

plantegroei en dit is, ten laaste, gegrond op die gegewens wat deur geoloé

beskikbaar gestel is aangaande die aard en metode van die neersetting van

die sedimente waaruit ons vandag die versteende geraamtes van die Pareia-

sauriérs kap.

Met die opstelling van hierdie paleobiologiese toneel is ek gehelp deur

mnr. C. W. Thorne, wat verantwoordelik was vir die maak en opstel van die

plante op die voorgrond, en deur dr. A. J. Hesse wat so geslaagd die agter-

grond geskilder het.

AANGEHAALDE PUBLIKASIES

1 Pareiasaurian Studies. ,,1. An Attempt at a Classification of the Pareiasuaria based on Skull

Features.” Ann. S. Afr. Mus., 28, 1, 79-87. 1929.*

2 Pareiasaurian Studies. ,,[II. On the Pareiasaurian Manus.’ Ann. S. Afr. Mus., 28, 1, 97-112.

1929.

3 Pareiasaurian Studies. ,,[V. On the Pareiasaurina Pes.”’ Ann. S. Afr. Mus., 28, 1, 113-122.

1929.

4 Pareiasaurian Studies. ,,V. On the Pareiasaurian Mandible.” Ann. S. Afr. Mus., 28, 1, 261—

289. 1929.*

5 ,,A Contribution to the Cranial Osteology of Pareiasaurus serridens (Owen).’’? Ann. Univ. Stellen-

bosch, 8, A, 5, 1-18. 19930.

6 Pareiasaurian Studies. ,,VI. The Osteology and Myology of the Locomotor Apparatus. A.—

Hind Limb.” Ann. S. Afr. Mus., 28, 3, 297-366. 1930.*

? Pareiasaurian Studies. ,,VII. On the Hind Limb of the Two Little-known Pareiasaurian

Genera: Anthodon and Pareiasaurus.” Ann. S. Afr. Mus., 28, 4, 429-435. 1932.

* Met S. H. Haughton.

171

9/24 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

8 Pareiasuarian Studies. ,,VIII. The Osteology and Myology of the Locomotor Apparatus.

B.—Fore Limb.” Ann. S. Afr. Mus., 28, 4, 436-503. 1932.

9 ,, The Phylogenesis of the Pareiasauridae: A Study in Evolution.” S. Afr. F. Sci., 29, 480—

486. 1932.

10 |,Paleobiologiese Beskouinge oor ’n Uitgestorwe Reptielgroep (Pareiasauridae).” §. Afr. 7.

Sct., 29, 487-494. 1932.

11 ,,A Note on the Hyoid Apparatus of two Permian Reptiles (Pareisaurians).”” Anat. Anz., 75,

4/5. 1932.

12 | ‘The Geographical Distribution of the Pareiasaurs within the Karroo Basin.” S. Afr. 7. Sci.,

39; 433-435- .1933- :

13 ,.’n Metode in Gebruik vir die Opgrawing van die Pareiasauriers.”” S. Afr. 7. Sci., 30, 436-

440. 1933-

14 Pareiasaurian Studies. ,,[X. The Cranial Osteology.”’ Ann. S. Afr. Mus., 31, 1, 1-38. 1934.

15 Pareiasaurian Studies. ,,X. The Dermal Armour.” Ann. S. Afr. Mus., 31, 1, 39-48. 1934.

16 Pareiasaurian Studies. ,,XI. The Vertebral Column and Ribs.” Ann. S. Afr. Mus., 31, 1,

49-66. 10934.

17 On a Pareiasaurian Reptile from South Africa, Bradysaurus whaitsi.”” Amer. Mus. Nov., 770,

I-4. 1935.

‘uINasNJy ssuveYLIY-pmMs sp ur jojsasdo soos Surmasuro oyTInnyeu As ut idajaas sninvsdpoig UeA dIISYNISUOYII-9}}001SSUIMIT U

‘Mdg “Stad “SUN +: 00ST

Plate 1v

eta 5

See

Ann. S. Afr. Mus., Vol. XLII

The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH APRICAN | MUSEUM are issued in pa Mens

intervals as material becomes available.

‘Some volumes and parts are out of print, pe orienta are only sold as nes of a set, or volu

‘respectively. The prices of parts published prior to 1 940 have been increased. —

Out of print: Vols. I, II (Parts 1-3, 5, 7, 8), III (Part 1), Vv (Parts 1, 2, 5, 8, a

Index), VII (Parts 1, 2, 3, 5), VIII, IX (Parts 1, 2), X Cee 2), XI (Parts 25 2 nde),

(Part 1), XXIV te 2), XXXI (Parts I-3).

Vol.

XXX.

1903-1905

1903—1908

1906-1910

1908-1910

1908-1913

Igt1-1918

IQII-I914

IQII-1918

1913-1924

1913-1923

IQI5—-1924

1914-1916

1917-1933

1917-1920

1921

1924-1925

1924-1926

1925-1927

1925-1928

1925-1926

1929-1938

1927-1928

1928

1929

1929-1932

1929-1931

1931-1935

1OSa57 Gor

19397 1940.

1939

1938

1956

1942-1948

1947-1952

I 950

1952

1952-1956

1952-1955

1953-1956

1955-

Zoology

Zoology... aah Rae

INDEX of papers, authors, and cea published j in Va o XXX. :

XXXI.

XXXII.

XXXIV.

Zoology and Be | (excl, Pe 1-3, ae 4, a)

Zoology .. a ye ty . (excl. Part. a)

Palaeontology

Geology, Palaeontology, Zoology, Anthropology (exdl.

Parts 1, 2, 5; 8, 9)

Zoology .. ae bey -. (excl. ae Fr Indes)

Palaeontology ea ea . (Parts 4 and 6 only) |

Botany oS shy a (excl. Parts 1 and 1 Ns

ZOEY. OV. a He . (excl. Part 2)

Zoology .. ae se ee Pe Index) —

Palaeontology and Conleey : es

rene te hy and as

Zoology :

Botany ©

Zoology

Zoology : ot vp a ipo tants

Zoology .. - 6 as ae se oe i

Zoology .. Ae oe hee fay |

Zoology — ie ys praise --(exdl. Part a

Palacciralosy : ee tis Bag ch

Zoology .. Ae

Anthropology and Enology mare .-(exdl Part 2)

Zoology a5 tot <e is

Zoology

Anthropology i aie ae a ae 8

Palaeontology

Zoology

Palaeontology a ban aires eee 4 only)

Zoology .. a si a

Zoology .. a ie 4S si oie i

Zoology .. i Ry Ass aig oases ee ae

Zoology .. es eae ke

Zoology

Apcharolesy Bei ae io Cena te

Zoologyict Gah sa oo ee ine a aa

Zoology. =<, ie oe m Se <a aie

Botatiy yi 5 eo oe a .. (excl. Index).

Zoology “ean <9 ee

Palaeontology ae ste Peeper eg ee

Zoology .. ‘Part-1- £1- os. (ode Parte

)

Copies may be obtained from—

The LIBRARIAN, SoutH AFrIcAN Museum, CAPE Town.

ANNALS

| SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

VOLUME XLII

6. The Hydrozoa of False Bay, South Africa. By N. A. H. MILiarp, PH.D.,

Zoology Department, peer slty of Cape Town. (With fifteen

text-figures. )

— ff FOB ARY ib

Aff

~—_—

man, ~ et

RNY.

Aacilhpult

= uh

Eo ell

ISSUED FANUARY 1957— PRICE _ 6s.

PRINTED FOR THE

TRUSTEES OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

BY THE RUSTICA PRESS (PTY.) LIMITED, COURT ROAD, WYNBERG, CAPE

6. The Hydrozoa of False Bay, South Africa. By N. A. H. MILuarp, PH.D., Zoology

Department, University of Gape Town. (With fifteen text-figures.)

SUMMARY

This paper records a total of sixty-five species of Hydrozoa from False Bay.

Of these seven are new records from South Africa, and eight are new species.

The latter include Aydractinia canalifera, Eudendrium deciduum, Campanularia

morganst, Lovenella chiquitita, Hebella furax, Synthectum hians, Sertularella capensis

and Sertularella falsa.

INTRODUCTION

The literature on South African hydroids is extremely scattered, most of it

in reports on expeditions and museum collections in various parts of the world.

Of the early authors, only one, Professor E. Warren, was actually living in the

country with free access to the shore and the hydroids in their living condition.

It is not surprising, therefore, that a very large proportion of the species, and

particularly the more inconspicuous ones, should have escaped notice, and

that the existing records should be scattered and incomplete.

Of the early workers the main contributors were Busk (1851), Kirchen-

pauer (1864, 1872, 1876 and 1884), Allman (1876, 1886 and the Challenger

Reports of 1883 and 1888), Marktanner-Turneretscher (1890), Warren (1908

and other papers), Jaderholm (1903, 1917 and 1923), Ritchie (1907a and

1909: Scottish National Antarctic Expedition), Vanh6éffen (1910: Deutschen

Sudpolar-Expedition), Broch (1914: Fauna of West Africa), and Stechow

(several papers including the reports of the Deutschen Tiefsee-Expedition).

In 1925 Stechow published a check-list of the hydroids reported from South

Africa up to that date. This included 153 species, of which 56 were collected

by the Valdivia.

Since that date Manton (1940) has described one new species, Ewer (1953)

one, and Millard (1955) three. Vervoort (1946a) has recorded eleven species

(none of them new) from the Union.

This paper represents the first of what is hoped to be a comprehensive series

describing the hydroids of South Africa. It is proposed for convenience to

describe the species of different sections of the coast separately, and False Bay

has been chosen as a start because of the very large collection which we possess

from that area. The material has accumulated from several different sources.

In the first place there is material collected by the old Government survey

vessel, the s.s. Pieter Faure, at the beginning of the century. This material was

submitted to the author for identification by the South African Museum and

is referred to by the reference letters PF. Its preservation is not all that might

173

VOL. XLIII, PART 4.

174 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

be desired, but most of the Calyptoblast species can be identified on their

skeletal parts.

Secondly, there is a small amount of material collected by Professor T. A.

Stephenson and his colleagues in their ecological survey of the coast, and

lodged in the Zoology Department of the University of Cape Town. This was

all collected in the littoral area at St. James, and is referred to by the reference

letter F.

Lastly, the great bulk of the material was collected during the last ten years

by members of the Zoology Department working under Professor J. H. O. Day.

The littoral material is referred to by the reference letters CP, and the sub-

littoral material by the letters FB and FAL. The sublittoral material was

collected by dredging and by diving with a frogman’s outfit. The latter is

entirely the result of the enthusiastic work of Mr. J. C. Morgans, who has been

conducting a survey of the bottom fauna, and whose results will be published

shortly.

The author is indebted to the members of the Zoology Department for their

co-operation and help in collecting specimens, and to the Royal Scottish

Museum, Edinburgh, and the Zoologische Sammlung des Bayerischen Staates,

Munich, for the loan of valuable type material.

Financial aid includes grants from the Staff Research Fund of the University

of Cape Town for the purchase of microscope lamps and drawing apparatus,

while grants awarded by the C.S.I.R. and the Carnegie Corporation have

made possible the purchase of a van and dredging equipment used in the

various expeditions. The cost of publication was partly defrayed by a special

grant from the publications fund of the University of Cape Town.

STATION LIsT

DATE POsITION DEPTH Bottom

ie Sein 27/9/98 34°13'S/18°33’E 57 m. Sand

PF 351 28/9/98 34°19'S/18°31’E (off Buffel’s Bay) 58-62 m.

PF 396 6/10/98 Off Buffel’s Bay

PF 405 8/10/98 Off Buffel’s Bay

PF 5013 8/6/00 34°14'5/18°30’ E (off Miller’s Point) 42 m. Rock

PF 15608 8/10/02 34°25'S/18°35’ E (Rocky Bank) 33 m. Rock

PF 15675 9/10/02 34°28/S/18°32’E 73 m. Rock

PF 16287 9/12/02 34°20'S/18°32’E 59 m. Sand

PET1e232 11/11/03 34°27'S/18°45’E 110 m. Green mud

PF 182093 7/12/03 34.°5°5'S/18°39’E (off Swartklip) 15-18 m. | Rock

CP 15-16 1/5/38 Froggy Pond

CP 18 30/4/38 Clovelly

CP 19-20 4/4/38 St. James

CP 224 29/10/32 St. James

* The Pieter Faure stations have been converted from the compass bearings given in the records,

and are given to the nearest minute.

CP 258

CP 259

CP 324

CP 326

ir 332

CP 333-334

CP 356

CP 377, 380

CP 392

CP 410

CP 415

CP 426

FB 101

FB 102

FB 103

FB 104

FB 105

FB 106

FB 107-110

FB 111

FB 112

FB 113

FB 114

HB L115

FB 116

FB 117

FB 119

FB 120-121

FB 122

FB 123

FB 126

FB 127

FB 128

FB 129

FB 130

FB 131

FB 132

FB 133

FB 134

FB 136

FB 137

FB 138

FB 139

FB 140

THE HYDROZOA OF FALSE BAY, SOUTH AFRICA

DATE

-|4/44

22/3/47

22/5/48

30/12/48

23/8/49

25/8/49

23/2/51

31/3/53

27/9/54

28/9/54

29/9/54

12/10/54

8/7/46

8/9/46

24/11/46

8/7/46

24/11/46

8/9/46

24/11/46

8/9/46

24/11/46

8/7/46

22/2/47

21/4/47

18/6/47

28/4/47

20/8/47

26/9/48

6/8/47

13/12/49

9/3/50

18/3/50

5/4/50

27/8/51

POSITION

St. James

Strandfontein

Clovelly

Dalebrook

Buffel’s Bay

St. James

Oatland Point

Froggy Pond

Oatland Point

34°9’S/18°28’E (off Fish Hoek)

34°8-58/18°27-5’E (off Fish Hoek)

34.°8-5/S/18°27°5’E (off Fish Hoek)

34°9/S/18°28’E (off Fish Hoek)

34°8-5/S/18°27-5’E (off Fish Hoek)

34°8-5'S/18°27-5’E (off Fish Hoek)

34°9/S/18°28’E (off Fish Hoek)

34°7°5'S/18°31’E (off Muizenberg)

34°8’S/18°31-5’E (off Muizenberg)

34°7°7'S/18°31-5’E (off Muizenberg)

34°7°5/S/18°29-2’E (off Muizenberg)

34°8-5'S/18°34°5’E (near Seal Is.)

34°10’S/18°27-8’E (off Glencairn)

34°9°5/S/18°27’E (off Glencairn)

?Off Strandfontein

34.°8’S/18°29'6’E (off Kalk Bay)

34°7-1’S/18°29°1’E (off Muizenberg)

34.°6-9’S/18°30’E (off Muizenberg)

34°9’S/18°26-7’E (off Glencairn)

34°8-5/S/18°27’E (off Fish Hoek)

34°11'S/18°27-3’E (off Simonstown)

34°8-9/S/18°27-4’E (off Glencairn)

34.°9°6’S/18°26-6’E (off Glencairn)

34°10-°2’S/18°26-2’E (off Glencairn)

34°10:1’S/18°26-1’E (off Glencairn)

34°10:0'S/18°26-1’E (off Glencairn)

34°9°3'S/18°26-4’E (off Glencairn)

DEPTH

22 m.

13 m.

15 m.

22 m.

15 m.

13 m.

15 m.

13 m.

15 m.

22 m.

27-28 m.

23-24 m.

19-20 m.

27m.

23-27 m.

24 m.

15-19 m.

18 m.

Ig m.

17°5 m.

5-8 m.

14 m.

25 m.

15 m.

17pm:

14m.

9 m.

Io m.

II m.

175

BoTTOM

Sand

?Shell and

stones

Shell and

sand

Sand

Shell and

sand

?Shell and

stones

Shell and

sand

?Shell and

stones

Shell and

sand

Sand

Rock

Sand

Rock

Sand and

shell

Sand

Rock, shell

and sand

Sand

Rock

Shell and

sand

Sand

Rock

————————————— ee Ph a Sa

FAL 20, 23

FAL 26

FAL 34

FAL 42

FAL 51-52

FAL 56

FAL 58

FAL 60

FAL 61-62

FAL 64

FAL 66

FAL 78, 82

FAL 95

FAL 108

FAL 115

FAL 123

FAL 125

FAL 132

FAL 137

FAL 141

FAL 148

el Pap asim

154, 159

20/9/50

27/8/51

cola

26/9/48

22/2/52

5/3/52

18/6/52

25/6/52

29/7/52

213

29/7/52

19/8/52

17/9/52

23/1/53

12/2/53

17/2/53

aes

9/3/53

12/3/53

21/4/53

POSITION

34°7°5'S/18°20’E (off St. James)

34°7°5/S/18°29’E (off St. James)

Off Glencairn

34°10:2’8/18°27:8’E (Roman Rock)

34°9°2’S/18°26-8’E (off Glencairn) |

34°8-5'S/18°30’E (off Muizenberg)

34°7°5/S/18°29°5’E (off Muizenberg)

34°8-2’S/18°35°3’E (near Seal Is.)

34°12°5/S/18°28’E (SE of Oatland

Point)

34°13'S/18°28’E (off Spaniard Rock)

34°13’S/18°29’E (off Miller’s Point)

34.°5'S/18°44’E (off Kromhout Rock)

34°9°6’S/18°49:2’E (off Gordon’s

Bay)

34°9°3'S/18°49-6’E to 34°9/S/18°50°1’

E (off Gordon’s Bay)

34°9°4/S/18°50°8’E to 34°9°5/S/18°

50:9’E (off Gordon’s Bay)

34°9°4'5/18°50°4’E (off Gordon’s

Bay)

34°17°8’S/18°49°3’E (off Rooi Els)

34°17°5'S/18°49°2’E (off Rooi Els)

34°17°3/S/18°48-7’ E (off Rooi Els)

34°17°2’S/18°49°4’E (north of Rooi

Els)

34°16°5'S/18°49°5'E (north of Rooi

Els)

34°10:6’S/18°4.7-3’E (off Gordon’s

Bay)

34.°9°3'S/18°51’E (Gordon’s Bay)

34°11’S/18°25-6’E (Simon’s Bay)

34°10'S/18°26’E (off Glencairn)

34°12°5'S/18°28’E (Oatland Point)

34°9°8’S/18°51°5’E (Gordon’s Bay

Pier)

34°12°5/S/18°28’E (Oatland Point)

34°12°5'S/18°28’E (Oatland Point)

ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

8-9 m.

II-12 m.

15-21 m.

BoTTom

?Sand and

rock

Sand and

stones

Rock

Sand

Sand and

shell

Shell and

sand

Sand and

rock

Shell and

rock

?Sand and

shell

Sand and

rock

Sand and

rock

Rock and

sand

Rock

Sand and

rock

Sand

Shell and

?sand

~ Rock

Rock

Rock and

sand

Rock and

sand

Shell and

sand

Rock and

sand

Rock

Stones, rock

and sand

Rock

FAL 186

FAL 205

FAL 207

FAL 209

FAL a11

FAL 214

FAL 217

FAL 222-

223

FAL 230

FAL 238

FAL 258

FAL 262

FAL 268

FAL 274

FAL 279,

282

FAL 288

FAL 289-

290

FAL 291

FAL 292

FAL 311

THE HYDROZOA OF FALSE BAY, SOUTH AFRICA

DATE

23/5/53

10/6/53

11/9/53

10/9/53

9/9/53

10/9/53

9/9/53

10/9/53

21/11/53

18/9/54

21/9/54

23/9/54

15/10/97

-|9/97

24/3/98

21/10/03

11/4/55

POsITION

34°12°5/S/18°28’E (Oatland Point)

34.°12°5'S/18°28’E (Oatland Point)

34°12°5'S/18°28’E (Oatland Point)

34.°12°5'S/18°28’E (Oatland Point)

34°12°5'S/18°28’E (Oatland Point)

34°22°1’S/18°35°2’E (north of Rocky

Bank)

34°12°8/S/18°36-5’E

34°17°6'S/18°39:2’E

34°9°9'S/18°42-4’E

34°6:8’S/18°40°3’E (off Swartklip)

34°7°1'S/18°35-6’E (off Strand-

fontein)

34°12°4'S/18°43°5E

34°7-0'S/18°32-5’E (NW of Seal Is.)

34°13°9/S/18°31-6’E (off Miller’s

Point)

34°17°3/S/18°31-4’E (off Buffel’s

Bay)

34°20°6'S/18°39°4’E

34.°12°5'S/18°28’E (Oatland Point)

34° 11°6’S/18°27-3’E (Noah’s Ark)

(

34°10°9'S/18°27-2’E (Roman Rock)

34°10°9/S/18°27-2’E (Roman Rock)

34.°10:9'S/18°27-2’E (Roman Rock)

34°9:6’S/18°49°8’E (off Gordon’s

Bay)

Kalk Bay

34°12°5'S/18°28’E (Oatland Point)

DEPTH

0-3 m.

2-4 m.

4-6°5 m.

o-2 m.

73 ™.

46 m.

62 m.

36-5 m.

29 m.

2oemn.

42 m.

18 m.

40 m.

82 m.

II-14 m.

15-18 m.

14-17 m.

12-14 m.

18 m.

40 m.

Oo-2 Mm.

177

BoTTrom

Rock

Shell and

sand

Shell and

sand

Shell and

?sand

Rock and

sand

Shell and

sand

Rock, sand

and shell

Rock

Rock, sand

and shell

Sand and

shell

?Shell, sand

and green

mud

Shell and

sand

Rock

> Rock

Rock

?Rock

Rock

178 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

List OF SPECIES

GYMNOBLASTEA

Corynidae

Coryne sp.

Tubulariidae

Tubularia solttaria Warren

Tubularia sp.

Bougainvilliidae

Hydracuma altispina Millard

FAydractima canalifera n. sp.

Fydractinia carnea (M. Sars)

Flydractinia sp.

Leuckartiara octona (Fleming)

HAydrocorella africana Stechow

Eudendriidae

Eudendrium ?antarcticum Stechow

Eudendrium deciduum n. sp.

Myriothelidae

Myriothela capensis Manton

CALYPTOBLASTEA

Haleciidae

Hydrodendron caciniformis (Ritchie)

Halecium beanu (Johnston)

Halecium dichotomum Allman

Halecium parvulum Bale

Halecium tenellum Hincks

Campanulariidae

Campanularia integra MacGillivray

Campanularia morgansi n. sp.

Clytia gracilis (M. Sars)

(Clytia ravidentata (Hincks) )

Obelia dichotoma (Linnaeus)

Obelia geniculata (Linnaeus)

Campanulinidae

Lovenella chiquitita n. sp.

Lafoeidae

FHebella furax n. sp

Hebella scandens (Bale)

Scandia mutabilis (Ritchie)

Reticularia serpens (Hassall)

Kygophylax cornucopia Millard

Syntheciidae

Synthecium ?elegans Allman

Synthecium hians n. sp.

Sertulartidae

Dictyocladium coactum Stechow

Salacia articulata (Pallas)

Sertularella africana Stechow

Sertularella abuscula (Lamouroux)

Sertularella capensis n. sp.

Sertularella falsa n. sp.

Sertularella flabellum (Allman)

Sertularella fustformis (Hincks)

Sertularella goliathus Stechow

Sertularella mediterranea Hartlaub

Sertularella megista Stechow

Sertularella polyzonias (Linnaeus)

Sertularella xantha Stechow

Symplectoscyphus macrogonus

(Trebilcock)

Amphisbetia bidens (Bale)

Amphisbetia minima (Thompson)

Amphisbetia operculata (Linnaeus)

Sertularia distans (Lamouroux)

Sertularia marginata (Kirchen-

pauer)

Plumulariidae

Antennella africana Broch

Halopteris constricta ‘Votton

Halopteris valdiviae (Stechow)

Paragattya intermedia Warren

Plumularia lagenifera Allman

Plumularia pulchella Bale

Plumularia setacea (Ellis and

Solander)

Plumularia spinulosa Bale

Kirchenpaueria pinnata (Linnaeus)

Pycnotheca mirabilis (Allman)

Nemertesia cymodocea (Busk)

Nemertesia ramosa Lamouroux

Antennopsis scotiae Ritchie

Aglaophenia pluma (Linnaeus)

Thecocarpus giard: Billard.

Lytocarpus filamentosus (Lamarck)

THE HYDROZOA OF FALSE BAY, SOUTH AFRICA 179

Family Corynidae

Coryne sp.

mecorass FAL 311 Tf. CP 326. F.

Description. Several branching stems reaching 0-8 cm. in length, one with

young gonophores, but too small to determine structure. Stem smooth or

irregularly corrugated in parts, pedicels of hydranths annulated at base.

Hydranths approximately 1 mm. in length.

Remarks. There is nothing in the appearance of the colony to exclude it

from Coryne eximia Allman, but in the absence of mature gonophores the

specimens cannot be finally identified.

Family Tubulariidae

Tubularia solitarra Warren 1906a.

Tubularia solitaria Warren 1906a; p. 83; Pl. X and XI.

Records. F 231 (recorded by Eyre 1939). CP 326 D.

Description. Gonophores present in December.

Tubularia sp.

recone "Gb 3961, EAL 153 X.

Description. A few small specimens with well-developed perisarc, and

hydranths without gonophores.

Remarks. Due to the paucity of the material and the absence of gonophores

the identification cannot be completed.

Family: Bougainvilliidae

Aydractinia altispina Millard 1955

Hydractima altispina Millard 1955; p. 215; fig. 1.

Records. F 274. GP 258, 377. FAL 7 Z. (Recorded by Millard 1955.)

Aydractina canalifera n. sp.

Bist

Type. Holotype GP 332 in University of Cape Town.

Description. A single colony growing on weed in the littoral area. Hydro-

rhiza forming an intimately anastomosing feltwork, encrusted in centre of

colony, but not at periphery.

Gastrozooids large, reaching 2-3 mm. in height (preserved), with 10-14

tentacles in a single whorl. Manubrium conical when contracted, but capable

of great expansion and even of turning completely inside-out.

No spines. No spiral zooids, but a very few tentacular filaments scattered

amongst the gastrozooids.

Gonozooids smaller than gastrozooids, each with a mouth and a single whorl

of 6-9 short tentacles, bearing a cluster of 4 or 5 sporosacs on the upper half

180 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Gay

Ore

MESS

YEZA CTIA SL

Catia Sa Laird

Fic. 1. Hydractinia canalifera n. sp. from the holotype.

A. Portion of a colony, showing 2 gastrozooids, a tentacular filament, and 2 female gonozooids

bearing sporosacs. B. Longitudinal section through mature female sporosac. Radial canals

not visible. C. Longitudinal section through young female sporosac, passing through one

radial canal and the circular canal. D. Longitudinal section through gastrozooid, showing

central canal (cc) of stem, and endodermal plug (end) blocking the mouth. gl, gland cells;

nem, nematocysts.

THE HYDROZOA OF FALSE BAY, SOUTH AFRICA 181

of the stem. Female sporosacs only present, ovoid, containing many eggs

(estimated as well over 50). Radial canals and circular canal present in young

sporosacs, though not visible in older ones. Manubrium with a very restricted

cavity. No vestige of tentacles.

Detailed Anatomy. ‘The structure of the zooids is interesting and unusual.

Under the dissecting microscope and in whole mounts a distinct central tube

can be seen passing up the stem to expand into a mass of solid tissue within

the tentacle-ring and completely blocking the mouth. Sections reveal that the

narrow central canal is formed by the massing of the cytoplasm in the inner

ends of enormously elongated endoderm cells. The outer ends of the cells

resting on the mesogloea are swollen and vacuolated, and tend to run together

to form a system of open spaces surrounding the central canal.

Near the top of the stem the central canal merges with a solid mass of small

endoderm cells which fills all the cavity within the tentacle-ring. Large darkly

staining gland cells are visible in the mass. Sometimes a series of crevices puts

the central canal or even the outer space into communication with the exterior,

but in most cases there is no communication whatever. In a few zooids the

central plug of endoderm is actually extruded beyond the level of the manu-

brium, and in cases where the manubrium has turned inside-out, a large area

of endoderm is exposed to the exterior.

Measurements (preserved material)

Gastrozooids reaching 3:16 mm. to origin of tentacles. Gonozooids reaching

a maximum height of 1:25 mm. to origin of tentacles.

Female sporosac, maximum length .. = or 7) O- ON.

maximum diameter : oe Og tebe

Remarks. H. canalifera is very close to H. kaffraria Millard 1955, but can be

distinguished by its larger and more robust zooids, and particularly by the

internal modifications of the endoderm.

The only other hydroid known to the author in which the digestive cavity

is blocked by endoderm is Eudendrium angustum Warren 1908, in which food

matter is directly ingested by the endoderm cells. It is probable that a similar

method of feeding is employed by H. canalifera, and the extrusion of the endo-

derm and eversion of the manubrium suggests that secretions may also be

poured over the food outside the body.

Hydractinia carnea (M. Sars) 1846

Podocoryne carnea Hincks 1868; p. 29; Pl. V.

?Hydractinia parvispina Vanhoffen 1910, p. 291.

Hydractinia carnea Vervoort 1946, p. 126, fig. 49.

Records. FB 108, 121 B. FAL 64 W, 205 C, 209 D, 238 B.

Description. Colonies fairly common in dredgings on shells of Hinza speciosa

(Adams). Hydrorhiza an open meshwork in younger parts of colony, com-

pletely encrusted in older parts, spines present only in fully encrusted areas.

182 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Ripe gonophores, however, may be present in areas which are not fully

encrusted.

The development of the medusoid individuals at the time of liberation varies

considerably and does not seem to depend on the season. I have seen a gono-

zooid bearing two gonophores, one of which was a small but perfectly developed

medusa with 4 tentacles and no sexual products, and the other much larger

and filled with spermatogenic cells, yet with the tentacles undeveloped.

Female medusoids are often packed with eggs at the time of liberation, the

number varying from 27 to 40. Gonophores present in June, July, September

and November.

Remarks. It is highly probable that the material reported from Simonstown

as H. parvispina on Nassa by Vanhoffen is the same species with precociously

developed sexual products.

Fydractima sp.

Records. FAL 183 N.

Description. Hydrorhiza encrusted. Spines smooth, long and _ hollow,

reaching a maximum length of 1-5 mm. Gastrozooid about 4 mm. long.

Gonozooids smaller, tentacular. Gonophores in the form of fixed sporosacs,

no radial canals visible. Smaller ones female, containing tightly packed eggs.

Larger ones male or hermaphrodite, the latter containing a few scattered eggs-

packed amongst masses of spermatogenic material.

Remarks. The material is in a very poor state of preservation, and the nature

of the gastrozooids and gonozooids cannot be determined. The species appears

to be closely related to Hydractinia altispina Millard 1955, although hydranths

and spines are somewhat longer. The sporosacs are better preserved than the

hydranths, and appear to be unique in their hermaphroditic nature.

Leuckartiara octona (Fleming) 1823

Eudendrium repens Wright 1858.

Leuckartiara octona Rees 1938, p. 12 (synonymy), figs. 3-5.

Records. FB 121 C, 136 C, 138 A, all on Bullia annulata (Lamarck). FAL 60

C, 61 B, 115 E, 209 CG, on Bullia annulata (Lamarck); FAL 238 C on Nassarius

circumtectus.

Description. Colonies fairly common on the shells of certain gastropods.

The form of the colony is very similar to that described by Rees 1938 from the

shell of a Turritella inhabited by a hermit crab.

On the ‘under’ side of the shell the stems are low and the hydranths small,

the whole colony not exceeding 1 mm. in height. No gonophores are present

in this region and often no hydranths, the shell being covered only by the

reticular hydrorhiza.

On the ‘upper’ side of the shell and round the tip of the spire the colony is

much better developed and reaches a height of 3-5 mm. The stems are long

THE HYDROZOA OF FALSE BAY, SOUTH AFRICA 183

and occasionally branched, and bear numerous gonophores. Only once was a

gonophore seen to arise from the hydrorhiza.

Perisarc annulated or coarsely wrinkled at base of stem, widening distally

and continued over hydranth to bases of tentacles where it ends abruptly.

Hydranths with 6-12 tentacles, usually held alternately elevated and

depressed.

Gonophores with short annulated pedicels, completely invested by trans-

parent perisarc. Medusae with 2 long tentacles when ready to leave. Gono-

phores present from June to September.

Measurements (in mm., preserved material)

Hydrorhiza, diameter Be a 4 He .. 0°04-0°07

Stem, diameter at base Be ee My, iv .. 0°045-0°07

Pseudohydrotheca, length .. 2 a . aa 0220-97

maximum diameter .. Ue hs .. O*19—0°38

Hydranth, length to tip of caanabmurs a ne -. 0°30-0°51

Gonephore, length .. .: ae De a .. 0°30-0°60

diameter a ae Mee si i ». 0°18-0°45

HAydrocorella africana Stechow 1921c

Aydrocorella africana Stechow 1925, p. 409.

Records. FB 114 B, 115 CG, 122 B, 123 B, 125 B, 136 D, 137 B, 143 A, 144, 145.

Description. Fertile colonies growing on empty gastropod shells. Gonophores

borne in clusters on gonozooids which are smaller than the gastrozooids and

possess about 6 rudimentary tentacles. Gonophores present in February.

Family: Eudendriidae

Eudendrium ?antarcticum Stechow 1921a

Eudendrium antarcticum Stechow 1925, p. 415, fig. 5.

Records. FAL 288 H.

Description. Hydrorhiza creeping on other hydroids. Stem unbranched or

sparingly branched, reaching a maximum height of 3 mm.; annulated at

base, on origins of branches and occasionally for short distances in other

regions. Perisarc terminating abruptly below hydranth. Hydranth with about

20 tentacles (19-23 in 8 counts) and a distinct annular groove near base.

Male gonophores borne in clusters on completely atrophied hydranths which

arise from the stem or, more frequently, direct from the hydrorhiza. Pedicel

annulated. Gonophore one-chambered, with a distinct tubercle at distal end.

Present in October. Female gonophores absent.

Measurements (in mm., preserved)

Stem, diameter Ae ft ie .. 0°055-0:075

Hydranth, length to tip of ee Cone ii iy .. 0:20—0°30

diameter at tentacle roots... x he .. O*1I-0-16

Gonophores, male, length .. vel a Bs ». O*15-0°22

184 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Remarks. ‘This species cannot be definitely diagnosed in the absence of

female gonophores. ‘The trophosome and its measurements, however, agree

well with Stechow’s description.

The species is excluded from E. parvum Warren and E. capillare Alder by

the smaller diameter of the stem and the one-chambered male gonophores.

It is close to E. stmplex Pieper 1884, which, however, is said to have hermaphro-

ditic gonophores.

Totton, 1930, gave the name F. antarcticum to a group of small antarctic

forms which had previously been assigned to several different species. Totton’s

species differs from that of Stechow in its taller growth (reaching 6 cm.), in

the presence of a weakly fascicled stem in the larger specimens, and particularly

in the greater diameter of the stem. It is obviously a separate species, and

was renamed E. totiont by Stechow in 1932.

Eudendrium deciduum n. sp.

Fig. 2

Types and Records. Holotype FAL 52 V in University of Cape Town. Further»

records: PF ?351 D, ?18232 A. FAL 13 E, 82 W, 108 N, 154 A, 169 S, 183 K,

288 G.

Description. Rugged tree-like colonies reaching a maximum height of 16 cm.

Main stem thick and woody at base, reaching a diameter of 8 mm. Main stem

and principle branches fascicled. Branching irregular and in all planes,

hydranth-bearing pedicels with a tendency to arise from one side of branches.

Annulations present on origins of all branches and pedicels, and groups of

annulations at irregular intervals on stem and branches, pedicels annulated

to a varying extent but generally smooth in terminal portion, gonophore-

bearing pedicels more or less completely annulated. Perisarc terminating

abruptly below hydranths, hydranth with basal circular groove and about 26

tentacles (22-30 in 23 counts).

Male gonophores 2-3 chambered, on atrophied hydranth. Female gono-

phores borne in whorl at base of hydranth, which later atrophies; spadix

branching and later shed.

The material shows all stages in the development of the female gonophores

(fig. 2, E-H). In the earliest stage the spadix curves round the egg as in the

typical gonophores of E. ramosum, later it develops 3 to 4 pairs of lateral pro-

jections, and eventually the whole spadix peels away from the embryo and is

discarded. At about this stage, too, the tentacles of the gonophore-bearing

hydranth atrophy. The young embryo remains enclosed in a transparent

capsule which typically bears warty protuberances on the surface.

Remarks. This species is almost impossible to distinguish from several others

in the absence of gonophores. It is closely related to E. ramosum (Linn.) and

E. rameum (Pallas), neither of which, however, has been recorded from South

Africa. It is also close to E. angustum Warren, which was recorded off Algoa

Bay at 40 fath., but differs from it in the presence of a groove round the base

THE HYDROZOA OF FALSE BAY, SOUTH AFRICA 185

ee,

i inde) (Oe

Pat

Ce BW) 19)- Te

(J) —_— =

SO A

Fic. 2. Eudendrium deciduum n. sp. from the holotype.

A. Whole colony. B. Portion of sterile colony. C. Branch bearing female gonophores in

various stages of development. D. A branch bearing two groups of male gonophores.

E-H. Stages in development of the female gonophore (see text).

of the hydranth, and in the absence of an endodermal plug in the gastral

cavity. E. racemosum (Gmelin) differs in the form of the female gonophore,

which has a forked spadix.

Gonophores of E. deciduum have been observed in April, June and October.

The main stem of the colony is dark brown, the smaller branches clear brown

to horn-colour, and the female gonophores bright orange when living.

186 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Family: Myriothelidae

Myriothela capensis Manton 1940

Myriothela capensis Manton 1940, p. 276, figs. 7, 8b, 9, Pl. I, figs. 12, 13.

Records. FB 119 G.

Description. A single small specimen measuring 0-65 cm. (preserved), with

gonophores containing eggs.

Family: Haleciidae

Hydrodendron caciniformis (Ritchie) 1907

Fig. 3

Ophiodes caciniformis Ritchie 1907, p. 500; Pl. X XIII, figs. 11 and 12; Pl. XXIV,

fies I

Records. FAL 268 J.

Description. A small colony growing on weed and reaching a maximum

height of 9°5 mm. MHydrorhiza forming a loose network on surface and

strengthened by internal chitinous projections; giving rise to upright stems,

solitary hydrophores, and a few scattered nematophores.

Stem sometimes weakly fascicled at base and occasionally branched, divided

into fairly regular internodes which bear the hydrophores alternately to

right and left, each on a short apophysis near the distal end. A suggestion of

an annulation above and below each node. Branches, when present, exactly

similar to main stem. Ritchie states that ‘a secondary hydrotheca, borne on a

relatively long peduncle, may arise from the lower portion of the peduncle of

a primary hydrotheca’. This occurs quite commonly in the False Bay material,

and a branch is simply the continuation of this process of budding. The two

rows of hydrophores are not always in the same plane, but sometimes converge

slightly to one side.

Hydrophores elongated, flaring towards margin, which is everted, separated

from stem apophysis by one or more nodes. No reduplications observed. An

indication of a pseudodiaphragm sometimes evident near base of hydrophore

as an annular thickening of the perisarc. Hydrotheca with a well-defined

diaphragm at base, and a row of puncta about one third of the height above it.

Polyps not well preserved, but apparently can be almost retracted into

hydrothecae.

Nematothecae irregular and scarce, about 4 or 5 to a stem; borne on stem

internodes, bases of hydrophores, or from hydrorhiza; sessile, goblet-shaped,

with everted margin. No refringent dots observed.

Gonangia absent.

Measurements (mm.)

Stem, diameter at node... ws oe ae .. O°12-0°16

length of internode... ie ae eile .. 0°33-0°54.

THE HYDROZOA OF FALSE BAY, SOUTH AFRICA 187

Hydrophore, margin to stem apophysis (unbranched

examples only). . Be Me ne ai .. 0°26-0°58

margin to diaphragm She “i ae .. 0°085-0°12

margin to puncta a sa ae dis .. 0:06-0:08

diameter at margin... as a st 52) Or21—0-24.

Nematophore, length .... fs ok Ps .. O*15—0°20

diameter at margin .. aes oe zh .. O*10—0°12

Remarks. This comparatively rare species has been reported from the Cape

Verde Islands, the West Indies and the Mediterranean. This is the first

record from South Africa.

2mm.

Fic. 3. Hydrodendron caciniformis (Ritchie). FAL 268 J.

A. A complete upright stem. B and C. Enlarged portions showing hydrophores and nemato-

thecae. In C a secondary hydrophore is branching from a primary one. fs, pseudodiaphragm.

188 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Halecium bean (Johnston) 1838

Halecium Bean Hincks 1868, p. 224; Pl. XLIII, fig. 2. Broch 1918, p. 38,

fig. XIII.

Halecium beam Stechow 1925, p. 419.

Records. GP 356 H. FB 119 F. FAL 66S, 78 Y, 153 Z, 183 lL, 186 E,

202), Y,.260 Byatt V-

Description. There is little further to add to the description of this well-

known species. Abundant material with male and female gonangia has been

collected from various localities. Colonies are generally short and bushy,

reaching a maximum height of 5-0 cm. The primary hydrothecae are sessile

and adnate to the stem, and often the two rows are not quite in the same plane

but inclined to one side. Ripe gonangia have been found in April and from

August to October.

Halecium dichotomum Allman 1888

Halecium dichotomum Allman 1888, p. 13; Pl. VI. Stechow 1925, p. 419.

Records. PF 15608 J. FAL 78 Z, ?64.N.

Description. Colonies short and scrubby with strongly fascicled stems, and

hydrophores shorter and more annulated than those figured by Allman.

Hydrothecal walls straight for the major part, with the extreme edge bent

sharply outward.

Female gonangia of the typical annulated type, and male gonangia (not

previously described) present on the same colonies. The latter smaller than

the female, elongated, slender, smooth, but often with several longitudinal

creases near distal end. Gonangia present in August and October.

Some of the material (FAL 64 N) is assigned with some doubt to this species.

The form of the colony and structure of the hydrophores is indistinguishable,

but the female gonangia, although annulated in the typical manner, show no

trace of a lateral opening.

Measurements (in mm., excluding FAL 64 N)

Hydrophore, length from origin on previous hydrophore 0:34—0-95

Hydrotheca, length, diaphragm to margin a .. 0°03-0°045

puncta to margin oe a ae vn .. 0°02—0°03

diameter at margin .. Be re .. O*IQ—0°23

diameter at level of denhraeca a es .. 0*16—-0-20

Gonotheca, female, length .. i ae ye .. | 103-125

maximum diameter .. ve ve i .. 0*46—-0°50

Gonotheca, male, length .. be if ec .. 0°52-0°73

maximum diameter .. My ee of .. O'15—-O°19

THE HYDROZOA OF FALSE BAY, SOUTH AFRICA 189

Halecium parvulum Bale 1888

Fig. 4A

Halecium parvulum Bale 1888, p. 760; Pl. XIV, figs. 4-5. Marktanner-

enercischer 1690, p. 216; Pl. III, fig. 22.

Halecium gracile Bale 1888, p. 759; Pl. XIV, figs. 1-3. Jaderholm 1903, p. 266;

Pl. XII, figs. 2-3. Billard 1906b, p. 163.

Helecium flexile Bale 1915, p. 246.

Records. CP 324, 334, 356 D. PF 15608 H, 15675 F. FB 129 CG. FAL 66 P,

Jom 132 V, 141 B, 2154 GC, 165 Z, 174 X, 183 R, 288 A.

Description. Bushy colonies up to 5:9 cm. in height, with stem and main

branches fascicled. Stem a scorpioid cyme, with branches arising singly from

the bases of the hydrophores and often anastomosing. Stem straight or zigzag,

with nodes of varying length, and sometimes an athecate internode interpolated

between two thecate ones. Hydrophores strongly everted, as described and

figured by Bale 1888, but often with a ‘pseudodiaphragm’ below the hydro-

theca. This is always better developed on the adcauline side. Secondary

hydrophores quite smooth or annulated at base. Margin of hydrotheca more

strongly everted on adcauline side.

Gonothecae arising from bases of hydrophores on main stem and branches,

flattened in the plane at right angles to the branch. Female gonotheca notched

at distal end as in Bale 1888, Pl. XIV, fig. 5, and Jaderholm 1903, Pl. XII,

fig. 3. Blastostyle branching at the base, distal end swollen and pear-shaped,

not completely filling gonotheca, with its blunt end pressed against the opening;

bearing about 6 eggs. Male gonotheca smaller than female, resembling Bale’s

figure (1888, Pl. XIV, fig. 1) in front view, and Allman’s figure of H. flexile

(1888, Pl. V, fig. 2a) in side view; younger gonothecae more flattened and

tapering distally to a sharp edge. Containing a central mass of spermatogenic

tissue, supported by a blastostyle which continues to the distal end, where it

spreads out giving a cap-like appearance. Male and female usually on

separate colonies, but may occur on the same one. Gonangia present in

February, March, July, August and October.

Measurements (mm.)

Stem, diameter te iP a ne ae ». 0°09-0°175

length of internode... 45 re a .. 0°34-0°85

Hydrophore aa ee pote from origin on inter-

Hodes 2’. ae < me ». O°115—-0°28

Hydrotheca, length, oe tomargin .. -. 0°02-0°05

diameter at margin... se oh be .. O*°13-0°21

Gonotheca, female, length .. #: ae us: ». TO5-1°45

FWA EN oe. _ de si as oe .. 0:66-1:06

Gonotheca, male, length .. ae ar oc .. 0°52—0°98

width .. al 23 2% e ie .. 0°255-0°61

190 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Remarks. H. gracile Bale 1888 and H. parvulum Bale 1888 are accepted as

synonyms, but since H. gracile is preoccupied by H. gracile Verrill 1874, the

name H. parvulum must be used. ‘There seems to be some doubt as to whether

Bale’s species is synonymous with H. flexile Allman 1888, the synonymy being

accepted by Hartlaub 1905, Ritchie 1911, Bale 1915 and Stechow 1919; and

rejected by Totton 1930. Female gonophores of H. flexile have not been

described, and so in the meantime it seems better to keep the two species

apart.

The measurements of the False Bay material agree well with those given by

Billard 1906b, and with the size of H. gracile and H. parvulum in Bale’s illus-

trations, except that the female gonothecae of Bale’s specimens are somewhat

smaller.

H. parvulum occurs in Australia, South America and Morocco, but this is

the first record from South Africa.

var. magnum, Nn. var.

Fig. 4, B—O

Types and Records. Holotype FAL 274 R in University of Gape Town, male

and female. Paratypes FAL 159 L in University of Cape Town, PF 405 A

and PF 16287 A, part in University of Gape Town and part in S.A. Museum.

Further records: FAL 82 V, 214 H, 268 H, 288 C.

Description. Stiff bushy colonies, differing from the typical form only in the

much larger dimensions. The stem internodes, the hydrothecae and the

female gonothecae are approximately double those of the typical form, and

the two varieties can be distinguished at a glance.

Measurements (mm.) Holotype Paratypes

Stem, diameter .. Ae fe “it YO: 22 —O nam 0°21—-0°33

length of internode .. ue ue 2) 407021 kO 0-61-1°34.

Hydrophore (primary aha none from origin

on internode AY) .. O*10—-0°37 O°15—-0°35

Hydrotheca, length, nares to margin . .. 0°04-0:07 0:04-0:07

diameter at margin .. Ne AN .. 039-097, 0:26-0:36

Gonotheca, female, maximum length .. oe 2°28 3°05

maximum width .. aN i le 2°05 2°38

Gonotheca, male, maximum length .. 0-99 1°31

maximum width ... e oe Ms 0:67 0°79

Remarks. The maximum height of the belong material is 6:4 cm., but

paratypes PF 405 A and 16287 A are both very much more luxurious, the

latter reaching 17:3 cm. Gonangia have been recorded in September, October

and December.

From the abundant fruiting material collected it has been possible to follow

the development of the gonangia, which has not previously been described

for this species. The development is interesting since the gonothecae differ in

THE HYDROZOA OF FALSE BAY, SOUTH AFRICA IQI

Fic. 4. A. Halecium parvulum Bale, typical form.

B-O. Halecium parvulum Bale, var. magnum n. var.

B. A single hydrophore from the holotype, on same scale as A. C—E. Male gonangia from the

paratype PF 405 A; C is a mature gonotheca in longitudinal section; D a young gonangium,

and E a mature gonangium, both in front view. F-—O. Female gonangia; F a young gonotheca

and G a mature gonotheca in longitudinal section; H—O successive developmental stages in

front view. N is an abnormal gonangium with two hydranths. F—M from the holotype, N and

O from the paratype FAL 159 L. ps, pseudodiaphragm,

192 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

appearance at different stages in their development, and were it not that all

stages have been observed on one colony, they might have been assigned to

different species. ‘The following description is based primarily on the holotype,

but is supplemented and confirmed by the paratypes.

The youngest female gonotheca observed is disc-shaped, with a sharp edge

and slightly bulging centre, and a diameter of about 1-4 mm. (fig. 4, F and H).

Within it is a blastostyle which expands into a sickle-shaped cap at the distal

end. Below the cap the blastostyle gives rise on one side to a bud resembling

a hydranth, but without tentacles. At a later stage (fig. 4, I), when the bud

is larger, the resemblance to a hydranth is even more striking—the rounded

distal end, or manubrium, is contained in a transparent capsule, and is

separated from the broad proximal region by a deep constriction. In stained

preparations ectoderm and endoderm layers are clearly visible, the manu-

brium is solid and has no mouth, but the body has a capacious gastral cavity.

Later (fig. 4, J), the blastostyle gives off a number of branching processes from

the base. These apparently grow outwards until they fuse with the distal cap

and partly obscure the hydranth in a netlike ramification. When the width

has reached about 2 mm. the shape of the gonotheca has changed. The distal

end expands into two earlike outgrowths, between which the edge is thick and

truncated. In the centre of this blunt edge is a circular opening around which

the margin is inturned to form a delicate internal collar (fig. 4, G, L-O).

Hence the notched appearance characteristic of the species. The flattened

manubrium of the hydranth now plugs the opening, and a number of eggs

are visible on the body. After this the whole structure becomes very thick and

dense due to further growth of the network of the blastostyle, and within it

3 or 4 eggs enlarge to form bulky larvae eventually filling the gonotheca

(fig. 4, O). Occasionally abnormal gonothecae occur, containing two hydranths

and possessing two openings (fig. 4, N).

The development of the gonangia in the typical form of H. parvulum is

probably identical, but so far well-preserved material of the younger stages is

lacking. |

The relationship of this species to others, such as the well-known H. beaniz,

where fully formed hydranths arise from the blastostyle, is easily apparent.

The sexual products in both cases are borne on a modified hydranth, which in

Hf. parvulum is without mouth or tentacles, and entirely contained in the

gonotheca.

The male gonangia start their development in very much the same way as

the female (fig. 4, C-E). The young gonotheca is almost circular and flattened,

with sharp edges. ‘The blastostyle grows through the centre to expand into a

sickle-shaped cap at the distal end. In this case, however, it forms no hydranth,

but bears the sexual products directly on its proximal part. Mature gono-

thecae are oval rather than circular, and the edges more blunt. They

presumably burst to set free the spermatozoa.

THE HYDROZOA OF FALSE BAY, SOUTH AFRICA 193

Halecium tenellum Hincks 1861

Fig. 5

Halecium tenellum Hincks 1868, p. 226; Pl. XLV, fig. 1. Ritchie 19074, p. 525;

Pl. II, fig. 4. Broch 1918, p. 46, fig. 20. Stechow 1919, p. 41, figs. J-K;

1925, p. 418.

Records. FAL 2090 CG.

Description. Delicate monosiphonic colonies growing on other hydroids and

reaching 4 mm. in height. Stems annulated above and below nodes, otherwise

smooth. Stem internodes very irregular in length and often devoid of hydro-

phores—the proximal part of the stem may bear as many as 7 athecate inter-

nodes before the typical sympodial branching commences. Branches often

arising in pairs, giving a dichotomous appearance. Secondary hydrophores

annulated at base, margin everted. Gonangia (probably male) flattened in

plane at right angles to stem, oval to circular in front view (very similar to those

figured by Broch), borne on short stalk, which may be segmented, from stem

or hydrorhiza.

Measurements (mm.)

Stem, diameter ay ee ie ie ea .. 0°04-0:07

length of internode... : ss ie -. 0:09-0°38

Hydrotheca, length, diaphragm to margin fe 50,0 3=0-0/

length, puncta to margin 5 is ss 3 O-02-0:09),

diameter at margin .. ae sis 3 ak WOE 2—O-17

Gonotheca, length, maximum a oe a? a O-71

width, maximum a ie sis a it 0:38

Family: Campanulariidae

Campanularia integra MacGillivray 1842

Campanularia caliculata Warren 1908, p. 338, fig. 19.

Campanularia integra Broch 1918, p. 159 (synonymy).

Records. F 267. CP 259. FB to1, 102, 103, 113 (growing on crab Dehaanius

Beas (Me idw.)), 129, 131 G, 134 B, 137 A, 138 B, 140 G. FAL 174 Z,

258 F.

Description. Colonies abundant on weed in littoral area and shallow water

of certain regions. Pedicels annulated, but last segment much more definite

than the rest. Hydrothecae variable in size, shape and thickness of perisarc.

Gonangia with smooth or faintly annulated walls, flattened from side to

side and elongate-oval in cross-section. Pedicel short and smooth. Containing

I-3 gonophores which bear eggs in the female. ‘The gonophores sometimes

resemble degenerate medusae with 4 minute tentacles. Present in March, and

July to September.

194. ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Soo 0: Ss mm.

{ mm.

Fic. 5. Halecium tenellum Hincks. FAL 290 C.

A gonangium (male?) is shown in front view arising from the hydrorhiza in B, and in side

view arising from the stem in C.

THE HYDROZOA OF FALSE BAY, SOUTH AFRICA 195

Campanularia morgansi n. sp.

Fig. 6

Types and Records. Holotype PF 15675 B in University of Cape Town.

Paratypes PF 351 C, FB 119 L, and FAL 26 L in University of Gape Town;

PF 18232 Bin S.A. Museum. Further records: FAL 280 B.

Description. Colony stolonial, creeping on other hydroids. Pedicels of

hydrothecae unbranched, arising direct from hydrorhiza, not distinctly

annulated but corrugated, with one distinct, somewhat flattened segment

below hydrotheca in which diameter is usually less than that of pedicel.

Hydrotheca long and narrow, tapering at base, not widening markedly

to margin, but with a raised and sometimes strongly thickened rim just below

margin. Marginal teeth 10 to 13 in number (although one specimen with 9

0-5mm.

Fic. 6. Campanularia morgansi n. sp. from the holotype.

A-C. Three hydrothecae drawn to same scale. Reduplications shown in B. D. A female

gonotheca.

196 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

teeth observed among paratypes), sharply pointed to bluntly rounded,

separated by rounded bays. Hydrotheca not striated, and margin smooth and

equite round when seen end-on. No diaphragm, but an annular thickening

near base of hydrotheca, and a row of refringent dots just above it. Redupli-

cations may occur, involving both the margin and the row of refringent dots.

Hydranth with about 16 tentacles and rounded manubrium.

Gonothecae borne direct from hydrorhiza on short annulated pedicels

(2-6 annulations), slender and elongated, deeply annulated (5—9 annula-

tions) for over ? length, and terminating in a smooth narrowed neck. Margin

inturned, smooth and slightly thickened, with a convex operculum. Con-

taining numerous eggs or planulae larvae attached to a central blastostyle.

The holotype has only female gonothecae, but one of the paratypes has 2 male

gonothecae, which are similar in shape to the female, but slightly smaller.

Measurements (mm.) Holotype Paratypes

Pedicel, length .. O°49-1°15 0:26—2°22

maximum diameter 0:05—0°10 0:05-0:08

Hydrotheca, length 0:46—0-72 0°43-0°71

maximum diameter 0-21—-0°37 O°21—-0°27

length/diameter che 1-76—2°39 1°7'7=3:00

Gonotheca, female, length .. oe .. 0°84-1°72

maximum diameter ue ae .. 0°33-0°50

Gonotheca, male, length vil ae aif ORF

maximum diameter ae ise ee 0-26

Remarks. ‘This species is named after J. G. Morgans who collected the first

material examined off Miller’s Point. Later, material rich in gonophores was

found among the Pieter Faure collection and was chosen as the holotype. Gono-

phores have been recorded from September to November.

The species is close to Campanularia africana Stechow 1923b, which, however,

lacks the raised rim below the hydrothecal margin, and has smooth gonothecae.

The general shape of the hydrotheca is similar to a number of other

Campanulariidae, including Campanularia hickson ‘Totton 1930, Clytia ulvae

Stechow 1g919a, and Eucalyx paradoxus Stechow 1923b. It is excluded from

Clytia and Eucalyx by the absence of a diaphragm, whereas Campanularia

hicksomt has a striated hydrotheca and a smooth gonotheca.

Clytia gracilis (M. Sars) 1851

Gonothyraea gracilis Hincks 1868, p. 183; Pl. XXXVI, fig. 1.

(?)Gonothyraea gracilis Hartlaub 1905, p. 583, figs. F?-J?.

Laomedia gracilis Broch 1918, p. 170.

Clytia gracilis Stechow 1925, p. 431, figs. 9-10.

Records. PF 15608 K. FB 119 M, 131 F. FAL 23 Q, 26 L, 66 Q, 82 Y,

279 H, 288 D, 290 D.

THE HYDROZOA OF FALSE BAY, SOUTH AFRICA 197

Description. Stem unbranched or sparingly branched, reaching a maximum

height of 0-6 cm., usually annulated at top and bottom only, but occasionally

throughout. %

Hydrothecae extremely variable in size, shape and number of teeth. Shape

inversely conical, or with almost parallel sides. Marginal teeth sharp or

acutely rounded, with rounded bays between them, 8-15 in number. Margin

undulating when seen end-on, but not sufficiently so to show striations in side

view, except near the edges.

Gonotheca with truncated top and constriction just below the rim. Con-

taining up to 4 medusa-buds, each with 4 well-developed tentacles when

mature. Present in March, July, August, October and December.

Measurements (mm.)

Pedicel, length aE ae ce ee .. 0°66—5:72

maximum diameter .. ws: we be .. 0°05-O'11

Hydrotheca, length .. sf ty: sue He .. 0°39-0°89

maximum diameter .. ae if oe .. 018-061

length/diameter an ms soe sis Sey L20—-2°30

Gonotheca, length a ee Ba ae .. 0°56-1-07

maximum diameter .. i. ae = -. O'25-0:41

Remarks. From the preliminary sorting of material this species appears to be

common all round the South African coast from Table Bay to Natal. In spite

of the variable nature of the hydrotheca it is easily recognized by its gonotheca.

Stechow 1925 has reported divided marginal teeth in material from Cape

Agulhas. Possibly he is mistaken over this point, for due to the extreme

delicacy of the hydrothecae the impression of divided teeth is often obtained in

microscopic preparations when the teeth of one side are superimposed on those

of the other, especially since the teeth sometimes lean slightly to one side.

Clytia raridentata (Hincks) 1861

Campanularia ?raridentata Hincks 1868, p. 176; Pl. XXVI, fig. 2.

Clytia raridentata Vanhoffen 1910, p. 301, fig. 22.

Thaumantias raridentata Stechow 1925, p. 426.

Remarks. The previous records of this species from South Africa should be

regarded with caution, as none had gonophores. Vanhoffen’s material from

Simonstown might well be Clytza gracilis, which is common in False Bay, and

which often has as few as 8 marginal teeth. The same might apply to Stechow’s

material which was not illustrated.

Further, there is some confusion over the appearance of the gonophore of

C. raridentata, Fraser 1944 describing a smooth gonotheca from North America

similar in shape to C. gracilis, and Stechow 1923c describing an annulated one

from the Mediterranean. It is possible that two species are involved: Fraser

may have been dealing with C. gracilis.

198 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Obelia dichotoma (Linn.) 1758

Obelia dichotoma Hincks 1868, p. 156; Pl. XXVIII, fig. 1.

Laomedia dichotoma Vervoort 1946, p. 292, fig. 128; 1946b, p. 344.

Records. CP 16. FB 106, 119 K, 120 B. FAL 23 N, 34 B, 78 X, 108 P, 123

M, 125 8, 148 H, 160 X, 165 X, 169 Z, 279 J. |

Description. Colonies usually less than 2 cm. in height and scantily branched,

but sometimes reaching 2-9 cm. and more profusely branched in the typical

pseudo-dichotomous manner. Stem straight, or slightly geniculate, due to

curvature within the internodes rather than bending at the nodes.

Hydrotheca margin very delicate and almost invariably damaged or worn.

Only rarely can the typical marginal indentations be distinguished. No

longitudinal striations. Diaphragm straight or slightly oblique.

Gonangia borne profusely on stem or hydrorhiza. Medusae with 16 ten-

tacles at time of liberation. Gonangia observed in January to March, May,

June and August.

Obelia geniculata (Linn.) 1758

Obelia geniculata Hincks 1868, p. 149; Pl. XXV, fig. 1.

Records. CP 356 CG.

Description. A single colony with gonangia reaching a maximum height of

0-7 cm.

Remarks. The colony approaches var. subsessilis Jaderholm 1904, but since

the internodes of a stem may vary from this form (short and thick, giving rise

to pedicels with only one annulation) to the typical form (elongated, giving

rise to pedicels with several annulations), no distinct varieties have been

distinguished.

Family: Campanulinidae

Lovenella chiquitita n. sp.

Fig. 7

Types. Holotype FAL 288 J, epizootic on Eudendrium deciduum n. sp., in

University of Gape Town. Paratypes FB 131 F, epizootic on Sertularella falsa

n. sp., and FAL 108 O, growing on weed, in University of Cape Town.

Description. Hydrorhiza creeping on weeds or other hydroids, smooth,

reticulate. Hydrothecae borne on pedicels which arise direct from hydrorhiza,

or from a stem which is sparingly branched in a sympodial manner. Maximum

height of colony 1:48 mm. Pedicels and stems annulated throughout. Pedicels

of varying length, widening gradually towards hydrothecae, from which they

are not sharply demarcated.

Hydrothecae minute, delicate, tubular, slightly constricted in distal half and

widening again at margin. Margin sinuous, with low pointed teeth alternating

with opercular segments. Operculum of 8-10 segments, leaving a small

circular opening between their central points. Diaphragm delicate, but quite

THE HYDROZOA OF FALSE BAY, SOUTH AFRICA 199

distinct. Perisarc exceedingly delicate throughout. Hydrothecae occasionally

regenerated. Hydranth with over 12 tentacles.

Gonothecae arising from hydrorhiza on short annulated pedicels; smooth,

elongated, tapering below, truncated above, containing two medusa buds,

present in October. Structure of medusa not discernible.

Measurements Holotype Paratypes

Pedicel, length .. 2 ae: an .. 0°04—0°38 0:05—-0°35

diameter at base .. = see .. 0°035—0°06 0:04-0:06

diameter at distalend .. za .. 0°04-0'075 0:045-0:07

Hydrotheca, length from diaphragm oe Oso O72, 0-14—-0°30

diameter at margin a: oe .. 0°09-0°14 0:09—0'12

height/diameter .. .. 1:18-1:92 1-22—2°74,

Gonotheca, length, including seacall .. 0°51-0°63

maximum diameter a 0°21—0°:29

Remarks. In one of the paratypes (FB LOT F) the hydrothecae are slightly

longer and the proportion of length to diameter greater, but the measurements

Fic. 7. Lovenella chiquitita n. sp.

A. A branching stem bearing hydrothecae. B. A gonotheca. C—F. Solitary hydrothecae from

different aspects; F showing an annular thecal thickening below the diaphragm. A, B and

E from the holotype, C and F from the paratype FB 131 F, D from the paratype FAL 108 O.

200 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

overlap those of the holotype. In the same sample some, but not all, of the

hydrothecae possess a slightly thicker perisarc and an annular thecal thickening

just below the attachment of the diaphragm. Since this seems to be a variable

character it cannot be used to distinguish a separate species. No gonophores

were present in this sample.

The species recorded by Vanhéffen 1910 from Simonstown as Campanulina

turrita Hincks is very similar and may prove to be the same species, although

the illustration shows no demarcation between the hydrotheca and the

opercular segments.

Of the few species of Lovenella described, L. chiquitita resembles most closely

L. clausa (Loven), in which, however, the pedicel is not so distinctly annulated.

Family: Lafoeidae

Hebella furax n. sp.

Fig. 8

Types. Holotype PF 18293 B, part in University of Gape Town, part in S.A.

Museum. Paratype FAL 58 Y in University of Cape Town.

Description. Colony stolonial. Hydrorhiza parasitic or epizootic on Lyto-

carpus filamentosus (Lamarck). Hydrothecae arising direct from the hydrorhiza

on short annulated pedicels, tubular, widening very slightly towards margin;

margin smooth, everted. No diaphragm, but a pronounced annular thickening

at base of hydrotheca and above it a row of refringent dots.

The species exists in two forms, both of which may occur in the same colony.

In the normal, free-living form the hydrorhiza creeps over the stems or hydro-

cladia of the host, giving rise at intervals to the hydrothecal pedicels. The

pedicels bear from 3 to 6 (usually 5) annulations which are twisted in a spiral

manner. The hydrotheca is usually somewhat asymmetrical, with the aperture

oblique and the margin flaring gracefully.

In the parasitic form the hydrorhiza invades the hydrocladium of the host,

obtaining entry apparently through the mamelon at the base, and destroys and

replaces the coenosarc. The infected hydrocladia are always dead and broken

off short in sharp contrast to the other healthy hydrocladia of the colony. The

hydrorhiza of the parasite is naked and has no perisarcal covering of its own

while in the body of the host. At a different level it emerges through a hydro-

theca or through the broken end of the hydrocladium to give rise to a hydro-

theca of its own. The pedicel of such a hydrotheca acquires a perisarcal

covering immediately on emergence; it is much shorter than that of the free-

living form, sometimes giving rise at once to a hydrotheca, and sometimes

bearing 1 or 2 twisted annulations first. The hydrotheca shows no difference

in shape and proportion from the free-living form, but is on the whole smaller.

In both forms reduplications of the margin occasionally occur, and in one

example (the paratype FAL 58 Y), two hydrothecae were seen to arise from

one pedicel. The polyps are strongly contracted in the material and it was

THE HYDROZOA OF FALSE BAY, SOUTH AFRICA

201

not possible to determine accurately the number of tentacles, although there

appear to be about 17.

No gonophores are present, so that the placing of the species in the genus

Hebella is provisional.

Measurements (mm.)

Holotype Paratype

Free-living | Parasitic | Parasitic

*Pedicel, length 0°21—0°66 | 0:03-0-15 | 0:04-0:17

maximum diameter 0:08-0:14 | 0:06—0-11 | 0:08-0:10

*Hydrotheca, length 0:77-1'18 | 0:65-0:84 | 0:-60—-0°85

diameter at margin 0:36-0:61 | 0°32-0°54 | 0:31-0°47

length/diameter .. | 1°54-2°14 | 1°50-2°17 | 1°81—-1-94

* The base of the hydrotheca is taken as the first indentation below the annular thecal thickening.

Remarks. The parasitic condition resembles that found in Hebella dispolians

(Warren 1909). Here also the hydrorhiza may creep over the surface of the

Fic. 8. Hebella furax n. sp.

A. The free-living epizootic form, from the holotype. B and C. The parasitic form growing on

Lytocarpus filamentosus, from the paratype FAL 58 Y.

202 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

host and give rise to normal hydrothecae, and may also enter the perisarc of

the host and invade its hydrothecae. There are, however, a number of

differences; in H. dispolians the parasitic hydranths are usually devoid of hydro-

thecae of their own, the free-living forms have smooth or only slightly wrinkled

pedicels, the hydrothecal margin is not everted, the size is smaller, and finally

the living coenosarc of the host (a species of Sertularia) continues to exist side

by side with the parasite, a condition which has not been observed in H. furax.

The form and size of the hydrotheca of the non-parasitic form of H. furax

are very similar to those of H. parasitica (Ciamician) but since the latter is not

parasitic but epizootic, it is considered advisable to establish a new species for

the False Bay material.

Hebella scandens (Bale) 1888

Lafoea scandens Bale 1888, p. 758; Pl. XIII, figs. 16-19. Warren 1908, p. 341,

fig. 21.

Hebella scandens Bale 1913, p. 117; Pl. XII, fig. 10. Stechow 1919, p. 77,

howz,

Hebellopsis scandens Stechow 1925, p. 442.

Records. PF 337 D, 15608 B, 15675 E. FAL 66 J, 78 E, 159 M, 169 V,

207 E, 214 F, 217 S, 223 W, 268 E, 274 Q, 279 M.

Description. Dense colonies growing on Sertularella arbuscula and other

hydroids. Hydrothecae similar to those described by Bale. Gonothecae

abundant in some colonies, containing as many as 4 medusae one above the

other in successive stages of development. Medusae deep, with 3 long tentacles

at time of liberation. Margin of gonotheca with 4 emarginations, each with

an opercular flap. Gonangia present in April and September.

Scandia mutabilis (Ritchie) 1907

Campanularia mutabilis Ritchie 1907, p. 504; Pl. XXIII, figs. 3-5.

Lafoea magna Warren 1908, p. 342, fig. 22.

Scandia mutabilis Stechow 1919a, p. 79. Fraser 1944, p. 208; Pl. 39, fig. 187.

Records. PF 396B.

Description. Colony growing on Thecocarpus giardi. Numerous hydrothecae

borne on pedicels with 6-11 spiral annulations. Near the base of the hydro-

theca is an annular thickening of the perisarc similar to that in Hebella and

Campanularia, attached to the upper region of which is a thin, membranous

diaphragm. Gonophores absent.

Measurements (mm.)

Pedical, length eS a 3 nt si .. 0°43-1°04

maximum diameter .. Be a oe .. O*14-0°19

Hydrotheca, length .. a Me AY A .. [*IQ=1°54

diameter at margin... as ays Ss .. 0°61—0°90

length/diameter Ae a ae a AN Ge Ay oat,

THE HYDROZOA OF FALSE BAY, SOUTH AFRICA 203

Remarks. The hydrothecae of this species are very similar to those of Hebella

parasitica and H. furax. However, the measurements of the hydrothecae are

somewhat greater, and the pedicel longer.

Reticularia serpens (Hassall) 1848

Filellum serpens Hincks 1868, p. 214; Pl. XLI, fig. 4. Stechow 1925, p. 458.

Coppinia arcta Hincks 1868, p. 219; Pl. XLI, fig. 5.

Records. FAL 20 8, 26.N, 290 E.

Description. Colonies growing on Amphisbetia operculata, Aglaophenia pluma

var. typica, and Nemertesia cymodocea. Hydrothecal margin very slightly everted,

and usually with several reduplications. No coppiniae present. |

Measurements (mm.)

Hydrotheca, length of free part, without reduplications.. 0-09—0-28

length of free part, with reduplications ae .. O*16-0°42

diameter at margin .. ae is v ». 0°09-0°15

K.ygophylax cornucopia Millard 1955

K ygophylax cornucopia Millard 1955, p. 219, fig. 3.

Records. F 299 B. FB 131 B. FAL 78S, 169 X, 217 N, 279 E. (Recorded by

Millard 1955.) ,

Family: Syntheciidae

Synthecium ?elegans Allman 1872

Fig. 9, D

Synthecium elegans Allman 1876, p. 266; Pl. XV, figs. 1-3. Billard 1925, p. 1209,

fig. 5.

Synthecium subventricosum Bale 1914, p. 5; Pl. I, figs. 3-5. Stechow 1925, p. 462.

Records. PF 15675 G. FAL 66 H.

Description. One colony of about a dozen pinnate stems reaching a maximum

height of 1-9 cm., and another very young colony without hydrocladia reaching

a height of 0-7 cm. Arrangement of lower stem internodes very irregular,

some bearing one pair of hydrocladia, others one pair of hydrothecae, and others

one pair of each. Arrangement in upper part also sometimes irregular, but

usually each internode bears one pair of proximal and one pair of distal

hydrothecae with a pair of hydrocladia in the centre.

Hydrocladia divided into regular internodes, but the nodes are sometimes

indistinct; occasionally bearing a pair of sub-branches. These arise from the

proximal part of a much-elongated internode. Hydrocladia often continued

as stolons which anastomose with other parts of the colony. Thecal pairs sub-

opposite in proximal parts of hydrocladia, becoming opposite in the 2nd to

grd pair.

Hydrothecae ventricose below, adnate for over two-thirds of height, those

on proximal part of hydrocladium more adnate than those in distal part.

204 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Margin forming an angle of about 45° with hydrocladium, reduplications

sometimes present.

Gonophores absent.

Measurements (mm.)

Hydrocladium, length of internode ad ot .. 0°60-0°73

Hydrotheca, length abcauline “hs a ay .. 0°34-0°44

length adcauline, adnate part a ue .. 0°43-0°54.

length adcauline, free part .. ae ie .. 0°06—0-20

diameter near base... By a .. O°14-0°18

diameter at margin... : 0°20-0'23

Remarks. In the absence of scat phon it is not ¢ pOSIDIe to identify this

species with certainty, for the trophosome of S. elegans is almost indistinguish-

able from that of . patulum (Busk.). The branching of the hydrocladia shows

some resemblance to S$. ramosum Allman, but is not developed to anywhere near

the same extent.

Synthecium hians n. sp.

Fig. 9, A—C

Types. Holotype FAL 214 G in University of Cape Town.

Description. A single colony: of about half a dozen upright stems reaching a

maximum height of 3-8 cm., and several fragments. Colour: light brown.

Hydrorhiza tangled, thick, with diameter of stolons equal to that of stem.

Stem unfascicled, thick at base, thin and transparent at tip, pinnate, segmen-

tation indistinct in older parts. Arrangement of hydrothecae and hydrocladia

very variable, but usually each internode bears 3 pairs of equally spaced

hydrothecae and one pair of opposite hydrocladia arising immediately below

the second pair of hydrothecae. Hydrothecae in older parts of stem empty and

usually eroded, leaving only stumps or scars. Basal part of stem without

hydrothecae or hydrocladia.

Hydrocladia unbranched, bearing up to 13 pairs of hydrothecae. Hydro-

thecae opposite, but often sub-opposite in proximal parts of hydrocladia.

There are 2 distinct arrangements. In the younger parts of the colony the

hydrocladia arise direct from the stem with no dividing node, and there is

always one unpaired hydrotheca at the base, followed by sub-opposite pairs

which gradually change to opposite. In the older parts of the colony there is a

well-marked transverse node near the base of the hydrocladium, followed

immediately by hydrothecal pairs which are opposite or very nearly so.

Segmentation of hydrocladium irregular, with a node after 1-4 pairs of

hydrothecae.

Hydrotheca narrow at base, widening strongly to margin, adnate for most

of its length, only very slightly bent outwards, with the margin forming an

angle of between 50° and go° with the hydrocladium. Margin smooth, everted,

often reduplicated. Diaphragm oblique, with outer edge reaching sometimes

THE HYDROZOA OF FALSE BAY, SOUTH AFRICA 205

Fic. 9. A-C. Synthecium hians n. sp. from the holotype.

A. Stem and hydrocladia from younger part of colony. B. Stem and hydrocladia from older

part of colony. C. Two pairs of hydrothecae from a hydrocladium.

D. Synthecium ?elegans Allman. Two pairs of hydrothecae from a hydrocladium, FAL 66 H.

206

as far as half-way up the abcauline wall.

ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

below margin on abcauline wall.

Gonophores absent.

Measurements (mm.)

Stem, diameter

Perisarc thin, sometimes thickened

0-18—-0°74

Hydrocladium, distance between 2 consecutive pairs of

Hydrotheca, length abcauline, from diaphragm attach-

Remarks.

hydrothecae

ment

length Wieauline. adnate pant

length adcauline, free part

adnate part/adcauline length

diameter at level of abcauline diaphragm attachment

diameter at margin

OF aaa:

0°14-0°26

OFS ORO ay

0°03-0'05

0:86-0:92

0°13-0'17

0:23-0:27

This species is very close to S. chilense Hartlaub 1905 (which is

possibly a synonym for S. robustum Nutting 1904).

It is, however, smaller in

all its measurements, the hydrothecae being approximately half the size, and

this fact together with minor differences of shape and proportions make it

advisable to establish a new species.

species are summarized as follows.

Dictyocladium coactum Stechow 1925, p

S. hians

. Hydrorhiza thick, same diameter

as stem.

Hydrotheca with about 75 of

adcauline wall free.

Margin distinctly everted.

Hydrotheca only slightly bent out-

wards. Margin forms angle of

50-90° with hydrocladium.

The smaller differences between the two

S. chilense

Hydrorhiza considerably thinner

than stem.

Hydrotheca with about +

adcauline wall free.

Margin not, or only slightly

everted.

Hydrotheca strongly bent out-

wards. Margin forms angle of

20-45° with hydrocladium.

Family: Sertulariidae

Dictyocladium coactum Stechow 1923b

. 466, fig. 27.

Records. FAL 52 S, 78 C, Gas hit 1D) 153 Us 174 Y, 183 M, 214 E, 274 W,

288 E.

Description.

Numerous colonies with normally unbranched stems, reaching

a maximum height of 2-2 cm. Rarely a stem will give off one or more side-

THE HYDROZOA OF FALSE BAY, SOUTH AFRICA 20°]

branches which arise from within the hydrothecae. Anastomoses between

different parts of the colony are occasionally present, but the arrangement is

not quite the same as in the genotype of Dictyocladium (D. dichotomum Allman

1888). Tendril-like structures arise from the tips of the stems, and attach

themselves, not to hydrothecae, but to other parts of the hydrorhiza.

The gonophores are surrounded by separate annulations and not by a

continuous spiral as in D. dichotomum. They arise usually from the base of the

stem, but sometimes higher up, usually just above the nodes. Some of the

gonophores were definitely female, in others the sex was not distinguishable.

Present from August to September.

Salacia articulata (Pallas) 1766

Thuiaria persocialis Allman 1876, p. 271; Pl. XVII, figs. 4-6.

Thuiaria pectinata Allman 1888, p. 69; Pl. XX XIII, fig. 1.

Thuiaria articulata Ritchie 1909, p. 84, fig. 6.

Salacia articulata Stechow 1925, p. 465.

Dymella articulata Vervoort 1946a, p. 320.

Records. F 254. CP 333 A. PF 351 B, 5013 A, 15608 A. FB 107, 140 D,

141 C. FAL 20 Q, 26 M, 42 S, 52 P, 62 P, 78 B, 95 N, 207 G, 222 D, 268 CG,

279 K, 2890 A.

Description. Gommon in False Bay, though only occasionally as rich colonies.

Gonophores present from July to October.

Sertularella africana Stechow 1919a

Figs. TO) Lee aE

Sertularella fusiforms Warren 1908, p. 295, fig. 5, CG and D.

Sertularella africana Stechow 1919a, p. 83; 1923c, p. 179, fig. V.

Records. F 296 (reported by Eyre 1939). FAL 56 E, 78 V, 125 W.

Description. Colonies of solitary, upright and usually unbranched stems.

Occasionally a stem bears one or more branches, which may arise from within

a hydrotheca or from immediately below it. Maximum height 1-1 cm.

Hydrotheca adnate about one half, with adcauline wall convex and usually

weakly striated. In occasional hydrothecae the striations extend all the way

round. Abcauline wall varying from slightly convex to straight or even slightly

concave, elongated so that the margin of the hydrotheca is not perpendicular

to the hydrothecal axis but tilted slightly towards the stem. No internal teeth.

Gonophores spindle-shaped, with narrow opening and 3 marginal teeth.

Female larger than male, with wider opening and shorter marginal teeth.

External marsupium present. Present in February and August,

208 - ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Measurements (mm.)

Internode, length .. lie “ a6 sy .. 0°29-0°79

diameter across node .. Se mM i .. O*13-0:20

Hydrotheca, length abcauline A Oe be . + 0°47 0708

length adcauline, adnate part : ae ». O°24-0°32

length adcauline, free part .. ae a .. 0°25-0°97

adnate part/adcauline length te Le .. O'4I-0°54

diameter at mouth ... of ae ia -, OP2= Oras

maximum diameter .. y ae ae .. 0°25-0°33

Gonotheca, male, length .. a Ne ae ie 1°86

maximum diameter .. ee al i Be 0°83

Gonotheca, female, length .. ae ae 3% By CO 2016)

maximum diameter .. 0-81—1°03

Remarks. ‘This species can easily be distinguished from S. polyzonias by its

habit of growth and:short, normally unbranched stems. The habit of growth

is similar to that of S. fusiformis and S. tenella. From the former it can be

distinguished by the complete absence of internal hydrothecal teeth, and from

the latter by the striations on the hydrotheca which normally occur on the

adcauline wall only. S. africana also differs from all other species without

internal teeth in the shape of the hydrotheca, in which the margin is not

perpendicular to the axis, but is always tilted at least slightly towards the

stem, never away from it as in S. polyzonias.

Sertularella arbuscula (Lamouroux) 1816

Figs. 10 B, 11 G

Sertularella crassipes Allman 1886, p. 133; Pl. VIII, figs. 4-5.

Sertularella cuneata Allman 1886, p. 134; Pl. IX, figs. 1-2.

Sertularella arborea Marktanner-Turnetscher 1890, p. 221. Ritchie 19074, p. 534.

Sertularella tumida Warren 1908, p. 297, fig. 6 A and CG, not B.

Sertularella arbuscula Stechow 1925, p. 487.

Records. PF 337 C, 15608 G, 15675 GC. FB 119 B, 131 E, 133 D. FAL 13 D,

26 G, 42 T, 52 T; 56 GC, 62 N, 64 K, 66 K, 78 D, 153° Ko Gomes

207 D, 217 R, 268 D, 274 V, 279 N, 292 A.

Description. There is nothing to add to the description of this well-known

species. It can easily be recognized by its tendency to branch in one plane,

forming fan-shaped colonies, by the distinct outward bend in the hydrotheca,

the three internal teeth, and the elongated and practically smooth gonotheca.

The amount of bend in the hydrotheca, however, varies, and in some individuals

the abcauline wall is practically straight. The species is extremely common in

False Bay, usually reaching a height of 4-6 cm., although a maximum height

of 15:0 cm. has been observed. The colour varies from horn-colour to brown

or even black, Gonophores occur in April, and June to October.

THE HYDROZOA OF FALSE BAY, SOUTH AFRICA

209

Fic. 10. The False Bay species of Sertularelia.

A. S. goliathus Stechow; FAL 222 C._ B.S. arbuscula (Lamouroux); FB 131 E. C. S. fusiformis

(Hincks); FAL 52 U. D. S. fusvformis (Hincks), form with crowded hydrothecae; FAL 176 V.

E. S. mediterranea Hartlaub; FAL 66 M. F. S. falsa n. sp. from the holotype.

G. S. flabellum

(Allman); FAL 95 Q. H. S. capensis n. sp. from the holotype. I. S. africana Stechow; FAL 56 E.

J. S. polyzonias (Linnaeus); FAL 207 F. K. S. xantha Stechow; FAL 186 D. L. S. megista

Stechow; FAL 66 L.

210 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Measurements (mm.)

Internode, length 0:38-0:71

diameter across node .. es a a .. 0°23-0°41

Hydrotheca, length abcauline #: oe Be .. O°41-0°61

length adcauline, adnate part 0°27—-0°44.

length adcauline, free part .. A ne .- 0°26-0°41

adnate part/adcauline length 0°4.2—0°62

diameter at mouth .. Me ~” fe .. O'15-0°31

maximum diameter 0°27—-0°38

Gonotheca, length 2-60-2°84.

maximum diameter 0°82-0°92

Sertularelia capensis n. sp.

Fig. 10 A

Types. Holotype FB 114 A; paratypes FB 115 D and FAL 64 L, all in

University of Cape Town.

Description. Rich colonies reaching a height of about 4.cm. Stem unfascicled,

flexuous and straggling. Branching irregular and profuse, with most of the

branches ending in tendrils which attach to other parts of the colony or to the

substratum, uniting the whole into a complex tangled mass. In unattached

stems the branching is roughly alternate, each branch arising from below a

hydrotheca and forming an angle varying from about 30° to go° with the

stem. ‘The two rows of hydrothecae lie in one plane.

Hydrotheca with a little over half the adcauline wall adnate, broad and

squat, with wide mouth. Diameter at mouth only very slightly less than that in

widest part. Margin perpendicular to hydrothecal axis or tilted very slightly

away from stem, sides straight to slightly convex, distal half with 1-3 distinct

annulations equally developed all round hydrotheca. 4 well-developed

marginal teeth of equal size. Operculum of 4 pieces. No internal teeth.

Hydranth with abcauline blind pouch.

Gonophores absent.

Measurements (mm.) Holotype Paratype

FAL 64 L

Internode length 0°59-0°75 0°50-0°85

diameter across node 0:19-0:26 O°17—0°25

Hydrotheca, length abcauline 0°41-0°47 0:36-0-44.

length adcauline, adnate part 0°31-0°35 0:28-0°33

length adcauline, free part 0°24-0°31 0°22—0'27

adnate part/adcauline length 0°53-0°56 0°51-0°58

diameter at mouth 0°25-0°30 O23 027

maximum diameter 0°28-0°35 0°29-0°31

Remarks. The habit of growth and form of ihe colony is somewhat similar to

S. polyzonias and S. falsa. From the latter it is distinguished by the absence of

THE HYDROZOA OF FALSE BAY, SOUTH AFRICA Pe we |

internal hydrothecal teeth, and from both by the shape of the hydrotheca and

its striations.

The species is very close to S. spzrifera Stechow 1931, but lacks the dichoto-

mous branching and has a broader hydrothecal margin.

Sertularella falsa n. sp.

Figs. 10 F, 11, D.

Types and Records. Holotype FB 119 C, and paratypes FB 131 H, CP 333 B

all in University of Gape Town. Further records: FB 133 B. FAL 153 S,

274 U.

Description. Hydrorhiza creeping over the surface of other hydroids or weeds,

sometimes so thickly as to hide the latter and give the appearance of a fascicled

stem. Stem unfascicled, lax, flexuous, and straggling; reaching a maximum

height of 2-9 cm., branching irregularly. Terminal parts of stem or branches

often with abnormally elongated nodes, and sometimes ending in tendrils

which anastomose with other parts of the hydrorhiza. Branches arising from

below hydrothecae, sometimes faintly annulated at origin. The two rows of

hydrothecae in one plane, nodes distinct and constricted.

Hydrotheca smooth, with approximately half adcauline wall adnate, and

with free part bending gently away from stem. Margin not perpendicular to

hydrotheca! axis, but tilted away from stem, adcauline wall convex, abcauline

wall concave in distal half. Mouth not constricted, with 4 marginal teeth of

equal size and an operculum of 4 pieces. 4 small and very regular internal

teeth, alternating with marginal teeth. Perisarc not exceptionally thick.

Hydranth with about 25 tentacles and abcauline blind pouch.

Gonophores elongated, spindle-shaped, smooth in proximal part and with a

number of shallow annulations in distal part, and 3 or 4 marginal teeth. Very

similar to those of S. mediterranea. Present in March, April, August, September

and December.

Measurements (mm.) FAfolotype Paratypes

Internode length, excluding abnormal elon-

gated internodes 0:54-0:78 0°52—-0°87

diameter across node 0-14—0°22 0-1 7-027

Hydrotheca, length abcauline 0°4.5-0°52 0°40-0°54.

length adcauline, adnate part 0:30-0:36 0:26-0-41

length adcauline, free part 0°29-0°35 0:28—0-36

adnate part/adcauline length 0°4.7-0°55 0°45-0°61

diameter at mouth 0:20-0:23 0:19-0:26

maximum diameter 0°24—0:30 0°24—0°32

Gonotheca, male, length 1-62—2-38 1-61-1°97

maximum diameter 0:60-0:81 0°59—-0-66

Gonotheca, female, length 2°90—2-5h

maximum diameter

0-78—0-90

P41. ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Remarks. S. falsa is practically identical with S. polyzonias in its form of

growth, and the shape and size of the hydrotheca. It differs only in the presence

of internal teeth. The number, position and size of the internal teeth are

remarkably constant in this species. In only one specimen out of the many

examined (FAL 153 S) were a few obviously badly worn hydrothecae at the

base of the stem found to lack internal teeth.

Sertularella flabellum (Allman) 1886

Figs. 10 G, 11 G

Thecocladium flabellum Allman 1886, p. 149; Pl. XIX, figs. 4-5. 1888, p. 81;

Pl. XX XVIII.

Sertularella flabellum Stechow 1925, p. 476.

Records. FAL 95 Q.

Description. A single group of stems reaching a maximum height of 2-4 cm.,

apparently a young colony since no stem has more than one branch. Number

[_ }cm.

Fic. 11. The gonophores of the False Bay species of Sertularella.

A. S. goliathus Stechow, male; FAL 222 C. B. S. mediterranea Hartlaub, male; FAL 66 M.

C. S. arbuscula (Lamouroux); FAL 52 T. D.S. falsa n. sp. from the holotype. E. S. fustformis

(Hincks), male; FAL 52 U. F. S. africana Stechow, male; FAL 125 W. G. S. flabellum (All-

man), female; FAL 95 Q. H.'S. polyzonias (Linnaeus); FAL 207 F. I. S. xantha Stechow (not

from False Bay material). J. S. megista Stechow, male; FAL 66 L.

THE HYDROZOA OF FALSE BAY, SOUTH AFRICA 213

of hydrothecae per internode varying from 1-9, but usually between 3 and 6.

Hydrotheca with perisarcal thickening around margin, and usually with 2 or

more reduplications, which may almost double the length. Otherwise ar1ange-

ment and shape of hydrothecae exactly as in previous descriptions.

Gonophores present in September, female, each containing one large

planula larva.

Measurements (mm., the hydrothecal length is measured straight across the

curves, and exclusive of reduplications).

Internode length .. oe ue ss a .. 1°56-3°65

Hydrotheca, length abcauline ee on vs .. 0°45-0°54

length adcauline, adnate part M4 ue 2 OF43-0-72

length adcauline, free part .. 2 is -. 0°06-0°27

adnate part/adcauline length we ie -. 0:63-0:92

length of reduplicated part .. a ie .. 0°00-0°46

diameter at margin .. 4 Be an O270.92

maximum diameter .. oe fi ne .. 0°28-0°34

Gonotheca, length oy an a ae ie 1-89 —2-29

maximum diameter .. se He a So) Uo BSje7ig

Sertularella fusiformis (Hincks) 1861

Figs. 10 Gand D, 11 E

Sertularella fusiformis forma glabra Broch 1933, p. 69, fig. 27.

Sertularella lineata Stechow 1923b, p. 109; 1925, p. 469, fig. 20.

Non Sertularella fusiformis Warren 1908, p. 295, fig. 5, G and D.

iesords. GP 326 B, 356 G. FB 109. FAL 52 U, 153 N, 176 V, 311 R.

Description. Stem unfascicled, unbranched or occasionally with 1 or 2

branches, reaching a maximum height of 2:2 cm. Stem smooth or with a

slight indication of annulation above and below each node. The two rows of

hydrothecae in one plane, or approaching one another very slightly on one

side.

Hydrothecae very much more close-set than those figured by Broch, usually

smooth, but ocasionally with suggestion of annulations, 4 to 4 adnate, ventri-

cose, with abcauline wall slightly convex and not elongated, margin perpen-

dicular to hydrothecal axis. Internal teeth present, small, usually 4, alternating

with marginal teeth, sometimes one or more wanting.

Gonothecae annulated completely or nearly so, spindle-shaped, with narrow

mouth and 3 or 4 marginal teeth. Present in February, April and June.

Measurements (mm.) False Bay S. lineata

Material Stechow*

Internode, length Ure 1 ay 12) 0530-0752 0:40-0:60

diameter across node _ ... Me .. O*15—-0°29 0:13—-0°16

* Measurements taken from Stechow’s type material loaned by the Munich Museum.

214 _ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Hydrotheca, length abcauline 0:44-0:60 0:38-0°55

length adcauline, adnate part 0:16-0:32 0-21—0°29

length adcauline, free part 0:28—-0°44 0:28-0:34.

adnate part/adcauline length 0-30—0°50 0-40-0°46

diameter at mouth 0°20-0°25 0-1 7—0°23

maximum diameter 0:26-0:33 0:26—0°32

Gonotheca, male, length - a .. 1°46-2:12

maximum diameter 0:78-1:89

Gonotheca, female, length .. ats Se) ee esi

maximum diameter 0-80—-0:99

Remarks. As Broch has pointed out, S. fusiformis is an exceedingly variable

species. ‘The False Bay material resembles Broch’s forma glabra rather than

his forma ornata, in that the hydrothecal wall is smooth or nearly so, but differs

from both in the shorter internodes and more crowded hydrothecae. All

degrees of this crowding can be found, in some stems the margin of one hydro-

theca barely reaches the base of the next one, in others the margin of one

hydrotheca reaches nearly half-way up the length of the next one and practi-

cally to the base of the following one on the same side (fig. 10 D). In these

extreme forms no sign of the normal annulation above and below the internode

can be seen.

S. fusiformis includes S. lineata Stechow 1923b. Stechow’s material, of which

I have been able to examine a prepared slide, has more definite annulations

on the hydrotheca, and above and below the nodes of the stem. The thecal

annulations are not so well defined as in forma ornata, although approaching

this condition. The hydrothecae are somewhat smaller than the False Bay

material, but more variable in size than suggested by Stechow, and the range

overlaps that of the False Bay material. The perisarc is described as being

of ‘sehr betrachtlicher Dicke’, but the thickness in fact varies from 0-01 to

0-04 mm. in different parts of the colony. The False Bay material is similarly

variable (under 0-o1 to 0:05 mm.). The annulations described at the base of

the stem in S. lineata are present in some stems of S. fusiformis, but usually the

hydrothecae commence immediately.

Broch has remarked also on the variable nature of the internal teeth in

S. fusiformis. In the False Bay material the normal condition appears to be 4

minute internal teeth alternating with the marginal teeth. But these teeth

are apparently extremely delicate, and very easily become lost or eroded,

with the result that many hydrothecae have some or all of them missing. It

is often necessary to examine a large number to find a perfect hydrotheca with

all teeth in position. However, any remaining teeth always have their correct

position, i.e. they alternate with the marginal teeth, and there is no danger

of confusing the species with a 3-toothed one such as S. mediterranea.

S. fusiformis can be distinguished from other closely related species with

internal teeth by the shape of the hydrotheca. The margin is more or less

THE HYDROZOA OF FALSE BAY, SOUTH AFRICA 215

perpendicular to the axis, whereas in S. mediterranea the lengthening of the

abcauline wall causes the margin to be tilted towards the stem, and in S.

arbuscula and S. falsa the margin is tilted away from the stem. From S. pulchra

it differs in the simple stem and generally smaller proportions.

Sertularella goliathus Stechow 1923b

JOSS Fi) aN, JIE /8\

Sertularella goliathus Stechow 1923 b, p. 112; 1925, p. 481, fig. 37.

Records. PF 15608 D. FAL 52 Y, 222 CG.

Description. A few fascicled stems reaching a maximum height of 3-4 cm.,

and a number of broken fragments. Nodes of stem and branches usually very

faint or invisible, though quite distinct on occasional branches. Three large

internal teeth in hydrotheca, of which 1 is adcauline and 2 abcauline. Hydro-

theca with 4 to $ adcauline side adnate.

Gonothecae (not previously described) borne on the branches immediately

above the hydrothecae, large, spindle-shaped, with about 5 deep and smoothly

rounded rings around distal portion, and 3 bluntly rounded teeth at margin.

Present in June and September.

Measurements (mm.)

Internode, length .. ie mY oe ae .. 0°67-0°95

diameter across node .. st Ls Me .. 0°40-0°76

Hydrotheca, length abcauline si oe a .. O'9Q0-I°14

length adcauline, adnate part aie we -. 0*50—-0°94

length adcauline, free part .. He es .. 0°33-0°59

adnate part/adcauline length si ie .. 0°46-0°73

diameter at margin .. Me 5% .. 0°32-0°41

maximum diameter .. Ne a 4 .. 0°48-0-61

Gonotheca, length .. a ay ey ae .. 2°90—3-98

maximum diameter .. : he sg san NCAP i tex:

Remarks. ‘This species differs from S. arbuscula in the position of the internal

hydrothecal teeth. In the latter species 1 tooth is abcauline and 2 adcauline.

Stechow is not clear on this point, since in his figure of S. goliathus he shows

some of the hydrothecae with one adcauline tooth, and some with one abcauline

tooth. Examination of Stechow’s type material shows that the former con-

dition always prevails. In the False Bay material the abcauline length of the

hydrotheca is slightly greater than that recorded by Stechow.

Sertularella mediterranea Hartlaub 1901

Figs. 10 BE, 11 B

Sertularella polyzonias Warren 1908, p. 291, fig. 5 A, B; Pl. XLVII, figs. 18-20.

Sertularella mediterranea Stechow 1923¢, p. 189, fig. G' and Da. Broch 1933,

PaO NV ELvoort 19464, pi\912: 1949,.p. 150, fig. 5:

Records. FAL 66 M, 78 F, 153 P, 183 J.

216 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Description. Colonies with unfascicled stems reaching a maximum height of

3-4. cm., branching occasionally in an irregular fashion. ‘The two rows of

hydrothecae in one pine.

Hydrothecae with 4 to a little over 4 of adcauline wall adnate, abcauline

wall elongated, so that margin is not perpendicular to hydrothecal axis but

inclined towards the stem. Internal teeth 3, 1 abcauline and 2 adcauline,

large.

Male gonotheca elongated, annulated in distal half, although the degree

of annulation varies considerably, some specimens being almost smooth;

narrowing to margin which bears 3 or 4 teeth. Present in April, and July to

September.

Measurements (mm.)

Internode, length .. ae a ie as .. 0'44-0°69

diameter across node .. a at oy .. 0°25-0°36

Hydrotheca, length abcauline td Us tis .. 0°65-0-86

length adcauline, adnate part fe ot .. 0°33-0°46

length adcauline, free part .. ue et .. 0°33-0°64

adnate part/adcauline length oe ss .. 0°37-0°58

diameter at mouth .. es ia ve .. 0°22-0°35

maximum diameter .. a ae: We .. O°31-0°39

Gonotheca, male, length .. EN re sak +, 2225 —-2-a0

maximum diameter .. , oe ». O85-1'°15

Remarks. ‘The author follows Sree Broch Be Vervoort in maintaining

S. mediterranea Hartlaub and S. polyzonias (Linnaeus) as separate species, the

former being distinguished by the presence of internal teeth in the hydrotheca.

S. mediterranea can be distinguished from S. arbuscula and S. fusiformis by the

fact that the abcauline wall of the hydrotheca is elongated so that the margin

is tilted towards the stem.

The number and position of the internal hydrothecal teeth is constant in

all the material examined. In one example, however (FAL 153 P), 2 minute

extra teeth were observed, one on each side of the abcauline one.

One of the colonies (FAL 153 P) bears enlarged hydrothecae similar to

those described by Warren 1908 and ascribed by him to the parasitic larva of

a pycnogonid.

Sertularella megista Stechow 1923b

Figs. 10 L, 11 J

Sertularella megista Stechow 1925, p. 480, fig. 36.

Records. FAL 52 R, 66 L, 153 M, 169 T, 183 G, 274 T, 279 L.

Description. Stiff, erect colonies reaching a maximum height of 8-7 cm. Stem

fascicled and about 3 mm. thick at base, branching irregularly. The terminal

branchlets show a tendency to an alternate arrangement in one plane, but

there is no regularity in this system. Individual branches are often enormously

elongated and may stretch for over 3 cm. without bearing sub-branches.

THE HYDROZOA OF FALSE BAY, SOUTH AFRICA PIG

Unfascicled branches straight and of equal thickness throughout. Nodes

usually clearly visible, but sometimes becoming obscure in the lower parts of

the colony. The two rows of hydrothecae in one plane.

Hydrothecae as described by Stechow, very large, adnate for over half

adcauline side, then bending sharply outwards. narrowing towards margin

which forms an angle of about 45° with hydrocladium. Free part of adcauline

side and distal part of abcauline side both slightly concave. Perisarc of

variable thickness, varying from about 0-025 to 0-05 mm. thick on abcauline

side of hydrotheca. No internal teeth.

Gonophores (not previously described) very large, spindle-shaped, with 4

or 5 broad and deep annulations in distal part, margin with 3 or 4 pointed

teeth. Sex probably male in those examined.

Measurements (mm.)

Internode, length .. a ay ee es .. 0°71-0°98

diameter across node .. BG aif ae .. 0°40—0°69

Hydrotheca, length abcauline A, uit ah a 0.001402

length adcauline, adnate part Me ay .. 0:67-0:90

length adcauline, free part .. ote Be ». 0°39-0°55

adnate part/adcauline length - ae .. 0°55-0°69

diameter at mouth _.... a) af Ay ». 0°33-0°45

maximum diameter .. oy 4, ae .. 0°47-0°61

Gonotheca, length .. the ie Bs ae eSe3 3-900

maximum diameter... iy; ». 0°85-1°50

Remarks. Under S. megista Stechow described an unfascicled stem reaching

a maximum height of 3:5 cm. It is evident that he had before him young

colonies of the species. Such stems have often been observed growing side by

side with strongly fascicled stems. Young colonies appear to reach a height of

14 to several cms. before they produce the first branch and develop the accom-

panying tubes of the stem. In the present material some of the colonies are

characteristically marked by dark tips to the branches. Gonophores were

observed from June to September.

In general appearance and in size S. megista is almost exactly like S. goliathus,

and the only sure way of distinction is by the absence of internal teeth. In

general appearance it is also like S. longa (= S. xantha), but the size of the

hydrothecae and gonothecae is much greater.

Sertularella polyzomas (Linnaeus) 1758

Figs. 10 J, 11 H

Sertularella polyzonias Hincks 1868, p. 235; Pl. XLVI, fig. 1. Hartlaub 1905,

p. 655, figs. T4 and U*. Broch 1918, p. 101; 1933, p. 65, fig. 24. Stechow

1923c, p. 194, fig. D'c. Vervoort 1946, p. 224, fig. 96.

Non Sertularella polyzonias Warren 1908, p. 291, fig. 5, A and B; Pl. XLVII,

figs. 18-20.

218 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Records. ?GP 20. PF 15608 E, 15675 D. FAL 207 F, 282 Z.

Description. Stem flexuous, straggling, unbranched or branched irregularly,

usually growing on other hydroids. Ends of branches often forming tendrils

which reunite with the hydrorhiza. Both rows of hydrothecae in one plane or

directed slightly to one side. Hydrotheca smooth, with about 4 adcauline side

adnate, bending gently away from stem, abcauline wall not elongated and

margin making an angle of about 45° with stem. No sign of internal teeth.

Gonotheca spindle-shaped, annulated for distal 2, with 3-5 pointed teeth

at margin. Female larger than male, with external marsupium. Present in

September and October.

Measurements (mm.)

Internode, length .. as a @ Hh .. 048-121

diameter across node .. a ay at: .. O*13—-0:20

Hydrotheca, length abcauline Ht is a .. 0°45—-0°59

length adcauline, adnate part ae ae .. 0°27-0°38

length adcauline, free part .. % aR .. 0°23-0°35

adnate part/adcauline length ue AS .. 0°44-0°61

diameter at mouth .... ay ‘a i .. O*1Q—-0°27

maximum diameter .. si a ve .. 0°25-0°32

Gonotheca, male, length .. oe oe ve .. 1°57-1°69

maximum diameter .. As ae an .. 0°60-—0:66

Gonotheca, female, length .. a . ae , 1) Qiba=esap

maximum diameter .. au ine ie .. 0°92—0°93

Remarks. The False Bay material, in the light of its slender, unfascicled

stems, belongs to the cosmopolitan forma typica (discussion: Broch ro18),

rather than to forma gigantea.

Sertularella xantha Stechow 1923b

Figs. 10 K, 11 I

Sertularella xantha Stechow 1925, p. 472, fig. 32.

Sertularella longa Stechow 1923b, p. 110; 1925, p. 483, fig. 38.

Records. FAL 186 D, 217 T.

Description. Straggling stems reaching a maximum height of 6-4 cm., weakly

fascicled at base, irregularly branched. Hydrocladia borne on stem and

branches, arising immediately below hydrothecae, alternate, usually with 3

hydrothecae between 2 branches, up to 2 cm. in length. Segmentation indis-

tinct on lower parts of stem, distinct on distal extremities and on hydrocladia.

Internodes very variable in length, usually long on stem and branches, but

becoming shorter towards the extremities and on hydrocladia. Both rows of

hydrothecae in same plane. Perisarc fairly thick on stem, much thinner on

hydrocladia; perisarc of hydrothecae also thicker on stem than on hydrocladia.

Hydrotheca with 4 to 2 adcauline wall adnate; abcauline wall slightly concave,

THE HYDROZOA OF FALSE BAY, SOUTH AFRICA 219

with a perisarcal thickening below margin; level of margin not quite perpen-

dicular to hydrothecal axis, but tilted slightly away from hydrocladium,

forming an angle of 45° with hydrocladium. No internal hydrothecal teeth.

Gonotheca borne on side of hydrocladium and opposite the base of a hydro-

theca, very large, spindle-shaped, with 5-10 distinct annulations in distal part,

and 3-4 small blunt teeth at margin. An external marsupium observed once

only. Present in September.

Measurements (mm.)

Internode length .. a ae st on .. 0°67-1:09

diameter across node .. x. 4g Me .. 0°16—-0°38

-Hydrotheca, length abcauline a a A .. 0°57-0°66

length adcauline, adnate part ap Be .. 0°42-0°51

length adcauline, free part .. oe se .. 0°30-0°40

adnate part/adcauline length ihe se .. 0°51-0°62

diameter at mouth .. a4 ee a a 0:25-07 31

maximum diameter... ae hs a .. 0°31-0°36

Gonotheca, length se we: a A .. 3°03-3°58

maximum diameter .. sos 3 Af -. O°99-1°34

Remarks. Stechow’s S. longa is considered to be a synonym for S. xantha.

The only real feature which distinguishes the two in his description is the

length of the internodes. which are said to be ‘ziemlich kurz’ (0-7 mm.) in

_S. longa, and ‘lang’ (1 mm.) in S. xantha. In the present material the internode

length varies in different parts of the colony, and the range of variation includes

both Stechow’s figures. Further, examination of prepared slides of Stechow’s

types shows that here too the internode length is in fact variable, ranging from

0-72 to 1°13 mm. in S. longa and from 0-go to 1-16 mm. in S. xantha. In other

details too the False Bay material combines features of both species, thus the

hydrothecae are solid as in S. longa in the older parts of the colony, delicate as

in §. xantha in the younger parts; the angle which the hydrocladium makes

with the stem varies and may be almost a right angle as in S. xantha, or sharp

as in S. longa; the hydrothecae are adnate for 4 to 2. Although the height of

the colony in this material is less than that of ether of Stechow’s species, other

material from the Agulhas Bank (to be described in a future paper) exceeds

that of S. longa (23 cm., Stechow). It seems, therefore, that there is no justifi-

cation for keeping the two species apart, and of the two S. xantha has priority.

Symplectoscyphus macrogonus (‘Trebilcock) 1928

Sertularella macrogona 'Trebilcock 1928, p. 11; Pl. I, fig. 4.

Records. F. 268. CP 326 B, 356 F, 380, 426 M. FAL 78 H, 132 W, 141 CQ,

153 T, 160 V:

Description. Hydrorhiza creeping, usually on weeds, forming a loose network.

Stem usually unbranched and about 0-8 cm. in height. Occasionally, however,

branching forms occur, resulting in a shrubby colony about 3-2 cm. in height.

220 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Here the stem is often interrupted by densely annulated regions devoid of

hydrothecae. Anastomosing tendrils often arise from within the hydrothecae,

and in the branching form unite the colony into a dense mesh-work.

The angle which the two rows of hydrothecae make with one another varies.

In some cases the two rows are exactly opposite and lie in the same plane, in

others the two rows are inclined towards one another forming an angle between

them which may be as small as 45°. The two extremes are seldom present in

one colony, some colonies tending towards a large angle, and others to a small

one, but all intermediate stages occur.

Hydrothecal aperture occasionally at right angles to the stem as described

by Trebilcock, but more usually directed away from the stem. Three internal

teeth usually present, alternating with marginal teeth. Margin often

reduplicated.

Gonothecae as described by Trebilcock, present in February to May, July,

August and December.

Measurements (mm.)

Internode length .. ue AV Me at .. ‘O°2I-0°29

Hydrotheca, length abcauline ae fe a .. 0*24-0°32

length adcauline, adnate part ave a .. 0:08-0:17

length adcauline, free part .. un ue .. 0°16-0-24

adnate part/adcauline length se oe .. 0°25-0°52

diameter at mouth... ie a a .. OTTI-O:145

Gonotheca, length .. ee bt ab ue #1: 20—tea2

maximum width i 0°79-I°14

Remarks. ‘This is the first record of this ee Zoran species from South

Africa, and in view of its fairly common distribution here it is surprising that

it has not been reported before.

The False Bay material differs from that of Trebilcock in the presence of

internal hydrothecal teeth. However, this is apparently not a constant feature

for the species, for although internal teeth are normally present, they may be

absent in several hydrothecae on a stem, or even on a complete stem. It

cannot therefore be used to establish a separate species. In other respects

(including the general appearance of the colony, the annulated base of the

stem and the structure of the gonotheca) the material conforms to Trebilcock’s

description.

Amphisbetia bidens (Bale) 1884

Sertularia bidens Bale 1884, p. 70; P. VI, fig. 6; PI. ool fig. 1. Warren 1908,

Dagon oaslO:

Records. FAL 66 N.

Description. One fragment 2°5 cm. long, without rootstock or basal part of

stem. Nodes of stem faint, but quite definite. Hydrocladia long, bearing as

many as 16 pairs of hydrothecae, and in one case branched. Internodes

bearing up to 12 pairs hydrothecae.

THE HYDROZOA OF FALSE BAY, SOUTH AFRICA 2215

Hydrothecae with comparatively short marginal teeth. Operculum of 2

membranous valves, of which the adcauline is the larger, meeting in the form

of a low pyramid above the aperture. The valves are not attached to the

marginal teeth, but are hinged to the margin of the hydrotheca in the bays

between the teeth. When the marginal teeth are short they do not reach the

level of the top of the pyramid, but when longer project beyond it.

Gonophores absent.

Amphisbetia minima (Thompson) 1879

Sertularia minma Allman 1886, p. 138; Pl. XIII, figs. 3-4. Bale 1884, p. 89;

PINE ties) O10, Pl XIX fies. 12-13: 1915, p. 260: 1924, p. 248:

Sertularia crinoidea Allman 1886, p. 141; Pl. XVI, figs. 1-2.

Records. FAL 153 V.

Description. One small colony, without gonothecae, reaching a maximum

height of 0-3 cm. Hydrorhiza with very thick perisarc and internal chitinous

supports. Stem with 2 or 3 hinge-joints in basal part (as described by Allman

for S. crinoidea) and up to 9g pairs of hydrothecae. Nematothecae visible on

some internodes as low tubular structures, slightly expanding towards aperture.

No nematophores visible. Operculum too badly preserved to see detail.

Amphisbetia operculata (Linnaeus) 1758

Sertularia operculata Hincks 1868, p. 263; Pl. LIV. Bale 1884, p. 67; Pl. VI,

Hoel 1e. 3." TOMS, p. 274.

ineCOndseeat TOA, 105, 119 J, 122, 199°C: FAL 20 P, 52 OQ; 62 M, 78 A,

108 H, 153 L, 217 Q.

Description. Common in dredgings, reaching a maximum height of 14:8 cm.

Branching very variable: dichotomous, but one fork often of much longer

growth than the other, resulting in a long-drawn-out colony. The 2 rows of

hydrothecae not always in one plane, but often shifted slightly on to one side

of the stem, although never in contact except in the axils of the branches.

Hydrothecae almost completely adnate, marginal teeth of unequal size.

Operculum of 2 membranous valves but, unlike A. bidens, they appear to be

attached to the marginal teeth at the sides. Adcauline valve divided into two

by a median line. Gonophores present in April, June to September, and

November. |

Sertularia distans (Lamouroux) 1816 var. gracilis Hassall 1848

igen

Sertularia gracilis Hincks 1868, p. 262; PI. LIII, fig. 2. Stechow rg1ga, p. 146,

figs. 121-124.

Dynamena gracilis Marktanner-Turneretscher 1890, p. 240; Pl. V, fig. 3.

Inidentata gracilis Stechow 1923¢, p. 208, fig. G1,

THE HYDROZOA OF FALSE BAY, SOUTH AFRICA

Lob dt a Oh mm.

Fic. 12. Sertularia distans (Lamouroux) var. gracilis Hassall, FAL 78 J.

A. Portion of an upright stem. B. A pair of hydrothecae from the centre of the stem, and

Le Ay C. from the lower part of the stem.

ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM 223

Sertularia distans var. gracilis Billard 1925, p. 175, fig. 33. Leloup 1935, p. 47,

figs. 28-29. 10374, p. 105, fig. 8.

Records. FAL 78 J, 311 S.

Description. Hydrorhiza creeping, supported by internal thickenings of

perisarc. Stem unbranched, reaching a maximum height of 0-8 cm., and

bearing up to 17 pairs of hydrothecae (but usually about 5-8). Basal athecate

part of stem terminated by 1 or 2 hinge-joints. Rest of stem divided into

thecate internodes each bearing a pair of opposite hydrothecae and bounded

by transverse nodes, which, however, are usually very faint or even invisible.

Short athecate internodes interpolated at irregular intervals (after 1-4 thecate

internodes), each bounded proximally by a transverse node and distally by an

oblique node. Pairs of hydrothecae fairly close, generally separated by a

distance approximately equal to height of hydrotheca, but tending to be closer

in distal part of stem. Members of a pair in contact for a little under half their

height on anterior surface, but first one or two pairs much less than this or not

meeting at all; free on posterior surface. Line of contact straight, rest of hydro-

thecae diverging at an angle of about 45°.

Hydrothecae with parallel sides in lower part, narrowing towards margin

in upper part, those on lower part of stem sometimes slightly shorter and wider

than those on upper part. Margin with a prominent triangular tooth on each

side and usually a small median one on adcauline side; often reduplicated.

Operculum of 2 valves, the adcauline smaller and divided by a median line.

An internal tooth sometimes present immediately below margin on abcauline

side. Three peg-like processes of perisarc in basal region of hydrotheca, one on

abcauline wall near base, one resting on outer part of base, and a third pro-

jecting downwards below adcauline wall. Hydranth with abcauline blind

pouch.

Gonophores absent.

Measurements (in mm., exclusive of lateral teeth or reduplications)

Stem, length of basal part .. Le ae ue .. O'41-0°64

Internode, thecate, length .. a a? we ». 0°34-0:42

thecate, diameter at node... Hs “is .. 0:06-0:09

athecate, length a a vs ue 2. O*15—-0°25

Hydrotheca, length, abcauline_.... a Ne 2. 0:21-0:26

length adcauline, adnate part a ie /.)) 0200-24)

length adcauline, free part .. ae ies | 0-12-0717

length adcauline, contiguous part .. ms -., 9:00-0:20

diameter at base Mt, ss me oe <1 0107-0712

diameter at margin .. a ye ove .. 0°08-0:09

Remarks. ‘This is the first time this species has been recorded from South

Africa.

224 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Sertularia marginata (Kirchenpauer) 1864

Pig. 19

Sertularia marginata Totton 1930, p. 204 (synonymy), fig. 48b.

Records. PF 15608 F.

Description. A single colony reaching 3 cm. in height, including both pinnate

and unbranched stems. Hydrorhiza creeping on alga and containing internal

perisarcal supports in some regions only. 3

Pinnate stem with short athecate basal portion (under 1-5 mm.) containing

I, or occasionally 2, transverse nodes, and terminated by 1, or occasionally 2,

hinge-joints. 1-4 pairs of hydrothecae (usually 1) present between hinge-joint

and first hydrocladium. Rest of stem divided into regular internodes by very

slightly oblique nodes which tend to be indistinct in lower parts. Each inter-

node bearing one hydrocladium with a hydrotheca in its axil and above it a

pair of alternate or subopposite hydrothecae. Occasionally an internode with

one pair of hydrothecae and no hydrocladium, and occasionally a short

athecate internode terminated by a hinge-joint. Hydrothecae below first

hydrocladium and above last in opposite or subopposite pairs. Hydrothecae

borne on front of stem, members of a pair not making contact with each other

except in distal region.

Hydrocladium borne on a fairly long apophysis from stem internode and

separated from it by a transverse node. First (and occasionally second) inter-

node short, athecate, terminated by hinge-joint. Remainder divided by

oblique nodes into regular internodes, each bearing a pair of hydrothecae.

Occasionally an extra transverse node separates off the distal end of an inter-

node. Members of a pair of hydrothecae usually contiguous.

Hydrocladia often branching again in an alternate and pinnate manner.

Those internodes giving rise to branches arranged as stem internodes, i.e. each

bears one branch with a hydrotheca in its axil, and above it a pair of sub-

opposite hydrothecae. The internodes immediately below show a gradual

displacement of the hydrothecal pairs to this arrangement. Structure of

branches exactly as hydrocladia.

Simple stem with basal part similar to pinnate stem. Remainder divided

by oblique nodes into fairly regular internodes, each bearing a pair of opposite

hydrothecae. Occasionally an extra athecate internode terminating in a hinge-

joint. Members of a pair of hydrothecae separate in lower part of stem,

contiguous in distal part.

Hydrothecae swollen below, narrowing to mouth, adnate for over half height

then bent outwards, with intrathecal ridge on abcauline wall which may be

absent in distal parts of colony. Margin with 2 prominent, sharp, lateral teeth,

and a small median adcauline tooth. No internal teeth, but margin sometimes

thickened. Operculum of 2 delicate flaps, the adcauline smaller and divided

by a median line. Hydranth with abcauline blind pouch.

Gonophores absent.

THE HYDROZOA OF FALSE BAY, SOUTH AFRICA 225

Measurements (mm.)

Pinnate stem, internode length .. Bi on a O51 LO

diameter at node ay ” ie a o7) O-11—0-20

Hydrocladium, internode (without branch), length .. 0-44-0-66

internode (with branch), length a os .. 0°85-0-90

diameter at base of hydrothecae oe tes ». 0°22—-0°34

Simple stem, internode length bie a oF .. 0°49-0°72

diameter at base of hydrothecae ails be ». 0°29-0'33

Hydrotheca, length, abcauline 5 re ue .. 0°20-0:26

length, adcauline, adnate part ut He fe Of20—=0-95

length adcauline, free part .. ai aA .. 0:08—0°21

length adcauline, contiguous part .. se .. 0°00—-0°19

maximum diameter .. se oi ay .. 0°16—0:26

diameter at mouth ... sas O-12—0°19

Remarks. ‘This is the first record of the species from South Africa. A full

description has been given, since, in the absence of gonophores, the identifi-

cation cannot be absolutely certain. Further, no types were available for

Fic. 13. Sertularia marginata (Kirchenpauer), PF 15608 F.

A. Portion of a pinnate stem with hydrocladia and sub-branches. B. A simple stem.

Cand D. Two pairs of hydrothecae from a hydrocladium.

226 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

comparison. Apparently there are two closely related species, S. amplectens

Allman, and S. inflata (Versluys). The description of the latter was not avail-

able, while the illustrations of the former are vague and indefinite in the

critical features. ‘Totton states that S. marginata can be distinguished from

S. amplectens by the greater length of the basal part of the stem and by the

presence of many pairs of hydrothecae below the first hydrocladium. In the

False Bay material the length of the basal part of the stem is intermediate

between the two species, but closer to S. amplectens, yet there are always hydro-

thecae below the first hydrocladium, usually one pair, but sometimes as many

as 4. In every other respect it agrees with S. marginata. An unusual feature of

the False Bay material is the branching nature of the hydrocladia, which has

not previously been described.

Family: Plumulariidae

Aniennella africana Broch 1914

Antenella quadriaurita Ritchie f. africana Broch 1914, p. 26.

Antenella africana Stechow 1925, p. 492, fig. 41.

Records. F 299A (recorded by Eyre 1939). PF 337 B. FB 119 D, 129 B,

131 B. FAL 6 M, 23 M, 26 K, 66 B, 78 K; 169 W, 214 Di2i7 Veeco

279 D, 290 B.

Description. Clusters of erect, hair-like hydrocladia reaching a maximum

height of 2-1 cm. Basal part of hydrocladium consisting of as many as 5 athecate

internodes of irregular length, separated by transverse nodes, and terminated

by an oblique node. The last of these segments with 2 or 3 nematothecae,

sometimes as many as 6, arranged irregularly. Of the others, the shorter ones

devoid of nematothecae, the longer ones with 2 or 3.

Remainder of hydrocladium divided into alternate thecate and athecate

internodes, bounded distally by transverse and oblique nodes respectively.

Oblique nodes very distinct, transverse ones less so and sometimes very faint.

Internodes of variable length, generally athecate internodes longer than thecate

in lower part of hydrocladium and thecate internodes longer in distal part.

Nematothecae as previously described, 5 on each thecate internode, one on

each athecate internode. Occasionally an athecate internode bears 2 median

nematothecae, one above the other; and occasionally there are two consecutive

athecate internodes each with a median nematotheca.

Gonophores borne on hydrocladia, singly or in pairs, immediately below

hydrothecae. Each arises on one side of the hydrocladial protuberance which

bears the hydrotheca, about mid-way between the hydrotheca and the median

nematotheca. Male and female on separate hydrocladia; or on the same one,

the male distal and the female proximal. Present in March, and June to

September. Male gonophore elongated, tapering to both ends, distal end

closed by a round, deep-convex operculum; one nematotheca on side of lower

part; pedicel of 1 segment. Female gonophore larger, broader, truncated at

THE HYDROZOA OF FALSE BAY, SOUTH AFRICA Ps4g|

distal end, closed by a round, shallow-convex operculum; 2 nematothecae on

sides of lower part; pedicel of 2 segments.

Measurements (mm.)

Hydrocladium, length of basal part oe me -. 1°02—2-86

thecate internode, length EN oy " .. 0°33-0°43

athecate internode, length .. be ee .. 0°23-0°52

athecate internode, maximum diameter... - + 0'07-0°13

Hydrotheca, length abcauline He 2 ay i. (O°10-0°27

diameter at margin .. re ae a .. O°21-0°26

Gonotheca, male, length (without pedicel) aa .. O73I-0°54

maximum diameter .. a 12) 0: 19-08-28

Gonotheca, female, length ene iedicel) ae 12, 0:06-O-77

maximum diameter... ue aN, .. 0°38-0°47

Remarks. The gonophores of this species re previously been incorrectly

described. In the diagram given by Stechow 1925, the smaller gonophore is

male, and the larger female.

The details and measurements of this species are very close to those of

A. serrata Totton, 1930, from New Zealand, and the latter is possibly a synonym

of the former.

Halopteris constricta ‘Totton 1930

Fig. 14 A

Halopteris constricta Totton 1930, p. 217, fig. 56a.

Records. FAL 58 X, 66 G, 78 T.

Description. Colonies with both simple and pinnate stems, reaching a maxi-

mum height of 9 mm. The simple stems represent hydrocladia arising direct

from the hydrorhiza. The structure of the pinnate form resembles that des-

cribed and figured by Totton, except that the adcauline side of the hydrotheca

is usually slightly more concave. The free adcauline part varies from 4 to } the

abcauline length, but is usually in the neighbourhood of 4. The basal athecate

part of the stem varies in length and may reach 3 mm., and the oblique hinge-

joint terminating this region is exactly similar to the other oblique joints of the

stem. Additional short athecate internodes devoid of nematothecae may occur

below the normal athecate internodes at almost any region of the stem or

hydrocladia, one or two are invariably present below the first long athecate

internode of the hydrocladium, and sometimes even 3. An extra median

nematotheca may occur on the athecate internodes of the hydrocladia (making

2); or on the thecate internodes above the hydrothecae, such internodes being

abnormally prolonged in this region. The hydrocladia may have as many as

6 hydrothecae, although the usual number is 2 or 3.

The larger pinnate colonies often have branching hydrocladia, the secondary

hydrocladia arising from the primary ones at the sides of the hydrothecae in

exactly the same manner as the primary hydrocladia arise from the stem.

228 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

There is no regularity in this branching, the secondary hydrocladia arising at

any level from the primary, and sometimes 2 secondaries from one primary.

Gonophores not present.

Measurements (mm.)

Stem, thecate internode, length .. ae sf .. 0°20—0°32

athecate internode, length .. ee oe .. O°15=0°42

diameter Ae Le Ce .. 0°04-0°105

Hydrocladium, first ree ec «fe .. 0°045-0°07

second internode, length ee iA oh .. O°15-0:28

normal athecate internode, length .. ee .» | O° LE5—O:28

thecate internode, length oy Me * .. 0*205-0-29

diameter Ay ys ts .. 0°035—-0:06

Cauline hydrotheca, ene eine ae 5 .. O°14-0°165

length adcauline, free part .. te a -» 0;04-0;05

Hydrocladial hydrotheca, length Eaeutine af .. O°14-0-16

length adcauline, free part .. p. ae .. 0°04-0°075

width at mouth Le ne ie vy .. O°13-0'165

Nematotheca, medial, on athecate internode... .. 0°05-0°08

lateral. of i a a2 m .. 0°055—-0°:08

Remarks. This is the first record of the species from South Africa. The only

other recorded locality is New Zealand.

The species appears to be extremely variable in its growth-form, possessing

simple stems, pinnate stems, and stems with branching hydrocladia, and

variable also in the segmentation of its stem and hydrocladia.

Halopteris valdiviae (Stechow) 1923

Fig. 14 B

Thecocaulus(?) valdiviae Stechow 1925, p. 495, figs. 42-43.

Records. PF 15608 G.

Description. ‘Two unattached plumes, the longer measuring 1-5 cm. Stem

unfascicled, but showing the beginning of fasciculation at the base. Basal part

of stem without hydrocladia, and in one specimen with several transverse nodes.

This part terminated by 2 oblique hinge-joints, between which arises a pair

of hydrocladia, one on each side of a cauline hydrotheca. Remainder of stem

divided by oblique nodes into regular internodes each bearing one cauline

hydrotheca and one hydrocladium.

Hydrocladia alternate, reaching 4 mm., and bearing up to 8 hydrothecae,

borne on apophyses of stem internodes alternately on left and right of cauline

hydrothecae. Details of hydrocladia exactly as described by Stechow: Ist

internode short and without hydrotheca or nematotheca, 2nd internode (and

on 1st pair of hydrocladia 3rd internode) longer and with one nematotheca,

THE HYDROZOA OF FALSE BAY, SOUTH AFRICA 229

remaining internodes thecate. Occasionally the distal end of an internode is

cut off by an extra node, but such intermediate internodes are always without

nematothecae.

Hydrotheca deeper than wide, adnate for over $ of length, margin sinuated.

Median nematotheca 2-chambered, short and broad. Median supracalycine

nematotheca 1-chambered, reaching hydrotheca margin. Lateral nemato-

thecae 2-chambered, long, not quite reaching the next node. Cauline nemato-

thecae as in Stechow’s fig. 43: one short, broad, 2-chambered nematotheca

a ge gg ONS.

Fic. 14. A. Halopteris constricta Totton, FAL 58 X. B. Halopteris valdiviae (Stechow), PF 15608 G,

230 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

below cauline hydrotheca, and one pair lateral nematothecae, of which that

on the opposite side to the hydrocladium is the longer.

Gonophores .absent.

Measurements (mm.)

Stem, internode length a re ae ae .. 0°44-0°50

maximum diameter .. ay Ay .. 0°14-0:20

Hydrocladium, first internode, ee a a .. 0°05-0:09

second internode, length ae a ify .. 020-097

thecate internode, length Hi a AY .. 0°48-0°57

Hydrotheca, length abcauline an He os .. 018-024

length of free part in at se an 0-04.

total length/length of free oe a ae .. 4°50-6-00

diameter at margin... a uh ae .. O*°135-0-20

Nematotheca, lateral, length si an a .. O*°12-0°17

median, infracalycine, length oe gn .. 0:07-0°10

Remarks. This material agrees so closely with H. valdiviae (Stechow 1925,

fig. 43) in its detailed structure that it must represent either a young colony or

detached branches of the same species. In a heavily fascicled stem such as that

described by Stechow the hinge-joints would undoubtedly be obscured.

Stechow illustrates the median supracalycine nematotheca as 2-chambered,

but describes it as 1-chambered, which it is in the False Bay material. Stechow

also states that the lateral nematothecae are as long as the hydrotheca, but the

length certainly varies in different parts of the colony as is shown by his own

figures, being greater near the base, and less near the tip. —The same tendency

is shown even in the small fragments from False Bay.

Paragattya intermedia Warren 1908

Paragattya intermedia Warren 1908, p. 323, fig. 16; Pl. XLVII, fig. 27. Stechow

1923C, Pp. 234; 1925, Pp. 494.

Records. FAL 52 X (growing on corallines and also on back of crab,

Dehaanius dentatus), 78 N, 108 M.

Description. Numerous colonies, generally growing on Corallines, and

reaching a maximum height of 7 mm. The structure agrees exactly with

Warren’s description, except that the tip of the stem is often prolonged into a

swollen tendril-like process which attaches to the substratum and forms a new

hydrorhiza. Gonophores present in August.

Plumularia lagenifera Allman 1886

Plumularia lagenifera Allman 1886, p. 157; Pl. XXVI, figs. 1-3. Nutting 1900,

p. 65; Pl. VI, figs. 6-10.

Plumularia califormca Marktanner-Turneretscher 1890, p. 255; Pl. VI, fig. 4.

Plumularia lagentfera, var. septifera Ritchie 1909, p. 87, fig. 7.

Records, FAL 82 X, 108 L, 123 L, 167 P.

THE HYDROZOA OF FALSE BAY, SOUTH AFRICA 231

Description. Hydrorhiza reticular, growing on weeds and corallines, often

with internal chitinous thickenings as described by Ritchie for var. septifera.

Stem unbranched, reaching 0-9 cm. Each internode bearing a hydro-

cladium on a long apophysis just above the centre; containing 2 or 3 septal

ridges, with another in the distal end of the apophysis. Occasionally the

proximal part of the internode is separated from the rest by an extra node.

In some cases the distal end of the stem is broadened and curled over to form

a new rooting stock.

Hydrocladia alternate, the two rows forming an angle of about 100° between

them, each bearing one short athecate internode (occasionally 2), then alternate

thecate and athecate internodes. One septal ridge in proximal internode, 2-4,

or occasionally more, in thecate internode, and 1 or 2 in intermediate internode.

Occasionally 2 consecutive athecate internodes occur, of which the Ist appears

to be the distal end of the previous thecate internode which has been cut off

by an extra node.

Hydrotheca borne on pronounced projection from internode, variable in

height, but with the lateral and abcauline walls always convex and bending

inwards towards mouth. Abcauline wall thickened, sometimes at margin only.

Margin not at right angles to internode as figured by Nutting and Allman, but

facing slightly away from it as figured by Marktanner-Turneretscher.

Nematothecae: 3 on thecate internode, mesial one borne on swelling of

internode below hydrotheca, lateral pair attached below margin of hydrotheca

and extending above margin, as figured by Marktanner-Turneretscher and

Allman, not as described by Nutting; 1 on intermediate internode; none on

proximal hydrocladial internode; 2 or 3 on stem internode, of which one is in

the axil of the hydrocladial apophysis and the other(s) on the anterior surface.

Gonothecae borne on apophyses of stem internodes, laterally compressed,

ovate in side view with a slender curved neck. In some cases the neck is only

slightly curved as figured by Nutting, in others it is bent right over like the

neck of a gourd, so that the opening faces downwards and outwards. Truncated

forms containing young eggs also present. Present in January, February and

June.

Measurements (mm.)

Stem internode, length Af sa nh aE .. 0°24-0°38

diameter a bs a ae a ». 0°075-O°145

Hydrocladium, tst internode, length a iP .. 0'04-0°095

normal athecate internode, length .. dt .. 0°055—-0°13

thecate internode, length a EY A .. 0°23-0°325

Hydrotheca, length adcauline =e ee ue .. 0°08-0°17

length abcauline ops che si ihe .. 0°06-0°155

diameter at base ee Ly. Me: a2 ». 0°055-0°085

diameter in centre 2. ae de; he .. O°09-0°14

diameter at margin... dy a St 32) O07, Oc 12

232 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Nematotheca, length en ae we ae .. 0:06-0°075

(an extra large one 0-10)

Gonotheca length (excluding truncated type) .. .. 0°625-0°91

maximum diameter .. Bi ae 8 .. 0°26-0°44

Remarks. As Bale has remarked, this species is closely related to P. setacea,

but can be distinguished from it by the fact that the hydrothecal wall (or at

least the abcauline side) is convex and narrows towards the mouth. Gono-

phores with recurved necks have never been observed in P. setacea.

The species is very variable and two extremes of form are found. In one the

hydrotheca is deep, with the height exceeding the width, and the wall thickened

only at the margin. In the other the hydrotheca is shallow, with the width

exceeding the height, the entire abcauline wall thickened, and all septal ridges

very much accentuated. The latter type corresponds to Torrey’s var. sepiifera,

described by Ritchie 1909, but since both types may occur in one colony,

together with intergrading forms, it does not seem possible to separate them.

Plumularia pulchella Bale 1882

Plumularia pulchella Bale 1882, p. 30; Pl. XV, fig. 6. Totton 1930, p. 221,

fig. 58.

Plumularia (Monotheca) flexuosa Stechow 1925, p. 499.

Records. FB 119 E. FAL 13 A, 23 P, 26 J, 66 F, 78 R, 132 X, 153 R, 311 Q.

Description. Sparse colonies from various regions of False Bay, reaching a

maximum height of 0-7 cm. Stem unbranched or very occasionally with one

lateral branch. Hydrocladia arising from apophyses on distal ends of internodes.

No gonophores.

Plumularia setacea (Ellis and Solander) 1755

Plumularia setacea Hincks 1868, p. 296; Pl. LXVI, fig. 1.

Records. CP 15 B, 326 G, 327 B, 356 B. FB131 CG. FAL 6L, 13 F, 15 Y,

66 D, 78 M, 125 T, 1378S, 141 A, 148 G, 153 W, 160 W, 165 Y, 169 Y, 177 M,

Oop ee) OY) JE BLO (Ga, UAL (Sy, 7G) JEL, Grit it dee

Description. Numerous colonies reaching a maximum height of 2-2 cm.

Gonophores present in February to July, September and December.

Remarks. The material from False Bay all falls within Broch’s forma typica.

Plumularia spinulosa Bale 1882, var. obtusa Stechow 1923c

Monotheca spinulosa var. obtusa Stechow 1923¢, p. 224.

Records. FB 126.

Description. Stems reaching 5 mm. in height, and bearing up to 18 hydro-

cladia. Basal part of stem short, consisting usually of 2 mternodes without

hydrocladia or nematothecae. Internodal septa well marked, 1 or 2 in each

stem internode, 1 in hydrocladial apophysis, 1 in first internode of hydro-

cladium, 1 or 2 in 2nd internode behind hydrotheca. Hydrocladium arising

THE HYDROZOA OF FALSE BAY, SOUTH AFRICA 233

from middle or distal end of stem internode. Spine on end of hydrocladium

short and bluntly pointed, barely reaching margin of hydrotheca. Gonophores

absent.

Remarks. Although the typical variety of P. spinulosa is known from Natal

(Warren 1908), this is the first record of var. obtusa. It has previously been

recorded from Australia and Japan.

Kirchenpaueria pinnata (Linnaeus) 1758

Plumularia echinulata Ritchie 19074, p. 540.

Plumularia pinnata Ritchie 19072, p. 541.

Plumularia unilateralis Ritchie 1907a, p. 541; Pl. I, fig. 1.

Kirchenpaueria pinnata Broch 1918, p. 53. Vervoort 1946, p. 167, figs. 69-70.

maieer 131 D>) 140 bh, 11 A, 142 B. FAL 42 U, 66 E, 78 L, ros K,

eee 160 U, 176 W, 274 P, 288 F.

Description. Very common in intertidal region and shallow water, forming

a short feathery growth reaching a maximum height of 2-5 cm. Many minor

variations occur. In some colonies all the stem internodes bear one hydro-

cladium each, in others the lower stem internodes may bear as many as 4

hydrocladia. Very occasionally in young colonies hydrocladia may arise

separately from the hydrorhiza. On the hydrocladia athecate internodes are

occasionally present between 2 thecate ones; and sometimes an extra I or 2

athecate internodes may be present between the basal athecate internode and

the first thecate one. These may be devoid of nematothecae, or may bear 1

or 2 each.

Gonophores very variable, younger ones normally smooth, older ones ribbed,

with or without spines. Borne on stem or on hydrorhiza. Present in February,

April to July, and September to October.

Remarks. Kirchenpaueria unilateralis (Ritchie 1907a) is considered to be a

synonym for A. pinnata. ‘This conclusion was reached after a careful study of

type material kindly loaned by the Royal Scottish Museum, Edinburgh. Its

distinguishing features are said to be:

(i) The stem internodes never bear more than one hydrocladium each. But

this is the normal condition in many stems of A. pinnata. Further, careful

study of the type material of A. unilateralis shows that at least two of the

stem internodes bear two hydrocladia each.

(ii) ‘The two rows of hydrocladia are borne on one side of the stem, and so lie

in two planes. This unilateral arrangement is obviously only a growth-

form of A. pinnata, and in False Bay is often found on stems growing in the

same colony as the normal flattened type.

(ii) The hydrocladia occasionally branch. Branching hydrocladia have never

again been observed in all the wealth of material examined, neither in

the normal flat stems, nor in the unilateral type. If A. unilateralis were

234 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM:

retained as a separate species, this would be its only distinguishing feature.

I am inclined to regard it, however, as an abnormal condition and possibly

due to injury.

In Ritchie’s material the internodes of the stem and hydrocladia are rather

shorter, and the hydrothecae more crowded than in the False Bay material

(hydrotheca length/internode length = 0-40-0-59 mm.), but not sufficiently

so for the maintenance of a separate variety. Broch gives the proportions for

var. typica as § to 4. All the False Bay material falls well within the range of

var. typica.

Pycnotheca mirabilis (Allman) 1883

Diplocheilus mirabilis Allman 1883, p. 49; Pl. VIII, figs. 4-7.

Kirchenpaueria mirabilis Bale 1894.

Pycnotheca mirabilis ‘Totton 1930, p. 216, fig. 55.

Records. FAL 78 U, 108 J.

Description. A fair number of unbranched stems, reaching a maximum

height of 3 cm. Basal 2-3 mm. of stem devoid of hydrocladia and containing

I—4 transverse nodes. Remainder with 2 hydrocladia per internode in lower

part, and one in distal part.

Gonophores present in January, as described by Bale, borne on hydrorhiza

and on basal part of stem replacing hydrocladia.

Measurements (mm.) False Bay Richard’s Bay

Hydrocladium, internode length oe 2 O°94=0r42 O°32-0- a5

Hydrotheca, height .. Se bs .. 0°25-0°30 0:20—-0'21

diameter at margin ih 5.) 0722-0727 0-18-0'19

adcauline side, length of free oe 22) 0-06_O712 0:06-0:08

Gonotheca, length ae : a .. 2:12-9-G6

maximum diameter oe a .. 1°02—1-:06

Remarks. ‘The material from False Bay agrees well both in size and structure

of the hydrotheca with the typical form of the species as figured by Totton.

In the material previously reported from Richard’s Bay, Natal (Millard and

Harrison 1954) as Airchenpaueria mirabilis, the hydrothecae are smaller, and the

opening into the medial nematotheca is in an oblique position rather than

vertical. This material must thus be referred to var. warren. ‘The measurements

of the two forms are given for comparison.

Nemertesia cymodocea (Busk) 1851

Antennularia decussata Kirchenpauer 1876, p. 52; Pl. II, fig. 24; Pl. III, fig. 24;

Pl. Vil; fig. 24.

Antennularia hartlaubi Ritchie 1907a, p. 542; Pl. III, fig. 4.

Records. PF 337 A. FB 112, 115 A, 129 A, 191 A, 132,.134 Ay 130"geaO B.

FAL 95 R, 209 F, 211 F, 217 K, 222 E, 268 F, 274 N, 279 G, 290 A.

THE HYDROZOA OF FALSE BAY, SOUTH AFRICA 235

Description. Massive colonies abundant in shallow water and reaching a

maximum height of 49 cm. The decussate arrangement, with the hydrocladia

borne in alternate pairs, is found in the lower parts of the branches, and the

hexastichous arrangement near the ends, i.e. just the opposite of the arrange-

ment described by Marktanner-Turneretscher. In some colonies only the

decussate arrangement is present, and in others only the hexastichous type.

Occasionally the small branches arising near the base of the colony have only

one hydrocladium to an internode, and these are arranged alternately, the

two rows being in one plane. One or two athecate internodes may be present

at the base of each hydrocladium. The hydrocladium-bearing apophysis bears

one pair of bithalamic nematophores, and a ‘mamelon’ more or less in the centre

of the upper surface. |

Gonophores include the normal elongated type, and young ones which are

shorter and truncated at the ends. Present in February, September and

November. é;

Nemertesia ramosa Lamouroux 1816

Antennularia ramosa Hincks 1868, p. 282; Pl. LXII.

Nemertesia ramosa Broch 1933, p. 38.

Records. PF 351 A. FAL 207 G.

Description. ‘Two specimens of unbranched fragments with a maximum

length of 6-7 cm., some of them fascicled in lower region. Hydrocladia in

whorls of 3 in upper parts, but becoming irregular lower down. Hydrocladial

apophyses stouter than usually figured, but narrowing to distal ends where the

diameter is the same as that of the hydrocladia. Athecate internodes not

limited to distal ends of hydrocladia, but irregularly scattered in any region.

One specimen possesses male gonophores and the other female, and these

are slightly different in appearance. The young male gonophore is elongated,

with a rounded end, and is quite symmetrical. Older ones have open truncated

ends which are sometimes at right angles to the stem and sometimes placed

slightly oblique, facing towards the stem. Female gonophores always have

the opening on the side facing the stem and practically parallel to it. They

contain several large eggs or embryos. Both sexes present in September.

Antennopsis scotiae Ritchie 1907a

Antennopsis scotiae Ritchie 1907 a, p. 543; Pl. III, fig. 3. 1909, p. go, fig. 8.

Records. PF 15675 A. FAL 64 M, 207 H, 211 G, 217 L, 222 G, 230 N, 291 A.

Description. Colonies reaching a maximum height of 13:7 cm. Gonophores

present in March and September.

Aglaophenia pluma (Linnaeus) 1758

Aglaophenia pluma Hincks 1868, p. 286; Pl. LXIII, fig. 1. Broch 1933, p. 44.

General Discussion. A number of species of Aglaophena have been recorded

from South Africa, all closely related to A. pluma, namely A. dichotoma (M. Sars),

236 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

A. parvula Bale, A. conferta Kirchenpauer, A. heterodonta Jaderholm and A.

chalerocarpa Allman.

Of these A. parvula, A. conferta and A. heterodonta are accepted as synonyms

by Ritchie 1909, Bedot 1921 and Stechow 1925. A. chalerocarpa is regarded

as a synonym for A. pluma by Bedot 1921, Stechow 1925 and Vervoort 1946.

This leaves three South African species:

(i) A. pluma var. typica.

(ii) A. dichotoma.

(iii) A. parvula.

A. dichotoma is distinguished from A. pluma by its dichotomous branching,

and A. parvula by the double nature of the second paired tooth of the hydro-

theca. However, there is some confusion about this distinction, for Ritchie

1909 includes both dichotomous and unbranched forms under A. heterodonia,

saying that the minute characters are identical. Leloup 1937a describes a

dichotomously branched form with the double hydrothecal tooth as A. parvula

but suggests that the latter may be a variety of A. dichotoma. Bedot 1921

suggests that A. parvula is a variety of A. pluma.

Examination of a large series of specimens in the University collection

suggests that the three forms should be regarded as varieties of the same species,

for neither of the distinguishing features is clear-cut and there are many inter-

mediate types. The ‘parvula’ form can, and does, branch dichotomously,

although its stems generally form a short, dense turf in shallow water and

intertidal regions. The ‘dichotoma’ form, with its long-drawn-out, dichoto-

mously branched stems is more typical of deeper water and occurs abundantly

in dredgings round the coast. But all intermediate stages occur.

The double point of the second hydrothecal tooth is most pronounced in the

‘parvula’ form (fig. 15), but by no means constant, the second point may be

only a hump on the side of the tooth, or the tooth may be single-pointed and

triangular. All variations may occur in the same colony, but in general the

second point is better developed in the lower parts of the hydrocladia. A

similar variation occurs in the ‘dichotoma’ form, where the second hydrothecal

tooth is usually triangular, but may have an accessory point on one side. Only

seldom does the “pluma’ type occur, where there is no sign of a double-pointed

tooth.

The corbulae are sexually dimorphic and are identical in all three forms.

Nor could any difference, other than minor variations in length and breadth,

be found in the internodes of the stem or hydrocladia. The length of the

median nematotheca is variable in each form, but in general is longer in the

‘parvula’ form than in the ‘pluma’ and “dichotoma’ forms.

For convenience a brief description of the composite species as now envisaged

follows.

Description. Stem unfascicled, branched or unbranched, distinctly segmented.

The basal part of the stem, which is of variable length and often very short, is

THE HYDROZOA OF FALSE BAY, SOUTH AFRICA 237

devoid of hydrocladia and nematothecae, and divided into internodes of

irregular length by transverse nodes. ‘This region is terminated by 2 oblique

hinge-joints (occasionally 3) with one extra large nematotheca between them.

The rest of the stem is divided by slightly oblique nodes into regular internodes

each bearing a hydrocladium. The first internode of this region is longer than

the others and bears 2 hydrocladia.

The stem may branch in two ways, and both types may be present in the

same colony:

(i) The hydrocladia-bearing part may divide dichotomously, the two branches

being of equal diameter and arising from apophyses on a broad stem

internode, which also bears a hydrocladium. The internodes of the

branches all bear hydrocladia.

(ii) Subsidiary branches may be given off from the stem; these are always

short and usually of smaller diameter. They do not arise dichotomously,

but replace hydrocladia. On these branches the first few internodes are

without hydrocladia, then follow 2 oblique hinge-joints and then hydro-

cladia-bearing internodes, exactly as on the base of the stem.

Hydrocladia alternately arranged, with the two rows directed towards one

side of stem, divided into internodes by transverse or slightly oblique nodes.

Each internode with 2 internodal septa and 1 hydrotheca.

Hydrotheca with 9 marginal teeth, including 1 median tooth on abcauline

side directed inwards, and 4 pairs of lateral teeth, of which the second may be

double.

Median nematotheca narrow at base, but widening distally, adnate for most

of length and then free, reaching to hydrothecal margin or just below. Openings

2 (1 into hydrotheca, 1 extending along free adcauline edge on to distal end)

or 3 (1 into hydrotheca, 1 on adcauline surface at base of free part, 1 on distal

' end). Supracalycine nematothecae swollen, reaching to hydrothecal margin

or just below. Cauline nematothecae 4, of which one is on hydrocladial

apophysis.

Corbula replacing hydrocladium, with one hydrotheca between it and

stem. Female corbula closed, except for first rib, with 4-9 ribs on each side,

each with about 10 nematothecae along one edge. First rib free at base,

bearing about 6 nematothecae on each edge, and a free lateral branch on one

side running parallel to the axis of the corbula and bearing about 6 nemato-

thecae on each edge. The side of the free branch corresponds to the side of the

corbula, i.e. when the corbula replaces a right-hand hydrocladium the free

branch is on its right. Very occasionally female corbulae may lack the free

lateral branch, though present in others of the same colony.

Male corbula partly or completely open, with 5-9 ribs on each side. Ribs

usually fused in basal part (except for first rib which is free), and bearing

nematothecae along one edge, free in distal part and bearing nematothecae

along both edges. Old empty corbulae often with ribs free for entire length.

238 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Normally no lateral branch on first rib, but very occasionally a small stunted

one present. Male and female corbulae on separate stems.

var. typica Bedot 1919

Fig. 15 A

? Aglaophenia chalerocarpa Allman 1886, p. 150; P. XXI, figs. 1-4.

Aglaophenia pluma forma typica Broch 1933, p. 44, fig. 18a.

Aglaophema pluma Vervoort 1946a, p. 335, fig. 8.

Records. FB 133 A. FAL 13 CG, 20 R, 26 H.

Description. Stems short, usually about 5 cm., generally unbranched. Second

paired tooth of hydrotheca triangular or truncated, but not double. Median

nematotheca not reaching to hydrothecal margin. Stems dark brown, hydro-

cladia lighter. Ripe corbulae in March.

LESSEE SE NE eA IN Se CO OLS YO aiLarIs

Fic. 15. Aglaophenia pluma (Linnaeus).

A. var. typica Bedot, FB 133 A. B and C. var. dichotoma (M. Sars), FB 116. In B the second

paired tooth is single and triangular, in C it has a subsidiary point. D and E. var. paroula

Bale (not from False Bay material). Second paired tooth bifid. F. var. parvula Bale, FAL 62 L.

Subsidiary point of second paired tooth almost obsolete.

THE HYDROZOA OF FALSE BAY, SOUTH AFRICA 239

Measurements (mm.)

Stem internode, length A Hf at of .. 0°38-0°41

Hydrocladial internode, length .. at oe o/-))) 10:20-0-38

Hydrotheca, length bie a ee .. 0'27-0°34

length above median Henlatornees ae Me .. O°09-0°12

width at margin ANG ay 8 .. Ot17-0'21

Remarks. Allman’s specimens of A. chalerocarpa thank probably be included

here.

var. dichotoma (M. Sars) 1857

Fig. 15 B and C

Aglaophenia pluma var. B Hincks 1868, p. 287.

Aglaophenia dichotoma Kirchenpauer 1872, p. 30; Pl. I, fig. 7; Pl. II, fig. 7;

Pl. III, fig. 7. Ritchie 1907a, p. 539; Pl. III, fig. 2. Vervoort 1946a,

Pp. 338.

Aglaophenia tubiformis Marktanner-Turneretscher 1890, p. 269; Pl. VII, figs. 4,

iy Ue

Aglaophenia heterodonta Ritchie 1909 (pp.), p. 96.

Aglaophenia dichotoma f. typica Broch 1933, p. 54, fig. 18b.

ecanram Ol 2960). HB 110,111, 116, 117, 120 A; 121 A, 127, 128) 146 A,

IV OVAL, 200 Ef, 217 J.

Description. Stems elongated and branching profusely in a dichotomous

manner, though diameter remains the same; often reaching 20-30 cm. in

length. Second paired tooth of hydrotheca usually single-pointed and tri-

angular, but often with a subsidiary point on one side. Median nematotheca

not reaching hydrothecal margin. Colour somewhat lighter than var. typica,

with hydrocladia cream. Ripe corbulae in February, September and November.

Measurements (mm.)

Stem internode, length a me ue ae ty) 0:37-0:50

Hydrocladial internode, length .. ste us -. 0°29-0°37

Hydrotheca, length . oe be ny ». 0°29—-0°35

length above i enit nemiatotiees a he Ae! 1 0;00- On 0

width at margin om ay a i .. 0°18—0°25

Corbula, male, length A A ie: He 22) 1 O0—3°53

wane lay 9 e as Ay vo sit Ne .. 0°84-1-25

Corbula, female, length .. ay 1M ob ai 2248 B02

WAGIEI iy 2). na a at 6 aie -., 1:02-2:28

var. parvula Bale 1882

Fig. 15, D-F

?Aglaophenia conferta Kirchenpauer 1872, p. 32; Pl. I, fig. 4; Pl. II, fig. 4;

a JOD, sites 21s

240 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Aglaophena parvula Bale 1882, p. 23; Pl. XIV, fig. 3. 1884, p. 165; Pl XIV,

fig. 3; Pl. XVII, fig. 10. Stechow 1925, p. 516. Vervoort 1946a, p. 339,

fig. gb.

Aglaophenia heterodonta Jaderholm 1903, p. 296; Pl. XIII, figs. 10-12; Pl. XIV,

fig: 1. Ritchie 1909 (pp:),) p. 96.

Records. F 49, 253 (reported by Eyre 1939 as A. dichotoma). CP 18, 356 D,

392 P, 410 X, 415 X. FB 119 A, 130. FAL 62 L, 66 G, 78 OQ, 125 V, 160 7,

176 X, 262 A, 279 G.

Description. Stems short and clustered, usually unbranched, but sometimes

branching by either of the methods described above, seldom more than one

branch to a stem. Length usually 3-5 cm., maximum length recorded 11-6 cm.

Second paired tooth of hydrotheca usually double, though sometimes one

point is much smaller than the other, and occasionally the tooth is single-

pointed and triangular. Median nematotheca usually reaching hydrothecal

margin. Colour darker than var. dichotoma and more like var. typica. Ripe

corbulae in February, and April to September.

Measurements (mm.)

Stem internode, length ai oh De ak -. 0°26-0°55

Hydrocladial internode, length .. eis ae ». 0°25-0°29

Hydrotheca, length . se a ae ». (0°25—079i

length above eaclian nematoriees ae on .. 0°06-0-10

width at margin e a apt hs - > | OF On2e

Corbula, male, length oe ok se ae «187-2

width .. At aM Ay: a a .. 0°96-1°07

Corbula, female, length .. Be dhe Hes .. 1:69-1:98

width .. ne bi as ae a .. I°00—1°05

Thecocarpus giardi Billard 1907

Thecocarpus Giardi Billard 1907, p. 381, fig. 21; Pl. XXV, fig. 9; Pl. XXVI,

figs. 11-16.

Thecocarpus giardi Vervoort 1946a, p. 335.

Records. PF 306 A.

Description. Colony reaching 23:8 cm. in height. Basal part of stem thick

and woody with a maximum diameter of 15 mm., and branching irregularly.

At about 12-15 cm. from the base each branch assumes the spirally twisted form

described by Billard and gives off alternate pinnae which bear the hydrocladia.

Hydrocladial internodes with two well-developed internodal septa, the

lower one continued as an intrathecal septum across the hydrotheca about a

third from its base, the upper one opposite the base of the lateral nematotheca.

The lateral hydrothecal teeth are seldom bifurcated as in many of Billard’s

specimens, with the exception of the pair nearest the hydrocladium which is

THE HYDROZOA OF FALSE BAY, SOUTH AFRICA 241

invariably double, so that one could more accurately describe the hydrotheca

as having 4 pairs of lateral teeth, and 1 median tooth of variable length.

Corbulae as described by Billard, present in October.

Lytocarpus filamentosus (Lamarck) 1816

Lytocarpus filamentosus Billard 1907, p. 371; figs. 15-17.

FHlalicornaria segmentata Warren 1908, p. 328; Pl. XLVIII, figs. 33-36.

Records. GP 224. PF 18293 A. FAL 13 B, 42 V, 52 W, 58 W, 66 A, 78 P.

Description. Colonies reaching a maximum height of 9.9 cm. The gono-

cladium varies in length, possessing only 3 or 4 segments to the nematocladium

in some specimens and as many as 10 in others. Gonophores present in October

and December.

Measurements (mm.)

Hydrocladial internode, length .. bid ae .. 0°22-0°26

Hydrotheca, length, to tip of median tooth oh -. 0°25-0:28

width at margin bse as i : .. O*1I-0'16

Median nematotheca, length abcauline .. i .. 0°24-0°30

length adcauline, free part .. ay a, .. 0°08-0°14

REFERENCES

Allman, G. J., 1876. ‘Diagnoses of new genera and species of Hydroida.’ 7. Linn. Soc. Lond.

(Zool.), vol. XII, pp. 251-284.

Allman, G. J., 1883. ‘Report on the Hydroida dredged by H.M.S. Challenger during the years

1873-76. Part I. Plumularidae.’ Rep. Sci. Res. H.M.S. Challenger, Zool., vol. VII, pp. 1-54.

Allman, G. J., 1886. ‘Description of Australian, Cape and other Hydroida, mostly new, from

the collection of Miss H. Gatty.’ 7. Linn. Soc. Lond., Zool., vol. XIX, pp. 132-161.

Allman, G. J., 1888. ‘Report on the Hydroida dredged by H.M.S. Challenger during the years

1873-76. Part II. The Tubularinae, Corymorphinae, Campanularinae, Sertularinae and

Thalamophora.’ Rep. Sci. Res. H.M.S. Challenger, Zool., vol XXIII, pp. 1-87.

Bale, W. M., 1882. ‘On the Hydroida of South-Eastern Australia, with descriptions of supposed

new species, and notes on the genus Aglaophenia.’ 7. Micr. Soc. Victoria, vol. II, pp. 15-48.

Bale, W. M., 1884. ‘Catalogue of the Australian Hydroid Zoophytes.’ Austr. Mus. Sydney,

pp. 1-198.

Bale, W. M., 1888. “On some new and rare Hydroida in the Australian Museum Collection.’

Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, ser. 2, vol. III, pp. 745-799.

Bale, W. M., 1894. ‘Further notes on Australian Hydroids, with descriptions of some new

species.” Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria (n.s.), vol. VI, pp. 93-117.

Bale, W. M., 1913. ‘Further notes on Australian Hydroids. II.’ Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria (n.s.),

vol. XXVI, pp. 114-147.

Bale, W. M., 1914. ‘Report on the Hydroida collected in the Great Australian Bight and other

Localities. Part I.’ Biol. Res. ‘Endeavour’, 1909-1914, vol. II, pp. 3-62.

Bale, W. M., 1915. “Report on the Hydroida collected in the Great Australian Bight and other

Localities. Part III.’ Biol. Res. ‘Endeavour’, 1909-1914, vol. III, pp. 241-336.

Bale, W. M., 1924. ‘Report on some Hydroids from the New Zealand coast, with notes on

New Zealand Hydroida generally, supplementing Farquhar’s list.’ Trans. Proc. N.&.

Instit. vol. LV, pp. 225-268.

Bedot, M., 1921. ‘Notes systématiques sur les Plumularides.’ Rev. Suisse Zool., vol. 28, pp. 311-356.

Billard, A., 1906b. ‘Hydroides.’ Expéd. Sci. ‘Travailleur’ et du ‘Talisman’, vol. VIII, pp. 153-241.

Billard, A., 1907. ‘Hydroides de Madagascar et du Sud-Est de I’Afrique.’ Arch. Zool. exp. gén.,

ser. 4, vol. VII, pp. 335-396.

24.2 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Billard, A., 1925. “Les Hydroides de l’expédition du Siboga. II. Synthecidae et Sertularidae.’

Siboga-Expeditie, monogr. VII b, pp. 1-116.

Broch, H., 1914. “Hydrozoa benthonica.’ Michaelsen’s Beitrége zur Kenntnis der Meeresfauna

Westafrikas, vol. I, pp. 19-50.

Broch, H., 1918. ‘Hydroida II.’ Danish Ingolf Exped., vol. V, pp. 1-205.

Broch, H., 1933. “Zur Kenntnis der adriatischen Hydroidenfauna von Split.’ Norske Videns.-

Akad. Oslo, I. Mat.-Naturv. Klasse, no. 4, pp- 1-115.

Eyre, J., 1939. “The South African Intertidal Zone and its relation to Ocean Currents. VII.

An Area in False Bay.’ Ann. Natal Mus., vol. IX, pp. 283-306.

Fraser, C. McL., 1944. ‘Hydroids of the Atlantic Coast of North America.’ Toronto.

Hartlaub, C., 1905. “Die Hydroiden der magalhaensischen Region und chilenischen Kiiste.’

Fauna Chilensis, vol. III, pp. 497-714.

Hincks, T., 1868. ‘A History of the British Hydroid Zoophytes.’ London.

Jaderholm, E., 1903. ‘Aussereuropaische Hydroiden im schwedischen Reichsmuseum.’ Ark.

Xool., vol. I, pp. 259-312.

Jaderholm, E., 1904. ‘Hydroiden aus den Kiisten von Chile.’ Ark. Zool., vol. II, pp. 1-7.

Kirchenpauer, G. H., 1872. ‘Ueber die Hydroidenfamilie Plumularidae, einzelne Grupp

derselben und ihre Fruchtbehalter, I. Aglaophenia.’ AbA. Naturw., Hamburg, vol. V,

pp. 1-52.

Kirchenpauer, G. H., 1876. ‘Ueber die Hydroidenfamilie Plumularidae, einzelne Gruppen

derselben und ihre Fruchtbehalter, II. Plumularia und Nemertesia.’ Abh. Naturw. Hamburg,

vol. VI, pp. 1-59.

Leloup, E., 1935. “Hydraires Calyptoblastiques des Indes Occidentales.? Mém. Mus. Roy.

d Hist. Nat. Belgique, ser. 2, fasc. 2, pp. 1-73.

Leloup, E., 1937a. ‘Résultats Scientifiques des Croisiéres du Navire-Ecole Belge ‘‘Mercator’’.

Hydroidea, Siphonophora, Ceriantharia: Hydropolypes.’ Mém. Mus. Roy. d’Hist. Nat.

Belgique, ser. 2, fasc. 9, pp. 91-121.

Manton, S. M., 1940. ‘On two new species of the Hydroid Myriothela.’ Sci. Rep. Brit. Graham

Land Exped. 1934-1937, vol. I, pp. 255-294.

Marktanner-Turneretscher, G., 1890. ‘Die Hydroiden des k.k. naturhistorischen Hofmuseums.’

Ann. k.k. naturh. Hofmus., vol. V, pp. 195-286.

Millard, N. A. H. and Harrison, A. D., 1954. “The Ecology of South African Estuaries. Part

V: Richard’s Bay.’ Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Afr., vol. XXXIV, pp. 157-179.

Millard, N. A. H., 1955. “New species of Hydrozoa from South Africa.’ Ann. S. Afr. Mus.,

vol. XLI, pp. 215-222.

Nutting, C. C., 1900. ‘American Hydroids. Part I. The Plumularidae.’ Spec. Bull. Smithsonian

Inst., Washington, No. IV, pp. 1-285.

Rees, W. J., 1938. “Observations on British and Norwegian Hydroids and their Medusae.’

J. Mar. Biol. Ass. U.K., vol. XXIII, pp. 1-42.

Rees, W. J., 1946. “A Revision of the Hydroid Genus Perigonimus M. Sars, 1846.’ Bull. Brit.

Mus. (Nat. Hist.), Zool., vol. III, pp. 337-362.

Ritchie, J., 1907. ‘On Collections of the Gape Verde Islands Marine Fauna, made by Cyril

Crossland, M.A. (Cantab.) B.Sc. (Lond.), F.Z.S., of St. Andrews University, July to

September, 1904.’ Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., pp. 488-514.

Ritchie, J., 1907a. “The Hydroids of the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition.’ Trans. Roy.

Soc. Edinburgh, vol. XLV, pp. 519-545.

Ritchie, J., 1909. ‘Supplementary Report on the Hydroids of the Scottish National Antarctic

Expedition.’ Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh, vol. XLVII, pp. 65-101.

Ritchie, J., 1911. “‘Hydrozoa (Hydroid Zoophytes and Stylasterina) of the “Thetis’ Expedition.’

Mem. Austr. Mus. Sydney, vol. 1V, pp. 807-869.

Stechow, E., 1913a. “Hydroidpolypen der japanischen Ostkiiste. Teil II.’ Abh. Bayer Akad.

Wiss., Math.-phys. Kl., supple. vol. III, pp. 1-162.

Stechow, E., 1919a. ‘Zur Kenntnis der Hydroidenfauna des Mittelmeeres, Amerikas und

anderer Gebiete.’ ool. Jahrb. Jena, vol. XLII, pp. 1-172.

Stechow, E., 1923b. “Ueber Hydroiden der Deutschen Tiefsee-Expedition, nebst Bemerkungen

uber einige andre Formen.’ ool. Anz. Leipzig., vol. LVI, pp. 97-119.

Stechow, E., 1923c. ‘Zur Kenntnis der Hydroidenfauna des Mittelmeeres, Amerikas und

anderer Gebiete. II Teil.’ Zool. Jahrb. Jena, vol. XLVII, pp. 29-270. —

THE HYDROZOA OF FALSE BAY, SOUTH AFRICA 243

Stechow, E., 1925. ‘Hydroiden der Deutschen Tiefsee-Expedition.’ Wissenschaftliche Ergebnisse

der Deutschen Tiefsee-Expedition auf dem Dampfer ‘Valdivia’ 1898-1899, vol. XVII, pp. 383-546.

Stechow, E., 1932. ‘Neue Hydroiden aus dem Mittelmeer und dem Pazifischen Ozean, nebst

Bemerkungen iiber einige wenig bekannte Formen.’ ool. Anz. Leipzig., vol. C, pp. 81-92.

Totton, A. K., 1930. ‘Coelenterata. Part V.i—Hydroida.’ Brit. Antarct. (‘Terra Nova’) Expedition

1910. Nat. Hist. Rep., Xool., vol. V, pp. 131-252.

Trebilcock, R. E., 1928. ‘Notes on New Zealand Hydroida.’ Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria (n.s.),

vol. XLI, pp. 1-31.

Vanhoffen, E., 1910. ‘Die Hydroiden der Deutschen Stidpolar-Expedition, 1901-1903.’

Deutschen Stidpolar-Exped. 1901-1903, vol. XI, Zool., pp. 269-340.

Vervoort, W., 1946. ‘Fauna van Nederland. Vol. XIV. Hydrozoa (C 1), A. Hydropolypen.’

Leiden.

Vervoort, W., 1946a. ‘Exotic Hydroids in the Collections of the Rijksmuseum van Natuurlijke

Historie and the Zoological Museum at Amsterdam.’ ool. Meded., vol. XX VI, pp. 287-351.

Vervoort, W., 1946b. “‘Hydroiden uit de Waddenzee.’ Arch. Néerl. Zool., vol. VII, pp. 334-352.

Warren, E., 1906a. ‘On Tubularia solitaria sp. n., a Hydroid from the Natal Coast.’ Ann. Natal

Mus., vol. I, pp. 83-96.

Warren, E., 1908. “On a Collection of Hydroids, mostly from the Natal Coast.’ Ann. Natal Mus.,

vol. I, pp. 269-355.

Warren, E., 1909. ‘On Lafoea dispolians sp. n., a Hydroid parasitic on Sertularia bidens, Bale.’

Ann. Natal Mus., vol. II, pp. 105-112.

tortie

tie a HO hey as ee

PVG RNIN oO 1 TED MOO es Biv by

: tance Li Tala Selita! ADR AB

4 F i

i = é ,

i gb ' ; Mae Pee se a coeltigat mise

i i Ay a

‘* “

af ;

ta’) is

ne eae

ya aie tee, Nb

The ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM are ree n parts.

intervals as material becomes available. Ke + tenn

Some volumes and parts are out of print, and sikeis are only pals as parts ofa set, or 0

respectively. The prices of parts published prior to 1940 have been increased.

Out of print: Vols. I, II (Parts 1-3, 5, 7, 8), Ill (Part 1), V

Index), VII (Parts 1, 2, 3, 5), VIII, 1X (Parts 1, 2), x (Part 2), XI er 2, e ee XxX

(Part 1) >» XXIV (Part 2), XXXI (Parts 1-3).

Vol. “3 ie haa, aa

II. 1900-1902 Zoology and Gaul, (excl. Parts Hi rere 7,8) x }

III. 1903-1905 Zoology - «(exh Part. ae ae ee

IV. 19031908 Palaeontology i oan

V. 1906-1910 Geology, Palaeontology, Zoology, Anthropology (excl. raat

Parts 1, 2,.5, 8, 9) g cae

VI. 1908-1910 Zoology ieee Pace ic Tadeo ere

VII. 1908-1913 Palaeontology . (Parts 4 and 6 only) | ;

IX. 1911-1918 Botany ent Parts1 and2) 2

X. &Ig1ti1-1914 Zoology ae ; . (exer Part2) .

XI. 1911-1918 Zoology tk lexal Parts 2, 7s indeele wee

XII. 1913-1924 Palaeontology and ‘Geolbay ve eae 2 a nen

XIII. 1913-1923 Seeley and areas LA ee

XIV. 1915-1924 Zoology j 3

XV. 1914-1916 Zoology .. Sheen Laced se ae Je wa igs

XVI. 1917-1933 Botany .. 4 te Re i

XVIL 1919-1920, Zodlagy = 3.4.3. ae ae oo) Dr

XV. 1921 Zoology .. man « os haa wf hd ac eae

XIX. 1924-1925 Zoology .. PR ak teh ef au Rear

XX. 1924-1926 Zoology .. ol ee

XXI. 1925-1927 Zoology . (excl. Bart 1) he

XXII. 1925-1928 Palachutolney ee te ee

XXIII. 1925-1926 Zoology .. wie Aig SN arena

XXIV. 1929-1938 Anthropology and Ethnology <a (excl | Part. 2) ae

XXV. 1927-1928 Zoology Ze es Ss ae

XXVI 1928 Zoology .. i ee ea es ATO

XXVII 1929 Anthropology 10: 2

XXVIII. 1929-1932 Palaeontology eM eet a He he 12

XXIX. 1929-1931 Zoology .. ae aa : . sei ee e : sa ote emaner

XXX. 1931-1935 Zoology .. ‘ Se guage

INDEX of papers, authors, and sone publhed 5 in Vols. i XXX.. oat

XXXI. 1934-1950 Palaeontology : : (Part a only) 14

XXXII. 1935-1940 Zoology : : Bae

XX XIII. 1939 Zoology ie,

XXXIV. 1938 Zoology 2. zs ay Be oe pone eee ie et

XXXV. 1956 Zoology... a wee Oe a

XXXVI. 1942-1948 Zoology Oe SO aay cae

XXXVII. 1947-1952 Archaeology iT A6 So

XXXVIII. 1950 Zoology In

XXXIX. 1952 Zoology ' re ep k.-,

XL. 1952-1956 Botany . (excl. Index) 1 6

XLI. 1952-1955 Zoology “s ee we 43 ger so

XLII. 1953-1956 Palaeontology .. ae see

XLIII 1955 Zoology and Balacontlony Ls

The LIBRARIAN, Sourn AFRICAN Museum, Care Town,

(Parts 1, 2, 5,8, 9), VI (Part

Part 1 £1 os. od. Parts 2 & 3, each £0 ie od. Part 4 2

Copies may he obtained from—

¢ , ¥ . oi mine Bi

ey: e KX ee

ANNALS.

OF THE .

_ SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

VOLUME XLUI

PART V, containing :—

7. The South African Cladoceran eae colletti (Sars) and another African

_ Species. By J. P. Harpinc, Pu.D., British Museum (Natural History).

- (With four text-figures.)

8. On the Lancelets of South and East Africa. By J. E. Wess, Department

| of Zoology, University Gee Ibadan. (With five tables and three

text-figures.)

ISSUED MAY 1957. PRICE 4s,

My ae PRINTED FOR THE

TRUSTEES OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

BY THE RUSTICA PRESS (PTY.) LIMITED, COURT ROAD, WYNBERG, CAPE

7. The South African Cladoceran Euryalona colletti (Sars) and another African

species. By J. P. Harpinc, Pu.D. British Museum (Natural History).

(With four text-figures.) |

The original description of the species was by Sars (1895) under the name of

Alonopsis colletti, and he gives an additional description with further figures in

a later work (Sars, 1916), in this case placing the species under the genus

Euryalona.

The genus Euryalona was established by the same author (Sars, 1901) for the

South American species F. occidentalis, the type species, which may be a

synonym of E. ortentalis described by Daday from Ceylon (Daday, 1898), under

the genus Alonopsis.

Sars (1916) writes: ‘I have convinced myself of the complete identity of the

South African and South American forms.’ However, this identity has been

questioned since then (Brehm, 1935; Gauthier, 1930). This is because in the

figures of neither 1895 nor 1916 did Sars show any denticles on the claw of the

tail; these are clearly seen forming a comb along the proximal half of the

dorsal edge of the claw of the South American specimens (Sars, 1901).

I have recently been examining some specimens belonging to the genus

Euryalona from Lake Tanganyika, the property of the Musée Royal d’Histoire

Naturelle de Belgique, which seem to me to be identical with Sars’s type

specimens of F. occidentalis from Brazil.

Dr. K. H. Barnard has kindly lent me for comparison the type specimens of

E. colletti from Knysna which are mounted on a single microscope slide among

the collections of the South African Museum, Cape Town. Rather to my

surprise I find that this species, the first to be described, is quite distinct, the

claw of the tail, the labrum and the length of the antennule relative to that

of the rostrum being different in the two species. The claw of E. colletti has a

very strongly developed basal spine which is about half as long as the claw

itself (fig. 4) but the basal spine of the claw of E. occidentalis is only about as

long as the width of the claw (fig. 3). The long basal spine of E. colletti has

spinules along its outer edge while that of E. occidentalis is smooth. E. occidentalis

has a conspicuous row of spinules forming a comb along the proximal half of

the dorsal edge of the claw. These spinules increase in length distally until the

terminal one (near the middle of the claw) is about as long as the basal spine.

The spinules in a similar position on the claw of E. colletti are very much finer

and can only be seen with the highest powers of the microscope.

245

VOL. XLIII, PART V.

246 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

The labrum of E. colletti has a very characteristic shape with even curves,

and bulges in front (fig. 1). The shape of the labrum of a co-type of E. occidentalis

from Brazil is shown in fig. 2. There is a curious lateral crease which makes the

profile rather irregular. It is, however, very similar in the specimens from

Lake ‘Tanganyika, and also is shown in Gauthier’s 1930 figure of a specimen

Fic. 1. Head of Euryalona colletti, cotype, x 85. Fic. 2. Head of Euryalona occidentalis, cotype,

x 85. Fic. 3. Claw of the tail of Euryalona occidentalis, cotype, X 500. Fic. 4. Claw of the

tail of Euryalona colletti, cotype, X 500.

from the Sahara. The antennule of EF. occidentalis reaches almost to the tip of

the rostrum but is distinctly shorter in E. colletti (figs. 2 and 1 respectively).

Euryalona colletti is known by the type specimens from Knysna in the South

African Museum and also by a single specimen from Mahlabatini, Zululand,

in the British Museum collected by Mr. James Gibson early this century, and

correctly identified by G. S. Brady.

E. occidentalis is known from South America and from East Africa (Daday,

1910, as E. orientalis), Kenya (Brehm, 1935), parts of the Sahara region

(Gauthier, 1930) and Lake Tanganyika (Harding, 1957).

A third species (which may, however, be identical with E. occidentalis) is

E. orventalis, found in Ceylon (Daday, 1898) and the East Indies (Stingelin,

1904).

THE SOUTH AFRICAN CLADOCERAN EURYALONA COLLETTI (SARS) 247

REFERENCES

Brehm, V. 1935. ‘Crustacea. I. Cladocera und Euphyllopoda’ in: Mission Sci. de l’Omo.

Paris 2: 141-161, 21 figs.

Daday, E. 1898. ‘Mikroskopische Stisswasserthiere.’ Termes. Fuzetek 21: 1-123, 55 text-figs.

1910. ‘Untersuchungen tiber die Siisswasser-mikrofauna Deutsch-Ostafrikas. Cladocera.’

Koologica, Stuttgart 23: (hft. 59) If 1-5, 120-158, pls. 6-8, text-fig. 4.

Gauthier, H. 1930. ‘Mission Saharienne Augiéras-Draper 1927-8. Cladocéres, Ostracodes,

Phyllopodes anostracés et conchostracés.’ Bull. Mus. Hist. nat. Paris (2) 2: 92-116, 12 figs.

Harding, J. P. 1957. ‘Crustacea: Cladocera.’ Result Sci. Explor. Hydrobiol. Lac Tanganyika,

(1946-47). In the press.

Sars, G. O. 1895. ‘On some South African Entomostraca raised from dried mud.’ Vidensk-

Selsk. Skr. Math. Nat. Christiania no. 8, 1-56, 8 pls.

1901. ‘Contributions to the knowledge of the Fresh-water Entomostraca of South America

as shown by artificial hatching from dried material. Part I, Cladocera.’ Arch. Math. Nat.

Christiania 23, 3: 1-102, 12 pls.

1916. “The Fresh-water Entomostraca of Cape Province (Union of South Africa). Part I,

Cladocera.’ Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 15: 303-351, pls. 29-41.

Stingelin, T. 1904. “Untersuchungen tiber die Cladocerenfauna von Hinterindien, Sumatra,

und Java nebst einem Beitrage zur Cladoceren-Kenntnis der Hawaii-Inseln.’ Zool. Jahrb.

Syst. 21, hft. 3: 327-370, pls. 11-13.

big.

oc RR Ng

Bucy ae

8. On the Lancelets of South and East Africa. By J. E. Wess, Department of

Zoology, University College, Ibadan. (With five tables and three figures

in the text.)

INTRODUCTION

Lancelets of the genus Branchiostoma have been recorded from a number of

localities along the coast of the Cape Province, on the East African and

Arabian coasts and in Madagascar. In 1902 Gilchrist described Branchiostoma

capense from specimens taken at Simons Bay, False Bay, Mossel Bay and Algoa

Bay in the Cape Province and, in 1923, he described a second species, B. bazaru-

tense, from the Bazaruto Islands off Portuguese East Africa. Franz (1922),

examining material collected by the ‘Prinz Adalbert’ Expedition, reported the

occurrence of both B. belcheri and a species of an allied genus, Asymmetron

cultellus, at Bagamoyo opposite Zanzibar. In 1928 Prenant described specimens

which he considered to be inseparable from B. lanceolatum taken on the north-

west coast of Madagascar. Webb (1956) recorded another specimen of this

species and described a new lancelet, B. arabiae, from material collected by

the ‘John Murray’ Expedition in 1933. The specimen of B. lanceolatum and the

collection of B. arabiae were taken in the same haul near the entrance to the

Gulf of Oman. B. arabiae is not strictly an East African form, but it is related

both to B. bazarutense and to B. belcheri.

As the recognition of species in the genus Branchiostoma depends chiefly on

the numerical evaluation of characters often subject to considerable variation,

it is natural that some controversy has arisen concerning the validity of many

of the species described. Some workers consider the genus to comprise relatively

few species most of which are very widely distributed (Prenant 1928, and

Drach 1948), while others recognize as species a larger number of more

circumscribed forms (Hubbs 1922, and Franz 1922). Apart from a difference

in opinion as to what degree of differentiation should be recognized in the

erection of a species, much of the difficulty arises from the shortcomings of

many of the early descriptions. In these, the data given are frequently

insufficient first to permit adequate comparisons with other species and,

second, to enable the extent of the variation of the different characters to be

assessed. A case in point involves the recognition of B. capense from the Cape,

B. tattersalli from Ceylon, B. californiense from California and B. elongatum from

Peru and the Galapagos Islands. Following Gilchrist’s description of B. capense,

Tattersall (1903) discussed the position of this lancelet at some length and

concluded that B. capense, B. californiense and B. elongatum are probably varieties

249

“ABE 1 1957

250 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

of one species. He reached this conclusion on the general similarity of the 4 |

of the fins. In the same year Tattersall (1903a) examined a large collection of 7

lancelets from the oyster beds of Ceylon and found in it a single specimen which

he referred to B. californiense. If he considered B. californiense and B. elongatum

to be the same species, however, he should have referred his Ceylon lancelet to

B. elongatum as this species, described by Sundevall in 1852 and 1853, antedates

B. californiense first recorded by Cooper (1868) and later described by Andrews

(1893) (see also Hubbs 1922). Beebe and Tee-Van (1941) later recognized

B. elongatum and B. californense as distinct, but only on a difference of the total

number of myotomes in each. Franz (1922, 1922a and 1930) followed

Tattersall’s lead in considering both B. capense and Tattersall’s B. californiense

from Ceylon as uncertain species and suggested that they may be geographical

varieties of B. elongatum, although he had not seen Gilchrist’s description of

B. capense. B. californiense from California he came to recognize as distinct from

B. elongatum. Meanwhile Hubbs (1922) took the opposite view and maintained

that lancelets from so widely separated localities as the Cape, Ceylon, California

and Peru, Chile and the Galapagos Islands are likely to be distinct. He

therefore recognized B. capense and went so far as to rename ‘Tattersall’s

Ceylon specimen B. tattersalli on little evidence other than geographical

location. In 1934 Prashad described a series of specimens from Geylon together

with Tattersall’s specimen as B. gravelyi but, as has already been indicated in a

previous paper (Webb 1955), B. gravelyi must fall into synonymy with

B. tattersalli which, from the myotome formula given by Prashad, appears to be

a valid species distinct from B. californiense. Drach (1948) evidently accepts the

view of Franz as B. capense does not appear in his list of species and B. tattersalli

is similarly omitted, but B. californiense and B. elongatum he recognizes as

distinct. The doubts concerning the validity of B. capense, therefore, date from

Tattersall’s (1903) rejection of the species on what must be considered to-day

as inadequate grounds and since that time material of the Cape lancelet has

never been critically examined to confirm or refute his contention. Thus a

review of this lancelet and those with which it has been confused is badly

needed.

The occurrence of B. belchert at Bagamoyo and B. lanceolatum in Madagascar

appears at first sight to be anomalous. B. belcheri is a species common in the

China Seas and East Indies while B. lanceolatum is the European lancelet. The

presence of these species on the East African coast, therefore, is of great

interest, but requires confirmation. In this paper an attempt is made to

clarify the systematic position of the Cape lancelet and to provide confirmation

of the existence of B. belcheri and B. lanceolatum in East Africa. Dr. Keppel H.

Barnard of the South African Museum has kindly lent the type specimens of

B. capense and Professor J. H. Day of the University of Cape Town has provided

a collection of lancelets from Cape Province and Portuguese East Africa made

ON THE LANCELETS OF SOUTH AND EAST AFRICA 251

in recent years by members of his department in the course of an ecological

survey of those regions. The author is grateful to Dr. Barnard and to

Professor Day for their co-operation and also to the Trustees of the British

Museum (Natural History) for permission to examine the collections of

B. califormense and B. elongatum in that museum.

SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT

Family BRANCHIOSTOMIDAE

Branchwostoma capense Gilchrist (1902)

Material examined. The type specimens ‘S.A.M. 13727, one of P.F. 722’

(here designated holotype), a specimen 38 mm. in length stained and mounted

on a slide; “S.A.M. 13728’ (here designated paratype) a specimen 36 mm. in

length stained and mounted on a slide; ‘Pieter Faure No. 4055 False Bay (Cape)

24 fathoms 1900’ (here designated paratype) a specimen 43 mm. in length

preserved in alcohol. These three specimens are deposited in the South

African Museum, Cape Town.

The following specimens lent by Professor Day: three specimens (F.B. 1104,

22.2.47) collected in False Bay 34° 08’ S. 18° 31’ 30” E. by D-net at 27-28

metres, bottom fine shingle; two specimens (FAL. 5. S. 22.2.52) collected in

False Bay, just south of Seal Island, by rock dredge at 35 metres, bottom

broken shell; three specimens (LIZ. 25. K. 11.4.54) dredged in Algoa Bay

34° 00’ 24” 8. 25° 44’ 30” E. at 39 metres, bottom coarse sand and shell; one

specimen (M.B. 71. C. 19.1.56) dredged in Mossel Bay. ‘These specimens are

deposited in the Department of Zoology, University of Cape Town.

Distribution. South coast of the Gape Province, South Africa: at Simons

Bay, False Bay, Mossel Bay and Algoa Bay.

Diagnosis. In the following diagnosis counts and measurements have been

made on the specimens listed above and the results examined statistically.

Although these specimens do not comprise a sample taken from one locality

at the same time, they are, nevertheless, so uniform that they can be treated as

a single series.

1. Dorsal fin chambers number 400-440: Mean 420-9: Standard Deviation

14:67: S.D. = 3:49 per cent of the Mean.

2. Preanal fin chambers number 62-80: Mean 71:2: Standard Deviation 6-11:

S.D. = 8.58 per cent of the Mean.

3. ‘Tallest of dorsal fin chambers 4:0—6-0 times as high as broad: Mean 4°55:

Standard Deviation 0-64: $.D. = 14:0 per cent of the Mean.

4. Height of dorsal fin contained 7-11 times in the depth of the body in the

mid-atrial region: Mean 9-4: Standard Deviation 1-36: 8.D. = 14°49 per

cent of the Mean.

252 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

5. Postatrioporal region 0:38-0:43 the length of the preatrioporal region:

Mean: 0-405: Standard Deviation 0-014: $8.D. = 3:4 per cent of the

Mean.

6. Myotomes from anterior end to atriopore 44-48: Mean 46-0: Standard

Deviation 1-26: $.D. = 2°75.per cent of the Mean.

7. Myotomes from atriopore to anus 18-20: Mean 19-2: Standard Deviation

0:75: 8.D. = 3-91 per cent of the Mean.

8. Myotomes posterior to anus 10-11: Mean 10-1: Standard Deviation 0:32:

S.D. = 3°13 per cent of the Mean.

g. Total myotomes 73-77: Mean 75:3: Standard Deviation 1-45: $.D. =

1-92 per cent of the Mean.

10. Maximum length in sample examined 64 mm.; minimum length 36 mm.

it RO i i our

E ti

BRANCHIOSTOMA CAPENSE

Fic. 1.

The following characters also assist in the recognition of this species and are

illustrated in fig. 1 which has been prepared from camera lucida drawings of the

holotype. The dorsal fin is approximately the same height throughout its

length and is not separated from the rostrum by a post-rostral notch. The

form of the rostrum and the oral region is almost identical with that of the

West African species B. nigertense (Webb, 1955 and 1956a). The caudal fin is

also similar to that of B. migeriense and in outline possesses the characteristic

dorsal and ventral subterminal indentations. The preanal fin, however, differs

from that of B. nigeriense as the fin chambers do not extend to one half the breadth

of the fin. The anus lies before the centre of the lower lobe of the caudal fin.

Comparison of Branchiostoma capense with other species of the genus

The species with which B. capense is compared are selected on grounds either

of similarity of structure or of occurrence in adjacent geographical locations.

Thus a comparison is made with B. californiense and B. elongatum as it is with

these species that B. capense shows similarities and has been considered synony-

mous in the past. B. capense is compared with B. belchen, B. bazarutense and

B. arabiae as these three species are found on the east coast of the African

continent from Portuguese East Africa to Arabia. Finally a similar com-

parison is made with the Guinea Coast species of West Africa, B. -nigeriense,

B. takoradit, B. leonense and B. africae, a group near to B. capense both structurally

and geographically. A comparison with B. lanceolatum which also now occurs

ON THE LANCELETS OF SOUTH AND EAST AFRICA 253

on the east coast of Africa has not been made as the appearance of this species

in the Arabian Sea and Indian Ocean is evidently very recent and the structural

differences between B. lanceolatum and B. capense are considerable.

When B. capense is compared with B. californiense a number of differences are

apparent which have not previously been appreciated. A single specimen of

B. californiense from San Diego, California (B.M. reg. no. 1892.4.27.16—-19), in

the British Museum (Natural History) collection has been found to possess the

following characteristics. The recorded range of variation in each character

for this species is given in parenthesis after the figures for the specimen

examined.

1. Dorsal fin chambers number 347. (312-374).

2. Preanal fin chambers number 45. (c. 50).

3. Tallest of dorsal fin chambers 4:0 times as high as broad. (5:0-8:0).

4. Height of the dorsal fin contained 8 times in the depth of the body in

the mid-atrial region. (5-8).

5- Postatrioporal region 0-36 the length of the preatrioporal region.

(0:30—0°38).

6. Myotomes from anterior end to atriopore 44. (43-48).

7. Myotomes from atriopore to anus 19. (16-19)

8. Myotomes posterior to anus 9. (8-10).

g. Total myotomes 72. (68-74).

o. Length of specimen 71 mm. (maximum length recorded elsewhere 84 mm.).

In general appearance this species resembles B. elongatum (see fig. 2) except

that the oral cirri, although rather short, are more prominent and the dorsal

fin is approximately the same height throughout the length of the body. The

anus is situated behind the centre of the lower lobe of the caudal fin.

A comparison of the diagnoses for B. capense and B. californiense shows that

the numbers of dorsal and preanal fin chambers are considerably higher in

the former species. In B. capense the height of the dorsal fin tends to be

relatively less than in B. califormiense and the proportions of the dorsal fin

chambers are accordingly slightly different. The relative length of the post-

atrioporal region in B. calzforniense is less than in B. capense. In the myotome

formula, while the number of myotomes before the atriopore is similar in both

species, the number behind the atriopore in B. capense is higher so that the total

myotome number is also higher than in B. californiense. These differences

appear to be quite sufficient to indicate that B. capense and B. californiense are

distinct, but, in addition, differences in the form of the rostrum, the oral

region, and the caudal and preanal fins support the separation of the two

forms.

From figures recorded for B. elongatum by Sundevall (1852 and 1853),

Snodgrass and Heller (1905), Hubbs (1922), Franz (1922, 1922a and 1930)

and Beebe and Tee-Van (1941), a much higher degree of similarity in the

254 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

numerical characters evidently exists between this species and B. capense than

between B. californiense and the Cape lancelet. Indeed, from this published

data, no clear distinction can be made between B. capense and B. elongatum and

a re-examination of material of B. elongatum was essential before it could be

determined whether, in fact, the two lancelets should be assigned to the same

species. Fortunately B. elongatum is represented in the collections of the British

Museum (Natural History) by good samples from Peru and from the Galapagos

Islands. ‘These samples have been examined and diagnoses for each are given.

Diagnosis of Branchiostoma elongatum Sundevall (Peruvian sample)

The following diagnosis is based on 16 specimens dredged from 5-8 fathoms

at Lobos de Tierra, Peru, 6° 25’ S. 80° 57’ W. on 7th June 1912. They are

part of a sample in the collection of the British Museum (Natural History),

B.M. reg. nos. 1913.7.10.1-10. Counts and measurements have been made

on these specimens and the results examined statistically.

1. Dorsal fin chambers number 350-410: Mean 381-0: Standard Deviation

18:50: S.D. = 4.86 per cent of the Mean.

2. Preanal fin chambers number 37-80: Mean 64:0: Standard Deviation

10°35: 5.D. = 16-17 per cent of the Mean.

3. ‘Tallest of dorsal fin chambers 2-7—6-0 times as high as broad: Mean 3:6:

Standard Deviation 1:03: $.D. = 28-68 per cent of the Mean.

4. Height of dorsal fin contained 7-12 times in the depth of the body in the

mid-atrial region: Mean 10-0: Standard Deviation 1-41: $.D. = 14°14

per cent of the Mean.

5- Postatrioporal region 0-34—0-42 the length of the preatrioporal region:

Mean 0:387: Standard Deviation 0-021: $.D. = 5:31 per cent of the

Mean.

6. Myotomes from anterior end to atriopore 47-51: Mean 49:0: Standard

Deviation 1:03: $S.D. = 2-11 per cent of the Mean.

7. Myotomes from atriopore to anus 18-20: Mean 18-7: Standard Deviation

0:79: S.D. = 4:24 per cent of the Mean.

8. Myotomes posterior to anus 11-13: Mean 12-25: Standard Deviation 0-69:

S.D. = 5°59 per cent of the Mean.

g. Total myotomes 77-84: Mean 80-0: Standard Deviation 1:57: $.D. =

1-96 per cent of the Mean.

10. Maximum length in sample examined 64 mm.; minimum length 25 mm.

The following characters not suitable for numerical evaluation assist in the

recognition of this species and are illustrated in fig. 2 which has been prepared

from camera lucida drawings of a small specimen from the sample. The dorsal

fin is distinctly taller at the posterior end than in the anterior region. The

rostrum is angular rather than curved in outline and there is no post-rostral

notch. The caudal fin is moderately well developed and without subterminal

indentations in outline. The anus is situated well before the centre of the

ON THE LANCELETS OF SOUTH AND EAST AFRICA 255

lower lobe. In the preanal fin the lamina is greatly reduced and the fin

chambers occupy almost the full width of the fin. The oral region is relatively

small and the buccal cirri considerably shorter than in other species of the

genus. There are, however, differences between large and small specimens in

this sample which indicate that changes occur with growth in the relative

height of the dorsal fin and in the number of preanal fin chambers. In speci-

mens under 40 mm. in Jength the tallest of dorsal fin chambers are 4:0-6-0

times as high as broad (Mean 4:9) and the height of the dorsal fin is contained

7-10 times in the depth of the body in the mid-atrial region (Mean 8-4). In

spécimens over 40 mm. in length the tallest of dorsal fin chambers are only

2°7-3°5 times as high as broad (Mean 3:0) and the height of the dorsal fin is

contained 10—12 times in the depth of the body in the mid-atrial region (Mean

10°7). It is evident, therefore, that the dorsal fin grows rapidly in height in the

BSRANCHIOSTOMA ELONGATUM CPERUVIAN SAMPLED

Fic. 2.

young animal and that the rate of increase in height of the fin becomes relatively

slight as the animal approaches maturity. Increase in length of the body and

hence of the dorsal fin, however, occurs without a corresponding increase in

the number of dorsal fin chambers so that the proportions of the individual

chambers alter with age. In the preanal fin, the number of fin chambers in

specimens less than 40 mm. in length is 37-60 (Mean 52:6) whereas, in speci-

mens over 40 mm. in length there are 62-80 chambers (Mean 69:2). There is

no overlap in the numbers of preanal fin chambers between these two arbitrarily

chosen groups of large and small specimens so that it is evident that the number

of chambers must increase with the age of the animal. The changes in the

relative height of the dorsal fin, the proportions of the dorsal fin chambers and

the number of preanal fin chambers account for the very wide range of

variation in these characters (characters 2, 3 and 4) in the diagnosis (where

the figures are based on the entire sample) and consequently for the high value

of the Standard Deviation evident when this is expressed as a percentage of

the Mean. The occurrence of differential rates of growth in the dorsal fin

and the body and the increase in number of preanal fin chambers with age

appears to be a peculiarity of B. elongatum and has not been observed in other

species of the genus.

Diagnosis of Branchiostoma elongatum Sundevall (Galapagos sample)

The following diagnosis is based on ten specimens taken by the Crossland

Expedition from the Galapagos Islands on 25th July, 1924. They are part of

256 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

a sample in the collection of the British Museum (Natural History), B.M. reg.

nos. 1955. 12.13. 131-142. Counts and measurements have been made on

these specimens and the results examined statistically.

1. Dorsal fin chambers number 356-420: Mean 383-6: Standard Deviation

21:21: 5.D. = 5°53 per cent of the Mean.

2. Preanal fin chambers number 40-75: Mean 53:0: Standard Deviation

10°12: S.D. = 19:1 per cent of the Mean.

3. Tallest of dorsal fin chambers 4-0—7-0 times as high as broad: Mean 5:5:

Standard Deviation 0-90: $.D. = 16-32 per cent of the Mean.

4. Height of dorsal fin contained 7—10 times in the depth of the body in the

mid-atrial region: Mean 8-3: Standard Deviation 1-06: $.D. = 12-76 per

cent of the Mean.

5. Postatrioporal region 0-33-0-41 the length of the preatrioporal region:

Mean 0:36: Standard Deviation 0-029: 8.D. = 8-18 per cent of the Mean.

6. Myotomes from anterior end to atriopore 47-50: Mean 48-9: Standard

Deviation 1-0: $.D. = 2-05 per cent of the Mean.

7. Myotomes from atriopore to anus 17-19: Mean 18-3: Standard Deviation

0-072) 5.) 13-00) per cent orune WViean:

8. Myotomes posterior to anus 9-11: Mean 10-1: Standard Deviation 0-88:

S.D. = 8-73 per cent of the Mean.

9g. Total myotomes 75-79: Mean 77:3: Standard Deviation 1-34: $.D. =

1°73 per cent of the Mean.

10. Maximum length in sample examined 29 mm.; minimum length 16 mm.

In general appearance the specimens of B. elongatum from the Galapagos

Islands closely resemble those from Peru. As this sample, like that described

by Snodgrass and Heller (1905), consists solely of small immature specimens,

comparison of the shape and proportions of the fins and the number of preanal

fin chambers can only be made with the smaller specimens in the Peruvian

sample. It is not known whether changes in the proportions of the dorsal fin

and in the number of preanal fin chambers occur in the Galapagos population

of this species.

A comparison of the numerical characteristics of the Peruvian and Galapagos

samples of B. elongatum is made in Table I where, for each of the characters

numbered 1—g in the diagnoses, the Mean and the Standard Deviation is given

and from these ‘?’ and hence ‘P’, the degree of probability that such differences

could occur between random samples of one population, have been calculated.

In this table the Means and Standard Deviations are those given in the

diagnoses of the two samples except for characters 2, 3 and 4 of the Peruvian

sample where figures based on five specimens under 40 mm. in length have

been substituted as offering a better comparison with the immature specimens

of the Galapagos sample.

ON THE LANCELETS OF SOUTH AND EAST AFRICA 257

TaBLe [

B. elongatum B. elongatum

CHARACTER| (Peruvian sample) | (Galapagos sample)

, oP ‘Pp?

NUMBER MEAN S.D. MEAN S.D.

I 381-0 18-50 383-6 QQ] 0-316 > 0°25

2 52-6 9°64 53:0 10°12 O-000n | |= -0-25,

3 4°9 0°89 5°5 0-90 ETS Fit hi 25

4 8-4. I-14 8°3 1-06 0-156 >0°25

5 0°387 0-021 0°36 0-029 2°638 0-02

6 49:0 1°03 48-9 IO 0°234 >0°25

7 18°7 0°79 18-3 O67 1.) O-5R5 >0:25

8 12°25 0-69 Iovl 0:88 6-666 <0°001

9 30-0 oy (IC: 1°34 4°331 <0°001

A statistical analysis showing to what extent the differences between the Peruvian and the

Galapagos samples of B. elongatum may be held to characterize the populations from which the

samples were taken.

It is seen from Table I that the differences between the samples of B. elongatum

from Peru and from the Galapagos Islands are not significant (assuming

‘P’ =0-05 to be the limit of significance) except in characters 5, 8 and g. In

character 5, the relative length of the postatrioporal region, the difference,

although significant, is not great, but in character 8, the number of myotomes

in the tail, the difference is highly significant. In accordance with the greater

number of myotomes in the tail in the Peruvian lancelet there is also a

significant difference in the total number of myotomes (character g) in the

two samples. Ignoring, therefore, the rather slight difference in the relative

lengths of the postatrioporal region, it is clear that the only important feature

distinguishing the lancelets of Lobos de Tierra and those of the Galapagos is

the number of myotomes in the tail. The difference in this character is

equivalent to the population differences found in B. lanceolatum from different

regions (Webb, 1956b) and is insufficient to justify the recognition of the

Galapagos lancelets as a distinct species. The comparison shows that the

sample of B. elongatum from Peru can be considered representative of the

species and, as it contains a number of mature specimens, it is more suitable

for comparison with the Cape lancelet than the Galapagos form. A statistical

analysis of the Peruvian sample of B. elongatum and the sample of B. capense is

given in Table II.

258 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

TABLE II

B. capense B. elongatum

CHARACTER (Peruvian sample)

7 te i

NUMBER MEAN S.D. MEAN 5.)

I 4.20°9 14°67 381-0 18°50 5766 <0-001

2 71-2 6-11 64:0 10°35 1°904 0:05

3 4°55 0-64. 3°6 1°03 2-616 0:02

4. Q°4 1°36 10:0 I-41 1-061 0°25

5 0°405 0-014 0°387 0-021 2°204. 0-02

6 46-0 1°26 49:0 1°03 6-524 <0-001

Gi 1Q°2 0.75 18-7 0°79 1-587 Or!

8 10°1 0°32 12°25 0-69 9282 <0-‘001

9 753 1°45 80:0 1°57 7.586 <0-001

A statistical analysis showing to what extent the differences between B. capense and the

_ Peruvian sample of B. elongatum may be held to characterize the populations from which the

samples were taken.

In Table II the Means and Standard Deviations for each of the nine

diagnostic characters of B. capense and the Peruvian sample of B. elongatum are

given and from them ‘/’ and hence ‘P’ have been calculated to show how far

the differences between the samples are significant. The chief characters in

which the Cape lancelet differs from B. elongatum are the number of dorsal fin

chambers (character 1), the number of myotomes before the atriopore

(character 6) and the total number of myotomes (character 9) for each of

which the value of ‘?’ is high and that for ‘P’ correspondingly low. Nevertheless

in all of these characters the range of variation is such that there is some

degree of overlap between the Cape sample and either the Peruvian or the

Galapagos samples. Thus, on these characters alone, individual specimens of

the Cape lancelet cannot necessarily be separated from specimens from one

or other of the populations of B. elongatum. In the number of preanal fin

chambers the Cape lancelet, with a rather higher number, is different from

the Peruvian lancelet, but the difference is barely significant. In character 3,

the proportions of the dorsal fin chambers, the Cape lancelet is not significantly

different from the small specimens of the Peruvian lancelet although it is

different from the mature forms. The height of the dorsal fin relative to the

depth of the body (character 4) is a very variable character in all forms and

differences between them are not significant. A difference in the relative

length of the postatrioporal region exists in the two forms, but again it is

ON THE LANCELETS OF SOUTH AND EAST AFRICA 259

barely significant. In character 7, the number of myotomes between the

atriopore and the anus, there is a close similarity between the Cape lancelet

and the Peruvian and Galapagos lancelets. In character 8, the number of

myotomes in the tail, the Cape lancelet is significantly different from the

Peruvian lancelet, but not from the Galapagos form.

Although, as would be expected, there is a greater difference between the

Cape and the Peruvian than between the Peruvian and the Galapagos lance-

lets, on numerical characteristics alone the differences between any of the

samples are not such that individual specimens from each are readily distin-

guishable. As the numerical characters do not provide a clear basis for

separation, it is necessary to take into consideration other features not con-

veniently assessed on a numerical basis. From a comparison of figures 1 and 2,

it is seen that the form of the rostrum and the oral region, the dorsal fin and

also the caudal and preanal fins is quite different in the two lancelets. In

general appearance B. elongatum has resemblances with B. belchert whereas the

Cape lancelet resembles the West African forms. Moreover, the changes in

the proportions of the dorsal fin chambers, the relative height of the dorsal fin

and the number of preanal fin chambers which occur in B. elongatum with

advancing age are features not found in the Cape lancelet where the characters

of large and small specimens do not differ significantly. ‘The writer attaches

considerable importance to these characters and, in view of the fact that the

two forms can be separated by them, is of the opinion that the Cape lancelet

should be regarded as a distinct form in which the similarity of numerical

characteristics with B. elongatum is fortuitous.

The comparison of B. capense with the Indo-Pacific species B. belchert,

B. bazarutense and B. arabiae can be dismissed very briefly. In each of these three

species the number of dorsal fin chambers is much fewer and the height of the

dorsal fin relatively less than in B. capense. In consequence, the dorsal fin

chambers are short and broad in these species, but long and narrow in B. capense.

In B. bazarutense and B. belcheri, but not in B. arabiae, the postatrioporal

region is relatively longer than in B. capense. An outstanding difference, how-

ever, lies in the number of myotomes before the atriopore which is much

higher in B. capense than in the other three species. The difference in the

number of anterior myotomes is also largely responsible for the clear difference

in the total myotome number (see Webb, 1955 and 1956). Moreover the

form of the rostrum, the oral region and the caudal and preanal fins in B. capense

gives this lancelet a general appearance by which it can be distinguished

immediately from the three Indo-Pacific species. It has already been pointed

out that close relationships exist between B. belcheri, B. bazarutense and B. arabiae

(see Webb, 1956) and it is evident that B. capense does not belong to this

group.

260 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Tasle III

B. capense B. nigeriense

CHARACTER —___,——______—_____ es x

NUMBER MEAN S.D. MEAN S.D.

I 4.20°9 14°67 34.43 15°30 II‘1Q5 <0-00I

2 71-2 6-11 53°9 3°07 7°548 <0:001

3 4°55 0-64 471 0-74 1421 0°25

4. Q°4 1°36 9°3 106 0-178 >0°25

5 0°405 0-014 0-417 0:030 1-194 0°25

6 46-0 1-26 41°7 1-70 6-298 <0-001

7 1Q°2 0°75 15°4 0°52 12°714 <0°001

8 1O°1 0°32 10°9 0°57 3°816 0-001

9 75:3 TAG | O79 1°45 II‘I1O <0-00I

A statistical analysis showing to what extent the differences between samples of B. capense

and B. nigeriense may be held to characterize the populations from which the samples were

taken.

The only other species with which B. capense can be compared with profit

are the West African species B. africae, B. nigeriense, B. takoradiu and B. leonense

which form a closely related group from the Guinea Coast (see Webb 1955,

1956a and 1956b). It is worth noting that, in describing B. africae, Hubbs

(1927) compared this species with B. californiense, B. capense, B. lanceolatum and

B. tatiersalli thus evidently recognizing a degree of relationship between

B. capense and B. africae. Unfortunately specimens of B. africae from which a

statistical analysis of the species can be prepared are not available. However

B. nigeriense is a species very close to B. africae and for which there is an abun-

dance of material. B. nigeriense occurs in two forms, one from the sea and the

other from brackish water. An analysis of the marine form has already been

published (Webb, 1956a) and these figures are here compared with those for

B. capense in Table III. A detailed comparison of B. capense with B. takoradi

and B. leonense is considered unnecessary in view of the close relationship

existing between all the Guinea Coast lancelets.

In Table III, for each of the characters numbered 1-9 in the diagnoses for

B. capense and B. nigeriense, the Mean and the Standard Deviation is given

and from these ‘t? and hence ‘P’ have been calculated as a measure of the

extent of the differences between the samples. High values for ‘t? and cor-

respondingly low values for ‘P’ show that B. capense and B. nigeriense are

significantly different in all characters except the height of the dorsal fin, the

proportions of the dorsal fin chambers and the relative length of the postatri-

ON THE LANCELETS OF SOUTH AND EAST AFRICA 261

oporal region (characters 4, 3 and 5 respectively). In some characters (the

number of preanal chambers, the number of myotomes before the anus and

the total myotome number) the difference between the two samples is con-

siderable. In the number of myotomes in the tail (character 8), however, it

is not so great and in the number of dorsal fin chambers (character 1) there is

a tendency among the Guinea Coast lancelets for this to be high, 400 chambers

occasionally being exceeded in B. leonense. With regard to characters other

than those treated numerically, it has already been mentioned that there is a

striking similarity between the form of the rostrum, the oral region and the

caudal fin in B. capense and that in B. nigertense and B. leonense. In general

appearance B. capense can be mistaken for B. nigeriense except for a difference

in number and length of the preanal fin chambers. It seems, therefore, that

these two lancelets possess a considerable number of identical characters

which strongly suggests that they have diverged from a common stock. Thus,

whereas there is no doubt that B. capense is distinct from the Guinea Coast

lancelets, it is also evident that it is an extreme member of that series and is

more closely related to B. nigeriense or perhaps B. africae than to any other

known species. Lancelets have not yet been recorded from the coasts of French

Equatorial Africa, Angola, or South West Africa where forms intermediate

between B. capense and the Tropical West African species might be expected

to occur. The proposed relationship between B. capense and the West African

lancelets is in accordance with their geographical location and supports the

contention that B. capense has no close affinities with B. elongatum in spite of the

remarkable agreement between their numerical characteristics. The view,

therefore, is taken that B. capense is a valid species not to be confused with the

lancelets of the western seaboard of the Americas.

Branchiostoma belchert (Gray)

Amphioxus belcheri Gray (1847)

Branchiostoma belcheri Gray (1851)

(for a full list of references see Franz, 1922, and Hubbs, 1922).

Material examined. Nine specimens (MOR. 43. K. 20.1.54) dredged at

Linga-linga, Morrumbene Estuary, Portuguese East Africa, common on a

sandy bottom. One specimen (P.E.A. 148. —.11.55) dredged off Mozambique

Island, Portuguese East Africa. These specimens are deposited in the Depart-

ment of Zoology, University of Gape ‘Town.

Distribution. Coasts of Borneo, China and Japan, Singapore, Philippine

Islands, Torres Strait, Madras, Ceylon and East Africa.

Remarks. The nine specimens from Linga-linga are a uniform series, but the

specimen from Mozambique Island shows minor differences from these. It has

therefore been considered desirable to give a separate diagnosis for each sample.

262 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Diagnosis of the Linga-linga lancelet. In the following diagnosis counts and —

measurements have been made on the 9 specimens in this sample and the ~

results have been analysed statistically.

1. Dorsal fin chambers number 258-306: Mean 287-0: Standard Deviation

15:1: S.D. = 5:26 per cent of the Mean.

2. Preanal fin chambers number 70-88: Mean 80-6: Standard Deviation

5°61: S.D. = 6-06 per cent of the Mean.

3. Tallest of dorsal fin chambers 3:0—3-6 times as high as broad: Mean 3:17:

Standard Deviation 0-24: $.D. = 7-48 per cent of the Mean.

4. Height of the dorsal fin contained 7-10 times in the depth of the body in

the mid-atrial region: Mean 8-8: Standard Deviation 0-97: $.D. = 11-05

per cent of the Mean.

5. Postatrioporal region 0.43-0°47 the length of the preatrioporal region:

Mean 0-450: Standard Deviation 0-012: $.D. = 2-72 per cent of the

Mean.

6. Myotomes from anterior end to atriopore 36-39: Mean 37:1: Standard

Deviation 0:79: S.D. = 2-13 per cent of the Mean.

7. Myotomes from atriopore to anus 17-19: Mean 17-7: Standard Deviation

O-71. 9.0. 4-0) per centiol the Mican.

8. Myotomes posterior to anus 9-11: Mean 9-9: Standard Deviation o-60:

S-D)\==6-07, per cent of the Mean.

g. Total myotomes 63-66: Mean 64:7: Standard Deviation 1:12: $.D. =

1°73 per cent of the Mean.

10. Maximum length in sample examined 48 mm.; minimum length 42 mm.

Diagnosis of the Mozambique Island lancelet.

Dorsal fin chambers number 276.

Preanal fin chambers number 68.

Tallest of dorsal fin chambers 4:0 times as high as broad.

Height of the dorsal fin contained 8 times in the depth of the body in the

mid-atrial region.

Postatrioporal region 0-46 the length of the preatrioporal region.

Myotomes from anterior end to atriopore 34.

Myotomes from atriopore to anus 17.

Myotomes posterior to anus II.

Total myotomes 62.

Length of specimen 62 mm.

mem Oo N

SO OI DY

The following characters also assist in the recognition of this species and are

illustrated in fig. 3 which has been prepared from camera lucida drawings of the

Linga-linga lancelet. The rostrum is of moderate size and is separated from

the dorsal fin by a post-rostral notch. The comparatively low dorsal fin is of

approximately the same height throughout the length of the body. The caudal

ON THE LANCELETS OF SOUTH AND EAST AFRICA 263

fin is rather small and lacks the subterminal indentations in outline present in

B. capense. ‘The anus is situated in advance of the centre of the lower lobe of

the caudal fin. The preanal fin is long but comparatively narrow and the

preanal chambers extend almost the full width of the fin. Seen from the

ventral aspect the preanal fin chambers are broad and, in some specimens,

there is incipient doubling of the fin either at the anterior end only or through-

out its entire length. The presence of a double preanal fin has been mentioned

by Gilchrist (1923) as a character of B. bazarutense. The anterior end of the

body is slender and the oral hood comparatively shallow dorso-ventrally. In

all the specimens examined well-formed gonads were present. The body is

more or less circular in cross-section in contrast with the marked lateral

flattening of most species other than B. belchert.

<n KEK « TT

KKK E

3 SSS en

= = Kus

eee ee eet ——

BRANCHIOSTOMA BELCHER/ CPORTUGUESE EAST AFRICAN SAMPLE)

FIGs 3:

These Portuguese East African lancelets agree in all characters with

B. belchert and do not differ very greatly from B. bazarutense. The occurrence of

B. belchert on the coast of East Africa is of special interest as this species seems

to be predominantly an Asiatic form. It has already been mentioned that

Franz (1922) recorded B. belchert from a locality near Zanzibar, but that this

record badly needed confirmation. The present collection from Linga-linga

and Mozambique Island provides that confirmation and suggests that

B. belcheri is probably well established on the East African coast as a distinct

population. To determine how far the East African form differs from the

Asiatic members of B. belcheri, a comparison is made between the Linga-linga

sample and another from Amoy on the coast of China, a statistical analysis of

which has already been published (Webb, 1956). In Table IV, from the Means

and the Standard Deviations for the nine diagnostic characters of the Linga-

linga and Amoy lancelets, ‘t? and hence ‘P’ has been calculated to show how

far the samples may be considered representative of distinct populations. It is

clear from the low values of ‘t? and the high values for ‘P’ obtained, that the

Linga-linga and the Amoy lancelets are not significantly different except in

the number of dorsal fin chambers, the relative length of the postatrioporal

region and the number of myotomes between the atriopore and the anus

(characters 1, 5 and 7). Moreover in only one of these three characters, the

relative length of the postatrioporal region of the body, can the difference

264 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

between the samples be considered highly significant. The measure of agree-

ment, therefore, is greater between the Linga-linga samples than has been

shown to exist between samples of B. lanceolatum taken from Naples, Plymouth

and the Kattegat (Webb, 1956b). In general appearance, also, the Linga-

linga lancelet and the Amoy lancelet are almost identical (compare fig. 3 with

Webb, 1956, fig. 2). There is no longer any doubt, therefore, that B. belcheri is

represented in East Africa, although there are population differences between

the East African and the Asiatic forms.

TABLE IV

Linga-linga lancelet| Amoy lancelet

CHARACTER ———————- —. —_ —____ Ge gee

NUMBER MEAN SD: MEAN S.D.

I 287°0 15:10 | 3050 23°64 2130 | <0:05

2 80:6 5:61 78-1 5°26 1-165 0°25

3 3°17 0°24 2°96 0-31 1-788 Orl

4 8-8 0:97 9:08 0:96 0-726 >0:25

5 0°45 0-012 0°50 0:024. 5808 <0-00I

6 SPI 0°79 36°5 0:82 1°844. Or!

7 77] O-71 17:0 0-76 2°330 >0:02

8 9:9 0-60 10:0 0°54. 0:448 >0°25

9 64:7 on 63°56 1-00 2°746 0-01

A statistical analysis showing to what extent the differences between samples of B. belcheri

from Linga-linga in Portuguese East Africa and Amoy in China may be held to characterize

the populations from which the samples were taken.

The single specimen from Mozambique Island has been shown to differ

from those from Linga-linga more particularly in the rather low number of

myotomes before the atriopore. Whereas it is impossible to draw any con-

clusions from such differences in a single specimen, the occurrence of this

specimen does suggest that there might be other populations of B. belchert on

the East African coast where isolation may have given rise to slight differences

which are maintained. It is also possible that Gilchrist’s species B. bazarutense

should more properly be referred to as a variant of B. belcheri. In his description

of B. bazarutense Gilchrist was more concerned with separating his species from

B. capense and B. elongatum than any other species, and he overlooked the

similarity with B. belcherr, the existence on the East African coast of this species

not being suspected at that time. Gilchrist placed some weight on the peculiar

form of the preanal fin in B. bazarutense, but the approach to a similar con-

dition in the Linga-linga lancelet shows that this character is, in fact, a further

ON THE LANCELETS OF SOUTH AND EAST AFRICA 265

link with B. belcheri. Nevertheless B. bazarutense can be recognized from a

number of slight differences which involve most of the characters, but whether

these differences are sufficient to warrant specific recognition is another matter

which, as the types of this species appear to have been lost, can only be settled

when a new sample has been obtained.

Branchiostoma banceolatum (Pallas)

Limax lanceolatus Pallas (1774)

Branchiostoma lubricus Costa (1834)

Amphioxus lanceolatus Yarrell (1836)

Branchiostoma lanceolatum Gray (1851)

Material examined. Two specimens (MOR. 43.K. 20.1.54) dredged at

Linga-linga, Morrumbene Estuary, Portuguese East Africa, from sandy

bottom. These specimens are deposited in the Department of Zoology,

University of Cape Town.

Distribution. Norwegian coast, North Sea, Kattegat, Heligoland, English

Channel, Irish Sea, Mediterranean Sea, Suez Canal, Arabian Sea, Madagascar,

Portuguese East Africa.

Remarks. These two specimens of B. lanceolatum were included in the same

sample as the nine specimens of B. belcherr from Linga-linga, Portuguese East

Africa. Apparently the two species have been taken from the same locality

at the same time.

Diagnosis of the Portuguese East African sample of Branchiostoma lanceolatum

1. Dorsal fin chambers number 270 and 280.

2. Preanal fin chambers number 32 and 34.

3. Tallest of dorsal fin chambers 2-5 times as high as broad.

4. Height of dorsal fin contained 11 and 12 times in the depth of the body in

the mid-atrial region.

5. Postatrioporal region 0-40 and 0-42 times the length of the preatrioporal

region.

6. Myotomes from anterior end to atriopore 34 and 35.

7. Myotomes from atriopore to anus 13.

8. Myotomes posterior to anus Io.

g. Total myotomes 57 and 58.

o. Length of the specimens examined 31 mm.

The two specimens examined were not in a very good condition, but, as

far as could be determined, in general appearance and in the form of the

rostrum and the caudal fin they resembled B. lanceolatum from the central

Mediterranean region (see Webb, 1956b).

266 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

This is the third record of B. lanceolatum from a region east of the Suez Canal

where this species is said to occur in abundance (Gruvel, 1933). Prenant

(1928) first recorded lancelets which he held to be B. lanceolatum from the

north-west coast of Madagascar. In 1933 the “John Murray’ Expedition

collected a single specimen of the species in a haul containing a large number

of B. arabiae (Webb, 1956). The present record from Portuguese East Africa

is similar in that the two specimens were taken together with another species,

but this time B. belchert. ‘This sporadic occurrence of B. lanceolatum outside

European waters suggests that this species is spreading from the Suez Canal

to the Arabian Sea and Indian Ocean.

TABLE V

Range of variation in Indian Ocean and

Arabian Sea samples of B. lanceolatum Total range of

CHARACTER -—_,—-__—__——__ variation in Euro-

NUMBER Portuguese | Madagascar Arabia pean samples of

East Africa B. lanceolatum

I 270-280 220-280 264 200-270

2 32-34 35 47 29-48

3 2°5 — 1:6 I-4—2°7

4 II-12 — 12 8—16

5 0°40—0°42 — 0°52 0°38-0°51

6 34-35 35 oH 33-38

7 13 15 The 12-16

8 IO 12 14 10-14

9 57-58 62 64 58-65

A comparison of the recorded range in variation of the numerical diagnostic characters in

the Indian Ocean and Arabian Sea samples of B. lanceolatum with the total range in variation

in the European samples of that species.

In Table V the diagnoses for the Portuguese East African, Madagascan and

Arabian samples of B. lanceolatum are compared with that of the European

samples of the species. It is seen that the total range in variation in each

character in the European samples covers the range for the Indian Ocean and

Arabian Sea forms with very few exceptions. These exceptions are a rather

high number of dorsal fin chambers in the Portuguese East African and the

Madagascan :samples (character 1), the relatively long postatrioporal region

in the Arabian specimen (character 5) and a low total number of myotomes

in one of the Portuguese East African specimens (character 9). In each case,

ON THE LANCELETS OF SOUTH AND EAST AFRICA 267

however, these figures fall outside the European range by so little that it is

doubtful how far they can be considered significant. ‘Two facts emerge from

this comparison which may be of value. First the diagnoses for the Indian

Ocean and Arabian Sea samples do not conform to any of the populations of

the European lancelet for which detailed figures are available (Webb, 1956b).

They may be similar, however, to the Suez Canal population a diagnosis for

which has not been published. Second, the numerical range shown by the

characters of the three samples from East of the Suez Canal, when taken

together, exceeds in certain respects that of any of the European populations

determined from larger samples. The probability is, therefore, that the

Portuguese East African, Madagascan and Arabian samples are not all taken

from the same population. The first two of these samples probably belong to

one population, taking into account both the similarity of the diagnoses and

their geographical location, but the Arabian specimen almost certainly belongs

to another. On the assumption that the populations of B. lanceolatum in the

Indian Ocean and Arabian Sea have been derived from the eastern Mediter-

ranean population at a time subsequent to the opening of the Suez Canal in

1869, it can be presumed that any differences between populations in the

Indian Ocean and in the Arabian Sea have arisen during a period of about

sixty years. It is known that the English Channel population of B. lanceolatum

has remained stable for more than seventy years (Webb, 1956b), so that any —

changes that may have occurred in the eastern Mediterranean lancelets since

their migration through the Red Sea may be due either to the change in

environmental conditions accompanied by isolation o1 to some degree of

hybridization with the endemic lancelets. In the Arabian Sea B. lanceolatum

is sympatric with B. arabiae and in Portuguese East Africa with B. belcheri.

Hybridization with B. arabiae might account for rather higher numbers of

dorsal and preanal fin chambers than are commonly found in lancelets at

Naples, but not, perhaps, for the relatively long postatrioporal region.

Similarly, hybridization with B. belchert could account for a high dorsal fin

chamber number and a rather tall dorsal fin. The evidence, however, is not

at all clear and further samples of B. lanceolatum from Portuguese East Africa,

the Arabian Sea and, in particular, the Suez Canal are required before an

opinion can be given.

CONCLUSIONS

An examination of the types of Branchiostoma capense and new collections

from South Africa of this species has been made. It is concluded that B. capense

is a valid species and is not synonymous with B. californiense or B. elongatum as

has been proposed by Tattersall (1903) and Franz (1922, 1922a and 1930).

The remarkable similarity between many of the characters of B. capense and

B. elongatum is thought to be due to convergence and not to close affinity of

268 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

these geographically widely separated forms. Comparisons have been made

between B. capense and the neighbouring species B. belcheri, B. bazarutense and

B. arabiae from the east coast of the African continent and B. africae, B. nigeriense,

B. takoradu and B. leonense from West Africa. B. capense has been shown to be

related to the Guinea Coast lancelets of West Africa and to'be an extreme

member of that series. ‘The Cape lancelet extends in range from the south-west

tip of the Cape Province (Simons Bay and False Bay) eastward to Port

Elizabeth (Algoa Bay).

On the east coast of Africa a different species, B. belcheri, is established and

has been recorded from the Morrumbene Estuary and Mozambique Island

in Portuguese East Africa and also by Franz (1922) from a locality near

Zanzibar. The population of B. belcheri at the Morrumbene Estuary is very

similar to that at Amoy on the China coast and the two forms can only be

distinguished by minor differences. B. bazarutense, described by Gilchrist

(1923) from the Bazaruto Islands off Portuguese East Africa, is a close relative

of B. belcheri differing from the Morrumbene form, but not, perhaps, sufficiently

to warrant specific distinction. Another species, B. arabiae, which is related to

B. belcheri, has been described by Webb (1956) from the Arabian coast.

Sympatric with B. arabiae and B. belcheri from the Morrumbene Estuary are

populations of B. lanceolatum which have evidently been derived from a Suez

Canal population of that species. A further record of B. lanceolatum has also

been made by Prenant (1928) from the north-west coast of Madagascar.

The lancelets of South and East Africa, therefore, appear to have been

derived from several different sources and consequently do not form a closely

related group as, for instance, seems to be the case with the lancelets of the

west Atlantic or, to a lesser extent, those of the east Atlantic. An explanation

of the occurrence of such a variety of different lancelets on these coasts is

probably to be found in the pattern of currents in the Indian Ocean. B. capense,

being related to the lancelets of the west side of the contingnt, is probably

endemic. Its distribution seems to be limited to a region of the Cape coast

just beyond the reach of the south-west warm Agulhas Current which is

formed from components from the north-south Mozambique Current, running

between Madagascar and Portuguese East Africa, and the east-west Equatorial

Current from Australia to the south of Madagascar. The direction of flow of

the Agulhas Current may well prove a barrier to the spread of the planktonic

larvae of B. capense northward beyond Port Elizabeth. The reason for the

abrupt termination of the range of this species to the west at the Cape (Simons

Bay and False Bay) might be due to the presence of the cold water of the

Benguela Current which originates south of this point and passes up the west

coast of the continent. The Benguela Current, however, provides a connection

between the Cape and the Guinea Coast of tropical West Africa which could

account for a relationship between B. capense and the Guinea Coast lancelets

as there must be some intermixing of waters between the Benguela and the

ON THE LANCELETS OF SOUTH AND EAST AFRICA 269

Guinea Coast Current at the level of the equator. From the direction of flow

of the Benguela Current it would seem more likely that the Guinea Coast

lancelets are derived from the Cape lancelet than that the reverse is true.

B. belcheri, which is an Asiatic form common in the China Seas, East Indies

and North Australia, appears to have been carried to East Africa by the broad

east-west Equatorial Current which strikes the east coast of Madagascar and

turns both to the north and to the south, passing around the island. The

direction of flow of this current could account for the occurrence of B. belchert

at Zanzibar and in Portuguese East Africa, and, perhaps, elsewhere on the

East African coast north of Port Elizabeth. This species should also occur in

Madagascar. The close similarity between the East African and the Amoy

forms of B. belchert suggests that a migration from east to west in the Equatorial

Current is made with some frequency and that the East African populations

are not fully isolated from the Asiatic. B. arabiae is connected with the East

African population of B. belchert by the seasonal north-east Monsoon Drift,

but has come to occupy a somewhat isolated position on the Arabian coast at

the entrance to the Gulf of Oman. B. bazarutense similarly has only been

recorded once from the Bazaruto Islands. Both of these forms have evidently

been derived from B. belchert and presumably could only have arisen through

occupation of an isolated area. There must, therefore, be regions along the

East African coast where such isolation is possible.

The mode of distribution of B. lanceolatum in the Arabian Sea and Indian

Ocean can be similarly explained. Once the species reached the Gulf of Aden

from Suez by means of the reciprocal currents of the Red Sea, one current

runs along the coast of Somaliland to meet the seasonal south-west Monsoon

Drift passing the East African coast to Madagascar and the Mozambique

Current, while another runs north-east along the Arabian coast. Thus the

south-west Monsoon Drift could account for the presence of B. lanceolatum on

the north-west coast of Madagascar and in Portuguese East Africa, and the

Arabian Current for the presence of that species in the locality of B. arabiae.

The distribution of lancelets on the East African coast, therefore, is in accor-

dance with the ocean currents, and may give an indication of the geographical

range of other marine organisms similarly distributed by means of planktonic

larvae in the Indian Ocean.

REFERENCES

Andrews, E. A. 1893. ‘An undescribed acraniate, Asymmetron lucayanum.’ Stud. biol. Lab. Johns

Hopkins Univ., V, pt. 4, 213-247.

Beebe, W. and Tee-Van, J. 1941. ‘Fishes from the Tropical Eastern Pacific (from Cedros

Island, Lower California, South to the Galapagos Islands and Northern Peru). Part I,

Lancelets and Hag-fishes.’ Zoologica, New York, 26, 89-91.

Cooper, J. G. 1868. In Cronise, Natural wealth of California, San Francisco, 498.

270 ANNALS OF THE SOUTH AFRICAN MUSEUM

Costa, O. G. 1834. Annuario zoologico: Cenni zoologici ossia descrizione delle specie nuove.’

49, Napoli.

Drach, P. 1948. In Grassé, Traité de Zoologie, 11, Paris.

Franz, V. 1922. ‘Systematische Revision der Akranier. (Fauna et Anatomia ceylanica Nr.

10.”) Jena &. Naturw. 58, 369-452.

1922a. ‘Kurzer Bericht tiber systematische Acranierstudien.’ Zool. Anz. 54, 241-249.

1930. Acranier (Lanzett-Fische). Tabul. biol. 6, 573-581.

Gilchrist, J. D. F. 1902. “South African Fishes.’ Marine Investig. S. Africa, 11, 7, 101-113.

1923. ‘A new species of Amphioxus from the Bazaruto Islands (Branchiostoma bazarutense).’

Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (9), 12, 62-65.

Gray, J. E. 1847. ‘Description of a new species of Amphioxus from Borneo.’ Proc. zool. Soc.

Lond. 15, 35-36.

1851. Cat. Brit. Mus. Fish, 7, 149-150.

Gruvel, A. 1933. “‘Abondance du Branchiostoma lanceolatum (Pallas) dans le canal de Suez.’

C.R. Acad. Sci. Paris, 197, 92-93.

Hubbs, C. L. 1922. ‘A list of the lancelets of the world with diagnoses of five new species of

Branchiostoma.’ Occ. Pap. Mus. Zool. Univ. Mich., No. 105, 1-16.

— In Monod, 1927. ‘Contribution a la faune du Cameroun. Pisces I.’ Faune Colon. Frang.

Paris, 1, 644-645.

Pallas, P. S. 1774. Spicilegia zoologica, 10, 19.

Prashad, B. 1934. ‘Ona collection of Indian Cephalochordates, with notes on the species from

the Indian waters in the Indian Museum, Calcutta.’ Rec. Indian Mus. 36, 329-334.

Prenant, M. 1928. ‘Sur un Amphioxus de la céte Malgache.’ Bull. Soc. zool. Fr., 53, 202-204.

Snodgrass, R. E. and Heller, E. 1905. ‘Shore fishes of the Revillagigedo, Clipperton, Cocos

and Galapagos Islands.’ Proc. Wash. Acad. Sci., 6, 333-427.

Sundevall, C. J. 1852. ‘Ny art af Amphioxus.’ Ofvers. VetenskAkad. Férh. Stockh., 9, 147-148.

1853. ‘Ny art af Branchiostoma.’ Ofvers. VetenskAkad. Forh. Stockh., 10, 11-13.

Tattersall, W. M. 1903. ‘Notes on the classification and geographical distribution of the

Cephalochorda.’ Trans. Liverpool biol. Soc., 17, 269-302.

1903a. ‘Report on the Cephalochorda collected by Professor Herdman at Ceylon in

1902.’ Rep. Ceylon Pearl Oyster Fisheries, Part I, Suppl. Rep., 6, 209-226.

Webb, J. E. 1955. ‘On the lancelets of West Africa.’ Proc. zool. Soc. Lond., 125, 421-443.

1956. ‘Cephalochordata.’ Sci. Rep. ‘Fohn Murray’ Exped., X (3), 121-128.

1956a. ‘Cephalochordata of the coast of Tropical West Africa.’ Aflantide Rep., IV,

167-182.

— 1956b. ‘On the populations of Branchiostoma lanceolatum and their relations with the West

African lancelets.’ Proc. zool. Soc. Lond., 127, 125-140.

Yarrell, W. 1836. History of British Fishes, 468, London.

Pee ae

te #

~ aF

Sts

+ Liens

rhe: ANNALS OF THE SOU TH AFRICAN M USEUM. are issued in parts at jirreg

intervals as material becomes available. — .

Some volumes and parts are out of print, and others are cen wilde as parts of a set, or val

respectively. The prices of parts published prior to I 1940 have been increased. —

. Out of print: Vols. I, II (Parts 1-3, 5, 7, 8), III (Part 1), V (Parts 1, 2, 5,8, a VI (ean 1

Index), VII (Parts 1, 2, 3, 5), VIII, EX (Parts 1, 2), X (Part 2); XI (Parts Phen Indes), rasa

(Part 1), XXIV (Part 2), XXXI1 (Parts I-3).

Vol.

. a 1900-1902

III. 1903-1905

IV. 1903-1908

_V.. 1906-1910

VI. 1908-1910

VII. 1908-1913

IX. 1911-1918

X. IQII-I9I4

XI. 1911-1918

XII. 1913-1924

MIM. r91g—1923

XIV. 1915-1924

XV. 1914-1916

XVI. 1917-1933

XVII. 1917-1920

XVIII 1921

XIX. 1924-10925

XX. 1924-1926

XXI. 1925-1927

XXII. 1925-1928

XXIII. 1925-1926

XXIV. 1929-1938

XXV. 1927-1928

XXVI 1928

XXVII 1929

XXVIII. 1929-1932

XXIX. 1929-1931

XXX. 1931-1935

INDEX

XXXII. 1934-1950

XXXII. 1935-1940

XXXIII. 1939

XXXIV. 1938

XXXV. 1956.

XXXVI. 1942-1948

_ XXXVII. 1947-1952

XXXVITI. 1950

XXXIX. 1952

XL. 1952-1956

XLI. 1952-1955

XLIT. 1953-1956

XLITI. 1955-

. Zoology and Geology

(eel Parts 1-3, | 4, aye

Zoology .. oe AG .. (excl. Part. 1)

Palaeontology A

Geology, Palcontaioses Zoology, Anthropology (excl.

Parts 1, 2, 5, 8, 9)

Zoology en ‘Part I, nde

Palaeontology . (Parts 4 and 6 only) —

Zoology : . (excl. Part 2)

Zoology (exall Pars Beas Index)

Palaeontology and Geolens ;

Bera and oa

Zoology a

Zoology

Botany

Zoology

Zoology .. gi se

Zoology .. AOA

Zoology . . (excl. ‘Part 1)

Pale cucesloey gar ee ON ae oes Sheba th aur

Zoology :

Anthropology and Ethnology

Zoology .. ae we

Zoology :

Anthropology

Palaeontology

Zoology

Zoology -

of papers, authors, and ents published in an L XXK

Palaeontology

Zoology

Anteecion,.

Zoology .. Rito aes Be Cae A.

Zoology

Botany

Zoology a fe ;

Palaeontology he DEN Nr sth ea

Zoology and Palaeontology

. (excl. Index)

Part 1 £1 os, od, Parts 2 & 3, each £0 55. od. Part i ‘

Copies may be obtained from—

The LIBRARIAN, Soury Arrican Museum, Cape Town.

.. (excl. Part 2) :

Ze 4 only) ; |

2 me an

OHNO RENAN NWOOW KN ~ mw Bmw m 12 G9 HD GO GO ob 69 Oop wb PT ae

gee

i) Ss

OMOwW IH WO Oo

a aes

° oo oo on om oOo °° xo) oon {<<} ow oo

peers

Cwm